Registration Manual Berklee College of Music

Document Sample
Registration Manual Berklee College of Music Powered By Docstoc
					                          Summer/Fall 2012
                         Registration Manual

Study Abroad in Valencia, Spain
                                   New Ensemble
 Berklee Global Studies Program     Attendance
            Fall 2012                  Policy
       For more information        See opening page
   on the program, see page 25.       for details.
      Ensembles – Revised Absence Policy
             Effective beginning Summer 2012

Students are expected to attend all meetings of their ensembles.
Instructors must be notified in advance if an unavoidable absence
is foreseen. In addition, the student must arrange for a suitable
replacement to fill his/her role in the ensemble. Failure to send a
substitute player will result in a grade of “F” for the ensemble
and can result in the loss of the seat in the ensemble. The grade
of “F” will stand as a final grade except in cases of extraordinary
circumstance as determined by the department chair.
Academic Calendar

Spring 2012
April 2 - 6          Academic advising period for Summer/Fall 2012 Registration
April 9 - 20         Summer/Fall 2012 Registration period. Register online at my.berklee.net.
April 16*            Patriot’s Day (no classes)

May   7 - 11         Final Exam/Audition Ensemble Week. Course evaluations due.
May   11             Last day to change a grade of “Incomplete” earned during Fall 2011.
May   12             Commencement Ceremony
May   13             Residence Halls close at 12:00 p.m.
May   18             Last day to make changes to your Summer 2012 Registration schedule until Check-in.

Summer 2012
May 18               Spring 2012 grades available at noon on my.berklee.net
May 22               Online Check-in begins for continuing and returning students.
                     Residence Halls open for Summer 2012
                     New Student Orientation and Check-in begins in the Student Activities Center.
May 22 - 25          Summer 2012 Check-in Week. Failure to check-in by 11:59 p.m. on May 25 will result in the loss of your
                     2012 Summer registration schedule and the assessment of a $250 late Check-in fee.
May 25               Last day to request a change of major, program, or instrument for Summer 2012. Contact the
                     Counseling and Advising Center ahead of time to authorize changes and adjust schedule accordingly.
May 28*              Memorial Day (no classes)
May 29               First Day of Summer 2012 classes, instrumental lessons, labs, and ensembles
June 4               Last day to add/drop, including all course schedule changes due to Credit by Exam
                     Last day to declare part-time status for Summer 2012. See the Counseling and Advising Center.
July 4*              Independence Day (no classes)
July 20              Last day to request a Withdrawal from a class for Summer 2012. Forms are available in the Office of the Registrar.
August    13 - 17    Final Exam Week/Audition Week. Course evaluations due.
August    18         Residence Halls close at 12:00 p.m.
August    23         Summer 2012 grades available on my.berklee.net
August    28         Last day to make changes to your Fall 2012 Registration schedule until Check-in.


Fall 2012
September 2          Residence Halls open for Fall 2012. Online Check-in begins for continuing and returning students
                     New Student Orientation and Check-in begins in the Student Activities Center.
September 2 - 7      Fall 2012 Check-in Week. Failure to check-in by 11:59 p.m. on September 7 will result in the loss
                     of your 2012 Fall registration schedule and the assessment of a $250 late Check-in fee.
September 3*         Labor Day
September 7          Last day to request a change of major, program or instrument for Fall 2012. Contact the Counseling and
                     Advising Center ahead of time to authorize changes and adjust schedule accordingly.
September 10         First day of Fall 2012 classes, instrumental lessons, labs, and ensembles
September 14         Last day to add/drop, including all course schedule changes due to Credit by Exam
                     Last day to declare part-time status for Fall 2012. See the Counseling and Advising Center.
October 8*           Columbus Day (no classes)
October 12           Last day to file for May 2013 graduation
Oct. 29 - Nov. 2     Mid-Term Week/Audition Week
November 9           Last day to request a Withdrawal from a class for Fall 2012. Forms are available in the Office of the Registrar.
                     Spring 2013 Registration Manual available
November 12*         Veterans Day observed (no classes)
November 13 - 16     Academic advising period for Spring 2013 Registration
Nov. 19 - Dec. 5     Spring 2013 Registration period. Register online
November 22 - 25*    Thanksgiving Recess
December 17-21       Final Exam Week/Audition Week. Course evaluations due.
December 21          Last day to change a grade of “Incomplete” earned during Spring or Summer 2012.
December 22          Residence Halls close at 12:00 p.m.
Dec. 22 - Jan. 13*   Winter Recess (Administrative Offices reopen January 2, 2013)

                     *College closed
TABLE OF CONTENTS




                                                                                                                            Table of Contents
Table of Contents                              1    After You Register
                                                        Completing Your Check-In                      35
Registering for Spring 2012                             Summer/Fall 2011 Tuition and Fees             35
   Introduction                                 2       Payment Options                               36
   Completing Your Registration                 2       Financial Aid                                 37
   Registration Appointment Time                3       Student Health Insurance                      37
   Registration Profile                         3
                                                    Course Descriptions
   Catalog Year Policy                          3
                                                       Arranging                                      39
   Online Grids by Major                        3
                                                       Composition                                    40
   My Degree Audit                              3
                                                       Conducting                                     45
   Private Instruction & Recital Preparation    4
                                                       Counterpoint                                   47
   Directory of Department Chairs               5
                                                       Contemporary Writing and Production            48
   Private Instructors                          6
                                                       Ensemble                                       54
   Instructions for Online Registration         8
                                                       Electronic Production and Design               97
Spring 2012 Curriculum Information                     Ear Training                                  103
    What’s New: Summary of                             Film Scoring                                  105
    Curriculum Changes                         12      Harmony                                       109
    New Courses and Prototype Courses          17      Instrumental Labs                             111
    Prototype Courses                          18      Instrumental Studies                          140
    Courses Open to All Students               20      Internships                                   142
    Liberal Arts Program at Berklee            21      Liberal Arts                                  146
Special Learning Opportunities                         Literature, History and Analysis              173
   Berklee in Valencia - Global Studies        25      Music Business/Management                     179
   MBA Opportunity at Suffolk University       26      Music Education                               185
   ProArts Consortium                          26      Music Production and Engineering              189
   Berklee Internship Programs                 27      Music Technology                              195
Academic Policies                                      Music Therapy                                 198
   Credit By Exam                              28      Performance Ear Training                      201
   Policy on Grades of Incomplete              28      Performance Styles/Surveys                    203
   Audit Policy                                28      Private Instruction and Recital Preparation   205
   Withdrawals                                 28      Professional Music                            207
   Repeated Courses                            29      Performance Studies                           209
   Declaration of Major                        29      Professional Writing                          225
                                                       Songwriting                                   226
Curricular Policies
   First Semester Testing and Placement        31   Special Listings
   Secondary Instruments                       31      Directed Study Faculty - Professional
   Private Instruction and Recital                     Writing Divsion                               232
   Preparation Requirements                    31      Special Section Listings                      234
   Instrumental Labs                           31   Campus Map                                       235
   Ensemble Information                        32   Class Planning Worksheet                         236
   Additional Graduation Requirements          32
Student Policies and Procedures
   Student Accountability                      33
   Semester Level Calculation                  33
   Full and Part-Time Policy                   33
   Special Notice to International Students    33
   Policy on Jury Duty                         34




                                                                                                     Summer/Fall 2012   1
                                           REGISTERING FOR SUMMER/FALL 2012
Completing Your Registration




                                           Introduction                                                               ●   Students who entered Berklee in Spring 2012:
                                                                                                                          please be aware that your Peer Advisor will be
                                                                                                                          contacting you to meet with him/her prior to your
                                           The purpose of this manual is to provide you with the                          registration appointment window. He/She will
                                           information and procedures you will need to register for the                   assist you in choosing classes and registering for
                                           Summer/Fall 2012 semester(s). Please note that the provisions                  classes online.
                                           of this manual do not constitute a contract between the
                                           student and Berklee College of Music. The sole purpose of this             ●   Read the course descriptions for each course for
                                           manual is to provide policies and curricular information that are              which you wish to register. Ensure you have the
                                           in effect when posted online. Berklee College of Music                         proper prerequisites, co-requisites, ensemble
                                           reserves the right to change course content, fees, program                     ratings, and/or that each course is electable by
                                           requirements, plans of study, schedules and the academic                       you. You must have a passing grade, transfer credit
                                           calendar, or to make other changes deemed necessary or                         or credit by exam on record in order to satisfy course
                                           desirable. The college also reserves the right to cancel course                prerequisites. The courses in which you are currently
                                           sections in which enrollment is not sufficient. Excessive offering             enrolled can be used as prerequisites. However, if you
                                           of under-populated course sections will eventually lead to higher              do not receive a passing grade for any Spring 2012
                                           tuition costs to students. By combining or eliminating sections                course that is being used as a prerequisite for a Summer
                                           of courses, the college is better able to control tuition increases.           or Fall 2012 course, you will be removed from that
                                                                                                                          course(s) before the start of the next term.
                                           For students unsure or not planning to attend the                          ●   If you wish to register for a course for which you do not
                                           Fall 2012 semester:
                                                                                                                          have all the prerequisites, you may petition the course
                                                                                                                          chair to waive the prerequisites restriction(s). Course
                                               ●   Staff from the Offices of the Registrar, Bursar, Financial             chairs approve prerequisite waiver appeals at their
                                                   Aid, Scholarships and Student Employment, and the                      discretion. When approved, course chairs need to enter
                                                   Counseling and Advising Center are available to help                   a prerequisite waiver into the Colleague computer
                                                   you make the best decision. Please feel free to stop by                system before a student can register for the course.
                                                   any of these offices to discuss your circumstances.                    Prerequisite waivers are valid for one semester only.
                                                                                                                      ●   Private Instruction registration requires special
                                               ●   If your decision to attend the fall term comes after                   course coding. Please see instructions on page 4.
                                                   the Registration Period concludes, you should contact the
                                                   Office of the Registrar.                                           ●   Performance majors registering for private
                                                                                                                          instruction must register for a thirty minute Private
                                                                                                                          Instruction (PIXX) with a co-requisite thirty minute
                                               ●   If you have decided to not attend this fall but                        Recital Preparation (RPXX) course. See page 4 for
                                                   would like to return to Berklee in a future term, you                  more details.
                                                   should complete a Returning Student Intent form at the
                                                   Office of the Registrar.                                           ●   Students are expected to declare a major by the time
                                                                                                                          they attain a semester level status of 3 or higher. If
                                                                                                                          you will reach third semester status by this summer or fall
                                           Instructions for Completing Your                                               and have not yet declared a major, you should do so at
                                           Summer/Fall 2012 Registration                                                  the departmental office of your chosen major.
                                                                                                                      ●   See instructions for registering online on page 8.
                                               ●   Check and confirm your Registration Profile
                                                                                                                          Students are expected to register for courses
                                                   (including your registration appointment
                                                                                                                          online using the instructions published in this
                                                   time) as follows:
                                                                                                                          manual. Should you need any assistance with learning
                                                    1. Log in to my.berklee.net                                           to register online, staff at the Office of the Registrar
                                                                                                                          (Uchida, Suite 120) are ready to help you.
                                                    2. Select the Student Services tab and then the
                                                       Registration Manual subtab                                     ●   After your initial registration session, you may
                                                                                                                          then add or drop courses as necessary up until
                                                    3. Open your Registration Profile to view a variety of
                                                                                                                          stated deadlines.
                                                       important information about you, including the
                                                       initial date and time that you may register.               Seek Out Advising
                                               ●   Take advantage of the academic advising services               Although we have tried to be as thorough as possible with
                                                   at the Counseling and Advising Center or through               the information in this manual, you are still advised to seek
                                                   your Faculty Departmental Advisor. The registration            academic advisement before registering for the summer or fall.
                                                   advising period begins April 2, 2012 and extends               The Counseling and Advising Center is the information center
                                                   through April 20, 2012. Students at 6th semester               for registration advising, and is located on the second floor of
                                                   standing and higher are encouraged to come in early            939 Boylston Street. Academic advisors there encourage
                                                   for advising.                                                  you to visit them and ask any questions that you may have. In
                                                                                                                  addition, all academic departments have Departmental Advisors
                                                                                                                  that are available to assist you with specific concerns about
                                                                                                                  their departments or majors.


                               2   Summer/Fall 2012
REGISTERING FOR SUMMER/FALL 2012




                                                                                                                                             Catalog Year/Online Grids by Major/My Degree Audit
                                                                                                                                             Registration Appointment Times/Registration Profile/
About Registration Appointment Times                              Online Grids by Major
The registration appointment time that has been set up            Every student already in a major(s) or considering a major
for you is the earliest date and time you may register for        should have the “grid” for that major to use as a reference for
Summer/Fall 2012 courses. We have scheduled your registration     selecting courses to take each term, and to track progress
appointment for a time of day when you are not in class.          toward graduation. Grids for all majors and dual majors, degree
                                                                  and diploma, can be downloaded as pdfs from my.berklee.net
Registration appointment times are necessary to ensure            by choosing the Student Services tab, then the Registration
the college’s registration system can handle the number of        subtab and clicking on Grids by Major on the left. Courses are
students registering at any one time. Registration appointment    displayed on the grids in a semester format that takes into
times are determined by student semester levels (highest to       account prerequisites and semester credit maximums.
lowest), and within a semester level by the number of credits
earned. As students progress through their time at Berklee,       My Degree Audit
each time they register for a new semester they are provided
an earlier time to register.                                      My Degree Audit is a very useful tool to self-advise on how
                                                                  the courses you have completed, are currently enrolled in,
Registration Profile                                              or are pre-registered for, will count toward graduation. My
                                                                  Degree Audit also highlights the remaining courses required
Your Registration Profile provides you with the following         for graduation and all other graduation requirements still to
important registration information:                               be completed. You are strongly recommended to use
                                                                  My Degree Audit before planning your registration
    ●   Your registration appointment time (your earliest
                                                                  for the next semester. Should you have any questions on
        opportunity to register for courses)
                                                                  how to interpret your degree audit results, staff from the
    ●   Matriculation term (the term you entered the              Office of the Registrar, the Counseling & Advising Center,
        college as a degree or diploma candidate)                 and departmental advisors are ready to assist you.
    ●   Semester level
                                                                  An additional feature of My Degree Audit is the ability to check
    ●   Academic standing (good or probationary status)
                                                                  out different majors and see how your academic work to date
    ●   Any restrictions that will prevent you from               will count toward graduating in different major(s), a sort of
        registering (library fine, etc.)                          “shop around” feature.
    ●   Your term specific Registration information, including:
                                                                  To use My Degree Audit (EVAL):
         – Registration status
                                                                      1. Log onto my.berklee.net.
         – Check-in status
                                                                      2. Click on Student Services
         – Principal instrument
         – Ensemble ratings                                           3. Click on the Registration subtab
         – Academic program/major                                     4. Select "My Degree Audit (EVAL)" on the left.
         – Catalog year for this academic program                     5. Then select either:
         – The anticipated completion date for your                        (a) Your active academic program (major), or:
           academic program                                                (b) Choose a major from "What if I changed my
         – Your student type code for this term (Degree                        program of study?” (You need to know your
           program full-time = BM, Diploma program                             catalog year for this choice - please find your
           full-time = PDM, Part-time degree or                                catalog year from your Registration Profile Screen)
           diploma = PT, etc.)                                        6. For the question, “What Work Do You Want To
To access your Registration profile, go to the Student Services          Include?”, select either:
tab on my.berklee.net, click on Registration Manual, and then              (a) ”C” for just your completed courses, or:
select Registration Profile on the left.                                   (b) “A” for all courses including those that are
                                                                               in-progress and any courses that you have
Catalog Year Policy                                                            preregistered for.
All students are assigned to a specific academic-year catalog     Note: To obtain the most accurate grade point average for a
at matriculation. This catalog provides students with a           major, you should select “C” for complete coursework only.
definitive and complete set of academic requirements required
to graduate, that will not change despite any curricular          Students who have not yet declared a major or have a new
changes that occur during the years of study.                     major going into effect at the start of summer or fall terms
                                                                  should use the “What if I changed my program of study?”
Students may opt to change to a more recent catalog year          option.
assignment if they prefer to graduate under a newer set of        Professional Music majors first need to build their specialized
curricular requirements. Students who leave and return to         curriculum on Colleague by meeting with the Professional
Berklee after four or more years will automatically be assigned   Music Department. Until you do so, your degree audit will
to the new catalog-year that is in effect at the time of their    not be complete.
return. Students may not change their catalog year assignment
to an earlier catalog. However, students are encouraged to
meet with the Chair of their major to discuss the applicability
of past course work to their existing catalog assignment.
                                                                                                                          Summer/Fall 2012               3
                                                          REGISTERING FOR SUMMER/FALL 2012
Private Instruction and Recital Preparation




                                                          Private Instruction and Recital                                                – Music Education, Professional Music and
                                                                                                                                           Songwriting: 6 levels of private instruction
                                                          Preparation                                                                    – All other majors: 4 levels of private instruction.
                                                          Students are required to register for Private Instruction each             • Songwriting majors may choose to take two additional
                                                          semester until they have completed all private instruction                   private instructions (six total). If these are taken on a
                                                          requirements for their major. To register for Private Instruction,           student’s principal instrument, the private instructions are
                                                          please follow the steps outlined below:                                      counted as private instruction levels five and six. Students
                                                                                                                                       have the choice to take these additional private instruc
                                                              ●   Select an instructor from the lists on pages 6-7                     tions on the following secondary instruments: Guitar,
                                                                  in this manual. If you need assistance in selecting                  Piano, and Voice. When these private instructions are
                                                                  an instructor, speak with your instrumental                          taken on a secondary instrument, they will be counted
                                                                  chair or advisor, or research instructors online at                  as unleveled private instructions. Up to two private
                                                                  www.berklee.edu/faculty/default.html                                 instructions (a primary and a secondary) can be taken
                                                              ●   In your second semester, you may register for EITHER:                concurrently without incurring extra charges until six
                                                                                                                                       cumulative private instructions have been reached.
                                                                    – A 50-minute, 2-credit section of Private Instruction,
                                                                    – OR a 30-minute, 1-credit section of Private                    • Private Instruction taken while enrolled on a part-time
                                                                      Instruction AND a 1-credit Instrumental Lab.                     basis is charged on a per-credit basis, and does not count
                                                                                                                                       toward the maximum Private Instruction courses allowed
                                                              ●   Non-performance majors in semesters three and                        within full-time tuition.
                                                                  four must register for a 1-credit 30-minute Private
                                                                  Instruction and a 1-credit Instrumental Lab.                       • Private Instruction courses in which non-passing grades
                                                                                                                                       are earned (“W”, “F”, “IF”) are counted toward the
                                                              ●   Private Instruction (and for performance majors, Recital             maximum allowed within full-time tuition.
                                                                  Preparation) will initially appear on your schedule with
                                                                  XXX as the course number. After final grades for the           The following chart lists the course numbers that should be
                                                                  preceding semester have been submitted, a computer             used to register for lessons:
                                                                  process will delete the XXX designation and assign a new
                                                                  course number that represents the highest level of Private     Instrument            Private               Recital
                                                                  Instruction and/or Recital Preparation that has been                                 Instruction           Preparation
                                                                  satisfactorily completed.                                      BASS                  PIBS-XXX              RPBS-XXX
                                                                                                                                 BRASS                 PIBR-XXX              RPBR-XXX
                                                              ●   When adding Private Instruction or Recital Preparation         GUITAR                PIGT-XXX              RPGT-XXX
                                                                  during Check-in Week or the Add-Drop Period: the               PERCUSSION            PIPC-XXX              RPPC-XXX
                                                                  first meeting time will be for the week after the              PIANO                 PIPN-XXX              RPPN-XXX
                                                                  course has been added on Colleague. Therefore:                 STRING                PIST-XXX              RPST-XXX
                                                                  –    Students adding private instruction or recital prepara-   WOODWIND              PIWD-XXX              RPWD-XXX
                                                                       tion courses during the first week of classes will have   VOICE                 PIVC-XXX              RPVC-XXX
                                                                       their first lesson during the second week of classes.
                                                              ●   In order to register for a Private Instruction that is
                                                                  outside of your principal instrument family, you               Recital Preparation (for Performance
                                                                  must request a waiver from the instrumental                    Majors Only)
                                                                  department chair of the lesson to be taken.                    Performance majors are required to take levels 1-6 of Recital
                                                              ●   You can only register for one Private Instruction              Preparation (RPXX) simultaneously with levels 3-8 of Private
                                                                  (and for Performance Majors, one Recital Preparation)          Instruction (PIXX). Please see additional details on page 33.
                                                                  per semester. To add a second private instruction (or          These courses consist of additional private study designed to
                                                                  recital preparatory) course in a term, instrumental            develop repertoire and other skills for various classes and
                                                                  chair approval is required. Your instrumental chair must       activities required of performance majors. In order to register
                                                                  enter a prerequisite waiver on Colleague before you            for the first Recital Preparation, the second level of Private
                                                                  can attempt to add the private instruction. An extra           Instruction must be passed or be in progress. RP courses are
                                                                  Private Instruction (per credit) fee will be assessed          numbered similarly to PI courses—the third and fourth letters
                                                                  whenever a second private instruction or recital               of the course number indicate the principal instrument. As an
                                                                  preparation is taken within a single semester.                 example, a performance major whose principal instrument is
                                                                                                                                 piano would take the following sequence of PI and RP courses
                                                              ●   The total number of private instruction courses you may        beginning in the third semester: PIPN-211/RPPN-211; PIPN-212/
                                                                  take is limited by your major. Taking more private             RPPN-212; PIPN-311/RPPN-311; PIPN-312/RPPN-312; PIPN-411/
                                                                  instruction than allowed will cause an extra (per credit)      RPPN-411; PIPN-412/RPPN-412. RPXX-311 is taken in conjunc-
                                                                  fee above normal full-time tuition. The following table        tion with ILRE-375 Recital Workshop for Performance Majors.
                                                                  details the maximum number of private instruction
                                                                  courses that can be taken within normal tuition by major.
                                                                      – Performance Major: 8 levels of private instruction,
                                                                        6 levels of recital preparation


                                              4   Summer/Fall 2012
REGISTERING FOR SUMMER/FALL 2012




                                                                                                                                            Directory of Department Chairs
Directory of Department Chairs                                 Jazz Composition
                                                               Ken Pullig, Chair, kpullig@berklee.edu
                                                               Room 213, 150 Massachusetts Ave., 617 747-2384
Chairs are your first line of communication for any depart-
mental questions. They are a valuable resource for advice      Liberal Arts
about your course of study, and can also provide guidance      Mike Mason, Interim Chair, mmason1@berklee.edu
through various administrative processes. You are encouraged   Room 300, 7 Haviland St., 617 747-2991
to reach out and communicate with them. Please contact         Music Business/Management
chairs directly to find out their office hours.                Don Gorder, Chair, dgorder@berklee.edu
Bass                                                           Room 236, 7 Haviland St., 617 747-2517
Rich Appleman, Chair, rappleman@berklee.edu                    John Kellogg, Assistant Chair, jkellogg@berklee.edu
Room 1H, 1140 Boylston St., 617 747-2281                       Room 200, 7 Haviland St., 617 747-3179
John Repucci, Assistant Chair, jrepucci@berklee.edu            Music Education
Room 1K, 1140 Boylston St., 617 747-2301                       Cecil Adderley, Chair, cadderley@berklee.edu
                                                               Room 320, 22 The Fenway, 617 747-2426
Brass
Tom Plsek, Chair, tplsek@berklee.edu                           Music Production and Engineering
Room 3H, 1140 Boylston St., 617 747-2291                       Rob Jaczko, Chair, rjaczko@berklee.edu
                                                               Room A14, 150 Massachusetts Ave., 617 747-8253
Composition
                                                               Dan Thompson, Assistant Chair, dthompson@berklee.edu
Greg Fritze, Chair, gfritze@berklee.edu
                                                               Room A13, 150 Massachusetts Ave., 617 747-8145
Room 205, 150 Massachusetts Ave., 617 747-2452
Jim Smith, Assistant Chair, jsmith3@berklee.edu                Music Therapy
Room 211, 150 Massachusetts Ave., 617 747-8356                 Suzanne Hanser, Chair, shanser@berklee.edu
                                                               Room 136, 7 Haviland St., 617 747-2639
Contemporary Writing and Production
Matthew Nicholl, Chair, mnicholl@berklee.edu                   Percussion
Room 219, 150 Massachusetts Ave., 617 747-8456                 John Ramsay, Chair, jramsay@berklee.edu
Andrea Pejrolo, Assistant Chair, apejrolo@berklee.edu          Room 005, 921 Boylston St., 617 747-8328
Room 218, 150 Massachusetts Ave., 617 747-8437                 Yoron Israel, Assistant Chair, yisrael@berklee.edu
                                                               Room 4B1, 1140 Boylston St., 617 747-2703
Ear Training
Allan Chase, Chair, aschase@berklee.edu                        Performance Studies
Room 209, 899 Boylston St., 617 747-2853                       Matt Marvuglio, Dean, mmarvuglio@berklee.edu
Roberta Radley, Assistant Chair, rradley@berklee.edu           Room 5H, 1140 Boylston St., 617 747-2025
Room 208, 899 Boylston St., 617 747-8326
                                                               Piano
Electronic Production and Design                               Stephany Tiernan, Chair, stiernan@berklee.edu
Kari Juusela, Interim Chair, kjuusela@berklee.edu              Room 4H, 1140 Boylston St., 617 747-2108
Room 222, 150 Massachusetts Ave., 617 747-2968                 Tony Germain, Assistant Chair, rgermain@berklee.edu
                                                               Room 4K, 1140 Boylston St., 617 747-8189
Ensemble
Ron Savage, Chair, rsavage@berklee.edu                         Professional Music
Room 108, 130 Massachusetts Ave., 617 747-8416                 Kenn Brass, Chair, kbrass@berklee.edu
Sean Skeete, Assistant Chair, sskeete@berklee.edu              Room 220, 22 The Fenway, 617 747-2416
Room 104, 130 Massachusetts Ave., 617 747-2994
                                                               Songwriting
Film Scoring                                                   Jack Perricone, Chair, jperricone@berklee.edu
Dan Carlin, Chair, dcarlin@berklee.edu                         Room 216, 150 Massachusetts Ave., 617 747-2385
Room 261, 150 Massachusetts Ave., 617 747-2444
Alison Plante, Assistant Chair, aplante@berklee.edu            String
Room 262, 150 Massachusetts Ave., 617 747-2637                 Melissa Howe, Chair, mhowe@berklee.edu
                                                               Room 5E2, 1140 Boylston St., 617 747-2572
Guitar
Larry Baione, Chair, lbaione@berklee.edu                       Voice
Room 5K, 1140 Boylston St., 617 747-2294                       Anne Peckham, Chair, apeckham@berklee.edu
Rick Peckham, Assistant Chair, rpeckham@berklee.edu            Room 3N, 1140 Boylston St., 617 747-2513
Room 5L, 1140 Boylston St., 617 747-2511                       Woodwind
Harmony                                                        Bill Pierce, Chair, bpierce@berklee.edu
Joe Mulholland, Chair, jmulholland@berklee.edu                 Room 2H, 1140 Boylston St., 617 747-2437
Room 210, 150 Massachusetts Ave., 617 747-8468
Tom Hojnacki, Assistant Chair, thojnacki@berklee.edu
Room 212, 150 Massachusetts Ave., 617 747-8438




                                                                                                                     Summer/Fall 2012   5
                                  REGISTERING FOR SUMMER/FALL 2012
Private Instructors




                                  Bass                Fawson, Christine         Hart, Richie            Blanco, Leo
                                                      Fritze, Greg              Hlady, Craig            Brackeen, Joanne
                                  Summer              Galindo, Jeff             Hogarth, Thaddeus       Candelaria, Consuelo
                                  Buda, Dave          Hopkins, Greg             Ihde, Mike              Carlberg, Frank
                                  Clark, Dave         Lewis, Charles            Johnson, Scott          Christopherson, Bob
                                  Funkhouser, John    Lada, Tony                Kasper, Julien          Covell, Jeff
                                  Gertz, Bruce        Okoshi, Tiger             Kelly, Jim              Davis, Suzanne
                                  Goines, Lincoln     Plsek, Tom                Lappin, Don             Elowsky-Fox, Jennifer
                                  Huergo, Fernando    Sebring, Gus              Lockhart, Jeffrey       Gardony, Laszlo
                                  Lockwood, John      Stout, Jeff               Maness, Andrew          Germain, Tony (Prior
                                  Lucie, Ed           Weinstein, Michael        Marasco, John           Written Approval)
                                  Mahdi, Ron          Wilson, Phil              Michaud, Shaun          Heck, Steve
                                  Morris, Danny                                 Miller, Jane            Hoffmann, Russ
                                  Repucci, John       Guitar                    Miller, Tim             Hunt, Steve
                                  Stagnaro, Oscar                               Monaco, Amanda          Jenson, Matt
                                                      Summer
                                  Stallworth, Lenny                             Musella, Joe            Jeon, Hey Rim
                                                      Bartlett, Bruce
                                  Smith, Barry                                  Newsam, David           Johnson, Doug
                                                      Belz, Kevin
                                  Stinnett, Jim                                 Passarelli, Lauren      Limina, Dave
                                                      Bowden, Dan
                                  Vitti, Anthony                                Peckham, Rick (Prior    Lissance, Alizon
                                                      Difusco, Sal
                                                                                Written Approval)       Mallet, Alain
                                                      Fewell, Garrison
                                  Fall                                          Peterson, Jim           Michelin, Nando
                                                      Finn, Jon
                                  Appleman, Tom                                 Pezanelli, Jack         Miwa, Yuko
                                                      Fiuczynski, David
                                  Browne, Whit                                  Rogers, Joe             Mulroy, John
                                                      Goodrick, Mick (Prior
                                  Buda, Dave                                    Roos, Randy             Neselovskyi, Vadim
                                                      Written Approval)
                                  Clark, Dave                                   Saunders, Bruce         Olmstead, Neil
                                                      Hansen, Charles
                                  Del Nero, Paul                                Sher, Ben               Ramsay, Ross
                                                      Hart, Richie
                                  Funkhouser, John                              Shumate, Curt           Ray, Tim
                                                      Ihde, Michael
                                  Gertz, Bruce                                  Stone, Robin            Rosen, Josh
                                                      Kasper, Julien
                                  Goines, Lincoln                               Stump, Joe              Rossi, Marc
                                                      Kelly, James
                                  Herman Hampton                                Taft, Ken               Santisi, Ray
                                                      Lockhart, Jeffrey
                                  Hollender, Dave                               Tarulli, Scott          Schachter, Daniela
                                                      Marasco, John
                                  Huergo, Fernando                              Tronzo, David           Sifter, Suzanna
                                                      Michaud, Shaun
                                  Lockwood, John                                Van Duser, Guy          Sung, Helen
                                                      Miller, Jane
                                  Lucie, Ed                                     Wheatley, Jonathan      Tanksley, Francesca
                                                      Miller, Tim
                                  Mahdi, Ron                                    White, Mark             Thomas, Bruce
                                                      Newsam, David
                                  Morris, Danny                                 Wilkins, John           Tiernan, Stephany (Prior
                                                      Passarelli, Lauren
                                  Raberg, Bruno                                 Williams, Michael       Written Approval)
                                                      Pezanelli, John
                                  Repucci, John                                 Willmott, Bret          Wardson, Greg
                                                      Tarulli, Scott
                                  Santerre, Joe                                 Zocher, Norman          Winter, Bob
                                                      Tronzo, David
                                  Smith, Barry                                                          Yavnai, Alon
                                                      Van Duser, Guy
                                  Smith, Skip
                                                      Wheatley, Jonathan
                                                                                Piano
                                  Stallworth, Lenny                                                     Percussion
                                                      Williams, Michael         Summer
                                  Stinnett, Jim
                                                      Willmott, Bret            Arcaro, John            Summer
                                  Vitti, Anthony
                                                                                Bedner, Ed
                                                      Fall                                              Drumset
                                  Brass               Aronson Zocher, Abigail
                                                                                Brackeen, Joanne
                                                                                Christopherson, Bob     Bellotti, Sergio
                                  Summer              Baboian, John             Covell, Jeff            DeAlmeida, Henrique
                                  Barrett, Darren     Baione, Larry (Prior      Davis, Suzanne          Hadden, Skip
                                  Cervenka, Ken       Written Approval)         Elowsky-Fox, Jennifer   Kaufman, Robert
                                  Faieta, John        Barry, Kevin              Hoffmann, Russ          Lehmann, Bertram
                                  Fritze, Greg        Bartlett, Bruce           Michelin, Nando         Monzon, Ricardo
                                  Galindo, Jeff       Belz, Kevin               Miwa, Yoko              Netto, Alberto
                                  Lewis, Charles      Bowden, Dan               Mulroy, John            Plainfield, Kim
                                  Sebring, Gus        Bryant, Freddie           Olmstead, Neil          Santos, Jr., Jackie
                                  Stout, Jeff         Damian, Jon               Ramsay, Ross            Scheuerell, Casey
                                  Wilson, Phil        DiFusco, Sal              Santisi, Ray            Smith, Neal
                                                      Fewell, Garrison          Schachter, Daniela      Tamagni, Robert
                                  Fall                Finn, Jon                 Sifter, Suzanna
                                  Barrett, Darren     Fiuczynski, David         Tanksley, Francesca     Hand Percussion
                                  Biviano, Lin        Fujita, Tomo              Thomas, Bruce           Castrillo, Eguie
                                  Cervenka, Ken       Gilmore, David            Wardson, Greg           Diaz, Ernesto
                                  Faieta, John        Goodrick, Mick (Prior
                                                                                                        Ringquist, Mike
                                                      Written Approval)         Fall
                                                      Hansen, Charles           Arcaro, John
                                                      Harrigan, Robert          Bedner, Ed
                      6   Summer/Fall 2012
REGISTERING FOR SUMMER/FALL 2012




                                                                                                                       Private Instructors
Total Percussion &       Cello                Flynn, Kathleen             Ragsdale, Jeremy
Marimba                  Friedman, Arnold     Gagnè, Jeannie              Ramsey, Jeff
                                              Gauvin, Marcelle            Rei, Sofia
Flanagan, Richard
                         Harp                 Ginenthal, Robin            Richardson, Diane
                                              Gleim, Brad                 Scott, David
Vibraphone               Pomeranz, Felice
                                              Goodman, Gabrielle          Scott, Maggie
Agatiello, Gustavo                            Jenkins, Jodi               Shachter, Daniela
Saindon, Edgar           Viola
                                              Kai, Kudisan                Shapiro, Jan
                         Howe, Melissa
Fall                                          Santoro Kowalczyk, Steven   Slye, Lorree
                         Rabson, Mimi
                                              Kyles, Jerome               Sorrento, Charles
Drumset                                       Leonhart, Carolyn           Stewart, Didi
Bellotti, Sergio         Violin               McElroy, Donna              Strickland, Stan
Carrington, Terri Lynn   Kott, Sandra         Moody, Duane                Thorson, Lisa
DeAlmeida, Henrique      Rabson, Mimi         Mungo, Nichelle             Watson, Larry
DiCenso, David           Thomas, Rob          Pampinella, Paul            Wedding, Alison
Djordjevic, Marko                             Peckham, Anne               Williamson, Patrice
                         Fall
Finn, Lawrence                                Pendarvis, Janice           Wilson, Darcel
Froman, Ian              Banjo                Pfeiffer, Dale              Wright, Kathryn
Galleota, Joe            Corbett, Wes         Pfister, Rene
Hadden, Skip             Hollender, Dave      Ragsdale, Jeremy            Woodwind
Hazilla, Jon                                  Scott, David
Israel, Yoron            Cello                Shachter, Daniela           Summer
Kaufman, Robert          Friedman, Arnold     Shapiro, Jan                Brandao, Fernando
Kohler, Mark             Friesen, Eugene      Strickland, Stan            Cokkinias, Peter
Langone, Steve           Young, Owen          Thorson, Lisa               Garzone, George
Lehman, Bertram                               Wedding, Alison             Giovoni, Dino
Monzon, Ricardo                               Wright, Kathryn             Harrington, J. Jeff
                         Harp
Morgenstein, Rod                                                          LaFitte, Barbara
                         Pomeranz, Felice
Netto, Alberto                                Fall                        LeClaire, Shannon
Pellitteri, Marcello                          Barnett, Janie              Marvuglio, Matthew
                         Mandolin                                         Olson, Mia
Peterson, Ralph                               Beaudry, Alli
                         Anick, Jason                                     Phillips, Margaret
Plainfield, Kim                               Bermejo, Mili
                         Walsh, Joe                                       Pierce, William
Santos, Jr., Jackie                           Blake, Joey
Smith, Neal                                   Brown, Sharon               Rolfe, Wendy
Smith, Tony
                         Oud                                              Thompson, William
                                              Capozzoli, Andrea
Skeete, Sean             Shaheen, Simon
                                              Carr, Karen
Tamagni, Robert                               Cheron, Carrie              Fall
Walker, Mark             Qanun                Christian, Armsted          Beard, Jackie
Weigert, David           Shaheen, Simon       Cifelli, Kristin            Beasley, Walter
                                              Devoe, David                Brandao, Fernando
Hand Percussion          Viola                Dolan, Ann                  Cokkinias, Peter
Castrillo, Eguie         Howe, Melissa        Flynn, Kathleen             Garzone, George
Diaz, Ernesto            Rabson, Mimi         Gagnè, Jeannie              Govoni, Dino
Galeota, Jr., Joseph                          Gauvin, Marcelle            Harrington, J. Jeff
Ringquist, Mikael        Violin               Ginenthal, Robin            LaFitte, Barbara
                         Anick, Jason         Gleim, Brad                 LeClaire, Shannon
Steel Pan                Anger, Darol         Goodman, Gabrielle          Lipsius, Fred
                         Glaser, Matt         Jenkins, Jodi               Lowery, Daryl
Reid, Ron
                         Howe, Melissa        Johnson, Aubrey             Marvuglio, Matthew
                         Kott, Sandra         Kai, Kudisan                McGhee, Andrew
Total Percussion &                                                        Odgren, James
                         Lee, Julianne        Karam, Christiane
Marimba                  Rabson, Mimi         Santoro Kowalczyk, Steven   Olson, Mia
Anderson, Dean           Shaheen, Simon       Kyles, Jerome               Osby, Greg
Flanagan, Richard        Simos, Mark          Leathers, Gwen              Phillips, Margaret
Zeltsman, Nancy          Thomas, Rob          Leonhart, Carolyn           Pierce, William
                                              Lucia, Joyce                Rolfe, Wendy
Vibraphone               Voice                McElroy, Donna              Skoler, Harry
Agatiello, Gustavo                            Moody, Duane                Thompson, William
Saindon, Edgar           Summer - 12 week                                 Tiberi, Frank
                                              Mungo, Nichelle
Samuels, Dave            Barnett, Janie                                   Tomassi, Ed
                                              Pampinella, Paul
                         Brown, Sharon
                                              Peckham, Anne
                         Christian, Armsted
String                   Cifelli, Kristin
                                              Pendarvis, Janice
                                              Pfeiffer, Dale
Summer                   Devoe, David
                                              Pfister, Rene
                         Dolan, Ann
                                              Philip, Annette
                                                                                                Summer/Fall 2012   7
                                                   REGISTERING FOR SUMMER/FALL 2012
Instructions for Online Registration




                                                   Instructions for Online Registration

                                                              IMPORTANT NOTE: Some students have been confused when they see inaccurate course listings on the Course
                                                              Companion site within my.berklee.net. Course Companion does not record all registration changes as they occur, and
                                                              is only periodically refreshed with up-to-date information. Also, private lessons are excluded from Course Companion.
                                                              Therefore, please do not rely on the Course Companion site for an accurate listing of your registered classes. To obtain
                                                              an accurate up-to-the-moment listing of your registered classes, click first on the “Student Services” tab, then click on
                                                              “Registration”, then click on “View/Change Schedule” (on the left).




                                                   Before You Register
                                                              Access http://my.berklee.net
                                                              Access to registration options and resources require you to log in to my.berklee.net. Before your registration appointment
                                                              time, please visit the website and verify that you can log in. If you have any difficulty accessing my.berklee.net, contact
                                                              the Student Computer Support Center on the lower level of 186 Massachusetts Avenue, email them at 8800@berklee.edu,
                                                              or call them at (617) 747-8800.




                                                              Review online Registration Manual and other online Resources
                                                              The online Registration Manual and the Student Services section of my.berklee.net contain useful information regarding
                                                              online registration. Please review this information before your appointment time.
                                                              Seek advising as needed
                                                              It will be easier and take less time for you to complete your online registration if you research the classes you want to
                                                              take in advance of your appointment time. This will also allow you to seek any advising you require, request waivers,
                                                              or perform other registration-related activities.




                                       8   Summer/Fall 2012
REGISTERING FOR SUMMER/FALL 2012




                                                                                                                                                   Instructions for Online Registration
Registering for Classes
       Go to http://my.berklee.net

       http://my.berklee.net is accessible from any Internet-connected computer with an up-to-date web browser.
       For Macintosh users, either the Safari (version 5.0.x or later) or Firefox (version 8.0 or later) browser is recommended.
       PC users should use either Firefox (version 8.0 or later) or Internet Explorer (version 8.x or later) though Firefox is more
       compatible with my.berklee.net than Internet Explorer.




       In the Log In column on the right side of the web page, enter your username and password. If you do not know your
       username and/or password, contact the Student Computer Support Center on the lower level of 186 Massachusetts
       Avenue, email them at 8800@berklee.edu, or call them at (617) 747-8800.




Select the Student Services Tab




       This is the area that contains the links to the information and registration options you will use to create your schedule.


       Menu Options:

       The Student Services Tab contains several subtabs. Click on the one labeled Registration Manual.

       The left hand menus on the Student Services Registration Manual Tab contain information and tools to help you
       register including a step-by-step guide, the Registration Manual, Grids by Major, View Transcript, network options,
       ensembles with open seats for your instrument, and other useful resources.

       The Registration Tools menu contains the links you will use to build your schedule. The options include:


       Registration Profile – contains information about your academic standing at Berklee.




                                                                                                                            Summer/Fall 2012   9
                                                    REGISTERING FOR SUMMER/FALL 2012
Instructions for Online Registration



                                                               Search and Register




                                                               Search and Register allows you to select classes by searching the course catalog.

                                                                                 1. Fill out search criteria to limit the search results to the classes you are interested in taking.
                                                                                         a. Term (required) – choose term for classes for which you are searching.
                                                                                         b. Subject (optional) – choose subject from drop-down menu to limit results
                                                                                            to subject chosen.
                                                                                         c. Course Number (optional) – enter course number to limit results
                                                                                            to course chosen.
                                                                                         d. Section Number (optional) – enter section number to limit results
                                                                                            to section chosen.
                                                                                         e. Class Meeting Time (optional) – limit results to a specified time by
                                                                                            using the provided drop-down menus.
                                                                                         f.   Day of Week (optional) – select days on which you want your search
                                                                                              results limited.
                                                                                         g. Course Title Keyword (optional) – enter a title or partial course title to
                                                                                            limit results to courses that contain that title.
                                                                                         h. Instructor’s Last Name (optional) – enter an instructor’s last name to limit
                                                                                            search results to those courses taught by the instructor entered.
                                                                                         i.   Only Show Open Courses (optional) – select check box to toggle whether
                                                                                              or not search results contain only open courses.
                                                                                 2. Click submit.
                                                                                 3. A result screen listing courses based on your criteria will be displayed.
                                                                                 4. Using the check boxes, select the classes that you would like to add to your schedule.
                                                                                 5. Click submit.




                                       10   Summer/Fall 2012
REGISTERING FOR SUMMER/FALL 2012




                                                                                                                                            Instructions for Online Registration
                     6. A confirmation screen will be displayed to verify the courses you selected.
                     7. Review information and click submit.
                     8. A result screen is displayed. The courses for which you are eligible will be added to
                        your schedule with a status of ’registered’.
                     9. For any course that you are prevented from registering for, a message describing the
                        reason why you were prevented will be displayed.
                     10. Links to the other registration tools can be accessed at the navigation menu on
                         the left side of the screen.




   View/Change Schedule




   View/Change Schedule displays classes for which you are registered and provides functionality to drop classes.


                     1. To drop a class, select the check box next to the course title.
                     2. Click submit.
                     3. A resulting schedule view will display classes for which you are registered.



   FOR MORE INFORMATION REGARDING ONLINE REGISTRATION, PLEASE
   VISIT THE STUDENT SERVICES TAB AT MY.BERKLEE.NET




                                                                                                                    Summer/Fall 2012   11
                                                         SUMMER/FALL 2012 CURRICULUM INFORMATION
What’s New: Summary of Curriculum Changes




                                                           What’s New:
                                                           Summary of Curriculum Changes Approved for Summer/Fall 2012



                                                           Composition
                                                           New Courses and Prototypes
                                                           Course Number and Title                                Credits             Semesters Offered         Electable by/Prerequisites
                                                           CM-346      Indian Music Styles and Techniques for     2 credits           Fall                      All/HR-212
                                                                       Jazz and Contemporary Composition




                                                           Contemporary Writing and Production
                                                           Changes in Courses
                                                           Course Number and Title                 Change Type:         From:                             To:
                                                           CW-P470     Writing and Producing for   Prerequisite         CW-450                            CW-361
                                                                       Music/Media Libraries




                                                           Counterpoint
                                                           Changes in Courses
                                                           Course Number and Title                 Change Type:         From:                             To:
                                                           CP-210      The Art of Counterpoint     Prerequisite         AR-111, HR-112, ET-112,           HR-112, ET-112, and CM-211




                                                           Ensemble
                                                           Changes in Courses
                                                           Course Number and Title                 Change Type:         From:                             To:
                                                           ENJZ-234    Chamber Improvisation       Prefix               ENJZ                              ENCL
                                                                                                   Title                Chamber Improvisation             Improvisation for Classical Musicians

                                                           ENPN-311    Piano Trio Lab              Number               311                               212
                                                                                                   Prerequisite         By audition                       ENPN-P112 or overall ensemble
                                                                                                                                                          rating 4-6
                                                                                                   Title                Piano Trio Lab                    Jazz Piano Trio 2

                                                           New Courses and Prototypes
                                                           Course Number and Title                                Credits             Semesters Offered         Electable by/Prerequisites
                                                           ENCL-P201   Women's Concert Choir                      1 credit            Fall, Spring              All/Written approval of course
                                                                                                                                                                instructor

                                                           ENJZ-235    The Music of Oregon                        1 credit            Fall, Spring              All/Overall ensemble rating 4

                                                           ENST-P230   Classical Improvisation                    1 credit            Fall                      String principals/None

                                                           ENVC-P132 Circle Song Choir                            1 credit            Fall, Spring              Voice principals/None




                                            12   Summer/Fall 2012
SUMMER/FALL 2012 CURRICULUM INFORMATION




                                                                                                                                                             What’s New: Summary of Curriculum Changes
 Course Number and Title                                Credits          Semesters Offered          Electable by/Prerequisites
 ENVC-P270 Musical Theater Workshop                     1 credit         Fall, Spring               All/None

 ENVC-P322 Vocal Jazz Choir                             2 credits        Fall, Spring               Voice principals/Written approval
                                                                                                    of course instructor




 Film Scoring
 New Courses and Prototypes
 Course Number and Title                                Credits          Semesters Offered          Electable by/Prerequisites
 FS-P301     Mixing the Film Score                      2 credits        Fall, Spring               FILM majors/FS-361




 Instrumental Labs
 Changes in Courses
 Course Number and Title                 Change Type:         From:                           To:
 ILVC-110    Vocal Lab – Elements of     Prefix               ILVC                            PSVC
             Vocal Technique
                                         Title                Vocal Lab – Elements of Vocal   Elements of Vocal Technique
                                                              Technique

 ILVC-161    The Professional Vocalist   Prefix               ILVC                            PSVC
             Audition Workshop

 ILVC-321    Vocal Pedagogy              Prefix               ILVC                            PSVC
                                         Prerequisite         ILVC-110                        PSVC-110

 ILVC-435    Advanced Techniques of      Prefix               ILVC                            PSVC
             Voice Production

 New Courses and Prototypes
 Course Number and Title                                Credits          Semesters Offered          Electable by/Prerequisites
 ILBS-P201   Jaco Pastorius Bass Lab                    1 credit         Fall, Spring               Bass principals/PIBS-211 or
                                                                                                    overall ensemble rating 3

 ILPN-247    Improvisation in Afro-Cuban Piano          1 credit         Fall, Spring               Piano principals/ILPN-112 and
                                                                                                    ILPN-121, or overall ensemble
                                                                                                    rating 2

 ILVC-P200   Vocal Technique and Wellness               1 credit         Fall, Spring               Voice principals/None

 ILVC-P220   Musicianship for Singers                   1 credit         Fall, Spring               Voice principals/ET-111 and
                                                                                                    PW-111




 Internships
 Changes in Courses
 Course Number and Title                 Change Type:         From:                           To:
 IN-103      Internship Certificate      Credits              0                               1 credit, not to count toward graduate
                                                                                              requirements

                                         Prerequisite         2nd semester standing           3rd semester standing (students must
                                                                                              have completed two semesters at
                                                                                              Berklee before eligible to enroll in course)




                                                                                                                                     Summer/Fall 2012   13
                                                         SUMMER/FALL 2012 CURRICULUM INFORMATION
What’s New: Summary of Curriculum Changes




                                                           Liberal Arts
                                                           Changes in Courses
                                                           Course Number and Title                   Change Type:         From:                             To:
                                                           LSPN-262    Spanish 2                     Prerequisite         LSPN-161                          LSPN-161 or LSPN-P100

                                                           New Courses and Prototypes
                                                           Course Number and Title                                  Credits          Semesters Offered            Electable by/Prerequisites
                                                           LCHN-P181 Chinese 1                                      3 credits        Fall, Spring                 All/None

                                                           LCHN-P282 Chinese 2                                      3 credits        Fall, Spring                 All/LCHN-P181

                                                           LCHN-P383 Chinese 3                                      3 credits        Fall                         All/LCHN-P282

                                                           LCHN-P484 Chinese 4                                      3 credits        Spring                       All/LCHN-P383

                                                           LENG-424    Advanced Theater Scriptwriting Workshop      3 credits        Fall                         All/Written permission of course
                                                                                                                                                                  instructor (Recommended:
                                                                                                                                                                  LENG-201, LENG-321, SW-335,
                                                                                                                                                                  and/or SW-445)

                                                           LENG-425    Advanced Theater Production Workshop         3 credits        Spring                       All/Written permission of course
                                                                                                                                                                  instructor

                                                           LSOC-280    Music, Spirit, and Transformation            3 credits        Fall                         All/LENG-111

                                                           LSPN-P100   Curso intensivo                              3 credits        Fall                         All/None

                                                           LSPN-P300   Cinema en español                            3 credits        Fall                         All/LSPN-262




                                                           Music Business/Management
                                                           Changes in Courses
                                                           Course Number and Title                   Change Type:         From:                             To:
                                                           MB-391      Concert Promotion and         Title                Concert Promotion and             Concerts and Touring
                                                                       Venue Management                                   Venue Management




                                                           Music Education
                                                           New Courses and Prototypes
                                                           Course Number and Title                                  Credits          Semesters Offered            Electable by/Prerequisites
                                                           ME-P332     Music in Early Childhood                     2 credits        Fall                         All/ME-211




                                                           Music Production and Engineering
                                                           New Courses and Prototypes
                                                           Course Number and Title                                  Credits          Semesters Offered            Electable by/Prerequisites
                                                           MP-113      Accelerated Pro Tools                        2 credits        Fall, Spring, Summer         All/MTEC-111

                                                           MP-114      Critical Listening Lab for Musicians         1 credit         Fall, Spring, Summer         All except MPED majors/MTEC-111




                                            14   Summer/Fall 2012
SUMMER/FALL 2012 CURRICULUM INFORMATION




                                                                                                                                                                What’s New: Summary of Curriculum Changes
 Course Number and Title                                 Credits           Semesters Offered             Electable by/Prerequisites
 MP-115      Production Analysis Lab for Musicians       1 credit          Fall, Spring                  All except MPED majors/MTEC-111

 MP-P205     Recording and Mix Techniques for Musicians 2 credits          Fall, Spring                  All except MPED majors/EP-225,
                                                                                                         PW-151, PW-161, MTEC-112, or
                                                                                                         MP-113

 MP-P432     Vocal Technologies for Records              2 credits         Fall, Spring                  MPED majors/MP-341




 Music Technology
 Changes in Courses
 Course Number and Title                  Change Type:          From:                              To:
 MTEC-200    Berklee Internet Network     Course Chair          Andrea Pejrolo                     Rob Jaczko
             Radio Workshop
                                          Department            Electronic Production and Design   Music Production and Engineering

 MTEC-308    Applications of              Electable by          MPED and ELPD majors               All
             Loudspeaker Design
                                          Prerequisite          MP-212 or EP-320                   LMSC-208 or LMSC-209




 Performance Studies
 New Courses and Prototypes
 Course Number and Title                                 Credits           Semesters Offered             Electable by/Prerequisites
 PSHR-P2770 Traditional Microtonal Theory and            1 credit          Fall, Spring                  All/None
            Application

 PSIS-P364   Melodic Variation Techniques in             2 credits         Fall                          String and guitar principals/None
             American String Traditions




 Professional Music
 Changes in Courses
 Course Number and Title                  Change Type:          From:                              To:
 PM-P250     Movement for Musicians       Credits               1                                  2




 Professional Writing
 Changes in Courses
 Course Number and Title                  Change Type:          From:                              To:
 PW-261      Basic Recording and          Prerequisite          FS-361, MP-225, EP-225,            PW-151
             Production Techniques                              or PW-161
                                          Required of           None                               SONG majors




                                                                                                                                        Summer/Fall 2012   15
                                                         SUMMER/FALL 2012 CURRICULUM INFORMATION
What’s New: Summary of Curriculum Changes




                                                           Songwriting
                                                           Changes in Courses
                                                           Course Number and Title               Change Type:     From:                          To:
                                                           SW-321    Advanced Lyric Writing      Title            Advanced Lyric Writing         Advanced Lyric Writing 1

                                                           SW-345    Musical Theater Writing     Title            Musical Theater Writing        Musical Theater Writing 1

                                                           New Courses and Prototypes
                                                           Course Number and Title                          Credits          Semesters Offered         Electable by/Prerequisites
                                                           SW-P234   Writing Children's Music               2 credits        Fall, Spring              All/SW-211 and SW-221

                                                           SW-P421   Advanced Lyric Writing 2               2 credits        Fall, Spring              SONG majors/SW-321 and written
                                                                                                                                                       permission of course instructor

                                                           SW-445    Musical Theater Writing 2              2 credits        Spring                    All/SW-345




                                            16   Summer/Fall 2012
SUMMER/FALL 2012 CURRICULUM INFORMATION




                                                                                                                                    New Courses and Prototypes
Summer/Fall 2012 New Courses and Prototypes

For more details on the courses below, please see the course descriptions.

New Courses
Course Number          Course Title                                                 Credits   Semesters Offered
CM-346                 Indian Music Styles and Techniques for Jazz and
                       Contemporary Composition                                     2         Fall
ENJZ-235               The Music of Oregon                                          1         Fall, Spring
ILPN-247               Improvisation in Afro-Cuban Piano                            1         Fall, Spring
LENG-424               Advanced Theater Scriptwriting Workshop                      3         Fall
LENG-425               Advanced Theater Production Workshop                         3         Spring
LSOC-280               Music, Spirit, and Transformation                            3         Fall
MP-113                 Accelerated Pro Tools                                        2         Fall, Spring, Summer
MP-114                 Critical Listening Lab for Musicians                         1         Fall, Spring, Summer
MP-115                 Production Analysis Lab for Musicians                        1         Fall, Spring
SW-445                 Musical Theater Writing 2                                    2         Spring




Prototypes
Course Number          Course Title                                                 Credits   Semesters Offered
ENCL-P201              Women's Concert Choir                                        1         Fall, Spring
ENST-P230              Classical Improvisation                                      1         Fall
ENVC-P132              Circle Song Choir                                            1         Fall, Spring
ENVC-P270              Musical Theater Workshop                                     1         Fall, Spring
ENVC-P322              Vocal Jazz Choir                                             2         Fall, Spring
FS-P301                Mixing the Film Score                                        2         Fall, Spring
ILBS-P201              Jaco Pastorius Bass Lab                                      1         Fall, Spring
ILVC-P200              Vocal Technique and Wellness                                 1         Fall, Spring
ILVC-P220              Musicianship for Singers                                     1         Fall, Spring
LCHN-P181              Chinese 1                                                    3         Fall, Spring
LCHN-P282              Chinese 2                                                    3         Fall, Spring
LCHN-P383              Chinese 3                                                    3         Fall
LCHN-P484              Chinese 4                                                    3         Spring
LSPN-P100              Curso intensivo                                              3         Fall
LSPN-P300              Cinema en español                                            3         Fall
MP-P205                Recording and Mix Techniques for Musicians                   2         Fall, Spring
MP-P432                Vocal Technologies for Records                               2         Fall, Spring
PSHR-P270              Traditional Microtonal Theory and Application                1         Fall, Spring
PSIS-P364              Melodic Variation Techniques in American String Traditions   2         Fall
SW-P234                Writing Children's Music                                     2         Fall, Spring
SW-P421                Advanced Lyric Writing 2                                     2         Fall, Spring




                                                                                                            Summer/Fall 2012   17
                                 SUMMER/FALL 2012 CURRICULUM INFORMATION
Prototype Courses




                                 Summer/Fall 2012 Prototypes

                                 For more details on the prototype courses please see course descriptions. Please note that these prototypes may or may not be
                                 offered during Summer/Fall 2012. Please consult the sponsoring department for more information.


                                 Course Number        Course Title                                                    Credits      Offered
                                 CM-P225              Guitar Composition Techniques for Performers/Composers          2            Fall, Spring
                                 CM-P341              Digital Score Preparation for Composers                         2            Fall, Spring
                                 CW-P217              Writing in Folkloric Latin Styles                               2            Fall
                                 CW-P227              Flamenco Music Composition and Arranging                        2            Fall, Spring
                                 CW-P470              Writing and Producing for Music/Media Libraries                 2            Fall, Spring
                                 ENCL-P201            Women's Concert Choir                                           1            Fall, Spring             NEW
                                 ENCL-P405            Classical Chamber Music Ensemble                                1            Fall, Spring
                                 ENJZ-P400            Ensemble Master Class                                           1            Fall, Spring, Summer
                                 ENPN-P112            Jazz Piano Trio 1                                               1            Fall, Spring
                                 ENPN-P121            Introduction to Jazz Improvisation for Classical Pianists       1            Fall, Spring
                                 ENPN-P212            Jazz Piano Trio 2                                               1            Fall, Spring
                                 ENRB-P400            Funk and Soul Review                                            1            Fall, Spring, Summer
                                 ENRT-P304            Acoustic Strings Workshop                                       2            Fall, Spring
                                 ENST-P230            Classical Improvisation                                         1            Fall                     NEW
                                 ENST-P254            Contemporary Styles String Quartet                              1            Fall, Spring
                                 ENVC-P132            Circle Song Choir                                               1            Fall, Spring             NEW
                                 ENVC-P212            American Negro Spirituals                                       1            Fall, Spring
                                 ENVC-P215            Singers Night Performance Ensemble                              1            Fall, Spring
                                 ENVC-P221            Historic Vocal Ensemble                                         1            Fall, Spring
                                 ENVC-P235            A Cappella Ensemble                                             1            Fall, Spring
                                 ENVC-P270            Musical Theater Workshop                                        1            Fall, Spring             NEW
                                 ENVC-P322            Vocal Jazz Choir                                                2            Fall, Spring             NEW
                                 ENVC-P335            The New Group                                                   1            Fall, Spring
                                 EP-P350              Live Performance Techniques for Electronic Musicians            2            Fall, Spring
                                 ET-P461              Advanced Modal Ear Training                                     2            Fall, Spring
                                 FS-P301              Mixing the Film Score                                           2            Fall, Spring             NEW
                                 FS-P485              Scoring Silent Films                                            2            Fall, Spring
                                 HR-P351              John, Paul, George, and Ringo: The Solo Years                   2            Fall, Spring
                                 ILBS-P110            Electric Bass for Non-Bass Principals                           1            Fall, Spring
                                 ILBS-P201            Jaco Pastorius Bass Lab                                         1            Fall, Spring             NEW
                                 ILPH-P365            Timbale Playing Styles 1                                        2            Fall, Spring
                                 ILPN-P274            Jazz Harmonic Applications 2                                    1            Fall, Spring             NEW
                                 ILVC-P200            Vocal Technique and Wellness                                    1            Fall, Spring             NEW
                                 ILVC-P220            Musicanship for Singers                                         1            Fall, Spring             NEW
                                 ISKB-P111            Keyboard Fundamentals                                           1            Fall, Spring, Summer
                                 LAHS-P230            Indian Art, Music, and Culture                                  3            Fall
                                 LAHS-P234            Japanese Art and Culture                                        3            Fall
                                 LAHS-P236            Race and the Visual Arts                                        3            Fall, Spring
                                 LAHS-P238            Scandals and Vandals: Forgery, Theft, And Destruction
                                                      in the History of Art                                           3            Fall,   Spring
                                 LCHN-P181            Chinese 1                                                       3            Fall,   Spring           NEW
                                 LCHN-P282            Chinese 2                                                       3            Fall,   Spring           NEW
                                 LCHN-P383            Chinese 3                                                       3            Fall,   Spring           NEW
                                 LCHN-P484            Chinese 4                                                       3            Fall,   Spring           NEW
                                 LENG-P102            English As a Second Language Intensive                          6            Fall,   Spring, Summer
                                 LENG-P387            African American Children's Literature and Culture              3            Fall
                                 LENG-P490            FUSION Magazine Seminar and Practicum                           3            Fall,   Spring
                                 LHAN-P288            Music of Olivier Messiaen                                       2            Fall
                                 LHIS-P237            American Television                                             3            Fall,   Spring
                                 LHIS-P320            20th-Century Women Songwriters                                  3            Fall
                                 LHUM-P218            Interdisciplinary Collaboration in Art                          3            Fall
                                 LHUM-P310            Creativity and Expression in the Arts                           3            Fall
                                 LMSC-P222            Oceanography                                                    3            Fall




                    18   Summer/Fall 2012
SUMMER/FALL 2012 CURRICULUM INFORMATION




                                                                                                                                      Prototype Courses
Course Number   Course Title                                                 Credits   Offered
LMSC-P240       Technology, Self, and Society                                3         Fall
LMSC-P310       Mathematics of Musical Signals 1: Signals and Filters        3         Fall
LSOC-P230       Gender and Country Music                                     3         Fall, Spring
LSOC-P281       From Boys to Men: Masculinity in Contemporary Society        3         Fall, Spring
LSOC-P451       Existential Psychoanalytic Theory and Life                   3         Fall
LSPN-P100       Curso intensivo                                              3         Fall                    NEW
LSPN-P300       Cinema en español                                            3         Fall, Spring            NEW
MB-P205         The Business of Flamenco Music                               2         Fall, Spring
MB-P311         Copyright Law                                                2         Fall
MB-P389         Managing Technology-Driven Business                          2         Fall, Spring, Summer
MB-P395         Business Finance                                             2         Fall, Spring
MB-P415         International Music Licensing                                2         Fall
MB-P421         Digital Marketing in the Music Industry                      2         Fall, Spring
MB-P435         Emerging Music Business Models                               2         Fall, Spring
MB-P493         Entrepreneurial Practicum                                    2         Fall, Spring
ME-P332         Music in Early Childhood                                     2         Fall
ME-P342         Composition, Technology, and the K-12 Student                2         Fall
ME-P388         Instrument Repair 2                                          2         Fall, Spring
ME-P389         Instrument Repair 3                                          2         Fall, Spring
MP-P205         Recording and Mix Techniques for Musicians                   2         Fall, Spring            NEW
MP-P226         Hybrid Recording and Mixing                                  2         Fall, Spring
MP-P432         Vocal Technologies for Records                               2         Fall, Spring            NEW
MP-P442         Control Surface Mixing Techniques                            2         Fall, Spring
MP-P459         Flamenco Music Recording and Production                      2         Fall, Spring
MP-P460         Freelancing for Producers and Engineers                      2         Fall, Spring
MTEC-P323       Production and Business of Dance Music                       2         Fall, Spring
MTEC-P421       Audio Implementation for Video Games                         2         Fall, Spring
MTEC-P422       Surround Sound Techniques and Practices                      2         Fall, Spring
MTH-P111        Assistive Music Technology for the Visually Impaired         2         Fall, Spring
MTH-P211        Mind/Body Disciplines for Musicians                          1         Fall, Spring
PFET-P211       Advanced Rhythmic Techniques for Performers                  2         Fall
PFET-P351       Ensemble Ear Training for Performance                        1         Fall, Spring
PFSS-P301       Survey of Mediterranean Musical Styles                       2         Fall, Spring
PFSS-P362       Survey of American Roots Music Styles                        2         Fall, Spring
PM-P250         Movement for Musicians 1                                     1         Fall, Spring
PM-P325         Managerial Finance                                           2         Fall, Spring
PS-P265         The Music of Kenny "Babyface" Edmonds                        2         Fall
PSBS-P345       Latin Jazz Masters                                           2         Fall, Spring
PSHR-P270       Traditional Microtonal Theory and Application                1         Fall, Spring            NEW
PSIJ-P426       Jazz Rhythm Section Accompaniment Skills                     2         Fall, Spring, Summer
PSIS-P364       Melodic Variation Techniques in American String Traditions   2         Fall                    NEW
PST-P352        Stage Performance Techniques 2                               2         Fall, Spring
PW-P240         Compositional Techniques of Bob Brookmeyer                   2         Fall, Spring
SW-P234         Writing Children's Music                                     2         Fall, Spring            NEW
SW-P245         Rock Songwriting Workshop                                    2         Fall, Spring
SW-P326         The Songs of Paul Simon: The Art and Craft of
                an American Master                                           2         Fall, Spring
SW-P375         Songwriting for Non-Songwriting Majors                       2         Fall, Spring
SW-P421         Advanced Lyric Writing 2                                     2         Fall, Spring            NEW




                                                                                                              Summer/Fall 2012   19
                                            SUMMER/FALL 2012 CURRICULUM INFORMATION
Courses Open to All Students




                                            Summer/Fall 2012 Courses Open to All

                                            The following courses have no prerequisites and are electable by all students. If you have room in your schedule for an elective,
                                            you might want to consider these possibilities. For more information on course content, please check the course descriptions.

                                            Course Number          Course Title                                                         Credits               Semesters Offered
                                            EP-210                 Survey of Electroacoustic Music                                      2                     Fall, Spring, Summer
                                            EP-250                 Electronics in the Soundtrack                                        2                     Fall, Spring, Summer
                                            ILGT-115               Guitar Performance Skills for the Non-Guitar Principal               1                     Fall, Spring, Summer
                                            ILPH-353               Native American Drumming Lab                                         1                     Fall, Spring
                                            ILPN-271               Jazz Harmonic Techniques for Piano 1                                 1                     Fall, Spring, Summer
                                            ISKB-P111              Keyboard Fundamentals                                                1                     Fall, Spring, Summer
                                            LCHN-P181              Chinese 1                                                            3                     Fall, Spring
                                            LENG-P387              African American Children's Literature and Culture                   3                     Fall
                                            LFRN-151               French 1                                                             3                     Fall, Spring, Summer
                                            LHAN-221               History of Jazz                                                      2                     Fall, Spring, Summer
                                            LHAN-222               History of Rock Music                                                2                     Fall, Spring, Summer
                                            LHAN-233               Classic Rock Guitar Players                                          2                     Fall, Spring
                                            LHAN-241               African American History, Culture, and Music 1                       2                     Fall
                                            LHAN-243               Japanese Music and Instruments                                       2                     Fall
                                            LHAN-245               Women in Music                                                       2                     Fall, Spring
                                            LHAN-331               The Bop Masters                                                      2                     Fall, Spring
                                            LHAN-345               Music and Cultures of Africa, Latin America, and
                                                                   South America                                                        2                     Fall,   Summer
                                            LHAN-351               The Music of Miles Davis                                             2                     Fall,   Spring
                                            LJPN-171               Japanese 1                                                           3                     Fall
                                            LMSC-130               Concepts of Mathematics                                              3                     Fall,   Spring, Summer
                                            LMSC-271               The Body, Sound, and Inspiration in Performance and Beyond           3                     Fall,   Spring
                                            LMSC-318               Environmental Science                                                3                     Fall,   Spring
                                            LSPN-P100              Curso intensivo                                                      3                     Fall
                                            LSPN-161               Spanish 1                                                            3                     Fall,   Spring,   Summer
                                            MB-101                 Introduction to the Music Business                                   2                     Fall,   Spring,   Summer
                                            MB-131                 Taxation in the Music Business                                       2                     Fall,   Spring,   Summer
                                            MB-287                 Business Communication                                               2                     Fall,   Spring
                                            ME-387                 Instrument Repair                                                    2                     Fall,   Spring
                                            MP-110                 Introduction to Music Production and Engineering                     2                     Fall,   Spring,   Summer
                                            MTEC-200               Berklee Internet Radio Network Workshop                              1                     Fall,   Spring,   Summer
                                            MTH-P211               Mind/Body Disciplines for Musicians                                  1                     Fall,   Spring
                                            PFSS-P301              Survey of Mediterranean Musical Styles                               2                     Fall,   Spring
                                            PFSS-342               Survey of Drum Styles since the '60s                                 2                     Fall,   Spring
                                            PFSS-P362              Survey of American Roots Music Styles                                2                     Fall,   Spring
                                            PFSS-385               R&B, Funk, and Smooth Jazz Saxophone Styles                          2                     Fall,   Spring
                                            PM-P250                Movement for Musicians 1                                             1                     Fall,   Spring
                                            PSH-238                Awareness Training for Musicians                                     1                     Fall,   Spring,   Summer
                                            PSH-250                Yoga for Musicians 1                                                 1                     Fall,   Spring
                                            PSH-261                Playing in the Key of Qi: Qigong for Musicians                       2                     Fall,   Spring
                                            PSH-281                Somatic Breathwork for Vocalists                                     1                     Fall,   Spring
                                            PSHR-P270              Traditional Microtonal Theory and Application                        1                     Fall,   Spring
                                            PSPR-381               Commercial Band Workshop                                             2                     Fall,   Spring,   Summer
                                            PST-351                Stage Performance Techniques 1                                       2                     Fall,   Spring
                                            PST-385                Elements of Theater Production                                       2                     Fall,   Spring
                                            PSVC-131               American Diction for Singers                                         2                     Fall,   Spring
                                            PSW-341                The Music of Ghana                                                   2                     Fall,   Spring,   Summer
                                            PSW-342                The Music of Guinea                                                  2                     Fall
                                            PSW-361                Brazilian Musical Styles                                             2                     Fall,   Spring
                                            SW-111                 Essentials of Songwriting                                            1                     Fall,   Spring, Summer
                                            SW-325                 The Music of John Lennon                                             2                     Fall,   Spring, Summer
                                            SW-P326                The Songs of Paul Simon: The Art and Craft of
                                                                   an American Master                                                   2                     Fall, Spring




                               20   Summer/Fall 2012
SUMMER/FALL 2012 CURRICULUM INFORMATION




                                                                                                                                                       Liberal Arts Program
The Liberal Arts Program at Berklee                                        ●   Technological Literacy: MTEC-111 Introduction to
                                                                                                       Music Technology
Berklee’s Liberal Arts program emphasizes the interdisciplinary
learning that artists and musicians need to succeed in today’s
                                                                           ●   Liberal Arts electives: Choose any three additional
world, especially writing and communication, and entrepre-                     courses of interest to you.
neurial, critical thinking and problem solving skills. Liberal Arts
courses provide a cultural context for the music being studied;        (*NOTE: Some majors require specific Liberal Arts courses;
relate music to other arts, politics, literature, and science;                 check with the major Chair for information.)
encourage in students an appreciation for diversity; and prepare
students to make the complex ethical choices they will face
throughout their lives. Berklee’s Liberal Arts Department is
designed to empower students with broad knowledge and                  LIBERAL ARTS MINORS
transferable skills, and a strong sense of values, ethics, and civic   Explore interests, develop skills and gain knowledge that
engagement. The partnership of Liberal Arts and music in the           complements your music studies and your major by earning a
Berklee curriculum means that graduates are accomplished               minor in a Liberal Arts discipline. Each minor consists of four
musicians who also excel as team members, communicators and            courses, usually 10-12 credits. As part of each minor, you
problem-solvers. For information, see Dr. Mikel Mason, Interim         will complete foundational courses and select from a list of
Chair, x.2991, mmason1@berklee.edu; or the department                  specified options. Courses taken to complete a minor may be
coordinator, x.2552.                                                   used to fulfill other degree requirements as appropriate.

                                                                       Studying a Minor Gives You a Chance to:
                                                                           ●   Synthesize and integrate knowledge from the discipline
What Are the Liberal Arts?
Liberal Arts includes the study of:                                        ●   Evaluate major themes and trends in the discipline
                                                                           ●   Analyze major issues in the discipline
    ●   Humanities — literature, creative writing, poetry,
        philosophy, languages, communication, art history,                 ●   Understand key terminology in the discipline
        history, music history, visual arts, drama, and more               ●   Compose written and oral communications appropriate
    ●   Natural Sciences/Mathematics — biology, chemistry,                     to the discipline
        physics, environmental science, acoustics, mathematics,                Apply critical thinking and practical reasoning as
                                                                           ●
        and more
                                                                               appropriate to the discipline
    ●   Social Sciences — psychology, economics, sociology,
                                                                           ●   Prepare for future study and/or graduate school in
        history, anthropology, political science, women’s studies,
        Africana studies, Latino studies, and more                             the discipline
                                                                       You will receive formal recognition for study in the minor, and
                                                                       it will be designated on your transcript.
Liberal Arts Requirements: 40 credits required for the
Bachelor of Music Degree
                                                                       Choices
    ●   Art History: Choose any course with an LAHS prefix
        of interest to you.                                            Choose from among the following Minor options:
    ●   English: LENG-111 Writing and Communication                        ●   Music and Society: Africana Studies
                 LENG-201 Literature: Choose among a variety                                      Gender Studies
                                                                                                  Global Studies
                 of literature topics of interest to you.
                                                                           ●   English: Literature Track
    ●   History: Choose any course with an LHIS prefix of
                                                                                         Creative Writing Track
        interest to you.
                                                                                         Poetry/Spoken Word/Slam Track
    ●   Humanities: LHUM-100 Artistry, Creativity, and                     ●   Drama
                    Inquiry Seminar
                                                                           ●   Psychology
                    LHUM-400 Professional
                    Development Seminar
                                                                           ●   Acoustics and Electronics
    ●   Mathematics/Natural Science: Choose any course
                                                                           ●   Visual Culture and Interactive Media Studies
        with an LMSC prefix of interest to you, except LMSC-130            ●   History
    ●   Music History: LHAN-211 History of Western Music 1                 ●   Philosophy
                       LHAN-212 History of Western Music 2
    ●   Music and Society: Choose any course of interest
        to you. (see listing)
    ●   Social Science: Choose any course with a LSOC-prefix
        of interest to you.




                                                                                                                               Summer/Fall 2012   21
                                    SUMMER/FALL 2012 CURRICULUM INFORMATION
Liberal Arts Program



                                    Detail                                                            LHIS-P320 20th Century Women Songwriters
                                    Music and Society: Africana Studies                               LHIS-363 Gender and Power in History
                                      Course requirements:                                            LSOC-P230 Gender and Country Music
                                      LHIS-224 Africana Studies: The Sociology of Black Music in
                                                                                                      LSOC-240 Women in Rock Music
                                      American Culture
                                                                                                      LSOC-371 Identity
                                       Choose 2 classes from the following:
                                                                                                      LSOC-P281 From Boys to Men: Masculinity in
                                       LHIS-225 Africana Studies: The Theology of American
                                                                                                      Contemporary Society
                                       Popular Music
                                       LHIS-226 Africana Studies: Biographies in Black (Music,
                                       Lives and Meanings)                                         Music and Society: Global Studies
                                                                                                     Course requirements:
                                       LSOC-355 City Life: Local and Global Perspectives
                                                                                                     LENG-365 Intercultural Communication
                                       HR-361 World Music, Materials, and Concepts for the
                                                                                                      Choose 3 classes from the following:
                                       Contemporary Musician
                                                                                                      LAHS-P230 Indian Art and Culture
                                       LHAN-221 History of Jazz
                                                                                                      LAHS-P234 Japanese Art and Culture
                                       LHAN-241 African American History, Culture, and Music 1
                                                                                                      LSOC-341 Irish and Celtic Culture, Film, and Music
                                       LHAN-341 African American History, Culture, and Music 2
                                                                                                      LENG-391 Children’s Literature: Multicultural Perspectives
                                       LHAN-345 Music and Cultures of Africa, Latin America,
                                                                                                      LHIS-301 International Human Rights
                                       and South America
                                                                                                      LHIS-215 History of Modern East Asia
                                       Choose 1 class from the following:                             LHIS-216 History of the Middle East
                                       ENPN-266 Gospel Keyboard Techniques Ensemble                   LHIS-221 World Revolutions
                                       PS-180 Music and Life of Bob Marley                            LHIS-224 Africana Studies: The Sociology of Black Music
                                       PSPR-361 Motown                                                in American Culture
                                       PSW-341 The Music of Ghana                                     LHIS-P227 Multicultural Contemplative Practices
                                       PSW-342 The Music of Guinea                                    LHIS-334 Contemporary History
                                       ENVC-485 Gospel Choir                                          LHIS-363 Gender and Power in History
                                       ENPC-374 West African Drum and Dance Ensemble                  LPHL-382 Introduction to Eastern Philosophy
                                       ENFF-301 The Music of Steve Coleman                            LENG-391 Children’s Literature: Multicultural Perspectives
                                       ENFF-302 The Music of the Crusaders                            LSOC-210 Introduction to Cultural Anthropology
                                       ENFF-303 The Music of the Meters                               LSOC-231 Culture, Diversity & Artistry
                                       ENRB-300 The Music of James Brown                              LSOC-260 Cuban Music, Culture and Society
                                       ENRB-301 '70s R&B/Funk                                         LSOC-335 Modern Political Thought
                                       ENRB-302 R&B/Funk Rating 5                                     LSOC-371 Identity
                                       ENRB-303 R&B/Smooth Jazz                                       LSOC-375 New Blues for the Old South: Southern Culture
                                       ENRB-403 Hip-Hop Ensemble                                      and Change
                                       ENRB-401 The Music of P-Funk
                                       ENRB-402 The Music of Tower of Power                        English: Literature
                                                                                                      Course requirements:
                                       ENRT-405 Reverence Gospel Ensemble
                                                                                                      LENG-201 Literature
                                                                                                      Choose 3 classes from the following:
                                    Music and Society: Gender Studies
                                                                                                      LENG-318 Studies in Poetry and Lyric
                                      Course requirements:
                                                                                                      LENG-319 Fiction and Film
                                      LSOC-220 Music, Gender and Society
                                                                                                      LENG-321 Modern Drama and Film
                                       Choose 3 classes from the following:
                                       LAHS-233 Art History Topics (Gender and Visual                 LSOC-341 Irish and Celtic Culture, Film, and Music
                                                                                                      LENG-352 Music and Literature for Children
                                       Arts topic only)
                                                                                                      LENG-391 Children’s Literature: Multicultural Perspectives
                                       LENG-365 Intercultural Communication
                                       LHAN-245 Women in Music
                                       LHIS-218 Women and Culture in the West: Route
                                       to Modern Feminism


                       22   Summer/Fall 2012
SUMMER/FALL 2012 CURRICULUM INFORMATION




                                                                                                                                          Liberal Arts Program
English: Creative Writing                                 Psychology
   Course requirements:                                      Course requirements:
   LENG-201 Literature                                       LSOC-211 General Psychology
   Choose 3 classes from the following:                      Choose 3 classes from the following:
   LENG-351 Music Criticism, Reviewing, and Blogging         LMSC-P307 Introduction to Psychoacoustics
   LENG-331 Creative Writing: Poetry 1                       LSOC-P281 From Boys to Men: Masculinity in
   LENG-335 Fiction Writing Workshop                         Contemporary Society
   LENG-336 Scriptwriting for Theater, TV, and Film          LSOC-301 Behavioral Assessment and Observation
   LENG-337 Telling True Stories                             LSOC-307 Music Cognition
   LENG-431 Creative Writing: Poetry 2                       LSOC-310 Group Dynamics
   LENG-450 Poetry Jam and Slam                              LSOC-371 Identity
   LENG-452 Poetry Jam and Slam 2: Advanced Workshop         LSOC-411 Child and Adolescent Psychology
   LENG-460 Flo’Ology: Spoken Word and Improvisation         LSOC-421 Abnormal Psychology
   LENG-P490 FUSION Magazine Seminar and Practicum           LSOC-431 Adult Development and Aging
                                                             LSOC-441 The Psychiatric Setting
English: Poetry/Spoken Word/Slam                             LSOC-P451 Existential Psychoanalytic Theory and Life
   Course requirements:                                      MTH-311 Psychology of Music
   LENG-450 Poetry Jam and Slam
   LENG-452 Poetry Jam and Slam 2: Advanced Workshop      Acoustics and Electronics
   Choose 2 classes from the following:                      Course requirements:
   LENG-318 Studies in Poetry and Lyric                      LMSC-208 Principles of Acoustics OR
   LENG-325 Theater Workshop                                 LMSC-209 Applications of Acoustics
   LENG-331 Creative Writing: Poetry 1                       LMSC-210 Principles of Audio Electronics
   LENG-431 Creative Writing Poetry 2                        Choose 2 classes from the following:
                                                             LMSC-P307 Introduction to Psychoacoustics
   LENG-460 Flo’Ology: Spoken Word and Improvisation
                                                             LMSC-P310 Mathematics of Musical Signals 1:
   SW-445 Musical Theater Writing 2
                                                             Digital Signals and Filter
                                                             LMSC-P315 Mathematics of Musical Signals 2:
Drama
                                                             The Wave Equation
   Course requirements:
                                                             MTEC-308 Application of Loudspeaker Design
   LENG-321 Modern Drama and Film
                                                             MTEC-P383 Studio Maintenance and Troubleshooting
   Choose 2 classes from the following:
   LENG-325 Theater Workshop
   LENG-336 Scriptwriting for Theater, TV and Film        Visual Culture and Interactive Media Studies
                                                              Course requirements:
   LENG-P401 Scene Study Workshop
                                                              LAHS-333 Approaches to Visual Culture
   LENG-424 Advanced Theater Scriptwriting Workshop
                                                             LHUM-P433 Digital Narrative Theory and Practice
   LENG-425 Advanced Theater Production Workshop
                                                             Choose 1 class from the following:
   Choose 1 class from the following:
                                                             LAHS-231 History of Art I: Ancient to Medieval Art
   CW-P257 Musical Theater Arranging and Orchestration
                                                             LAHS-232 History of Art II: Medieval Art to the Present
   ENCL-404 Musical Theater Orchestra
                                                             LAHS-P230 Indian Art, Music and Culture
   ILVC-151 Acting Skills for the Vocalist
                                                             LAHS-233 Art History Topics
   PSVC-161 The Professional Vocalist Audition Workshop
                                                             LAHS-P234 Japanese Art and Culture
   ENVC-370 Musical Theater Ensemble
                                                             LAHS-P238 Scandals and Vandals: Forgery, Theft, and
   ENVC-470 Musical Theater Chorus
                                                             Destruction in the History of Art
   PST-385 Elements of Theater Production
                                                             Choose 1 class from the following:
   SW-345 Musical Theater Writing 1                          LENG-319 Fiction and Film
   SW-445 Musical Theater Writing 2                          LENG-321 Modern Drama and Film
                                                             LHIS-220 Cinema in Hitler’s Germany




                                                                                                                  Summer/Fall 2012   23
                                    SUMMER/FALL 2012 CURRICULUM INFORMATION
Liberal Arts Program



                                    History                                                            Philosophy
                                        Choose any four (4) history courses. At least one (1)              Course requirements:
                                        course of the four (4) must be at a 300-level or above.
                                                                                                           LPHL-381 Western Philosophy
                                       LHIS-301 International Human Rights                                 LPHL-382 Eastern Philosophy
                                       LHIS-202 Nations and Nationalism                                    Choose 3 courses from the following:
                                       LHIS-203 Ancient Religion and Philosophies                          LPHL-361 Philosophy of Religion
                                       LHIS-213 Early History of the Americas                              LPHL-365 Ethics
                                       LHIS-214 Modern History of the Americas                             LPHL-383 Aesthetics
                                       LHIS-215 History of Modern East Asia                                LPHL-475 Philosophy of Education
                                       LHIS-216 History of the Middle East
                                       LHIS-217 The Modern Age: Europe 1700 -1945
                                       LHIS-218 Women and Culture in the West: Route to
                                       Modern Feminism                                                 MUSIC AND SOCIETY REQUIREMENT
                                                                                                       The Music and Society minor at Berklee challenges students to
                                       LHIS-219 History of Nazi Germany                                read, think, discuss and explore music as a product of cultural
                                       LHIS-220 Cinema in Hitler's Germany                             expression. Music and Society courses explore the relationship
                                                                                                       among music, other performing and fine arts, literature, and
                                       LHIS-221 World Revolutions                                      politics. Additionally, Music and Society courses examine the
                                       LHIS-223 History Topics Courses.                                way art production is affected and shaped by the consideration
                                                                                                       of identity, power, and social agency.
                                         Choose from available offerings. Possibilities include:
                                         Globalism and Globalization                                   One course required (3 credits)
                                         American Jazz Age to Age of Aquarius                              Students may choose any course from among the
                                         Law and Disorder                                                  following:
                                         American Pop Culture and Society                                  LAHS-P230 Indian Art, Music and Culture
                                         History of the Music City                                         LENG-352 Music and Literature for Children
                                         Toward a Vision of Music’s Future
                                                                                                           LHIS-224 Africana Studies: The Sociology of Black Music in
                                         Law and Disorder                                                  American Culture
                                         Contemplative and Mystical Tradition
                                                                                                           LHIS-225 Africana Studies: The Theology of American
                                         People, Place & Power
                                                                                                           Popular Music
                                       LHIS-224 Africana Studies: The Sociology of Black Music in
                                                                                                           LHIS-226 Africana Studies: Biographies in Black (Music,
                                       American Culture
                                                                                                           Lives, and Meanings)
                                       LHIS-225 Africana Studies: The Theology of American                 LSOC-341 Irish and Celtic Culture, Film and Music
                                       Popular Music
                                                                                                           LSOC-213 Music and Peace
                                       LHIS-226 Africana Studies: Biographies in Black (Music, Lives       LSOC-220 Music, Gender, and Society
                                       & Meaning)
                                                                                                           LSOC-P230 Gender and Country Music
                                       LHIS-P248 Palestinian-Israeli Relations                             LSOC-231 Culture, Diversity & Artistry
                                       LHIS-P320 20th-Century Women Songwriters                            LSOC-240 Women in Rock Music
                                       LHIS-321 America from the Jazz Age to the Digital Age               LSOC-P250 Sound and Society: The Social Life of Musical
                                       LHIS-P322 The Music of Laurel Canyon                                Practices
                                       LHIS-334 Contemporary History                                       LSOC-P270 The R&B/Soul Business: The Roots of Hip-Hop

                                       LHIS-363 Gender and Power in History                                LSOC-280 Music, Spirit, and Transformation
                                                                                                           LSOC-375 New Blues for the Old South: Southern Culture
                                       LHIS-375 Mythology and Folklore
                                                                                                           and Change




                       24   Summer/Fall 2012
SUMMER/FALL 2012 CURRICULUM INFORMATION




                                                                                                                                                    Berklee in Valencia - Global Studies
Special Opportunities                                             Core Music
                                                                  CM-211 Tonal Harmony 1
                                                                  CM-212 Tonal Harmony 2
BERKLEE IN VALENCIA - GLOBAL STUDIES                              CP-210 The Art of Counterpoint
                                                                  COND-211 Conducting 1
Berklee’s Global Studies program provides an opportunity for      COND-212 Conducting 2
undergraduate students, in their third semester or higher, to     ET-211 Ear Training 3
become successful global music leaders and to prepare for         ET-212 Ear Training 4
international careers. Students study in Valencia, Spain, at      HR-211 Harmony 3
Berklee’s new international campus.                               HR-212 Harmony 4
                                                                  LHAN-211 History of Western Music 1
The Global Studies program focuses especially on                  LHAN-212 History of Western Music 2
International Music Business and Mediterranean Music.
The program also features an International Career Center          Contemporary Writing and Production
that enables all students, regardless of major, to prepare for    AR-112 Arranging 2
their future. Additionally, courses are offered from across the   PW-151 Introduction to Desktop/Digital Audio 1
curriculum and for a variety of majors, so that all students      PW-161 Technology Tools for the Writer
may find the classes they need.                                   PW-365 Orchestral Mock-Up Production
                                                                  CW-P227 Flamenco Music Composition and Arranging
The program appeals to all students who are interested in         CW-261 MIDI Applications for the Writer
learning about other cultures and developing competencies
necessary to become successful global music leaders. In           Film Scoring
Valencia, Berklee students may take advantage of performance      FS-221 Introduction to Film Scoring
and experiential learning opportunities, while also studying      FS-231 History of Film Music
the courses they need to progress in their programs and           FS-271 Analysis of Video Game Music Techniques
meet their graduation requirements. Students will also meet
with top artists and network within the International             Liberal Arts
Music Industry.                                                   LSPN-161, 262, 363, 464 Spanish 1-4
                                                                  LENG-201 Literature: Music and Words
TRAVEL TO OTHER EUROPEAN CITIES                                   LAHS-233 Art History Topics: Art in Valencia
                                                                  LHIS-223 History Topics: History of Spanish Film
For Fall 2012, all Global Studies students will take two
                                                                  LHUM-400 Professional Development Seminar
European trips:
Paris—The Mama Event—An annual international music                Music Technology
convention and festival held in Paris from October 25-26.         MP-113 Accelerated Pro Tools
Students will travel to Paris to attend the conference and        MP-114 Critical Listening Lab for Musicians
explore the city.                                                 MP-115 Production Analysis Lab for Musicians
                                                                  MP-P205 Recording and Mix Techniques for Musicians
Madrid—Students will travel to Madrid, to explore the city
and its Mediterranean music scene.                                International Internship
                                                                  XX-495 Internship
(NOTE: All fees for these trips are included in the Berklee
in Valencia housing costs. There are no additional costs for      ELIGIBILITY - Applicants must have:
these trips.)                                                         ●   Completed their 2nd semester or higher at Berklee
                                                                          by the program start date
COURSES                                                               ●   Minimum cumulative GPA of 3.0
Music Business                                                        ●   Good judicial and financial standing at Berklee
MB-211 Legal Aspects of the Music Industry
MB-287 Business Communication
                                                                  APPLICATION - For Fall 2012, submit the following
MB-341 Creative Promotion in New Media
                                                                  materials by April 4:
MB-375 Music Intermediaries
MB-P499 International Music Business Seminar                          ●   Online Application
                                                                      ●   2 Berklee References
Performance and Mediterranean Music
PIXX Private Instruction                                              ●   1 Online Recommendation Form
ENDS-400 Directed Study Ensemble
ENMX-211 Mixed Styles Ensemble                                    TUITION & FEES - Tuition and related fees for the semester
ENMX-311 Mixed Styles Ensemble                                    in Valencia are the same as for a semester in Boston. Students
ILRE-375 Recital Workshop for Performance Majors                  in their first semester of Global Studies are required to stay in
PFSS-P301 Survey of Mediterranean Music Styles                    the Berklee in Valencia residences. Each student will have a
PFET-P211 Advanced Rhythmic Techniques for Performers             single room with private bath. Internet and weekly cleaning
PSHR-321 Harmonic Considerations in Improvisation 1               services are included. The residence cost per student per
PSIJ-311 Chord Scale Theory in Improvisation                      semester is $6,300.
RPXX Recital Preparation

                                                                                                                            Summer/Fall 2012   25
                                                              SPECIAL LEARNING OPPORTUNITIES
Global Studies Program/MBA with Suffolk University/
                               ProArts Consortium


                                                              PASSPORT & VISA - All students must have a passport that is       Additionally, all Berklee students, faculty, and staff are eligible
                                                              valid for at least six months after the program end date. Most    to take courses at these schools as well as use some of
                                                              students will need a student visa to study in Spain. The Global   their facilities:
                                                              Studies staff provides guidance in applying for the passport
                                                              and visa, but it is ultimately the student’s responsibility to    Participation in the ProArts Cross Registration program is open
                                                              apply for and obtain them.                                        only during the Fall and Spring semesters. You may register for
                                                                                                                                courses during both pre-registration as well as the add/drop
                                                              FOR MORE INFORMATION                                              period each semester. Please see www.proarts.org or the Office
                                                              Visit www.berkleevalencia.org, email                              of the Registrar for the specific dates. If you are interested in
                                                              globalstudies@berklee.edu, or call Tracey Mellor at               taking courses at one of the consortium colleges, the following
                                                              617-747-8536.                                                     procedures should guide you through the process:
                                                                                                                                    ●   Select courses from the ProArts Combined Course
                                                              MBA Opportunity with Suffolk University                                   Offerings booklet and complete a Cross Registration
                                                                                                                                        Form. Both the booklet and forms are available at the
                                                              Students who successfully complete the Music Business/                    Office of the Registrar and can be found online at:
                                                              Management program and earn a Bachelor of Music degree                    http://www.proarts.org.
                                                              from Berklee College of Music may apply for acceptance
                                                              to the Suffolk University Accelerated MBA Program for                 ●   Check to make sure you have all necessary prerequisites.
                                                              Berklee students.                                                         If not, be sure to obtain the necessary approval form(s)
                                                                                                                                        before trying to register for the class.
                                                              Through a special arrangement, you may receive credit for
                                                              your Berklee course work in the Music Business/Management
                                                                                                                                    ●   Have your cross registration form signed by the Office
                                                              major towards an MBA from Suffolk. As much as a semester                  of the Registrar first, and then bring it to the host
                                                              of the four-semester Suffolk program is eligible for course               college during Cross Registration week. These dates
                                                              waiver consideration, saving you considerable time and cost               differ across the participating schools and are listed
                                                              in earning this valuable degree.                                          in the ProArts booklet and on the ProArts website.
                                                                                                                                    ●   Once you have cross-registered at the host college, you
                                                              Acceptance to the MBA program and course waiver                           then must bring the signed cross-registration form back
                                                              considerations are based on (1) the achievement of a 3.00                 to the Office of the Registrar at Berklee.
                                                              GPA or above, (2) a minimum grade of B in required courses,
                                                              (3) a GMAT score of at least 450, and (4) any additional              ●   Remember to add the ProArts course to your Berklee
                                                              requirements necessary for admission to Suffolk University.               schedule. Please see the table below to determine the
                                                                                                                                        course number and section for adding a ProArts course
                                                              This “fast track” program is intended to support your chosen              to your Berklee schedule. The course number you
                                                              career path in the music industry—whether entrepreneurial,                choose must equal the same amount of credits that the
                                                              marketing, or management—and put you in the job                           course is worth at the host college. Adding a ProArts
                                                              market as well prepared and quickly as possible.                          course to your Berklee schedule does not guarantee
                                                                                                                                        a space in the host college course. However, it will,
                                                              If you would like further information on the MBA program                  save space on your Berklee schedule and increase your
                                                              at Suffolk, or on the Music Business/Management major                     term credit load, which is important for financial aid
                                                              at Berklee, please visit the Music Business/Management                    concerns, and SEVIS concerns for international students.
                                                              Department, Room 234, 7 Haviland St., or call 617-747-2152.
                                                                                                                                Please use the following course numbering system
                                                              You will also find information on www.berklee.edu, under
                                                                                                                                when registering for a ProArts course:
                                                              Music Business/Management, Graduate Programs.
                                                                                                                                Course Number                     Section
                                                              ProArts Consortium                                                PA-005 = 0.5 credit course        001 = Boston Architectural
                                                                                                                                PA-001 = 1 credit course                College
                                                              Berklee College of Music is a member of the ProArts               PA-015 = 1.5 credit course        002 = Boston Conservatory
                                                              Consortium. ProArts is an association of six performing and
                                                                                                                                PA-002 = 2 credit course          003 = Emerson College
                                                              visual arts schools: Boston Architectural College, Berklee
                                                                                                                                PA-025 = 2.5 credit course        004 = Mass. College of Art
                                                              College of Music, the Boston Conservatory, Emerson College,
                                                              Massachusetts College of Art and Design, and the School           PA-003 = 3 credit course                and Design
                                                              of the Museum of Fine Arts, Boston. As members of the             PA-004 = 4 credit course          005 = School of the Museum
                                                              consortium, Berklee students, faculty, and staff have many                                                of Fine Arts, Boston
                                                              opportunities at their disposal.
                                                                                                                                Ex.: A 4-credit course at Emerson would be PA-004-003.
                                                              All members of the Berklee community can access ProArts
                                                              Connect (www.proartsconnect.org) - an online resource for         Additional Information
                                                              connecting across the ProArts schools. Collaborate, find              ●   ProArts courses are only counted as general elective
                                                              and post events, buy and sell, offer or look for services,                credit toward graduation. If you wish to have a ProArts
                                                              and find housing.                                                         course count differently than general elective credit,
                                                                                                                                        you must first obtain approval from the chair of your
                                                                                                                                        major before the start of the course.


                        26                            Summer/Fall 2012
SPECIAL LEARNING OPPORTUNITIES




                                                                                           Berklee Internship Programs
    ●   A maximum of four ProArts credits may be applied to
        the general elective requirements of your major. Faculty
        and staff are eligible to take one course per semester
        through ProArts.


The Office of Experiential Learning
Special Learning Opportunities
The mission of the Office of Experiential Learning (OEL) is to
provide practical internship and service-learning opportunities
for our students. All OEL programs provide students with an
opportunity to connect their classroom studies with practical
career development.

The OEL offers a number of credit-bearing programs for
students and alumni, most notably, the Summer Internship
Program in Los Angeles, Summer Internship Program in
New York City and the Summer Internship Program in
London. These comprehensive, credit-bearing opportunities
combine internship experience and professional development
workshops during the summer break. Students live in
housing provided by the college. To learn more visit
www.berklee.edu/oel or contact the Office of Experiential
Learning.

Eligibility for the Los Angeles, New York and London
programs:
    ● 5th semester standing or completion of 50 Berklee

       credits earned while at Berklee.
    ●   Minimum academic standing of a 3.0 GPA in major
        and a 2.5 overall GPA.
    ●   Good judicial and financial standing at Berklee.




                                                                   Summer/Fall 2012   27
                                      ACADEMIC POLICIES
Credit By Exam/Incompletes/
         Audits/Withdrawals


                                      Credit By Exam                                                       Audit Policy
                                      Students seeking Credit By Exam (CBX) for a course should            Students are not allowed to audit any course within the
                                      apply to the appropriate Course Chair. The following                 curriculum. All students must be properly registered for all
                                      limitations and stipulations apply:                                  courses they attend by the end of the Add/Drop period. After
                                         ●   A minimum grade of B must be earned in the exam               the Add/Drop period concludes, faculty are asked to check
                                                                                                           updated course rosters and identify any students attending
                                             and/or project assignments for CBX to be awarded.
                                                                                                           their courses who are not fully registered and send them to
                                         ●   Any necessary adding or dropping of courses due to            the Office of the Registrar to resolve registration issues.
                                             obtaining CBX must be completed by the add/drop
                                             deadline.                                                     Withdrawals
                                         ●   CBX is not available for courses in which both
                                                                                                           Withdrawing from Classes
                                             proficiency and participation are the criteria for credit.
                                                                                                           The deadline to drop a course is the Friday of the first week
                                         ●   CBX is not available for courses in which a student
                                                                                                           of classes. After the drop deadline has passed, students may
                                             has received a grade of I, F, or IF.
                                                                                                           withdraw from a course by submitting a Student Initiated
                                         ●   In order to graduate, participation is required in a          Withdrawal from a Class form at the Office of the Registrar.
                                             minimum of 60 credits (degree), or 48 credits (diploma).      A withdrawn course will remain on a transcript with a grade of
                                                                                                           “W” (Withdrawn) and is not eligible for a tuition refund or a
                                                                                                           replacement course.
                                      Policy on Grades of Incomplete
                                      If you are not able to complete the required work for a              Please note: If you receive financial aid or veterans’ benefits,
                                      course by the end of the term, you may request a grade of            withdrawal from a course(s) may reduce your eligibility for
                                      Incomplete (I) from your instructor. When doing so, please           aid. If you are an international student, withdrawal from a
                                      keep the following in mind:                                          course(s) may jeopardize your F-1 Visa status.

                                         ●   You must be passing the course and have satisfactory          The deadlines for withdrawing from a course are March 30,
                                             attendance.                                                   2012 for Spring 2012, July 20, 2012 for Summer, and
                                                                                                           November 9, 2012 for Fall 2012.
                                         ●   The request may be made during the final two weeks
                                             of the semester.                                              Withdrawal from the College
                                         ●   A grade of “I” does not count against your GPA.               If you need to withdraw from the college anytime after
                                                                                                           completing the check-in process, you are required to complete
                                         ●   A grade of “I” is not a passing grade. You will not receive   a Withdrawal from the College form in order to be officially
                                             credit for the class until a passing grade is submitted.      withdrawn from the term. There are two locations to do this:
                                         ●   The course cannot be used as a prerequisite for another          1. For US citizens (or permanent residents) who are
                                             course until a passing grade is submitted.                          withdrawing from the college for any reason other than
                                                                                                                 a medical or mental health issue, please go to the
                                         ●   The grade of “I” is not available for ensembles.
                                                                                                                 Office of the Registrar.
                                         ●   The deadline to complete a course with a grade of “I”            2. For international students and any student withdrawing
                                             is the last day of your next term of attendance. Students           from the college for medical or mental health reasons,
                                             who are not enrolled in a subsequent term are permitted             please go to the Counseling and Advising Center.
                                             one calendar year to resolve the grade.
                                                                                                           Students who withdraw by the end of the fourth week of the
                                         ●   A grade of “I” that is not resolved within the stated         fall or spring semesters are entitled to a credit of part of their
                                             time period will automatically change to a grade              tuition on the basis of assessing 20% of the semester’s tuition
                                             of “IF” – Incomplete/Failure. This will be averaged           per week of attendance. After the fourth week no credit will be
                                             into your GPA as an “F” – Failure. Grades of “IF”             made. Students who withdraw by the end of the third week of
                                             cannot be changed.                                            classes in the summer semester are entitled to a credit of part
                                         ●   Having an Incomplete grade for any course as of the           of their tuition on the basis of assessing 25% of the semester’s
                                             third week of the next semester will prevent a student        tuition per week of attendance. After the third week, no credit
                                             from being included on that term’s Dean's List.               will be made. No deduction is made for temporary absence,
                                                                                                           nor is any credit granted if you are suspended, dismissed or
                                         ●   One or more incompletes can significantly add to your         leave the college without officially withdrawing.
                                             workload in your next semester.
                                                                                                           Financial aid awards may be prorated upon withdrawal
                                         ●   Last day to change an incomplete awarded for:                 from the college. Contact the Office of Financial Aid for
                                             Fall 2011: May 11, 2012; Spring or Summer 2012:               more information.
                                             December 21, 2012.
                                                                                                           International students in F-1 status will affect their immigration
                                                                                                           status by withdrawing from the college. These students should
                                                                                                           consult their international advisor in the Counseling and
                                                                                                           Advising Center prior to submitting a Withdrawal from the
                                                                                                           College form.

            28                Summer/Fall 2012
ACADEMIC POLICIES




                                                                                                                                               Declaration of Major
                                                                                                                                               Repeated Courses/
Repeated Courses                                                                         FS-221     Intro to Film Scoring
                                                                                         ISKB-211   Basic Keyboard (not required
Students may re-enroll in most courses for a second or                                              for piano principals)
subsequent time. (Music technology courses cannot be
repeated without department approval). When a course is              Jazz Composition    AR-112     Arranging 2
taken more than once, only the highest grade earned for the                              AR-228     Survey of Jazz Composition
course is used to determine the cumulative grade point average                                      and Arranging
(CGPA) and concentrate cumulative grade point average                                    ISKB-211 Basic Keyboard (not required
(CCGPA). Repeated courses appear on the transcript for each                                         for piano principals)
term the course was taken with the grade received and the            Music Business      MB-101     Intro to the Music Business
term grade point average. Credits earned from repeating a                                MB-201     Principles of Business
course cannot be counted toward graduation.                                                         Management
                                                                                         MB-211     Legal Aspects of the
Please note: this policy does not apply to ensembles, instrumental                                  Music Industry
labs, and non-leveled private instruction, all of which may be                           LMSC-130 Concepts of Mathematics
repeated with each grade counted in the CGPA, CCGPA and                                  LSOC-225 International Economics
applicable toward graduation (up to certain limits – please see                                     & Finance
Restrictions for General Elective Credit on page 32.)                Music Education     ME-111     Intro to Music Education
                                                                                         ME-152     Computer Applications for
Declaration of Major                                                                                Music Education
                                                                                                    Highly Recommended
All students are required to declare a major field of study by       Music Production    MP-110     Intro to MP&E
their third semester credit standing. Students who have not          and Engineering     LMSC-209 Applications of Music Acoustics
declared a major and are currently in their second semester                                         *required in second semester
credit standing or higher, should declare a major prior                                  MP-210     Principles of Independent
to registering.                                                                                     Record Production
                                                                                         MP-310     Sound Reinforcement for
To begin the process of declaring a major, students should visit
                                                                                                    Musicians – Intended for non
the departmental office of the appropriate major. (Performance
                                                                                                    MP&E majors
majors should begin with their instrumental department.) The
Declaration of Major form must be completed at the major             Music Therapy       MTH-201 Intro to International
department and then be submitted to the Office of the Registrar.                                    Music Therapy
                                                                                         LSOC-211 General Psychology
Declaring for most majors must be done by the end of                                     ILGT-231 Guitar Class (not required for
Check-in Week, which is the Friday before the start of classes                                      guitar principals)
and, if approved, will be effective for that semester. Declaration                       MTH-311 Psychology of Music
of Major forms received after this date will be effective, if        Performance         PFSS-XXX Approved Styles Survey
approved, for the following semester. Please check directly                                         (course code is determined by
with the major department for possible earlier deadlines.                                           your principal instrument – See
                                                                                                    Major Grid)
Following is a list of majors and suggested entry courses. The                           PSXX-XXX Performance Studies
entry courses provide an overview of the respective majors and                                      (course code is determined by
begin to build a foundation for courses that follow in the major.                                   your principal instrument – See
Note: Some of these courses have prerequisites. Be sure                                             Major Grid)
to check the course description for details.                         Professional        Does not have a special entry course, see
                                                                     Music               department advisor in the Professional
Major                Entry Courses(s)                                                    Music department
Contemporary         AR-112    Arranging 2
                                                                     Songwriting         SW-111     Essentials of Songwriting
Writing and          LMSC-208 Principles of Musical Acoustics
                                                                                         SW-221     Lyric Writing 1
Production           ISKB-211 Basic Keyboard (not required
                                                                                         SW-211     Songwriting 1
                               for piano principals)
                                                                                         ISKB-211 Basic Keyboard (not required
Composition          CM-211 Tonal Harmony and                                                       for piano principals)
                               Composition 1
                     CP-210    The Art of Counterpoint
                     ISKB-211 Basic Keyboard (not required           Declaration of Major for Electronic
                               for piano principals)
                                                                     Production and Design or Music Production
Electronic           EP-210    Survey of Electroacoustic Music       and Engineering
Production           EP-250    Electronics in the Soundtrack
and Design           LMSC-208 Principles of Music Acoustics          In order to ensure the proper amount of lab/studio project
                     OR                                              time and hands-on experience necessary in the curriculum
                     LMSC-209 Applications of Music Acoustics        of the Electronic Production and Design (EPD) major and the
Film Scoring         CM-211 Tonal Harmony and                        Music Production and Engineering (MP&E) major, enrollment in
                               Composition 1 *required in            both of these programs is limited. Students interested in either
                               second semester                       of these majors must follow special application procedures.
                     CP-210    The Art of Counterpoint
                     FS-131    History of Film Music
                                                                                                                            Summer/Fall 2012       29
                                    ACADEMIC POLICIES
Declaration of Major



                                    Electronic Production and Design:                                   Additional Information for EPD and MP&E Applicants:
                                    Students desiring to declare a major in Electronic Production and   Due to current facility limitations, simultaneous enrollment in
                                    Design (EPD) must complete the EPD application process and be       or attendance of multiple sections of any EP, MP, or MTEC
                                    approved for acceptance into the major. Complete information        course is not permitted. A student may only enroll in or
                                    about applying is available online at http://epd.berklee.edu as     attend one section of a given EP, MP, or MTEC course.
                                    well as at the EPD office, room B10, 150 Massachusetts Ave.
                                                                                                        ELPD and MPED majors may not enroll in an EP, MP, or MTEC
                                    Acceptance to the EPD major is not guaranteed and is extremely      course that they have previously taken without written
                                    competitive. The rate of acceptance for recent semesters has        permission from the chair of their department.
                                    been around 40%.
                                                                                                        The dates listed earlier are subject to change.
                                    Students accepted into the EPD major will be billed for the
                                    EPD Major Bundle of hardware and software which can be              Declaration of Performance Major
                                    picked up at the start of the semester when entering the
                                                                                                        Students may declare the Performance major during their
                                    major. Also, as students advance through the curriculum,
                                                                                                        second semester or by their third semester credit standing.
                                    the major may require additional hardware and/or software
                                                                                                        It is highly recommended that students do so during their
                                    purchases for specific courses.
                                                                                                        second semester of study. Students who intend to declare
                                                                                                        the Performance major must visit their instrumental/voice
                                    Important Dates for EPD Applicants:
                                                                                                        department chair and request an Intent to Declare Performance
                                    Note: Summer and Fall enrollment share a single application         Major Application Form. It is strongly recommended that
                                    deadline in the Spring.                                             students have a CGPA of 2.70 or higher in private instruction,
                                                                                                        ear training and ensemble/lab in order to declare a major
                                    For Admission into:              Deadline (by 4:00 PM EST)          in Performance.
                                    Summer or Fall 2012              Deadline has already passed
                                                                                                        Important Dates for Performance Major Applicants:
                                    Spring 2013                      Monday, October 15, 2012
                                    Summer or Fall 2013              Monday, February 25, 2013              ●   Application deadline for Summer/Fall 2012
                                                                                                                start in major: April 6, 2012
                                                                                                            ●   Application deadline for Spring 2013
                                    Music Production and Engineering:                                           start in major: November 16, 2012
                                    Information about applying to the MP&E major is available               ●   Application deadline for Summer/Fall 2013
                                    online at http://mpe.berklee.edu. Acceptance to the MP&E                    start in major: April 5, 2013
                                    major is not guaranteed and is extremely competitive. The rate
                                    of acceptance for students applying to the Music Production
                                    and Engineering major is typically in the range of 35% - 50%.
                                    If you are accepted to the Music Production and Engineering
                                    major, you must sign the Student Recording Rights Agreement
                                    (SRRA) at the MP&E office and submit a completed Declaration
                                    of Major form to the Office of the Registrar, before enrolling in
                                    any restricted MP&E classes.
                                    You will also be required to purchase the Music Production
                                    and Engineering Major Hardware and Software Bundle, which
                                    will be ordered and reserved for you during the second week
                                    of classes. Specific information on the pickup schedule and
                                    payment process will be provided upon completion of your
                                    Declaration of Major Form and posted online at
                                    http://mpe.berklee.edu.
                                    Important Dates for MP&E Applicants
                                    Note: Summer and Fall enrollment share a single application
                                    deadline in the Spring.
                                    For Admission into:              Deadline (by 4:00 PM EST)
                                    Spring 2013                      Friday, October 19, 2012
                                    Summer or Fall 2013              Friday, March 1, 2013
                                    Spring 2014                      Friday, October 18, 2013




                       30   Summer/Fall 2012
CURRICULAR POLICIES




                                                                                                                                            PI and RP Requirements/Instrumental Labs
                                                                                                                                            First Semester Testing/Policies/Secondary Instruments
First Semester Testing and Placement                               Private Instruction (PIXX) and Recital
                                                                   Preparation (RPXX) Requirements for
Entering students who place into advanced levels of
Arranging, Harmony, or Ear Training through the Entering           Performance Majors
Student Proficiency Assessment (ESPA) will earn credit for each
                                                                   Beginning in their third semester, performance majors are
preceding course upon successful completion of their first
                                                                   required to take one private instruction (PIXX) and one recital
semester courses. Students who earn more credit than is
                                                                   preparation (RPXX) lesson each semester. Private instruction
needed to meet Core Music requirements may apply the
                                                                   courses are technique and proficiency lessons required for
additional credit earned to other graduation requirements,
                                                                   a performance major to matriculate through the required
either in the concentrate (where appropriate) or as general
                                                                   eight levels of final exams. Recital preparation courses are
elective credit.
                                                                   performance major-specific private lessons that focus on
                                                                   building performances leading to the Senior Recital.
Regardless of advanced placement, all students are required
to enroll in and satisfactorily complete at least one Arranging,
                                                                   Students may choose from the following options for recital
one Harmony, and one Ear Training course in their first
                                                                   preparation courses:
semester at Berklee. Students are required to continue to
register for sequential core music courses during successive           ●   Principal instrument with faculty member in your
semesters of study until such time as they have finished                   department
their core music requirements.                                         ●   Principal instrument with faculty member outside
                                                                           your department
Policies                                                               ●   Secondary instrument

English as a Second Language                                       Students may take their private instruction and recital
All degree and diploma students for whom English is a Second       preparation courses in the following arrangements:
Language and whose entering Berklee English assessment or              ●   Two 30-minute lessons on your principal instrument
TOEFL score places them in an ESL course are required to                   with one faculty member combining your PIXX and
enroll in that course in their first semester. All degree and              RPXX lessons into one hour.
diploma students must continue to enroll in an ESL course in           ●   Two 30-minute lessons (PIXX and RPXX) on your
subsequent semesters until they attain proficiency as defined
                                                                           principal instrument with two different faculty
as ready to enroll in LENG-111 Writing and Communication.                  members from your principal instrumental department.
No first semester student is permitted to drop any required
                                                                       ●   One 30-minute PIXX lesson on your principal instrument
course without the written authorization of the course chair.
                                                                           with a faculty member from your principal instrumental
                                                                           department, and one 30-minute RPXX lesson with a
LENG-111 Writing and Communication                                         faculty member from another instrumental department.
All degree students are required to enroll in LENG-111 Writing         ●   One 30-minute PIXX lesson on your principal
and Communication in their first semester, unless they have                instrument and one 30-minute RPXX lesson on a
received appropriate transfer credit or are enrolled in an                 secondary instrument.
English as a Second Language course. All degree students who
have received transfer credit for LENG-111 will be required to     Students should check with their instrumental department chairs
select another Liberal Arts course for their first semester.       for their Recital Preparation lesson final exam requirements.

Performance Majors: Secondary Instruments                          Instrumental Labs
Performance majors who play more than one instrument               Each instrumental department provides a variety of instrumental
proficiently may declare a secondary instrument. Minimum           labs that focus on specific techniques, skills and/or genres.
private instruction residency on a secondary instrument is         These labs may or may not fulfill graduation requirements as
two semesters of study. Students may declare only one              determined by the individual student’s program of study and
secondary instrument. Students who wish to declare a               departmental requirements. Instrumental labs may be used as
secondary instrument need to see the department chair of           general electives in cases where they are not required. For more
that instrument to schedule an audition. Department chairs         information, consult either your private instructor or your
will schedule private lessons on secondary instruments and         instrumental department.
lessons outside their department.

RPXXs on the secondary instrument support the Recital
Preparation Program.

Preferential registration for PIXX and RPXX courses is provided
for performance majors: principal instruments, first choice;
and secondary instrument, second choice. To participate in
ensembles on a secondary instrument, contact the Ensemble
Department for an audition.




                                                                                                                         Summer/Fall 2012               31
                                                            CURRICULAR POLICIES
Ensembles/Additional Graduation Requirements



                                                            Ensemble Information                                             ●   A maximum of six additional liberal arts credits beyond
                                                                                                                                 the standard requirement may be applied to the general
                                                            Students are limited to registering for a specific number            elective requirements for students in the degree program.
                                                            of ensembles during the registration period according to             A maximum of twelve additional liberal arts credits beyond
                                                            instrument. This is to provide all students with a fair              the standard requirement may be applied to the general
                                                            opportunity to register for ensembles. Once all students’            elective requirements for students in the diploma program.
                                                            registration appointment times have passed, additional
                                                            ensembles can be added. For further information about            ●   Courses taken through the ProArts Consortium that meet
                                                            ensembles, please contact the Ensemble Office, Room 108,             the standards of Berklee’s transfer credit policy for liberal
                                                            130 Massachusetts Avenue.                                            arts requirements or electives will be accepted and counted
                                                                                                                                 toward graduation as appropriate. ProArts courses that
                                                            Please refer to the chart below:                                     are not normally transferable may be accepted with a
                                                            Instrument               Limit                                       maximum four credits applied to the general elective
                                                            Bass                     2                                           requirements.
                                                            Brass                    3
                                                            Guitar                   1
                                                            Percussion               1
                                                            Piano                    1
                                                            String                   3
                                                            Voice                    2
                                                            Woodwind                 3

                                                            Additional Graduation Requirements
                                                            In addition to the requirements for graduation set out in the
                                                            major grids and/or on My Degree Audit, the following are also
                                                            required for graduation:
                                                             ●   Completion of the specified total credits required
                                                                 for graduation.
                                                             ●   Completion of your principal instrument proficiency
                                                                 level specified by major.
                                                             ●   Completion of a final project as required by your
                                                                 specific major.
                                                             ●   Completion of at least 60 credits for degree and
                                                                 48 credits for diploma at Berklee to satisfy the
                                                                 residency requirement.
                                                             ●   Minimum cumulative grade point average of 2.00
                                                                 plus minimum grade point average of 2.70 in
                                                                 concentrate courses.

                                                            Restrictions for General Elective Credit
                                                             ●   Starting with Fall 2010, a maximum of four additional
                                                                 private instruction credits, beyond the amount required
                                                                 within each major, may be applied to the general elective
                                                                 credit requirements. (Professional Music majors may apply
                                                                 up to an additional two private instruction credits.)
                                                             ●   A maximum of eight additional ensemble and/or lab credits
                                                                 beyond the amount required for each major may be
                                                                 applied to the general elective credit requirements.
                                                                 (Professional Music majors may only apply up to an
                                                                 additional six ensemble/lab credits.)




                                               32   Summer/Fall 2012
STUDENT POLICIES AND PROCEDURES




                                                                                                                                               Full and Part-Time Policy/International Students
                                                                                                                                               Student Accountability/Semester Level Calculation/
Student Policies and Procedures                                   programs. Students wishing to register for more than
                                                                  four extra credits who have demonstrated high academic
For further information on policy and procedures,
                                                                  achievement and/or high musical proficiency should seek
please refer to the College Bulletin.
                                                                  approval from the academic advising coordinator in the
                                                                  Counseling and Advising Center.
Student Accountability
●   Students are responsible for keeping their own                Part-time status may be granted under the following
    accurate records of completed courses, grades received,       circumstances:
    and other academic documents. You can check and verify            ●   A student who has completed at least one full-time
    your records anytime on my.berklee.net by using My                    semester at Berklee may study part-time during the
    Transcript and other academic record tools.                           summer semester.
●   The college uses several methods of communicating                 ●   A student who has fewer than 12 credits required
    information to students about events, activities,                     for graduation.
    announcements, and daily updates, including Berklee
    email, the my.berklee.net website, and bulletin board             ●   A student who has fewer than 24 credits required for
    postings. The primary methods of communication are                    graduation including sequential courses that require the
    Berklee email and my.berklee.net. Students are responsible            student to enroll for at least one semester beyond the
    for checking their Berklee email account and my.berklee.net           semester for which part-time status is being requested.
    on a daily basis for information.
                                                                      ●   A student with a documented physical, learning, or
                                                                          psychiatric disability for which the college determines that
Semester Level Calculation                                                part-time enrollment is a reasonable accommodation. In
                                                                          the case of learning disabilities, documentation from at
Your semester level is determined by your program of study                least the high school level must be submitted to the
(Degree or Diploma) and the total number of credits you have              Special Services Counselors in the Counseling and
completed. It is not determined by the number of semesters                Advising Center. The definition of disability is outlined
in which you have been enrolled. Following is a chart of                  in the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990.
semester levels by credits earned.
                                                                      ●   A student whose only registered course for a term is
Semester         Credits earned        Credits earned                     an approved internship.
Level            Diploma               Degree                         ●   A graduate of Berklee returning to take additional
1                   0-11.5              0-14.5
                                                                          coursework.
2                 12-23.5              15-29.5
3                 24-35.5              30-44.5                    All students must be authorized for part-time status.
4                 36-47.5              45-59.5                    You will need to submit a Change of Enrollment Status Form at
5                 48-59.5              60-74.5                    the Counseling and Advising Center for part-time status to be
6                 60-71.5              75-89.5                    official. Part-time status can be authorized any time between
7                 72-83.5             90-104.5                    Registration Advising Week and Monday, June 4, 2012 for
8                      84+                105+                    summer term, and Friday, September 14, 2012 for the fall term.
9 (dual majors) 96-107.5              120-134.5
10 (dual majors)     108+                 135+                    Part-Time Attendance Policy for
                                                                  F-1 Visa Holders
Full and Part-Time Policy
                                                                  The Student and Exchange Visitor Information System (SEVIS)
The college’s primary commitment is to full-time study.           requires schools to electronically report the number of credits
The maximum credit load within full-time tuition for each         F-1 students enroll in each semester. The Department of
program is:                                                       Homeland Security (DHS) regulations require students in F-1
                                                                  non-immigrant status to attend college on a full-time basis
    ●   Degree: 16 credits
                                                                  and define full-time as at least 12 credit hours per semester.
    ●   Diploma: 13 credits                                       Only the following exceptions are allowed:

Exceeding the maximum credit load will result in an extra             ●   During a vacation semester: Students who meet
credit fee. The fee is based on the number of credits over                DHS vacation semester guidelines and the College’s
the maximum ($1,255 per credit).                                          part-time criteria may enroll in less than 12 credits
                                                                          during a DHS-approved vacation semester with
Maximum Extra Credits per Term                                            authorization from the Counseling and Advising
                                                                          Center. To maintain valid nonimmigrant status, students
Students may register for up to four extra credits each term
                                                                          are required to enroll in the semester immediately
and will be charged per credit for each extra credit. Diploma
                                                                          following an annual vacation.
students may register for 17 credits and degree students may
register for 20 credits.                                              ●   To complete course of study in current term:
                                                                          Students may be permitted to enroll in less than 12
First-semester entering students and transfer students                    credit hours during their final semester of study before
generally may not exceed the registration credit limit of their           graduation, if they have fewer than 12 credits and no


                                                                                                                            Summer/Fall 2012              33
                                  STUDENT POLICIES AND PROCEDURES
International Students/
              Jury Duty


                                          prerequisite sequences remaining and will satisfy all          Policy on Jury Duty
                                          graduation requirements during that semester. Failure to
                                          complete the course of study will result in termination of     According to the Office of the Jury Commissioner of the
                                          the SEVIS record, loss of F1 status and loss of F1 benefits.   Commonwealth of Massachusetts, “every U.S. Citizen
                                      ●   Documented Illness or Medical Condition: A student             17 years of age or older who is a Massachusetts resident or
                                          may be allowed to enroll in less than 12 credit hours          an inhabitant for more than 50% of the time is eligible to
                                          if sufficient medical documentation from a U.S. licensed       serve as a juror. If you are a resident of another state but a
                                          medical doctor (defined by DHS as a Doctor of                  student at a Massachusetts college, you are an inhabitant for
                                          Osteopathy, Doctor of Medicine, or a Licensed Clinical         more than 50% of the year and, therefore, eligible to serve
                                          Psychologist) is submitted to the Counseling and Advising      are a juror in Massachusetts.”
                                          Center. This basis for part-time authorization must be
                                          reestablished each semester that part-time is granted.         It is not unusual for students residing in Massachusetts to be
                                          Documentation requirements and more information may            summoned to serve as trial jurors. Jury service, on a short-
                                          be obtained at the Counseling and Advising Center.             term basis, can provide students with a good opportunity
                                                                                                         to fulfill one of their responsibilities as members of the
                                  Students must obtain authorization from the Counseling                 community. Berklee supports students in their fulfillment of
                                  and Advising Center prior to enrolling in less than 12                 this civic duty.
                                  credit hours. If students fall below 12 credits without prior
                                  approval, under SEVIS requirements this is considered a                Students should carefully read all materials they receive with
                                  “reportable event” and the college is required to report it to         their summons to service, as they contain helpful information
                                  the DHS within twenty-one days. If the reason for less than            about confirming, postponing, rescheduling, or relocating
                                  full-time attendance is not among those listed above,                  service, and address many of the most frequently asked
                                  the college is required to report the student’s F-1 status             questions. Jury duty is an important legal obligation, and
                                  to DHS as “terminated”. Authorization for enrollment                   those who fail to respond are subject to criminal prosecution.
                                  in fewer than 12 credits may effect scholarship award;
                                  students must check with the Scholarship Office prior                  Students who must miss class in order to fulfill their jury
                                  to enrolling in fewer than 12 credits.                                 service requirement should notify each of their instructors
                                                                                                         of the summons and make arrangements to complete any
                                  SEVIS reporting requirements necessitate that international            missed work. Students may be required to furnish their
                                  students enroll in at least 12 credits during a non-vacation           summons notice or the certificate of the service when
                                  semester. Students in their first or second semester of                making these arrangements.
                                  undergraduate study in the United States may be permitted
                                  to complete less than 12 credits, if they are having initial           If you have any questions about jury duty, including confirming,
                                  difficulties with the English language or reading requirements,        postponing, rescheduling, or limiting your service, please
                                  or unfamiliarity with American teaching methods. Students              contact the Office of the Jury Commissioner (800 THE-JURY/
                                  must receive a recommendation from their teacher(s) and                800 843-5879). Further information can be found on the
                                  authorization from their International Advisor prior to going          Office of Jury Commissioner’s website at www.massjury.com.
                                  below 12 credits and resume full-time attendance at the next
                                  available semester.

                                  When a student does not have 12 required credits remaining
                                  but cannot complete their program in the current semester due
                                  to prerequisites, he/she will need to enroll in classes not required
                                  for their program in order to maintain F-1 status. Students are
                                  responsible for their academic decisions. Therefore, Berklee
                                  strongly encourages students to plan their coursework with an
                                  academic and international student advisor each semester to
                                  develop an immediate and a long-term study plan that will
                                  maximize their meeting DHS enrollment requirements during
                                  their course of study.

                                  Any international student wanting to enroll in fewer than
                                  12 credits MUST see an international advisor counselor in the
                                  Counseling and Advising Center. Failure to maintain full-time
                                  status has serious implications, such as inability to have an
                                  I-20 signed, loss of work permission, and/or being required
                                  to leave the U.S. It is your responsibility to maintain status.

                                  Students authorized for part-time status by the published
                                  deadline will be charged on a per credit basis.




          34              Summer/Fall 2012
AFTER YOU REGISTER




                                                                                                                                                    Tuition and Fees
                                                                                                                                                    Check-in Summer/Fall 2012/
Check-in                                                               Tuition and Fees
All students are required to check-in online by the end of
Check-in week for each term.                                           Summer 2012 Tuition
                                                                       Tuition: Degree Program                         $15,190
International students in F1 status must clear their immigration
restriction prior to being able to check-in online.                    Tuition: Diploma Program                        $13,082
                                                                       Residence Hall Fee (includes full meal plan)    $7,025
Counseling and Advising Center staff will accept the
Immigration Verification form via fax, email attachment, and           Fall 2012 Tuition
in person from continuing students who have maintained
                                                                       Tuition: Degree Program                         $17,725
their F1 status and have valid immigration documents on
file. The immigration restriction will be removed within               Tuition: Diploma Program                        $15,282
one business day of receipt of the completed Immigration               Residence Hall Fee (includes full meal plan)    $8,475
Verification form.

Entering students, Returning students and students with                Individual Fees
invalid immigration documents on file are required to
                                                                       Comprehensive Fee                               $520
present their immigration documents in person prior to
removal of the immigration restriction.                                Per Credit Charge                               $1,255
                                                                       Extra Private Instruction Charge - 2 credits    $2,510
Check-in involves the following two steps:                             (per semester)
    ●   Settle your bill with the Office of the Bursar.                Extra Private Instruction Charge - 1 credit     $1,255
        Your bill must be paid in full by May 15, 2012 for the         (per semester)
        summer term and August 1, 2012 for the fall term.              Late Check-in Fee (per term)                    $250
        Please note: Payment must actually be received by the          Late Payment Fee (per term)                     $250
        college by these dates. It is advised to pay your bill early   Housing Prepayment                              $300
        enough to account for any delays in mail systems, etc.         Facilities-Only Fee (per term - non-enrolled)   $315
        Students whose payment is not received in full by
                                                                       Make-Up Examinations (mid-term/final)           $15/25
        the due date will be assessed a $250 late fee.
                                                                       Berklee Laptop Purchase (Up to)                 $2,985
    ●   Check-in online between May 22 - 25, 2012 for                  (subject to 6.25% sales tax)
        the summer term, and September 2 - 7, 2012 for
        the fall term.
        Students checking-in online will receive a confirmation
                                                                       Health Insurance
        screen upon successfully finishing the process. We
                                                                       Summer 2012                                     $570
        recommend that you print this screen for your records.
        Once you have checked-in, you will be able to view             Fall 2012                                       TBD
        your schedule (with room numbers) and add and
        drop courses.                                                  (For the Fall 2012 health insurance fee, please check
                                                                       the Schedule of Tuitions and Fees form found at
    ●   Students who are required to check-in with a staff-            www.berklee.edu/tuition beginning July 2012.)
        person should receive an official schedule from them.
        Official schedules have room numbers printed on them.          Please note that all fees are subject to change.


        Please note:
    ●   The schedules of students who fail to check-in
        by the Check-in deadline will be cancelled. The
        seats in those courses will then become available
        to students who have checked-in.
    ●   Students who subsequently check-in late will be
        assessed a $250 late fee. They can attempt to
        rebuild their schedules according to space
        availability in each class.




                                                                                                                                 Summer/Fall 2012        35
                               AFTER YOU REGISTER
Payment Options



                               Payment Options                                                        Wire Transfers
                                                                                                      If the wire is between two U.S. banks, the following
                               Tuition Payment Plan                                                   information will be required to wire monies:
                               The college has an agreement with Tuition Management                   Pay to:   Berklee College of Music
                               Systems (TMS) to provide an installment payment plan for the                     Berklee Account #:00533-37159
                               fall and spring semesters only. To utilize this service, divide your             ABA#: 0260-0959-3
                               semester fees (excluding health insurance, major bundles and                     Bank of America
                               laptop charges) by five and pay this figure monthly beginning                    100 Federal Street
                               on June 1 (for Fall) or November 1 (for Spring). There are no                    Boston, Massachusetts 02110
                               qualifications to use this service; however, you must submit
                               the amount you wish to budget and any back payments to                 If the wire involves an international bank, the following
                               TMS by the semester due date.                                          information will be required to wire monies:
                               The benefits of enrolling in TMS are a one-time only enrollment        Pay to:   Berklee College of Music
                               fee, no interest charges, and no requirement of credit approval.                 Berklee Account #: 00533-37159
                               The college will give you advance credit toward the money                        SWIFT #: BOFAUS3N
                               you have budgeted provided that you are current with your
                               monthly payments. It is your responsibility to budget the              If the transfer is being directed through a correspondent
                               appropriate amount with TMS.                                           bank, the fed wire number is 026009593.

                               Please be advised, this plan requires that monthly payments            Please note: Your bank must also fax a copy of the wire
                               be in a current status. Also, no refunds will be issued until          transfer to Berklee. Make sure that your name and student
                               the full amount budgeted is received by TMS.                           number appears on the wire. The Bursar’s fax number is
                                                                                                      617 747-8004. Funds should be sent 10 days prior to the
                               For specific deadlines and more information regarding TMS,             payment due date to avoid payment late fees.
                               please contact TMS at 888 216-4258, tmsservice@afford.com
                               or afford.com.                                                         Bursar’s mailing address and phone number:
                                                                                                                Berklee College of Music
                               Berklee reserves the right to revoke this option from any                        Office of the Bursar
                               student if delinquency becomes an issue.                                         MS 921-BUR
                                                                                                                1140 Boylston Street
                                                                                                                Boston, MA 02215-3693
                               Credit Card Payments                                                             617 747-2610 or 617 747-2165
                               Berklee has contracted with Official Payments Corp. (OPC)
                               to process MasterCard, Discover, and American Express credit           Returned Checks
                               card payments online, or by calling 866 661-9951. Visa cards           Please be advised that if you choose to pay your fees with a
                               will not be accepted. OPC will charge a convenience fee of             personal check and this check is returned, Berklee will charge
                               2.5% of the payment amount for this service. Two line                  you a $50 processing fee. Notice of the returned check will
                               items will appear on your credit card statement. Your                  be sent to the student. If the return payment creates a debit
                               tuition payment will appear as “Berklee College of Music”              balance on the account, a hold will be placed on the account,
                               and the convenience fee will appear as “Tuition Convenience            which blocks academic schedule changes, access to grades
                               Fee”. Online payments can be made at my.berklee.net.                   and transcripts, and future registrations until complete
                                                                                                      restitution of funds is made. The college reserves the right
                               Students can still pay Berklee tuition and fees with no                to demand future payments in the form of a certified check,
                               additional fee by using the following payment methods:                 money order, cash, or credit card at this point, and you
                                   ●   Online by E-Payment from a U.S. based checking                 will no longer be able to use personal checks as a form of
                                       or savings account.                                            payment. Berklee will not redeposit personal checks that have
                                   ●   Mailing a check or money order to:                             been returned and requires that these checks be replaced
                                                                                                      within five business days.
                                           Berklee College of Music
                                           Office of the Bursar
                                           MS 921-BUR                                                 Collection Policy
                                           1140 Boylston Street                                       Students are required or agree upon registration to pay tuition
                                           Boston, MA 02215-3693                                      and fees at the beginning of any given semester. If a student
                                   ●   In person by check, cash or money order at:                    adds additional courses or ensembles during the add/drop
                                           Office of the Bursar                                       period, they must pay the additional fee(s) at the time of
                                           Uchida Building, Suite 240                                 enrollment. The student will be notified via the student mailbox
                                                                                                      and the home mailing address of any unpaid balance that
                                                                                                      appears on the account. The student has approximately 14
                               Alternative Payment: If you do not have access to                      business days to pay the balance due in full. If payment is not
                               my.berklee.net and want to make a payment on a students‘               received after receipt of the bill or payment arrangements are
                               account, you can go to berklee.edu/altpay                              not made with the Office of the Bursar, the account will be
                                                                                                      subject to collection procedures.


                  36   Summer/Fall 2012
AFTER YOU REGISTER




                                                                                                                                               Health Insurance
                                                                                                                                               Financial Aid/
The College will make every internal effort to collect                with a financial aid counselor from 9-5, Monday-Friday. The
outstanding balances before placement with external                   Financial Aid Office can be reached at 617-747-2274 or at
collection agencies utilized by the College. Once placed with         financialaid@berklee.edu
an external agency, the account will be subject to a collection
cost at the industry standard rate. This cost is solely the
responsibility of the student. Restrictions will be placed on
                                                                      Student Health Insurance
any account with a balance due. The restriction will prohibit
                                                                      Massachusetts state law (QSHIP) requires that students enrolled
access to grades, transcripts, degrees, diplomas, and
                                                                      in colleges located within the state must have health insurance
participation in any future term at the College. The restriction
                                                                      at or above the QSHIP level. Colleges may only enroll students
will remain in force until the account is paid in full.
                                                                      who are either enrolled in a college sponsored health insurance
                                                                      program, or who are able to verify (through a waiver process)
In the rare event that an account must be pursued in a court
                                                                      that they are enrolled in an alternative health insurance
of law, Berklee College of Music reserves the right to legally
                                                                      program that meets or exceeds the minimum QSHIP benefit
pursue that account. All associated costs, including
                                                                      requirements. Berklee has arranged for a health insurance
reasonable attorney fees, are also the responsibility of
                                                                      policy (Blue Cross Shield of Massachusetts) through the
the student.
                                                                      Gallagher Koster Insurance Agency.
Statements
                                                                      Health Insurance Information for Summer
All hard copy statements are mailed 30 days prior to any
given semester to the address on file in the Office of the            2012 Students (Who Were Not Enrolled
Registrar. The same information is available approximately            Fall 2011 or Spring 2012)
30 days prior on my.berklee.net. In the event you do not
                                                                      What if I already have insurance and wish to waive the
receive a hard copy statement in the mail, please access
                                                                      health insurance fee for Summer 2012?
my.berklee.net to obtain billing information.
                                                                      Submit an online waiver no later than May 15, 2012 by
All payments that are received after the published                    logging into my.berklee.net, selecting the Student Services
deadline for any given semester will be subject to a                  tab, and clicking on Waive My Health Insurance. You can
$250 late payment fee.                                                also submit a waiver form at the Office of the Bursar (Suite
                                                                      240, Uchida). Waiver forms can be downloaded online at
                                                                      www.berklee.edu/forms in the Health Related section of
Financial Aid                                                         the page.

There are many Berklee policies that may impact your eligibility      What if I pay for the insurance in May but leave
for financial aid. All aid applicants should familiarize themselves   Berklee before my coverage runs out?
with the following guidelines:                                        If you enrolled in the Gallagher Koster insurance program at
    ●   All financial aid awards are based on full-time               any time during the Fall 2011 – Summer 2012 academic year,
        enrollment (12 credits). If you are enrolled for fewer        you are insured through August 14, 2012. This is true whether
        than twelve credits, your aid may be reduced or               you are enrolled at Berklee, have since graduated, or left the
        canceled at the end of the Add/Drop period.                   college. This coverage extends outside of the United States.

    ●   Financial aid applicants must continue to make
                                                                      Health Insurance Information for Fall 2012
        Satisfactory Academic Progress (SAP). Students must
        maintain a minimum 2.0 GPA and must complete the              Students
        required number of credits each semester for their            What if I already have insurance and wish to waive the
        academic program.                                             health insurance fee for Fall 2012?
    ●   Pending aid cannot be credited to a student’s account.        Submit an online waiver no later than August 1, 2012 by
        You may check the status of your aid online at                logging into my.berklee.net, selecting the Student Services
        my.berklee.net by clicking on Student Services > My           tab, and clicking on Waive My Health Insurance. You can
        Finances > My Aid. If you have pending awards, you            also submit a waiver form at the Office of the Bursar (Suite
        should check Student Services > My Finances > My              240, Uchida). Waiver forms can be downloaded online at
        Documents to verify that we are not requesting any            www.berklee.edu/forms in the Health Related section of
        information from you. Most items that we request may          the page.
        be downloaded from berklee.edu/forms.
                                                                      What if I pay for the insurance in September but leave
    ●   Federal regulations require that students complete an exit    Berklee before my coverage runs out?
        interview session if you graduate, enroll for less than six
                                                                      If you enrolled in the Gallagher Koster insurance program at
        credits, withdraw from the college during the semester,
                                                                      any time during the Fall 2012 – Summer 2013 academic year,
        or do not return to the college. For loan repayment
                                                                      you are insured through August 14, 2013. This is true whether
        information, contact the Office of Financial Aid.
                                                                      you are enrolled at Berklee, have since graduated, or left the
For more details regarding how your enrollment affects your           college. This coverage extends outside of the United States.
financial aid eligibility, Satisfactory Academic Progress, student
loan requirements and other policies, please visit us on the
web at www.berklee.edu/financial-aid or walk in and meet

                                                                                                                            Summer/Fall 2012      37
                                AFTER YOU REGISTER
Health Insurance



                                What if I waived the health insurance plan but my
                                alternative insurance plan unexpectedly terminates
                                before August 14, 2013?
                                If you have waived the student health insurance plan for the
                                academic year but your alternate insurance plan unexpectedly
                                terminates before August 14, 2013, you may late enroll for
                                Berklee’s plan as follows:

                                Petition to Add Process
                                Students who initially waived the student insurance plan can
                                only petition to add coverage if they experience a qualifying
                                event. Examples of qualifying events include students who
                                lose coverage because they reach the maximum age under
                                their private insurance plan or who lose coverage due to a
                                parent/guardian’s loss or change of employment. A qualifying
                                event does not include a student who is seeking enrollment
                                to gain access to a benefit that was exhausted under their
                                current private insurance plan.

                                Students must submit a Petition to Add form within 31 days
                                of the qualifying event in order for the effective date of
                                coverage to be the day of the qualifying event. If the Petition
                                to Add form is received after 31 days of the qualifying event,
                                the effective date of coverage will be the date the petition
                                is received at Gallagher Koster. You can download a Petition
                                to Add form at www.gallagherkoster.com. In addition to the
                                Petition to Add Form, a letter from the previous insurance
                                company MUST be provided stating the reason for the
                                student’s ineligibility and the date the student became ineligible.

                                In accordance to the recently revised Massachusetts Student
                                Health Programs Mandate (114.6 CMR 3.00), Gallagher
                                Koster will be pro-rating the premium for all approved
                                Petition to Add requests.

                                If Gallagher Koster approves your petition to add health
                                insurance late, you must pay the health insurance fee to
                                the Bursar’s Office. You will not be officially insured until
                                Gallagher Koster approves your petition, determines the
                                (pro-rated) cost of the insurance to Berklee, and that amount
                                is paid in full to Berklee.

                                What if I have questions regarding what is covered
                                under the college sponsored insurance plan?
                                Please visit Berklee’s health insurance websites at either
                                my.berklee.net (select the Student Services tab, then the Student
                                Health Insurance subtab) or www.berklee.edu/insurance.

                                If you have further questions about what’s covered, how to
                                access benefits, enrollment concerns, or replacement ID cards,
                                visit www.gallagherkoster.com. There you can select from
                                links under Your Student Health Insurance Plan or login
                                to access the My Account section to view personal and
                                dependent coverage information. You can also call Gallagher
                                Koster at 617 769-6008 or 800 391-8057, or email them at
                                BerkleeStudent@gallagherkoster.com.




                   38   Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                  Arranging
Arranging                                                           AR-203
                                                                              Music Preparation 1
                                                                              2 credits
AR-111
                                                                              Course Chair: Ken Pullig
           Arranging 1                                                        Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           2 credits                                                          Required of: None
           Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl                                      Electable by: All
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                      Prerequisites: AR-111
           Required of: All
           Electable by: All                                        Skills, tools, and techniques used in handwritten notation,
           Prerequisites: PW-111, or PW-110 and HR-111,             including score layout and part design and layout as used in
             or satisfactory placement score                        the professional music environment. Special problems,
                                                                    including divisi parts, vocal parts, multistave parts, master
A study of the musical concepts of melody, rhythm, harmony,         rhythm parts, and copying from a sketch. Use of a calligraphy
and form as applied to the principles and techniques of writing     pen and other specialized equipment and supplies used by
and arranging for the rhythm section (drums, bass, guitar,          professional music copyists.
keyboards, basic percussion) and a lead-line for a solo
instrument, two horns (trumpet plus alto or tenor saxophone),       AR-228
or voice. Focus on the conceptual process of combining
                                                                              Survey of Jazz Composition and Arranging
individual components to create a musically satisfying
                                                                              2 credits
arrangement. Exploration of the use and integration of MIDI
                                                                              Course Chair: Ken Pullig
technology and sequencing as they relate to rhythm section
                                                                              Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
and lead-line writing. Study of various contemporary musical
                                                                              Required of: JCMP majors
styles and musical concepts that comprise them, including
                                                                              Electable by: All
writing from the “bottom up” (groove-driven) and “top
                                                                              Prerequisites: None
down” (working with a melody in a lead instrument or voice).
Writing assignments will incorporate combinations of                A comprehensive study of the evolution of jazz arranging and
acoustic, electronic, and MIDI instruments.                         composition from the 1920s to the present. Score analysis of
                                                                    representative works by Fletcher Henderson, Duke Ellington,
AR-112                                                              Gil Evans, Thad Jones, and others. Extensive listening. Written
           Arranging 2                                              arrangements not required.
           2 credits
           Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl                            AR-313
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                      Scoring for Instrumental Ensembles in the
           Required of: CWPR and JCMP majors                                  Secondary School
           Electable by: All                                                  2 credits
           Prerequisites: AR-111 and HR-112                                   Course Chair: Cecil Adderley
                                                                              Offered: Fall semester in odd-numbered years
Study of the properties of the trumpet, alto saxophone, tenor
                                                                              Required of: None
saxophone, trombone, and baritone saxophone, and the
                                                                              Electable by: All
writing/arranging processes of standard and spread voicings,
                                                                              Prerequisites: CM-212 or both CM-252 and CP-212
approach techniques, melodic embellishment, and guide tone
backgrounds. Focus is on applying the writing processes to          Orchestration for wind, string, and percussion groups as used
soli and background writing for two-, three-, four-, and five-      at the secondary school level. Principles of score
part combinations of these instruments. It is recommended           layout/arranging for concert band and high school orchestra.
that CW-171 be taken by CWPR majors prior to enrolling in
AR-112.
                                                                    AR-314
                                                                              Arranging for Secondary Vocal Ensemble
AR-201                                                                        2 credits
           Chord Scale Voicings for Arranging                                 Course Chair: Cecil Adderley
           2 credits                                                          Offered: Spring semester in odd-numbered years
           Course Chair: Ken Pullig                                           Required of: None
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                      Electable by: All
           Required of: JCMP majors                                           Prerequisites: CM-212 or CM-252
           Electable by: All
           Prerequisites: AR-112 and HR-211                         Arranging for high school vocal groups. Principles of part-
                                                                    writing for various combinations of voices. Writing piano
Five- and six-part writing for instruments. Application of          accompaniments. End-of-semester arranging project required.
voicings in seconds, thirds, and fourths. Upper-structure triads,
clusters, and other nonmechanical voicings derived from chord
scales. Extensive score analysis.




                                                                                                                          Summer/Fall 2012   39
                      COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
 Arranging/
Composition


                      AR-316                                                             AR-340
                                 Arranging for High School Jazz Ensemble                           Jazz Arranging for Small Ensemble
                                 2 credits                                                         2 credits
                                 Course Chair: Cecil Adderley                                      Course Chair: Ken Pullig
                                 Offered: Spring semester in even-numbered years                   Offered: Fall, Spring
                                 Required of: None                                                 Required of: None
                                 Electable by: All                                                 Electable by: All
                                 Prerequisites: AR-112                                             Prerequisites: AR-201

                      Principles of writing for high school jazz ensembles with          Jazz arranging techniques for the rhythm section and various
                      standard and mixed instrumentation. Range problems, rhythm         small-group instrumental combinations of up to three horns
                      section parts, special considerations for high school musicians.   (melodic voices). Emphasis on developing complete rhythm
                      Examination of published scores.                                   section sound (with or without winds) and advanced voicing
                                                                                         techniques (including interval-based voicings, linear approach
                      AR-321                                                             techniques, and constant structure).
                                 Contemporary Arranging and Composition
                                 2 credits                                               AR-407
                                 Course Chair: Ken Pullig                                          Advanced Jazz Arranging for Large Ensemble
                                 Offered: Spring                                                   2 credits
                                 Required of: None                                                 Course Chair: Ken Pullig
                                 Electable by: All                                                 Offered: Fall, Spring
                                 Prerequisites: CM-371                                             Required of: None
                                                                                                   Electable by: All
                      Development of individual writing creativity. Emphasis on the                Prerequisites: Written approval of course chair
                      building of confidence in writing clear, memorable lead lines
                      based on standard song forms. Discussions on the relationship      Extended applications of standard big band scoring
                      of speech patterns to melody. Individual conferences with the      techniques. Analysis of devices found in the compositions of
                      instructor when necessary. Written projects required.              major jazz writers.

                      AR-328
                                 Arranging for Contemporary Jazz Ensemble                Composition
                                 2 credits
                                 Course Chair: Ken Pullig                                CM-211
                                 Offered: Fall                                                     Tonal Harmony and Composition 1
                                 Required of: None                                                 2 credits
                                 Electable by: All                                                 Course Chair: Greg Fritze
                                 Prerequisites: AR-201 and HR-212                                  Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                                                                                   Required of: Degree – all except MUED majors;
                      The arranging of original tunes combining both traditional                     Diploma – COMP and FILM majors
                      jazz techniques and contemporary compositional concepts.                     Electable by: All
                      Analysis of taped examples.                                                  Prerequisites: PW-111, or (HR-111 and either
                                                                                                     AR-111 or PW-110)
                      AR-331
                                 Big Band Arranging and Score Analysis                   Functional tonal harmony analyzed and composed in various
                                 2 credits                                               musical textures. Emphasis on voice leading, melodic writing,
                                 Course Chair: Ken Pullig                                and figured bass.
                                 Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                 Required of: JCMP majors                                CM-212
                                 Electable by: All                                                 Tonal Harmony and Composition 2
                                 Prerequisites: AR-201, AR-228, and HR-212                         2 credits
                                                                                                   Course Chair: Greg Fritze
                      Methodology of big band arranging. Analysis of scores by                     Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                      classic and contemporary big band arrangers. Library                         Required of: Degree – all except MUED majors;
                      assignments and class discussion. Written arrangements and                     Diploma – COMP and FILM majors
                      score analysis projects required.                                            Electable by: All
                                                                                                   Prerequisites: CM-211

                                                                                         Continuation of CM-211. Advanced tonal harmony and
                                                                                         intermediate compositional procedures. Emphasis on
                                                                                         harmonies with sevenths, other upper extensions, chromatic
                                                                                         alterations as well as modulation.




     40       Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                  Composition
CM-221                                                             CM-231
          Techniques of Tonal Writing                                        Instrumentation and Score Preparation
          2 credits                                                          2 credits
          Course Chair: Greg Fritze                                          Course Chair: Greg Fritze
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                      Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
          Required of: FILM majors                                           Required of: COMP and FILM majors
          Electable by: All                                                  Electable by: All
          Prerequisites: CM-212, and CP-210 or CP-212                        Prerequisites: CM-212

Specific techniques of traditional tonal composition. Conclusive   The technical aspects involved in creating finished, professional
and nonconclusive phrases; antecedent-consequent phrase            scores. Score layout; instrumental/vocal ranges and
relationships; open-ended phrase relationships; sequencing;        performance characteristics; special playing techniques and
modulation; large-scale tonal relationships; thematic variation    limitations; breath and bowing considerations; choice of key,
and development. Application of these techniques in writing,       meter, beat, and subdivision values; use of slurs, articulation
using models from the classical period.                            marks, dynamics, tempo variation, and other devices for
                                                                   indicating expressive nuance; proper underlaying of vocal
CM-P225                                                            text; calligraphy; creating a practical piano reduction; and
          Guitar Composition Techniques for                        extracting parts.
          Performers/Composers
          2 credits                                                CM-251
          Course Chair: Greg Fritze                                          Traditional Materials and Structure of Music 1
          Offered: Fall, Spring                                              2 credits
          Required of: None                                                  Course Chair: Greg Fritze
          Electable by: All                                                  Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
          Prerequisites: CM-211                                              Required of: MUED majors
                                                                             Electable by: MUED majors
Intermediate and advanced approach to guitar composition                     Prerequisites: PW-111, or HR-111 and either
techniques. The course is designed for performers/composers                    AR-111 or PW-110
and provides a comprehensive demonstration of the
capabilities of the instrument and the most successful ways to     Diatonic harmonic analysis in various musical textures. Melody
compose for it through analysis, live performances,                writing. Harmonization of melodies in various musical textures.
improvisation, and mostly elementary and advanced
compositional techniques. Also covers performance                  CM-252
techniques, extended compositional approaches (guitar and                    Traditional Materials and Structure of Music 2
other instruments), resources and technologies of basic                      2 credits
composition techniques, and mainly guitar music of the 20th                  Course Chair: Greg Fritze
century and beyond.                                                          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                                                             Required of: MUED majors
CM-227                                                                       Electable by: MUED majors
          The Russian Art of Modulation                                      Prerequisites: CM-251 and either CP-210 or CP-211
          2 credits
          Course Chair: Greg Fritze                                Continuation of CM-251. Advanced traditional harmony and
          Offered: Fall                                            intermediate compositional procedures. Seventh chords,
          Required of: None                                        altered chords, modulation.
          Electable by: All
          Prerequisites: CM-212, and CP-210 or CP-212              CM-311
                                                                             Contemporary Techniques in Composition 1
During this course the students will explore and master the                  2 credits
technique of modulation to the keys both closely related and                 Course Chair: Greg Fritze
distant. Using the concepts of “three degrees of kinship                     Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
between keys” and the major-minor (minor-major) systems,                     Required of: COMP and FILM majors
the students will acquire the skill of gradual modulation as                 Electable by: All
well as sudden modulation, as it was taught in Russia. This                  Prerequisites: CM-397 or CM-221 and either
practical/theoretical approach will both contrast and                          COND-211, COND-216, or COND-221
complement current methods of handling this more advanced
area of harmony, and will thus bring about for the student         Specific techniques of traditional 20th-century composition.
additional practical applications of these concepts.               Technical devices such as quartal harmony, serial writing,
                                                                   polytonality, and contrapuntal techniques. Assignments are
                                                                   directly related to each of these aspects of composition and
                                                                   are performed in class.




                                                                                                                          Summer/Fall 2012   41
                           COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Composition



                           CM-312                                                             a variety of idiomatic 20th-century world music and popular
                                      Contemporary Techniques in Composition 2                music techniques. The course does not follow a particular
                                      2 credits                                               methodology, but rather encourages the student to find
                                      Course Chair: Greg Fritze                               his/her own voice within the genre. The class begins with a
                                      Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                           historical survey of the jazz fusion idiom starting with Miles
                                      Required of: COMP majors                                Davis’s landmark Bitches Brew recording and continues with
                                      Electable by: All                                       the music of the alumni of Davis’ influential bands, up to
                                      Prerequisites: CM-311 and COND-211 or                   today. As students apply techniques and ideas learned, they
                                        COND-216                                              will gain perspective as to how jazz fusion is part of music as
                                                                                              a whole and examine some of the underlying principles that
                           The continuation of CM-311 with concentration on the               make for good composition. A special section of the course
                           employment of serial approaches to composition. Various            will be dedicated to introducing students to some
                           composition assignments and a final project are required.          fundamentals of Indian ragas (scales) and to Konnikol (Indian
                                                                                              rhythmic solfege) and their application to contemporary jazz-
                           CM-318                                                             fusion composition. Groups such as Shakti, Miles From India,
                                      New Music Composition and                               Trilok Gurtu, The Marc Rossi Group, and others have brought
                                      Performance Workshop                                    this information to the forefront, and it is helping to redefine
                                      2 credits                                               jazz fusion.
                                      Course Chair: Greg Fritze
                                      Offered: Spring                                         CM-346
                                      Required of: None                                                  Indian Music Styles and Techniques for Jazz
                                      Electable by: All                                                  and Contemporary Composition
                                      Prerequisites: ET-111 and either HR-111                            2 credits
                                        or PW-111                                                        Course Chair: Greg Fritze
                                                                                                         Offered: Fall
                           The workshop provides opportunities for student composers to                  Required of: None
                           hear performances of their own work, and for student                          Electable by: All
                           performers to gain public performing experience of original                   Prerequisites: HR-212
                           student works and works written within the last 60 years.
                           Important works of the 20th century are explored. It is            The class will expose students to and survey the two main
                           advisable, but not required, for students to have taken            Indian classical music systems: Hindustani (North Indian) and
                           LHAN-261 prior to enrolling in this course. This course can be     Carnatic (South Indian) along with Konnikol (South Indian
                           repeated for credit.                                               rhythmic solfege). Selected Indian film music will also be
                                                                                              examined. Students will compose, arrange, and create
                           CM-P341                                                            improvisational models using specific Indian music ideas and
                                      Digital Score Preparation for Composers                 techniques as a source.
                                      2 credits
                                      Course Chair: Greg Fritze                               CM-351
                                      Offered: Fall, Spring                                              Choral Composition
                                      Required of: None                                                  2 credits
                                      Electable by: All                                                  Course Chair: Greg Fritze
                                      Prerequisites: MTEC-111                                            Offered: Fall, Spring
                                                                                                         Required of: None
                           The course will focus on the acquisition of skills with                       Electable by: All
                           technological tools for the creation of professional composition              Prerequisites: CM-212
                           portfolios. Production of publication-ready scores and parts
                           using Finale® notation software will be emphasized, including      Traditional scoring techniques for full chorus with and without
                           nonstandard notation. Basic audio editing will also be             instrumental accompaniment. A choral composition in a
                           presented to create demonstration recordings.                      traditional style is required as a final project.

                           CM-345                                                             CM-P353
                                      Jazz Fusion Composition and Arranging for                          Introduction to Contemporary Composition
                                      Small Ensemble                                                     2 credits
                                      2 credits                                                          Course Chair: Greg Fritze
                                      Course Chair: Ken Pullig                                           Offered: Spring
                                      Offered: Fall, Spring                                              Required of: None
                                      Required of: None                                                  Electable by: All
                                      Electable by: All                                                  Prerequisites: CM-212, and CP-210 or CP-212
                                      Prerequisites: HR-212
                                                                                              Introduction to compositional concepts from the late
                           Through the study of major artists and recordings, the student     20th century with emphasis on students writing
                           will identify the compositional and instrumental practices of      original compositions.
                           the jazz fusion idiom and apply those to writing assignments
                           and projects. Jazz fusion is looked at broadly and may include

              42   Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                   Composition
CM-355                                                              CM-371
          Principles and Techniques of Writing                                Jazz Composition 1
          for the Voice                                                       2 credits
          2 credits                                                           Course Chair: Ken Pullig
          Course Chair: Greg Fritze                                           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                       Required of: JCMP majors
          Required of: None                                                   Electable by: All
          Electable by: All                                                   Prerequisites: AR-201
          Prerequisites: CM-212, and CP-210 or CP-212
                                                                    A systematic approach to the art of composing in the jazz
Examination of representative solo vocal works from the 19th        idiom. Exploration of melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic
and 20th centuries (including works requiring nontraditional        principles. Standard jazz song form. Analysis of jazz standards.
vocal techniques), with emphasis on dramatic organization,          Arranging considerations applied as a means of enhancing a
relationship of music to text, and appropriateness to the           composition. Projects for small jazz group required.
capacity of the trained singing voice. Special attention given to
principles of vocal technique and speech articulation as they       CM-373
apply to composition, principles of vocal notation, and                       Jazz Composition 2
considerations of opera and musical theater. Students will be                 2 credits
expected to write specified vocal passages based on assigned                  Course Chair: Ken Pullig
texts as well as participate in some improvisation and dramatic               Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
reading of texts in class.                                                    Required of: JCMP majors
                                                                              Electable by: All
CM-357                                                                        Prerequisites: CM-371
          Introduction to Electroacoustic Music
          for Composers                                             Composition of non-song-form jazz pieces based on motivic
          2 credits                                                 development. Discussion of form and content as it applies to
          Course Chair: Greg Fritze                                 episodic composition in jazz. Examination of representative
          Offered: Spring                                           works by various jazz composers. Various assignments and
          Required of: None                                         the composition of an episodic five-minute piece are required.
          Electable by: All
          Prerequisites: None                                       CM-375
                                                                              Jazz Composition 3
Introduction to Electroacoustic Music for Composers is a                      2 credits
survey course in electronic and computer music composition.                   Course Chair: Ken Pullig
Designed especially for students on Berklee composition                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
tracks, the course is suitable for any student wishing to gain a              Required of: JCMP majors
comprehensive overview of the history and techniques of                       Electable by: All
electronic music while learning to compose works at the                       Prerequisites: AR-331 and CM-373
computer for electronics alone or in combination with live
instruments.                                                        Composition of multisection extended jazz compositions.
                                                                    Discussion of form and orchestration as it applies to extended
CM-361                                                              composition in jazz. Examination of representative works by
          World Music Resources in Composition                      various jazz composers. Composition of a short chamber
          2 credits                                                 piece without rhythm section and a large-scale ten-minute
          Course Chair: Greg Fritze                                 piece are required.
          Offered: Fall, Spring
          Required of: None                                         CM-385
          Electable by: All                                                   Post Bebop Harmonic Innovations
          Prerequisites: AR-111, HR-211, and one of the                       2 credits
            following: CM-311, ILPH-351, ILPH-357,                            Course Chair: Ken Pullig
            LHAN-345, LHAN-346, or PSW-351                                    Offered: Fall, Spring
                                                                              Required of: None
Approaches to composition using ideas and aesthetic                           Electable by: All
principles from a variety of non-Western musical traditions.                  Prerequisites: HR-325
Explorations of diverse concepts of rhythm, melody, timbre,
and form as heard in the music of Africa, Asia, India, and          Survey and analysis of music growing out of the bebop jazz
South America. Assignments will include a substantial               era. Extensive study of John Coltrane, Miles Davis, Wayne
composition illustrating these principles.                          Shorter, and Thelonious Monk. Discussion of blues forms and
                                                                    modal harmony used in the 1960s. Application of concepts
                                                                    through composition of original music.




                                                                                                                           Summer/Fall 2012   43
                           COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Composition



                           CM-397                                                              CM-495
                                      Directed Study in Small Forms 1                                    Composition Internship
                                      2 credits                                                          2 credits
                                      Course Chair: Greg Fritze                                          Course Chair: Greg Fritze
                                      Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                      Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                      Required of: COMP majors                                           Required of: None
                                      Electable by: All                                                  Electable by: COMP majors
                                      Prerequisites: CM-212                                              Prerequisites: Sixth-semester standing and written
                                                                                                           approval of course chair
                           Students will take a half-hour private lesson with a
                           composition teacher each week. The teacher will work with           Monitored and evaluated professional work experience in an
                           the students on the basics of composition, including conclusive     environment related to the composition major. Placement is
                           and nonconclusive phrases; antecedent-consequent phrase             limited to situations available from or approved by the Office
                           relationships; open-ended phrase relationships; sequencing;         of Experiential Learning and the Composition Department
                           modulation; large-scale tonal relationships; and thematic           chair or designee. To apply for an internship, students must
                           variation and development. Application of these techniques          see the internship coordinator in the Office of Experiential
                           will be the basis in writing compositions, using models from        Learning prior to registering. Note: Equivalent credit for prior
                           the classical period. These basic compositional techniques may      experience is not available due to the requirement of
                           be expanded to include more advanced concepts, as                   concurrent contract between the employer/supervisor and the
                           determined by the composition professor according to the            college. International students in F-1 status must obtain
                           student’s composition background. In addition to the weekly         authorization on their Form I-20 from the Counseling and
                           half-hour private lesson, the student will attend a                 Advising Center prior to beginning an internship.
                           composition seminar (1.5 hours) along with all of the Directed
                           Study students.                                                     CM-497
                                                                                                         Directed Study in Sonata Composition
                           CM-398                                                                        2 credits
                                      Directed Study in Small Forms 2                                    Course Chair: Greg Fritze
                                      2 credits                                                          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                      Course Chair: Greg Fritze                                          Required of: COMP majors
                                      Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                      Electable by: All
                                      Required of: COMP majors                                           Prerequisites: CM-312 and CM-398
                                      Electable by: COMP majors
                                      Prerequisites: CM-311                                    Sonata form. The composition of an extended
                                                                                               three-movement sonata for piano or for solo instrument
                           Individualized instruction in composing small forms (i.e., short    and piano.
                           instrumental pieces, themes and variations, art songs, single
                           movements of larger works, etc.). Emphasis on developing            CM-498
                           stylistic diversity and gaining experience in writing for various             Directed Study in Orchestral Composition
                           musical textures and ensemble combinations.                                   2 credits
                                                                                                         Course Chair: Greg Fritze
                           CM-434                                                                        Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                      Serial Techniques as Applied to                                    Required of: COMP majors
                                      Jazz Composition                                                   Electable by: All
                                      2 credits                                                          Prerequisites: CM-497
                                      Course Chair: Ken Pullig
                                      Offered: Spring                                          The composition of an extended work for full contemporary
                                      Required of: None                                        orchestra. Intended to demonstrate the ability to handle large
                                      Electable by: All                                        orchestral groups in a characteristic and coherent manner.
                                      Prerequisites: AR-201 and written approval of
                                        course chair                                           CM-499
                                                                                                         Directed Study in Jazz Composition
                           Utilization of 12-tone methodology in creating a                              2 credits
                           one-movement concert jazz piece.                                              Course Chair: Ken Pullig
                                                                                                         Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                           CM-441                                                                        Required of: JCMP majors
                                      Scoring for Full Orchestra                                         Electable by: JCMP majors
                                      2 credits                                                          Prerequisites: CM-375
                                      Course Chair: Greg Fritze
                                      Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                            Individualized instruction designed to guide students
                                      Required of: COMP majors                                 majoring in jazz composition in the preparation of their
                                      Electable by: All                                        graduation projects.
                                      Prerequisites: CM-231

                           Orchestration techniques for full symphony orchestra.

              44   Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                  Conducting
Conducting                                                        COND-217
                                                                             Conducting 2 with Live Keyboards
COND-211                                                                     1 credit
          Conducting 1                                                       Course Chair: Greg Fritze
          1 credit                                                           Offered: Fall, Spring
          Course Chair: Greg Fritze                                          Required of: None
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                      Electable by: All
          Required of: Degree – all except MUED majors;                      Prerequisites: COND-211 or COND-216
            Diploma – CWPR, COMP, FILM, and JCMP majors
                                                                  A conducting class class where students conduct other
          Electable by: All
                                                                  students playing MIDI keyboards that create the sounds of the
          Prerequisites: ET-211 or ET-231
                                                                  instruments of an orchestral ensemble. Each student learns all
Techniques of conducting vocal and instrumental music.            aspects of score preparation and rehearsal techniques. All
Fundamental beat patterns. Discussion and study of                sessions are recorded for home study.
terminology, problems of tempo, phrasing, and articulation.
                                                                  COND-221
COND-212                                                                     Choral Conducting Majors
          Conducting 2                                                       2 credits
          1 credit                                                           Course Chair: Cecil Adderley
          Course Chair: Greg Fritze                                          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                      Required of: MUED majors; MTHE majors not
          Required of: Degree – all except MUED majors;                        taking COND-222
            Diploma – CWPR, COMP, FILM, and JCMP majors                      Electable by: MUED and MTHE majors
          Electable by: All                                                  Prerequisites: None
          Prerequisites: COND-211 or COND-216
                                                                  Fundamental beat patterns, basic conducting technique,
The course assumes basic beat pattern knowledge and covers        phrasing and articulation, problems of tempo. Discussion and
three areas: (1) symphonic conducting with an instrumental        study of terminology. Lab sessions for choral application of
soloist (concerto), (2) symphonic conducting with a vocal         classroom skills. Geared to the needs of public school music
soloist (operatic aria), and (3) symphonic conducting of a        educators. Emphasis on secondary school repertoire.
major modern work involving complete meter changes.
Works used include a romantic piano or violin concerto, an        COND-222
operatic excerpt, and a piece such as Petrouchka, The Rite of                Instrumental Conducting for Music
Spring, or Symphonies of Wind Instruments.                                   Education Majors
                                                                             2 credits
COND-216                                                                     Course Chair: Cecil Adderley
          Conducting 1 with Live Keyboard Ensemble                           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
          1 credit                                                           Required of: MUED majors; MTHE majors not
          Course Chair: Greg Fritze                                            taking COND-221
          Offered: Fall, Spring                                              Electable by: MUED and MTHE majors
          Required of: None                                                  Prerequisites: COND-321 or written approval of
          Electable by: All                                                    course chair
          Prerequisites: ET-211 or ET-231
                                                                  Fundamental beat patterns, basic conducting technique,
This course emphasizes in-depth score study and elements          phrasing and articulation, problems of tempo. Discussion and
involved with the formulation of musical ideas, the role of the   study of score analysis. Lab sessions for instrumental
conductor, and the proper kind of relationship between the        application of classroom skills. Geared to the needs of public
conductor and the orchestra. Students gain valuable               school music educators. NOTE: Performance on secondary
experience rehearsing and conducting an ensemble. The             instrument(s) is required.
course utilizes eight keyboards, allowing the formation of an
in-class live keyboard ensemble creating a virtual orchestral     COND-311
sound. Each of eight performers play their own individual lines              Advanced Conducting Seminar With
from the score while one person conducts and rehearses the                   Live Orchestra
ensemble. Each conductor will be videotaped while in front of                2 credits
the ensemble for further study.                                              Course Chair: Greg Fritze
                                                                             Offered: Fall, Spring
                                                                             Required of: None
                                                                             Electable by: All
                                                                             Prerequisites: Written approval of instructor and
                                                                               course chair and either COND-351 or COND-498

                                                                  This course is designed for the student who wishes to further
                                                                  abilities in conducting. Emphasis is on rehearsal techniques and
                                                                  interpretation while working with a live orchestral ensemble.

                                                                                                                          Summer/Fall 2012   45
                          COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Conducting



                          COND-321                                                            COND-361
                                     Choral Rehearsal Techniques for Music                               Conducting for Film and TV Production
                                     Education Majors                                                    2 credits
                                     2 credits                                                           Course Chair: Greg Fritze
                                     Course Chair: Cecil Adderley                                        Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                     Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                       Required of: None
                                     Required of: MUED majors                                            Electable by: All
                                     Electable by: MUED majors                                           Prerequisites: COND-351
                                     Prerequisites: COND-221
                                                                                              Rehearsing and recording to picture with live performers
                          Detailed attention to typical vocal repertoire with extensive       under studio conditions. Focus on preparation, efficiency, and
                          analysis and application of rehearsal techniques as they apply      accurate synchronization.
                          to specific public school groups. More advanced lab sessions
                          for application of classroom principles.                            COND-P391
                                                                                                         Careers in Conducting
                          COND-322                                                                       2 credits
                                     Instrumental Rehearsal Techniques for Music                         Course Chair: Greg Fritze
                                     Education Majors                                                    Offered: Spring
                                     2 credits                                                           Required of: None
                                     Course Chair: Cecil Adderley                                        Electable by: All
                                     Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                       Prerequisites: COND-212 or COND-217
                                     Required of: MUED majors
                                     Electable by: MUED majors                                Presentation and discussion on the topics of what it takes to
                                     Prerequisites: COND-222                                  succeed as a professional conductor in the 21st century.
                                                                                              Several topics will be presented throughout the semester,
                          Detailed attention to typical instrumental repertoire with          including how to run a recording session, the business aspect
                          extensive analysis and application of rehearsal techniques as       of being a conductor, interpersonal responsibilities,
                          they apply to specific public school groups. More advanced          management, and planning. Conducting remains one of the
                          lab sessions for application of classroom principles. NOTE:         music’s elusive professions: why do some succeed while others
                          Performance on secondary instrument(s) is required.                 fail? Following Richard Strauss, we spend our whole lives
                                                                                              trying to become better conductors, only to find out at the
                          COND-351                                                            end of our lives how much more we have to learn. In addition,
                                     Advanced Conductor’s Workshop with Live                  the financial and managerial aspects of our organizations and
                                     Keyboard Ensemble                                        of our own careers ought never to be too far from our minds:
                                     2 credits                                                for in them we occupy the dual roles of senior manager and
                                     Course Chair: Greg Fritze                                principal artist.
                                     Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                     Required of: None                                        COND-421
                                     Electable by: All                                                   Advanced Rehearsal Techniques
                                     Prerequisites: COND-212 or COND-217                                 2 credits
                                                                                                         Course Chair: Greg Fritze
                          A practical course for conductors and music directors in                       Offered: Fall, Spring
                          preparation, organization, rehearsal, and recording under                      Required of: None
                          studio conditions. Emphasis on establishing fluency in conducting              Electable by: All
                          and rehearsal techniques to maximize efficiency in the session.                Prerequisites: COND-311 or COND-351

                          COND-355                                                            An advanced course for conductors in the development of
                                     Conducting Small Ensembles                               effective technical, musical, and psychological skills, including
                                     2 credits                                                planning (choice of literature, aesthetic and practical
                                     Course Chair: Greg Fritze                                considerations, allotment of rehearsal time); musical
                                     Offered: Fall                                            preparation (development of interpretation, choice of tempi,
                                     Required of: None                                        stylistic factors, identifying difficult or tricky passages, editing
                                     Electable by: All                                        parts for bowing and breathing); rehearsal (pacing, including
                                     Prerequisites: COND-212 or COND-217                      alternating woodshedding with play-through; balancing
                                                                                              dynamics; using effective gestures with the baton, face, left
                          This course is designed to give students practical experience in    hand, and body; giving effective verbal instructions; intonation;
                          conducting rehearsals of small instrumental groups. Students        listening and prioritizing; stopping and starting; knowing when
                          will expand their conducting technique and deepen their             to be satisfied); and human factors (mutual respect and
                          score-preparation skills in class meetings with their colleagues    honesty, shared responsibility, ensemble esprit de corps, and
                          playing MIDI keyboards in preparation for sessions with small       psychological momentum).
                          ensembles (e.g., brass quintet, flute choir, string quartet, wind
                          quintet); at these sessions themselves, the students will meet
                          the challenges of analog instrumental groups—balance,
                          intonation, rehearsal skills, and conductor-performer relations.

             46   Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                          Counterpoint
                                                                                                                                          Conducting/
COND-498                                                           CP-212
          Directed Study in Conducting                                       Tonal Two-Part Canon and Invention
          2 credits                                                          2 credits
          Course Chair: Greg Fritze                                          Course Chair: Greg Fritze
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                      Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
          Required of: None                                                  Required of: Degree – all; Diploma – COMP and
          Electable by: All                                                  FILM majors
          Prerequisites: COND-212 or COND-217 and written                    Electable by: All
            approval of instructor and course chair                          Prerequisites: CP-210 or CP-211 and either CM-211
                                                                               or CM-251
Supervised preparation and performance of an approved
conducting project. Projects may originate with recitalists or     Continuation of CP-211. A thorough study of canon and two-
from various departments such as Film Scoring, Contemporary        part invention through analysis and composition within a
Writing and Production, and Music Production and                   functional tonal language.
Engineering. The student will conduct at least one project from
the following categories: studio recording, recital or live        CP-215
concert requiring a conductor, or preparing and conducting a                 The Art of Counterpoint 2
work with an ensemble.                                                       3 credits
                                                                             Course Chair: Greg Fritze
                                                                             Offered: Fall, Fall, Spring, Summer
Counterpoint                                                                 Required of: COMP, CWPR, and FILM majors
                                                                             Electable by: All
CP-210                                                                       Prerequisites: CP-210
          The Art of Counterpoint
          3 credits                                                A thorough study of the Two and Three-Part Inventions of J.S.
          Course Chair: Greg Fritze                                Bach through analysis and composition within a functional
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                            tonal language. There will be two projects, a two-part inven-
          Required of: All                                         tion and a three-part invention in the style of Bach.
          Electable by: All
          Prerequisites: HR-112, ET-112, and CM-211                CP-311
                                                                             Advanced Counterpoint
This course will instruct students in the fundamental principles             2 credits
of free counterpoint (i.e., composition with melodic lines) with             Course Chair: Greg Fritze
an emphasis on two-part writing. Through the utilization of a                Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
three-pronged focus on principles, literature, and experiential              Required of: COMP and FILM majors
practice, students will complete exercises and projects                      Electable by: All
involving composition and performance within the                             Prerequisites: CM-212, and CP-212 or CP-215
common-practice period with additional attention to and
experience in contemporary tonal practice.                         Analysis and writing of three- and four-voice imitative
                                                                   counterpoint based on traditional models. Models include
CP-211                                                             fugue, chorale prelude, and passacaglia or chaconne.
          Tonal Counterpoint 1
          2 credits                                                CP-350
          Course Chair: Greg Fritze                                          20th-Century Counterpoint
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                      2 credits
          Required of: Degree – all; Diploma – COMP and                      Course Chair: Greg Fritze
          FILM majors                                                        Offered: Fall, Spring
          Electable by: All                                                  Required of: None
          Prerequisites: PW-111, or HR-111 and either                        Electable by: All
            AR-111 or PW-110                                                 Prerequisites: CM-212, and CP-212 or CP-215

Free counterpoint within a functional tonal context. Emphasis      The course is based on the examination of different realms of
on two-voice writing, binary, and melodic phrase forms.            20th-century counterpoint through the detailed analysis of
                                                                   contrapuntal styles and techniques of leading innovative
                                                                   composers such as Ravel, Stravinsky, Shostakovich, Hindemith,
                                                                   Bartók, Messiaen, Honegger, Barber, and composers of the
                                                                   New Viennese School. More recent stages in the evolution of
                                                                   counterpoint will be studied in examples by Ligeti,
                                                                   Lutoslawski, Penderecki, Schnittke, and Gubaidulina,
                                                                   as well as contemporary American composers (including
                                                                   Berklee composers).




                                                                                                                       Summer/Fall 2012     47
                                              COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
                      Counterpoint/
Contemporary Writing and Production


                                              CP-361                                                             CW-171
                                                         Jazz Counterpoint 1                                               Groove Writing
                                                         2 credits                                                         2 credits
                                                         Course Chair: Ken Pullig                                          Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl
                                                         Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                     Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                                         Required of: JCMP majors                                          Required of: CWPR majors
                                                         Electable by: All                                                 Electable by: All
                                                         Prerequisites: AR-112 and HR-211                                  Prerequisites: AR-111, ET-112, HR-112,
                                                                                                                             and MTEC-111
                                              Study of the process for creating multiline textures in a given
                                              melodic and/or harmonic situation. Voice-leading, melodic          Expanding on the material introduced in AR-111, this course
                                              analysis and embellishment, rhythm, and form. Assigned             focuses on creating and writing grooves for the rhythm section
                                              written projects to emphasize the role of contrapuntal             (guitar, keyboard, bass, percussion, and drums) and the ways
                                              practices in arranging.                                            in which different grooves work together. Original techniques
                                                                                                                 and practical approaches to creating grooves will be presented,
                                              CP-362                                                             as well as methods to refine and create variations in grooves
                                                         Jazz Counterpoint 2                                     and scoring with production goals in mind. Styles studied
                                                         2 credits                                               include funk, hip-hop, rock, reggae, and ska; Latin styles,
                                                         Course Chair: Ken Pullig                                including bossa, samba, salsa, cha-cha, songo, and baion;
                                                         Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                           shuffle, as used in rock, blues, and funk; generic dance
                                                         Required of: JCMP majors                                grooves such as techno; and pop and Euro-pop. Projects will
                                                         Electable by: All                                       include transcription, sequencing, and live performance
                                                         Prerequisites: CP-361                                   of grooves.

                                              Continuation of CP-361. Emphasis on the role that                  CW-205
                                              counterpoint plays in jazz composition.                                      Music Preparation 2
                                                                                                                           2 credits
                                                                                                                           Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl
                                              Contemporary Writing and                                                     Offered: Spring
                                              Production                                                                   Required of: None
                                                                                                                           Electable by: All
                                                                                                                           Prerequisites: AR-203 and PW-161
                                              CW-141
                                                         Hip-Hop Writing and Production                          Building on the content of AR-203, this course provides in-
                                                         2 credits                                               depth study of the capabilities of the software program Finale.
                                                         Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl                           Course content includes using Metatools, Hyperscribe, Shape
                                                         Offered: Fall, Spring                                   Designer, a broader range of editing tools, and practical
                                                         Required of: None                                       shortcuts to efficiently create scores and parts of professional
                                                         Electable by: All                                       quality. Instruction and project work is accomplished in the
                                                         Prerequisites: MTEC-111                                 Professional Writing Division MIDI Lab.

                                              An introduction to writing and production techniques in hip-       CW-211
                                              hop styles. Topics include the social and cultural aspects of                Writing for Small Ensemble
                                              hip-hop music as it pertains to the music’s origins and early                2 credits
                                              pioneers, the analysis of stylistic and musical characteristics,             Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl
                                              and instruction in the use of sequencing software in hip-hop                 Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                              production.                                                                  Required of: CWPR majors
                                                                                                                           Electable by: All
                                              CW-151                                                                       Prerequisites: AR-112, CW-171, and CW-216
                                                         Survey of Pop/Rock Styles
                                                         2 credits                                               Instruction in advanced small group writing concepts that
                                                         Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl                           encompasses sophisticated rhythm section scoring and groove
                                                         Offered: Fall, Spring                                   writing, including writing for auxiliary percussion; an
                                                         Required of: None                                       introduction to writing for voices and strings; background
                                                         Electable by: All                                       writing for horns, strings, and voices; manipulation of
                                                         Prerequisites: AR-111 and HR-112                        elements of large-scale form and structure; creation of
                                                                                                                 complex, layered textures; and hybrid writing techniques
                                              A study of major pop and rock styles and the writers,              involving sequencing and live players. In addition, the course
                                              producers, and artists who shaped the music, with a focus on       will focus heavily on score and part preparation.
                                              the writers and artists inducted into the Rock and Roll
                                              Hall of Fame.




                48                    Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                     Contemporary Writing and Production
CW-216                                                               CW-221
           Vocal Writing                                                        Writing and Production Techniques in the
           2 credits                                                            Pop/Rock Idiom
           Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl                                        2 credits
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                        Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl
           Required of: CWPR majors                                             Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Electable by: All                                                    Required of: None
           Prerequisites: AR-112, HR-211, and either ET-211 or                  Electable by: All
             ET-231                                                             Prerequisites: AR-112 and HR-211

Conceptualizing, writing, and producing vocals; contemporary         Techniques of instrumental and vocal writing, arranging, and
writing and production techniques for vocal groups of                production in the pop/rock idiom. Includes extensive score
different sizes; working with vocals in live situations versus the   analysis of major composers and performers, discussion of
recording studio environment; writing background vocals              stylistic techniques and orchestrations, historical perspective,
above a band versus a cappella vocal writing. Creating vocal         problem solving, and basic production and programming
band effects will also be explored. Range considerations,            concerns. The course is designed to guide the student in
timbre, vocal production, and notation for various size vocal        developing an original pop/rock writing style.
groups; writing and production techniques and considerations
for recording studio situations.                                     CW-222
                                                                                Introduction to Writing and Production for the
CW-P217                                                                         Recording Studio
           Writing in Folkloric Latin Styles                                    2 credits
           2 credits                                                            Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl
           Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl                                        Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Offered: Fall                                                        Required of: CWPR majors
           Required of: None                                                    Electable by: All
           Electable by: All                                                    Prerequisites: ISKB-212 (non-piano principals), and
           Prerequisites: AR-111, ET-112, and HR-112                              either CW-261 or SW-361

This course examines the folkloric music from Latin America          Emphasis on arranging techniques that apply specifically to
that informs today’s contemporary music. Topics include              recording situations in various contemporary music settings
traditional musical styles, forms, instrumentation, arranging        and idioms. Arranger’s function, current market trends, and
techniques, melody, and harmony. Folkloric music from the            contemporary recording techniques are discussed.
following countries is studied: Argentina, Brazil, Chile,
Colombia, the Dominican Republic, Mexico, Peru, Puerto Rico,         CW-225
and Venezuela. The course focuses on applications of these                      Writing in Salsa Styles
styles in contemporary arranging and composition.                               2 credits
                                                                                Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl
CW-218                                                                          Offered: Fall, Spring
           Jingle Writing                                                       Required of: None
           2 credits                                                            Electable by: All
           Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl                                        Prerequisites: AR-112
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Required of: None                                         A study of rhythmic styles of contemporary salsa music,
           Electable by: All                                         including characteristics of instrumentation and the unique
           Prerequisites: AR-111 and HR-211                          clave rhythmic pattern. Specific rhythmic styles analyzed will
                                                                     include mambo, son montuno, guajiro, bomba, merengue,
Composition of music for radio and television commercials.           and songo, among others. Musical scores of Eddie Palmieri,
Emphasis on means of creating suitable product image.                Juan Luis Guerra, Oscar D’León, Arturo Sandoval, Paquito
Working with, and alteration of, given lyrics. Some lyric            D’Rivera, and many others will be analyzed. Students will
writing. Determining proper instrumentations.                        create melodies as well as piano, guitar, bass, and percussion
Timing considerations.                                               rhythmic patterns; they will write brass instrumental sections
                                                                     using the clave rhythmic pattern.




                                                                                                                             Summer/Fall 2012   49
                                                   COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Contemporary Writing and Production



                                                   CW-P227                                                            CW-255
                                                              Flamenco Music: Composition and Arranging                         Contemporary Applications of
                                                              2 credits                                                         12-Tone Concepts
                                                              Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl                                     2 credits
                                                              Offered: Fall, Spring                                             Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl
                                                              Required of: None                                                 Offered: Fall
                                                              Electable by: All                                                 Required of: None
                                                              Prerequisites: AR-111                                             Electable by: All
                                                                                                                                Prerequisites: ET-212, HR-212, and either AR-112,
                                                   This course examines the concepts and techniques of writing                    CP-210, or CP-211
                                                   flamenco music, which is a vital and growing genre in
                                                   contemporary music. The course covers the origins of the           Alternative approaches and concepts to writing that can be
                                                   various styles of flamenco, their individual influences, primary   used in various aspects of songwriting, arranging, and
                                                   composers of flamenco, overview of popular lyrics, and             composing for contemporary broadcast media, such as film
                                                   common composition and arranging techniques in flamenco            and TV scores, that will supplement other writing approaches.
                                                   styles. Students will investigate the various aspects of writing   Using compositional concepts pioneered by George Tremblay
                                                   flamenco music: use of improvised structure; binary, ternary,      and Jack Smalley, the course explores writing techniques based
                                                   and polyrhythm rhythmic styles; traditional harmonic               on the use of the 12-tone row concept and the process of
                                                   approaches and concepts; melodic approaches; and the               extracting consonant melodic components from the rows that
                                                   use of microtones. A variety of compositions, arrangements,        are then applied to writing for contemporary musical styles
                                                   and orchestrations will be analyzed, including examples of         and forms and commercial clients. Some writing projects will
                                                   contemporary compositions and new stylistic variations in          be realized through sequencing and live performance.
                                                   flamenco that feature the use of electronics and flamenco
                                                   without guitar. Students will create compositions and/or           CW-P257
                                                   arrangements for a flamenco music ensemble.                                  Musical Theater Arranging and Orchestration
                                                                                                                                2 credits
                                                   CW-237                                                                       Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl
                                                              Scoring for Percussion                                            Offered: Spring
                                                              2 credits                                                         Required of: None
                                                              Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl                                     Electable by: All
                                                              Offered: Fall, Spring                                             Prerequisites: AR-112
                                                              Required of: None
                                                              Electable by: All                                       This course is a study of orchestration in musical theater and
                                                              Prerequisites: AR-112                                   the role of the orchestra in a theater piece. Students will
                                                                                                                      arrange and orchestrate songs with a focus on supporting a
                                                   Survey of the mallet, membrane, and accessory groups of            vocalist, telling the story, and creating a theatrical sound. The
                                                   the percussion instrument family. Demonstration and                class will explore how orchestration can be used as a dramatic
                                                   discussion of notation, range, techniques, and effects. Scores     element, to establish a period, create a mood, and support
                                                   from Broadway shows and studio, orchestral, chamber, and           the narrative. Written projects focus on typical instruments
                                                   solo pieces.                                                       and ensembles used in various theatrical situations. Listening
                                                                                                                      will include songs from a wide variety of musical theater
                                                   CW-247                                                             recordings, with examples of piano scores and individual parts
                                                              Writing for Woodwinds                                   from shows.
                                                              2 credits
                                                              Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl
                                                              Offered: Fall, Spring
                                                              Required of: None
                                                              Electable by: All
                                                              Prerequisites: AR-112

                                                   A study of the flute, clarinet, and double reed families based
                                                   on intensive listening, transcription, live demonstration, and
                                                   composition. Compositions will include: visual imagery,
                                                   storytelling, non-Western based concepts and forms, sound
                                                   exchange, layering sound, and techniques for composition that
                                                   include improvisation.




                                      50   Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                 Contemporary Writing and Production
CW-261                                                             CW-311
          MIDI Applications for the Writer                                   Writing for Large Ensemble 1
          2 credits                                                          2 credits
          Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl                                      Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                      Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
          Required of: CWPR majors                                           Required of: CWPR majors
          Electable by: CWPR majors                                          Electable by: All
          Prerequisites: ISKB-211 (non-piano principals) and                 Prerequisites: CW-211
            PW-161 (CWPR majors), or written approval of
            course chair (non-CWPR majors)                         An orchestration/arranging course that focuses on the
                                                                   techniques and concepts of writing for large ensemble.
The student will learn to utilize digital technology and MIDI to   Content also includes the arranging process and how to adapt
create musical arrangements of both original and existing          and modify the musical elements of a composition into an
material using a computer-based music workstation. Projects        effective arrangement. The course deals with notation,
are designed to simulate real-world writing assignments.           voicings, and combinations of the various sections comprising
Building on skills learned in PW-161, Technology Tools for the     the large ensemble: trumpets, trombones, saxophones,
Writer, this course will focus on the musical use of technology    selected woodwinds, and rhythm section. Extensive use of
and basic production aspects of a project, including MIDI and      taped examples and extracts from scores.
audio signal flow within the hardware of the workstation;
virtual signal flow within the software environment; recording,    CW-P313
editing, and processing digital audio; advanced sequencing                   Advanced Writing in Latin Styles
and sequence editing techniques; and file management. In                     2 credits
addition to using their own laptops in the Professional Writing              Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl
Technology Lab, students are expected to have the CWP major                  Offered: Spring
bundle.                                                                      Required of: None
                                                                             Electable by: All
CW-275                                                                       Prerequisites: AR-111 and CW-225
          Music Production Techniques for Writers
          2 credits                                                An advanced study of writing in a variety of Latin styles,
          Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl                            including modern and traditional orchestration concepts,
          Offered: Fall                                            style-specific aspects of form and structure, score analysis,
          Required of: None                                        score and part preparation, and production tips that will give
          Electable by: All                                        the composer, arranger, or orchestrator the proper tools to get
          Prerequisites: AR-111, HR-211, and CW-261                the best results either in the studio or in a live performance.
                                                                   Styles covered include mambo, guaguancó, bomba, timba,
Viewing music production from the writer’s perspective, this       bolero, danzón, tango reggae, samba, and partido alto.
course explores how knowledge of compositional elements            Students will create arrangements of existing works and
including melody, harmony, arranging, and orchestration help       original pieces for a variety of ensembles of different sizes
provide the foundation and focus of contemporary production        and instrumentation.
styles and techniques. Study and analysis of great
producer/musicians will include George Martin, Quincy Jones,       CW-P316
Phil Spector, Daniel Lanois, Peter Gabriel, Prince, Don Was,                 Advanced Vocal Writing
Robert John “Mutt” Lange, and others. Focus will be on how                   2 credits
producers utilize their background as accomplished musicians                 Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl
to create the “aural landscape” of the artists they produce.                 Offered: Spring
Course projects will include analysis papers on different                    Required of: None
producers in a variety of styles, and one recording project.                 Electable by: All
                                                                             Prerequisites: CW-216

                                                                   This course presents an expanded development of material
                                                                   introduced in CW-216. Important concepts include: production
                                                                   and direction of vocal rehearsals and recording sessions;
                                                                   advanced production techniques including layering, stacking,
                                                                   compressing and mixing vocal tracks; study of diverse song
                                                                   styles and musical concepts that comprise them; observation
                                                                   of text/language and cultural influence in relation to vocal
                                                                   writing; further development of multi-part background writing;
                                                                   more refined utilization of harmonic tensions and
                                                                   reharmonization. Rubato and groove-oriented a cappella
                                                                   techniques will also be explored.




                                                                                                                         Summer/Fall 2012   51
                                                   COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Contemporary Writing and Production



                                                   CW-341                                                             CW-370
                                                              Scoring for Strings                                               Video Game Scoring Fundamentals
                                                              2 credits                                                         2 credits
                                                              Course Chair: Greg Fritze                                         Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl
                                                              Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                     Offered: Fall, Spring
                                                              Required of: None                                                 Required of: None
                                                              Electable by: All                                                 Electable by: All
                                                              Prerequisites: CM-212                                             Prerequisites: CW-361, FS-361, or EP-371

                                                   Discussion of string instruments, their special effects,           This course provides students a one-semester overview of
                                                   and proper notation. Principles of string orchestration and        approaches to scoring for video games. Beginning with a short
                                                   voicing techniques.                                                history of interactive music, the content includes typical game
                                                                                                                      music workflow and approaches to scoring video games.
                                                   CW-343                                                             Assignments include scoring projects using different interactive
                                                              Contemporary Arranging for Strings                      music techniques. Students will be able to describe the history,
                                                              2 credits                                               theory, mechanisms, and basic approaches to writing music for
                                                              Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl                           video games. They will be able to write simple to moderate
                                                              Offered: Spring                                         interactive scores using the most commonly used methods in
                                                              Required of: None                                       the industry. In addition students will discuss and learn about
                                                              Electable by: All                                       specific industry issues related to working in this field.
                                                              Prerequisites: HR-212, and either AR-201 or
                                                                CW-211                                                CW-411
                                                                                                                                Writing for Large Ensemble 2 –
                                                   Arranging for strings behind a vocalist or lead instrument.                  Studio Orchestra
                                                   Emphasis is on contemporary string writing approaches in the                 2 credits
                                                   styles of rock, Latin, funk, ballads, and jazz, and the feels of             Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl
                                                   even and shuffled eighths and sixteenths for string sections                 Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                                   (with rhythm section accompaniment) using specific arranging                 Required of: CWPR majors
                                                   techniques of closed and open voicings, clusters, three- to six-             Electable by: All
                                                   part writing, use of primary melody and countermelody, and                   Prerequisites: CW-311 and completion of the
                                                   guide tone lines. Production approaches from the writer’s                      CWP Music Preparation Proficiency
                                                   perspective are also covered. Projects may include
                                                   arrangements for live performances, recordings,                    An advanced study of the techniques and concepts of
                                                   or commercials.                                                    writing/arranging for a studio orchestra. A continuation of
                                                                                                                      CW-210 with the addition of the string section, French horn,
                                                   CW-361                                                             tuba, percussion, additional woodwinds, harp, and synthesizer.
                                                              Sound Processing Applications for Writers               Emphasis is placed on orchestral combinations, stylistic factors,
                                                              2 credits                                               techniques of scoring melody and accompaniment,
                                                              Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl                           sophisticated voicings such as ambichords, writing effective
                                                              Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                           introductions and endings, and routining an arrangement.
                                                              Required of: CWPR majors                                Extensive use of taped examples and score extracts.
                                                              Electable by: CWPR majors
                                                              Prerequisites: CW-261                                   CW-422
                                                                                                                                Advanced Production for Writers
                                                   This course focuses on the use of sound-processing equipment                 2 credits
                                                   as it pertains to the writer who engineers and produces his or               Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl
                                                   her own pieces. Through the use of software plug-ins, this                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                                   course examines the artistic application of ambient devices                  Required of: CWPR majors
                                                   such as reverbs, delays, flangers, harmonizers, and choruses,                Electable by: CWPR majors
                                                   and dynamic processing units such as compressors, noise                      Prerequisites: CW-222, CW-311, and CW-361
                                                   gates, outboard equalization, and limiters. The course also
                                                   explores how writing can be enhanced in recording and mixing       A project-driven course that focuses on production from the
                                                   through the effective use of sound-processing equipment.           writer’s perspective. The content includes more advanced
                                                   Students will have the opportunity to understand how to            creative and production projects, incorporating MIDI sequences
                                                   enhance their recordings with these effects through in-class       using sampled sounds and synth modules with live
                                                   demonstration, listening analysis, and assigned projects. In       overdubbing of acoustic instruments, more refined utilization
                                                   addition to using their own laptop in the Professional Writing     of sound-processing equipment, and conceptualizing with
                                                   technology lab, students are expected to have the CWP major        sound-processing ideas in mind. In addition to class meetings,
                                                   bundle.                                                            each student will be assigned recording studio time to be used
                                                                                                                      for overdubs, sweetening, and/or mixing. Students will use
                                                                                                                      their own laptop in the Professional Writing technology lab
                                                                                                                      and are expected to have the CWP major bundle.




                                      52   Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                         Contemporary Writing and Production
CW-435                                                                CW-450
           Contemporary Orchestration for Digital                                Scoring for Advertising
           Audio Workstations                                                    2 credits
           2 credits                                                             Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl
           Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl                                         Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Offered: Fall, Spring                                                 Required of: CWPR majors
           Required of: CWPR majors                                              Electable by: All
           Electable by: CWPR majors                                             Prerequisites: CW-361, EP-322, SW-361, or FS-361
           Prerequisites: CW-211 and CW-361
                                                                      A study of the creative, technical, production, and business
This course covers advanced sequencing and orchestration              aspects of writing music for visual media, primarily television
techniques in the electronic and hybrid realms of production for      commercials. Content includes the creative process: reacting
acoustic ensembles. Its main purpose is to expose and guide           to emotion and mood of visuals, supporting the picture with
students to writing and production of polished and high-quality       appropriate music, stylistic considerations,
original compositions for small to large acoustic ensembles           compressing/expanding musical ideas, and hitting visual cues.
through the use of advanced sequencing techniques and                 Production aspects include various approaches to shaping the
electronic tools. Through a detailed survey and hands-on              musical product to support the creative direction that has been
practice of the major software orchestral libraries, the course       chosen or provided. Exploration of sound design (incorporation
integrates all the techniques involved in creating electronic and     of sound effects into music tracks) and technical aspects of
hybrid polished productions for rhythm section, small ensemble,       timings, film editing influences, frame-counting, and
big band, and studio orchestra. Content includes advanced             synchronization. Business aspects: working with producers and
sequencing techniques such as groove quantization, layering,          directors, taking direction, selling ideas, and general and
tempo variations, advanced use of MIDI control changes, and           contractual obligations that modify the creative process. Various
alternate MIDI controllers. The students will learn multilayering     projects and assignments in writing music in different moods,
of acoustic and electronic instruments; translation into the          styles, and lengths, that support and enhance visuals. Most
electronic realm of phrasing, articulations, and performance-         creative work will be realized at MIDI workstations using a
related markings; controlled detuning; and horizontal/vertical        MIDI sequencing program and video software; students
timbre variation. In addition, through a series of original writing   must have a strong working knowledge of MIDI systems and
assignments for large ensembles and rhythm section, the course        sequencing programs.
will focus on merging the gap between the composition stage
and the final electronic production by covering the mixing stage      CW-461
of the hybrid production process focusing in particular on                       Advanced Electronic Composition and
multireverb placement and variable equalization.                                 Production for the Writer
                                                                                 2 credits
CW-445                                                                           Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl
           Contemporary Orchestration                                            Offered: Fall, Spring
           2 credits                                                             Required of: CWPR majors
           Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl                                         Electable by: CWPR majors
           Offered: Fall                                                         Prerequisites: CW-361
           Required of: None
           Electable by: All                                          This course has two purposes: first, to provide the student with
           Prerequisites: CM-231 or CW-411                            the necessary advanced synthesis, sound design, and
                                                                      technology-based creative tools to be competitive in the
Exploration of techniques of writing for each orchestral              contemporary electronic writing industry; and second, to
instrument and for various combinations of instruments,               enhance and further develop the student’s compositional skills
unusual orchestral instruments, and special effects many              in a variety of contemporary music styles with a particular
instruments can create. Principles of combining and balancing         emphasis on electronic genres. Through a detailed and thorough
instruments; comparison between the live orchestral situation         hands-on experience the students will begin studying the basic
and the recording studio environment. Incorporation of ethnic         concepts of analog synthesis, moving on to advanced synthesis
instruments into orchestration; application of orchestral             techniques such as FM, sampling and physical modeling, all the
instruments to contemporary settings and styles. Overview of          way up to the most advanced sound design and sound shaping
the development of the modern symphonic orchestra and the             techniques. The course will cover advanced processing methods
full orchestra as used in film scores. Live demonstrations of         and effects (such as loop creation/editing/slicing and creative use
instruments; score listening and analysis.                            of EQ, delay, compression, and convolution reverbs etc.)
                                                                      targeted specifically to enhance and improve the production of
                                                                      contemporary electronic music. Topics will be contextualized
                                                                      with precise references to specific contemporary music styles
                                                                      and trends and practically applied by the student to originally
                                                                      composed projects that feature different electronic styles and
                                                                      techniques. Using these concepts and techniques the students
                                                                      will create original compositions based mainly on sounds they
                                                                      have programmed and designed themselves, and by the end of
                                                                      the course they will have an original sound library at their disposal.



                                                                                                                                 Summer/Fall 2012   53
                                                  COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Contemporary Writing and Production/
                           Ensemble


                                               CW-P470                                                              CW-498
                                                          Writing and Producing for                                            Directed Study in Contemporary Writing
                                                          Music/Media Libraries                                                2 credits
                                                          2 credits                                                            Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl
                                                          Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl                                        Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                                          Offered: Fall, Spring                                                Required of: CWPR majors
                                                          Required of: None                                                    Electable by: CWPR majors
                                                          Electable by: CWPR, FILM, ELPD, and SONG majors                      Prerequisites: CW-311
                                                          Prerequisites: CW-361
                                                                                                                    Individualized instruction designed to guide students majoring
                                               This course covers advanced creative, technical, production and      in contemporary writing and production in the preparation of
                                               business aspects of writing for music and media libraries. Its       their graduation projects. Students will be allowed to schedule
                                               main purpose is to expose and train students to be proficient        time in the Professional Writing Division MIDI Lab to meet the
                                               in writing and producing for a variety of media-related music        portfolio requirements.
                                               libraries through style specific assignments and scenarios. The
                                               course focuses on writing genre-specific music cues for reality
                                               shows, soap operas, talk/variety shows, documentaries, title         Ensemble
                                               sequences, infomercials, and web media such as miniseries,
                                               web advertising, and web-based tutorials. Students are guided
                                               through a thorough analysis and critique of each style and
                                                                                                                    Ensembles - Revised Absence Policy
                                               individual original writing assignments based on real case           Students are expected to attend all meetings of their
                                               examples. For each style students master the creative process,       ensembles. Instructors must be notified in advance if an
                                               library-specific production techniques, how to support different     unavoidable absence is foreseen. In addition, the student
                                               moods with appropriate music, how to communicate with                must arrange for a suitable replacement to fill his/her role
                                               media producers, and how to develop original material inside         in the ensemble. Failure to send a substitute player will
                                               the boundaries set by the style and by the production team.          result in a grade of “F” for the ensemble and can result
                                               This course focuses on how to compose and produce mood-              in the loss of the seat in the ensemble. The grade of “F”
                                               based music libraries and cues that are not written to a specific    will stand as a final grade except in cases of extraordinary
                                               picture. Each assignment is critiqued, assessed, and revised         circumstance as determined by the department chair.
                                               according to creative directions and style specific production
                                               guidelines. Discussions of business aspects include working with
                                               music libraries producers and companies, demo preparation,           ENBR-321
                                               positive and quick response to feedback and comments from                       Brass Quintet
                                               the music library producer and licensing scenarios. Through                     1 credit
                                               various projects students will have frequent opportunities to                   Course Chair: Tom Plsek
                                               write music in different moods, styles, and lengths. Students                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                               must have a strong working knowledge and experience with                        Required of: None
                                               hybrid production techniques and with MIDI systems and                          Electable by: All
                                               sequencing programs.                                                            Prerequisites: Written approval of course chair

                                               CW-495                                                               A brass quintet that performs a mixture of traditional and
                                                          Contemporary Writing and                                  20th-century music. Instrumentation: two trumpets, horn,
                                                          Production Internship                                     trombone, tuba.
                                                          2 credits
                                                          Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl                             ENBR-336
                                                          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                        Brass Playing and Singing
                                                          Required of: None                                                    1 credit
                                                          Electable by: CWPR majors                                            Course Chair: Tom Plsek
                                                          Prerequisites: Written approval of course chair                      Offered: Fall, Spring
                                                                                                                               Required of: None
                                               Monitored and evaluated professional work experience in an                      Electable by: Brass principals
                                               environment related to the contemporary writing and                             Prerequisites: None
                                               production major. Placement is limited to situations available
                                               from or approved by the Office of Experiential Learning and          This course is designed to focus on vocal performance for
                                               the Contemporary Writing and Production Department chair             brass principals. Students may or may not have experience
                                               or designee. To apply for an internship, students must see the       as vocalists. All classes will be geared towards the styles the
                                               internship coordinator in the Office of Experiential Learning        individuals are interested in, emphasizing both singing and
                                               prior to registering. Note: Equivalent credit for prior experience   playing. Students will be asked to learn and perform new
                                               is not available due to the requirement of concurrent contract       songs each week with the main emphasis being on the
                                               between the employer/supervisor and the college. International       selection of correct keys, tempos, and styles. There will be
                                               students in F-1 status must obtain authorization on their Form       a comparative analysis between vocal and instrumental
                                               I-20 from the Counseling and Advising Center prior to                phrasing, improvisation, and physiology. Students will also
                                               beginning an internship.                                             be exposed to performers who have been recognized and
                                                                                                                    respected as both singers and horn players.

                 54                    Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                  Ensemble
ENCL-200                                                            ENCL-400
           Concert Choir                                                      Contemporary Orchestra
           1 credit                                                           1 credit
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                           Course Chair: Ron Savage
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                      Offered: Fall, Spring
           Required of: None                                                  Required of: None
           Electable by: All                                                  Electable by: All
           Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor               Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor

Large vocal ensemble with emphasis on traditional and               The Contemporary Orchestra features Berklee's student
contemporary music stretching through a wide range of               performers, composers, and conductors through the use of
music genres. In this course, students will participate in          standard repertoire, film, multimedia, and sound. Works of
weekly rehearsals. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity,   major 20th-century composers, as well as Berklee students
as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy. Concert        and faculty, will be programmed. Student performers will gain
performances during the fall and spring semesters.                  experience in orchestral auditions and have the opportunity to
                                                                    be featured as soloists. This ensemble meets two times per
ENCL-P201                                                           week; the second weekly meeting will be used for workshops.
           Women's Concert Choir
           1 credit                                                 ENCL-402
           Course Chair: Anne Peckham                                         Contemporary Chamber Music Ensemble
           Offered: Fall, Spring                                              1 credit
           Required of: None                                                  Course Chair: Ron Savage
           Electable by: All                                                  Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor               Required of: None
                                                                              Electable by: All
The Women's Concert Choir is a choral group consisting of                     Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor
12-40 women. Students will learn part-singing, blending,
intonation, reading, and memorization through the repertoire,       Mixed instrumental and vocal ensembles are formed to study
which will range from the standard classical choral repertoire      and perform chamber music by 20th-century composers
to arrangements of musical theater works. A performance will        including Luciano Berio, John Corgliano, Aaron Copland,
be scheduled at the end of the semester. Voice principals and       Maurice Ravel, Arnold Schoenberg, Igor Stravinsky, and others.
non-voice principals are eligible to audition.                      Using their own parts from the preselected repertoire, students
                                                                    will individually practice and master performance skills and
ENCL-234                                                            musicianship, then rehearse in the larger group in preparation
           Improvisation for Classical Musicians                    for an end-of-semester recital.
           1 credit
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                 ENCL-403
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                      Art Music of Black Composers
           Required of: None                                                  1 credit
           Electable by: All                                                  Course Chair: Ron Savage
           Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor               Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                                                              Required of: None
The Improvisation for Classical Musicians ensemble is a small                 Electable by: All
group of instrumentalists that will play traditional chamber                  Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor
music with a twist by adding improvisational techniques. The
students will partake in weekly rehearsals, as well as end of       The Art Music of Black Composers ensemble will study
the semester performances. Emphasis will be given to hear-          and perform the richness of America's roots music traditions.
ing, expressing your musical ideas with stylistic integrity, as     The students will study all types of black composers stretching
well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.                   from roots music all the way to modern-day pop.




                                                                                                                          Summer/Fall 2012   55
                        COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Ensemble



                        ENCL-404                                                             ENEL-403
                                   Musical Theater Orchestra                                            Techno/Rave Ensemble
                                   1 credit                                                             1 credit
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                             Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                        Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Required of: None                                                    Required of: None
                                   Electable by: All                                                    Electable by: All
                                   Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor                 Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor

                        The Musical Theater Orchestra will perform the music of              An open forum for development of live performance multi-
                        Broadway shows. In this course, students will participate in         instrumental duo/trio ensembles consisting of electronic,
                        weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will gain experience          electro/acoustic, and acoustic sources. The class splits into
                        in performing in a variety of styles inherent in each show.          a number of smaller groups working on two compositions
                        Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic,   and playing in class on a rotating schedule for discussion and
                        harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy. Please contact the instructor       critique. Use of a variety of instrumental approaches such as
                        for more information on the shows to performed in current            controls surfaces, audio/MIDI processing, MAX/MSP patches,
                        semester.                                                            any instruments.

                        ENCL-P405                                                            ENEL-404
                                   Classical Chamber Music Ensemble                                     Turntable Ensemble
                                   1 credit                                                             1 credit
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                             Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring                                                Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Required of: None                                                    Required of: None
                                   Electable by: All                                                    Electable by: All
                                   Prerequisites: Written permission of course instructor               Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor

                        Mixed instrumentation chamber ensemble, including brass,             Members of the Turntable Ensemble will compose, improvise,
                        woodwinds, strings, voice, and guitar with piano accompanists.       and perform music that incorporates the turntable as a musical
                        Ensemble will perform standard classical chamber music               instrument, informed by the traditions of hip-hop, jazz, soul,
                        repertoire. Emphasis will be on developing accompanying skills       and other related styles. In this course, students will participate
                        while providing an outlet for soloists.                              in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will gain experience
                                                                                             in performing in a variety of styles and settings. Emphasis will
                        ENDS-400                                                             be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic,
                                   Directed Study                                            and rhythmic accuracy.
                                   1 credit
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                  ENFF-200
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                        Funk
                                   Required of: None                                                    1 credit
                                   Electable by: All                                                    Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                   Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor                 Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                                                                                        Required of: None
                        The Directed Study ensemble will study and perform a specific                   Electable by: All
                        genre or artist of their liking. In this course, students will                  Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3
                        participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will
                        gain experience in performing the particular directed studies’       Level 3 Funk ensemble will study and perform seminal music
                        compositions. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as      from the funk genre including music from the 1970s to the
                        well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.                    current era. The focus of the class will be on creating a funky
                                                                                             feel, imitating classic instrumental parts, as well as improvising
                        ENEL-221                                                             and creating style-specific parts. Students will gain experience
                                   Electronic Improvisation                                  in discussion, researching, and performing the various styles
                                   1 credit                                                  of funk. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                  melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Required of: None
                                   Electable by: All
                                   Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor

                        A small contemporary ensemble consisting of synthesizers
                        and other electronics, typically along with a rhythm section
                        composed of drum set and electric bass. The ensemble
                        will develop a concert-ready performance based upon
                        improvisation, extended performance techniques, sound
                        design, and grooves.

           56   Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                         Ensemble
ENFF-201                                                              ENFF-300
           Retro Funk/Fusion                                                     George Duke/George Benson
           1 credit                                                              1 credit
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                              Course Chair: Ron Savage
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                         Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Required of: None                                                     Required of: None
           Electable by: All                                                     Electable by: All
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3                              Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5

The Retro Funk/Fusion ensemble will study and perform the             The George Duke/George Benson ensemble will transcribe,
music of Herbie Hancock, Ramsey Lewis, Soulive, Stevie                study and perform the music of George Duke and George
Wonder, George Benson, Roberta Flack, Joe Zawinul, and                Benson. In this course, students will participate in weekly
Donny Hathaway, and others. In this course, students will             supervised rehearsals. Students will gain experience in
participate in weekly, supervised rehearsals. Students will           transcribing, performing arrangements from the original
gain experience of performing music in the genre of retro             recording. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as
funk/fusion, using music from traditional and contemporary            well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
artists. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as
melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy. Some material will          ENFF-301
be prearranged with individual parts, other material will be                     The Music of Steve Coleman
arranged during the class, by the instructor and the ensemble,                   1 credit
from lead sheets. After midterms, an attempt will be made to                     Course Chair: Ron Savage
consider material (original or covers) from the student that is                  Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
consistent with the genre. In addition, students will be given                   Required of: None
the opportunity to direct the performance of material covered                    Electable by: All
during the class.                                                                Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5

ENFF-220                                                              The Music of Steve Coleman ensemble will study and perform
           Funk/Fusion                                                the music of Steve Coleman as well as original music by
           1 credit                                                   the members of the ensemble. In this course, students will
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                   participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will gain
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                              experience in performing modern jazz fusion with odd time
           Required of: None                                          signatures, superimposed time signatures, and unusual form
           Electable by: All                                          and structure. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4                   well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.

Level 4 Funk/Fusion ensemble will study and perform seminal           ENFF-302
music from the funk/fusion genre including music from the                        The Music of the Crusaders
1970s to the current era. The focus of the class will be on                      1 credit
creating a funky feel, imitating classic instrumental parts,                     Course Chair: Ron Savage
as well as, improvising and creating style specific parts.                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
Additionally, the students will be introduced to the harmonic,                   Required of: None
melodic, and rhythmic component of jazz, rock, and Latin that                    Electable by: All
create the genre of funk/fusion. Students will gain experience                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5
in discussion, researching, and performing the various styles of
funk/fusion. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well   The Music of the Crusaders funk ensemble will study and
as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.                          perform the music of The Crusaders. This ensemble consists
                                                                      of the best early soul-jazz funk music of The Crusaders: Joe
ENFF-221                                                              Sample, Larry Carlton, Wayne Henderson, Sticks Hooper, and
           Funk/R&B Rating 4                                          Wilton Felder. In this course, students will participate in weekly
           1 credit                                                   supervised rehearsals. Students will gain experience in perform-
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                   ing soul/jazz. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                              as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy and feel of this
           Required of: None                                          style. The charts consist of exact transcriptions of the music
           Electable by: All                                          performed. Instrumentation: piano, bass, guitar, drums, tenor
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4                   sax, and trombone.

Level 4 Funk/R&B ensemble will study and perform seminal
music from the funk and r&b genre including music from
the 1970s to the current era. The focus of the class will be on
creating a funky feel, imitating classic instrumental parts, as
well as, style specific improvising including the creation of
style specific parts. Students will gain experience in discussion,
researching, and performing the various styles of funk and
r&b. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as
melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
                                                                                                                                 Summer/Fall 2012   57
                        COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Ensemble



                        ENFF-303                                                             ENFF-322
                                   The Music of the Meters                                              The Music of Stern, Brecker, and Scofield
                                   1 credit                                                             1 credit
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                             Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                        Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Required of: None                                                    Required of: None
                                   Electable by: All                                                    Electable by: All
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5                             Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 6

                        The Music of the Meters ensemble will study and perform              This contemporary fusion ensemble will study and perform
                        seminal music from the legendary funk r&b soul instrumental          the music of Mike Stern, Michael Brecker, John Scofield,
                        group, The Meters. The focus of the class will be on creating        Alan Holdsworth, Joshua Redman, and others. In this course,
                        a funky feel, imitating the original rhythm section parts,           students will participate in weekly supervised rehearsals.
                        as well as, improvising and creating style specific parts.           Students will gain experience in performing modern and
                        Students will gain experience in discussion, researching, and        classic fusion with advanced harmonic improvisation and
                        performing the various styles of funk/fusion. Emphasis will be       challenging rhythmic content, including odd time signatures.
                        given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and      Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic,
                        rhythmic accuracy.                                                   harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.

                        ENFF-320                                                             ENFF-323
                                   Original Fusion                                                      The Music of Pat Metheny
                                   1 credit                                                             1 credit
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                             Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                        Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Required of: None                                                    Required of: None
                                   Electable by: All                                                    Electable by: All
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 6                             Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 6

                        The Original Fusion ensemble will study and perform original         In this ensemble students will study and perform the music of
                        music from the teacher as well as the original compositions of       Pat Metheny. In this course, students will participate in weekly
                        the students in the ensemble class. The focus of the class will      supervised rehearsals. Students will gain experience in per-
                        be on playing a mixture of genres including jazz, rock, funk,        forming every song selected for the semester. Emphasis will
                        and Latin, as well as improvising and creating style specific        be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic,
                        parts. Students will gain experience in discussion, researching,     and rhythmic accuracy.
                        and performing the various styles of funk/fusion. Emphasis will
                        be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and   ENFF-324
                        rhythmic accuracy.                                                              Mahavishnu Orchestra and Return to Forever
                                                                                                        1 credit
                        ENFF-321                                                                        Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                   The Music of Joe Zawinul                                             Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   1 credit                                                             Required of: None
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                             Electable by: All
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                        Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 6
                                   Required of: None
                                   Electable by: All                                         The students in this ensemble will study and perform the
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 6                  arrangements of music by the groups Mahavishnu Orchestra
                                                                                             and Return to Forever. Emphasis will be given to stylistic
                        The Music of Joe Zawinul ensemble will transcribe, analyze,          integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
                        and perform the music of Joe Zawinul, Wayne Shorter, and             Instrumentation: mixed winds, synthesizer, piano, guitar,
                        Jaco Pastorius when they were members of Weather Report.             bass, drums, and percussion.
                        In this course, students will participate in weekly supervised
                        rehearsals. Students will gain experience in performing the
                        fusion music developed by this great group. Emphasis will be
                        given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and
                        rhythmic accuracy.




           58   Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                      Ensemble
ENFF-325                                                             ENGB-201
           Yellowjackets Ensemble                                               Klezmer Music
           1 credit                                                             1 credit
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                             Course Chair: Ron Savage
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                        Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Required of: None                                                    Required of: None
           Electable by: All                                                    Electable by: All
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 6                             Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3

This high-level ensemble learns and performs the challenging         Students in the Klezmer Music ensemble will study and
and beautifully crafted music of the world- famous                   perform roots music from the eastern European Jewish
Yellowjackets, a band that for thirty years has successfully         tradition and diaspora, focusing on dance music for weddings
performed the jazz fusion compositions of Russell Ferrante           and celebrations, as well as various crossover styles such
(keyboards) and Bob Mintzer (tenor and EWI) along with               as Yiddish swing, Yiddish theatre, and contemporary
phenomenal bassist Jimmy Haslip and creative drummer Will            jazz/experimental repertoire by John Zorn, Masada, and
Kennedy. Expect to practice the tunes several hours per week         others. Students will also compose or arrange at least one
outside of class with an occasional extra rehearsal.                 piece in a klezmer style for the ensemble. Students will
                                                                     participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will gain
ENFF-326                                                             experience in performing klezmer and Yiddish music, either
           Improvisation on 21st-Century Grooves                     instrumental, vocal, or both. Vocalists may sing in Yiddish
           1 credit                                                  and/or English and vocalese. Emphasis will be given to stylistic
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                  integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                             Students will also gain an appreciation for cultural context of
           Required of: None                                         the music.
           Electable by: All
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4; drums and       ENGB-220
             bass by audition                                                   South American Folkloric Music
                                                                                1 credit
We will experiment with mixing current grooves and unusual                      Course Chair: Ron Savage
modes and harmonies in a jazz improv context. The purpose                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
of this class is to bridge the divide between jazz harmonies                    Required of: None
and groove vamps by combining both. Furthermore, heavy                          Electable by: All
emphasis is on melodic development techniques. By the end                       Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor
of this class you will have a working knowledge of rock, funk,
reggae, ska, dance hall, drum 'n' bass, reggaeton, house, 2-         Focuses on the performance of modern arrangements of
step, 32nd note hi-hat grooves, hip-hop, go-go, and clipped          music from different South American countries such as:
and bounce beats.                                                    Venezuela, Colombia, Argentina, Peru, Ecuador, and others.
                                                                     Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic,
ENFF-327                                                             harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
           The Music of Herbie Hancock
           1 credit                                                  ENGB-221
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                             Contemporary Middle Eastern Music
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                        1 credit
           Required of: None                                                    Course Chair: Ron Savage
           Electable by: All                                                    Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 6                             Required of: None
                                                                                Electable by: All
The Herbie Hancock ensemble will transcribe, study and                          Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4
perform the music of Herbie Hancock. In this course, students
will participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students           This ensemble will perform contemporary compositions and
will gain experience in transcribing one album per week.             standard repertoire from the Arab world, Turkey, Iran, and
Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic,   Central Asia. Emphasis is on improvisation, communication
harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.                                     within the ensemble, developing a groove (including tunes
                                                                     in asymmetrical meters), and exploring the musical resources
                                                                     of the Middle East. Since the music is primarily modal, this
                                                                     ensemble offers students to an opportunity to explore dynamics,
                                                                     instrumental timbre, embellishment, and phrasing free from
                                                                     the constraints of complex harmony. Repertoire is chosen each
                                                                     semester, based on students' preference, from the work of
                                                                     artists such as: Fairuz, Abdel Wahab, Natacha Atlas, Laço Tayfa,
                                                                     Simon Shaheen, Charbel Rouhana, Omar Faruk Tekbilek, and
                                                                     many others.




                                                                                                                              Summer/Fall 2012   59
                        COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Ensemble



                        ENGB-222                                                             ENGB-301
                                   Afro-Pop                                                             Caribbean Music
                                   1 credit                                                             1 credit
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                             Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                        Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Required of: None                                                    Required of: None
                                   Electable by: All                                                    Electable by: All
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4                             Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5

                        A large ensemble modeled after afro-pop bands of West                In this course students will study and perform the music of
                        Africa but fused with American influences. Styles include            the Caribbean including artists such as: Tito Puente, Destra,
                        afro-beat, soukous, and derivative American styles. The music        Kassav', Jam Band, Ellie Matt, Sara Tavares, and many more.
                        includes covers, original compositions, and improvisations by        In this course, students will participate in weekly supervised
                        the ensemble. The first half of the semester is organized in a       rehearsals. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well
                        workshop format. The second half is used to learn repertoire.        as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
                        Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic,
                        harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.                                     ENGB-400
                                                                                                        Middle Eastern Fusion
                        ENGB-223                                                                        1 credit
                                   Celtic Music                                                         Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                   1 credit                                                             Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                             Required of: None
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                        Electable by: All
                                   Required of: None                                                    Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor
                                   Electable by: All
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4                  An advanced performance ensemble geared towards
                                                                                             experimenting with different musical styles, traditional and
                        The Celtic Music ensemble will study and perform the music           contemporary, from North Africa, the Middle East, the
                        of broad grouping of musical genres that evolved out of              Balkans, and the Mediterranean, including Lebanese, Egyptian,
                        the folk musical traditions of the Celtic people of Western          Turkish, Algerian, Bulgarian, and Gypsy traditional styles
                        Europe. In this course, students will participate in weekly,         (ex: muwashshah, sama'i, kopanitsa). Listening will include
                        supervised rehearsals. Students will gain experience in              traditional artists (ex: Fairuz, Umm Kulthum, Sayed Darwish,
                        discussion, researching, and performance of specific styles.         Selim Sesler), as well as fusion artists who have successfully
                        Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, musicality,           blended these traditional styles with more contemporary
                        individual interpretation, as well as melodic, harmonic, and         sounds and concepts (ex: Simon Shaheen, Rabih Abou-Khalil,
                        rhythmic accuracy.                                                   Bustan Abraham, Erkan Oğur, Hüsnü Şenlendirici, The NY
                                                                                             Gypsy All-Stars, Laço Tayfa). Students will be exposed to a
                        ENGB-300                                                             diverse repertoire, with a focus on odd meters and traditional
                                   Reggae Dub                                                rhythmic cycles (7/8, 10/8, etc.), as well as traditional Arabic
                                   1 credit                                                  modes and their place in contemporary composition and
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                  improvisation.
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Required of: None
                                   Electable by: All
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5

                        Reggae Dub ensemble students will participate in weekly
                        supervised rehearsals. Students will gain musical experience
                        through the study and performance of reggae dub artists
                        including: Steel Pulse, Morgan Heritage, Beres Hammund,
                        Gentleman, Willie Williams, Giant Panda, Cultura Profética,
                        Groundation, Damian Marley, and many more. Emphasis will
                        be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic,
                        and rhythmic accuracy.




           60   Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                   Ensemble
ENGB-401                                                           ENGT-200
          Microtonal Grooves                                                  Guitar Ensemble
          1 credit                                                            1 credit
          Course Chair: Ron Savage                                            Course Chair: Larry Baione
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
          Required of: None                                                   Required of: None
          Electable by: All                                                   Electable by: Guitar principals
          Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor                Prerequisites: None

In this class we will experiment with microtonal arrangements      Performing groups for guitar principals. Offered in stylistically
of Western classical, Middle Eastern and other non-Western         delineated sections, including jazz, rock, metal, acoustic pop,
and jazz/fusion compositions. Joe Maneri's 72 equal                funk, fusion, and blues, this course focuses on development
temperament octave notation system will be explained. We will      of performance skills in the specified style. Students should
start with a selection from the following compositions: Eclipse    consult the Guitar Department in order to enroll in the
(Mingus); Madoka Blue (Fiuczynski); Carrillo quarter tone string   appropriate section.
quartets; Hába quarter tone etudes; Turkish, Arabic, and
Chinese melodies; Beethoven fragments; MoonRing (3/4 tone          ENGT-233
diminished mode); and Apprehension (Fiuczynski). Students                     Jazz Guitar Trio
will have a working knowledge of notation, Western classical                  1 credit
microtonal history, intonation, and ways of soloing and comp-                 Course Chair: Larry Baione
ing in a microtonal chord scale context. We will also experiment              Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
with dance hall, drum 'n' bass, reggaeton, merengueton,                       Required of: None
house, 2-step, 32nd note hi-hat grooves, hip-hop, go-go,                      Electable by: Guitar principals
clipped and bounce beats, and new experimental beats                          Prerequisites: ILGT-119
created by students.
                                                                   This ensemble will aid the student in performing in a jazz
ENGB-402                                                           trio setting of guitar, acoustic bass, and drum set. Topics will
          Vocal Music of South Africa                              range from idiomatic introductions and endings; challenging
          1 credit                                                 standard tunes/melodies; single note, octave, and chord
          Course Chair: Ron Savage                                 soloing; soloing in double stops; solo introductions (rubato
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                            and in tempo); trading fours; comping for bass solos;
          Required of: None                                        reharmonization considerations; modulation/transposition for
          Electable by: All                                        variation of color; fingerstyle/pick considerations; and attaining
          Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor     a good sound.

The South African Vocal ensemble will study perform the            ENGT-280
music of African contemporary artists. In this course, students               Classical Guitar Repertoire
will participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will               1 credit
gain experience performing popular and traditional African                    Course Chair: Larry Baione
songs. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as              Offered: Fall, Spring
melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.                                     Required of: None
                                                                              Electable by: Guitar principals
ENGT-111                                                                      Prerequisites: None
          Guitar Performance Ensemble
          1 credit                                                 An ensemble for aspiring classical guitarists of all levels,
          Course Chair: Larry Baione                               based on the traditional repertoire class, where standard and
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                            lesser-known works of guitar literature are performed,
          Required of: All first-semester guitar principals who    coached, and discussed. Students will regularly perform
            are enrolled in neither ENMX-100 nor ENMX-121          level-appropriate pieces agreed upon with the instructor, and
          Electable by: All                                        through these performances, the class will provide a survey of
          Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 1 through 4       guitar literature. Coaching will cover issues of classical guitar
                                                                   performance such as tone, technique, musicality,
Development of ensemble group-playing skills, focusing on the      interpretation, and style. The course will also include study
roles of the guitarist. Development of melodic performance,        of major classical guitarists and their recordings.
rhythm guitar/accompaniment techniques, and improvisation
in an ensemble setting. Material will be learned through use of
recordings and call-and-response techniques as well as written
music materials. Instrumentation: six electric guitars, bass,
and drums.




                                                                                                                           Summer/Fall 2012   61
                        COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Ensemble



                        ENGT-281                                                             ENJZ-201
                                   Classical Guitar Chamber Music Ensemble 1                            The Music of Elvin Jones
                                   1 credit                                                             1 credit
                                   Course Chair: Larry Baione                                           Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring                                                Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Required of: None                                                    Required of: None
                                   Electable by: Guitar principals                                      Electable by: All
                                   Prerequisites: None                                                  Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3

                        An intermediate level ensemble focusing on the rehearsal,            The Music of Elvin Jones ensemble will focus on the work
                        recording, and performance of literature written or transcribed      of legendary jazz drummer Elvin Jones as featured with
                        for classical guitar.                                                John Coltrane, Wayne Shorter, Hank Jones, McCoy Tyner, and
                                                                                             many others. In this course, students will participate in weekly
                        ENGT-340                                                             supervised rehearsals. Students will gain experience in
                                   Guitar Artist Ensemble                                    performing and entertaining. Emphasis will be given to stylistic
                                   1 credit                                                  integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
                                   Course Chair: Larry Baione
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                             ENJZ-202
                                   Required of: None                                                    Smooth Jazz Rating 3
                                   Electable by: Guitar principals                                      1 credit
                                   Prerequisites: None                                                  Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                                                                                        Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                        In-depth approach to guitar performance, with each section of                   Required of: None
                        the course dedicated to signature repertoire and vocabulary                     Electable by: All
                        of specific artists. Students will focus on the artist’s harmonic,              Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3
                        melodic, and rhythmic styles. Students should consult the
                        Guitar Department in order to enroll in the appropriate section.     The Level 3 Smooth Jazz ensemble will study and perform
                                                                                             smooth jazz in the context of a small band. Students will
                        ENGT-381                                                             participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. They will focus on
                                   Classical Guitar Chamber Music Ensemble 2                 playing smooth jazz compositions, which involve contemporary
                                   1 credit                                                  grooves such as r&b, hip-hop, funk, jazz, and Latin.
                                   Course Chair: Larry Baione                                Additionally, students will be introduced to the use of jazz
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring                                     vocabulary in the context of the smooth jazz genre. Emphasis
                                   Required of: None                                         will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic,
                                   Electable by: Guitar principals                           and rhythmic accuracy.
                                   Prerequisites: ENGT-281
                                                                                             ENJZ-203
                        Sight-reading and performing more advanced literature written                   Big Band Jazz Rating 3
                        or transcribed for classical guitar.                                            1 credit
                                                                                                        Course Chair: Ron Savage
                        ENJZ-200                                                                        Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Small Band Jazz Rating 3                                             Required of: None
                                   1 credit                                                             Electable by: All
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                             Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Required of: None                                         Big Band Jazz Rating 3 ensemble will perform arrangements
                                   Electable by: All                                         associated with, but not limited to, jazz legends such as
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3                  Count Basie, Woody Herman, and Buddy Rich. In addition,
                                                                                             arrangements encompassing the contemporary genre may be
                        Level 3 Small Band Jazz ensemble will study and perform              included. Emphasis will be given to hearing and expressing
                        jazz in the context of a small band. Students will participate       your musical ideas with stylistic integrity, as well as melodic,
                        in weekly supervised rehearsals. They will focus on playing          harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
                        standard jazz arrangements with special attention to the
                        swing feel, playing through song forms, and the further
                        development of standard jazz repertoire and vocabulary.
                        Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as
                        melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.




           62   Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                      Ensemble
ENJZ-204                                                             ENJZ-222
           The Music of Martino, Pass, and                                      Smooth Jazz Rating 4
           Wes Montgomery                                                       1 credit
           1 credit                                                             Course Chair: Ron Savage
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                             Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                        Required of: None
           Required of: None                                                    Electable by: All
           Electable by: All                                                    Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3
                                                                     The Smooth Jazz Rating 4 ensemble will study and perform
The Martino, Pass, and Wes Montgomery ensemble will                  smooth jazz in the context of a small band. Students will
study and perform the music of Pat Martino, Joe Pass, and            participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. They will focus on
Wes Montgomery. In this course, students will participate in         playing smooth jazz compositions, which involve contemporary
weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will gain experience          grooves such as r&b, hip-hop, neo-soul, funk, jazz, and Latin.
in performing this style of jazz through exercises and               Students will be introduced to the use of standard jazz
transcription. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as     vocabulary in the context of the aforementioned styles, which
well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.                    will include the concept of groove oriented improvisation.
                                                                     Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic,
ENJZ-220                                                             harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
           Small Band Jazz Rating 4
           1 credit                                                  ENJZ-223
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                             Scofield, Carlton, and Ford
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                        1 credit
           Required of: None                                                    Course Chair: Ron Savage
           Electable by: All                                                    Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4                             Required of: None
                                                                                Electable by: All
The Small Band Jazz Rating 4 ensemble will study and                            Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4
perform jazz in the context of a small band. Students will
participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. They will focus on      The Scofield, Carlton, and Ford ensemble will study and perform
playing standard jazz arrangements with special attention to         the music of John Scofield, Larry Carlton, and Robben Ford.
the swing feel, playing through song forms, and the further          In this course, students will participate in weekly supervised
development of standard jazz repertoire and vocabulary.              rehearsals. Students will gain experience in performing this style
Additionally, students will be introduced to improvising over        of music through exercises and specific repertoire associated
complex chord changes, more complex song forms, as well as           with these artists. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity,
an introduction to a variety of rhythmic feels within the genre      as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
of jazz. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as
melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.                            ENJZ-224
                                                                                Jazz Flute Ensemble
ENJZ-221                                                                        1 credit
           Odd Meter Jazz                                                       Course Chair: Ron Savage
           1 credit                                                             Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                             Required of: None
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                        Electable by: All
           Required of: None                                                    Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4
           Electable by: All
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4                  The Jazz Flute ensemble is modeled after the group Supersax.
                                                                     In this course flute students will get the experience playing in
An ensemble designed to improve the ability of performers            a section situation with the correct nuances and articulations.
in an ensemble context to understand and master different            The rhythm section players will have the opportunity to read
irregular or "not common" time signatures that we often              parts similar to big band charts. The arrangements are also
find in today's music. The students will learn and perform           written for students to improve their soloing skills. Repertoire
compositions containing different rhythmic concepts from             for this ensemble consists of jazz standards and original jazz
various styles of music. Emphasis will be given to hearing           compositions.
and expressing your musical ideas with stylistic integrity, as
well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.




                                                                                                                              Summer/Fall 2012   63
                        COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Ensemble



                        ENJZ-225                                                             ENJZ-228
                                   R&B/Gospel Jazz                                                      Jazz and Latin Jazz Rating 4
                                   1 credit                                                             1 credit
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                             Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                        Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Required of: None                                                    Required of: None
                                   Electable by: All                                                    Electable by: All
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4                             Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4

                        The R&B/Gospel Jazz ensemble will study and perform a                The Jazz and Latin Jazz ensemble will study Latin influenced
                        mixture of r&b and gospel Jazz with and emphasis on the              jazz and perform the music of contemporary artists that mix
                        hybrid of jazz and gospel harmonic concepts. The students            jazz harmony and improvisation while performing over Latin
                        will be introduced to the concept of playing gospel jazz             grooves. In this course, students will participate in weekly
                        and improvising in the context of r&b influenced grooves.            supervised rehearsals. Students will gain experience in per-
                        Students will participate in weekly supervised rehearsals.           forming styles and rhythms as they apply to rhythm section
                        Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic,   playing and instrumental solo performance techniques in the
                        harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.                                     Afro-Cuban style. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity,
                                                                                             as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy and
                        ENJZ-226                                                             improvisational techniques.
                                   Piano Trio
                                   1 credit                                                  ENJZ-229
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                             Jazz Featuring Vocals
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                        1 credit
                                   Required of: None                                                    Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                   Electable by: All                                                    Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4                             Required of: None
                                                                                                        Electable by: All
                        The Piano Trio ensemble repertoire starts with Ahmad Jamal                      Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4
                        and continues through Wynton Kelly, Red Garland, Bill Evans,
                        Tommy Flanagan, Oscar Peterson, McCoy Tyner, Jacky Terrasson,        The Jazz Featuring Vocals ensemble will study and perform
                        Cyrus Chestnut, and Benny Green. Mandatory out of class              vocal and vocalized jazz compositions in the context of a small
                        listening assignments will be emphasized. Students will work         band. Students will participate in weekly supervised rehearsals.
                        on their own reinterpreted arrangements of standards and             They will focus on playing standard jazz arrangements with
                        play original compositions. Odd meters will also be explored.        special attention to accompanying a vocalist, swing feel,
                                                                                             dynamics, playing through song forms, and the further
                        ENJZ-227                                                             development of standard jazz repertoire and vocabulary.
                                   Django Reinhardt/Gypsy Jazz                               Additionally, students will be introduced to improvising over
                                   1 credit                                                  complex chord changes, more complex song forms, as well as
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                  an introduction to a variety of rhythmic feels within the genre
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                             of jazz. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as
                                   Required of: None                                         melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
                                   Electable by: All
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4                  ENJZ-230
                                                                                                        The Music of Joni Mitchell
                        The Django Reinhardt/Gypsy Jazz ensemble will study and                         1 credit
                        perform the music of Django Reinhardt and other artists in the                  Course Chair: Ron Savage
                        idiom. The music is primarily acoustic string and guitar based.                 Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                        Students will participate in weekly supervised rehearsals,                      Required of: None
                        develop a memorized repertoire, and gain experience in stylistic                Electable by: All
                        improvisation and melodic interpretation. Emphasis on stylistic                 Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor
                        integrity via listening and transcription, as well as melodic,
                        harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy. Course includes end-of-             A small group ensemble performing material composed or
                        semester performance.                                                arranged by, or otherwise associated with, Joni Mitchell. In this
                                                                                             course, students will participate in weekly supervised rehearsals.
                                                                                             Students will gain experience in performing every song selected
                                                                                             for the semester. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity as
                                                                                             well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.




           64   Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                      Ensemble
ENJZ-231                                                             ENJZ-235
           Piano Trio with Vocals Rating 4                                      The Music of Oregon
           1 credit                                                             1 credit
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                             Course Chair: Ron Savage
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                        Offered: Fall, Spring
           Required of: None                                                    Required of: None
           Electable by: All                                                    Electable by: All
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4                             Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4

The Piano Trio with Vocals ensemble will study, learn, and           This ensemble explores more complicated small group jazz
perform the music of standards, bossa novas, sambas and              compositions using mixed meters and unique instrumentation.
original arrangements with singers. In this course, students will    Many of the compositions are written by members of the
participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will gain      quartet Oregon. Students are encouraged to write and arrange
experience in performing with singers and singers will gain          for this ensemble. The ensemble will perform at least once
experience in writing charts and working with accompanists           per semester.
in a jazz setting. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity,
as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.                 ENJZ-300
                                                                                Small Band Jazz Rating 5
ENJZ-232                                                                        1 credit
           Big Band Jazz Rating 4                                               Course Chair: Ron Savage
           1 credit                                                             Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                             Required of: None
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                        Electable by: All
           Required of: None                                                    Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5
           Electable by: All
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4                  Small group of instrumentals doing their own original
                                                                     compositions in jazz, rock, swing, and Latin idioms. In this
The Big Band Jazz Rating 4 ensemble will study and perform           course, students will participate in weekly supervised rehearsals.
previously performed and original big band charts. In this           Students will gain experience in performing every song selected
course, students will participate in weekly supervised rehearsals.   for the semester. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as
Students will gain experience in ensemble performance                well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
(intonation, phrasing, blending, and articulation). Emphasis
will be given to hearing and expressing your musical ideas with      ENJZ-301
stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic                 Jazz Octet
accuracy. Good listening skills are required.                                   1 credit
                                                                                Course Chair: Ron Savage
ENJZ-233                                                                        Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Organ Grooves                                                        Required of: None
           1 credit                                                             Electable by: All
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                             Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Required of: None                                         The Jazz Octet ensemble will study and perform various styles
           Electable by: All                                         of contemporary jazz. In this course, students will participate
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4                  in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will gain experience
                                                                     in performing all styles of jazz and Latin music. Emphasis will
The Organ Grooves ensemble will transcribe, study and                be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic,
perform the music of Jimmy Smith, Dr. Lonnie Smith, Rhoda            and rhythmic accuracy.
Scott, and Joey DeFrancesco. In this course, students will
participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will
gain experience in transcribing and performing recordings of
the artist above. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity,
as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.




                                                                                                                              Summer/Fall 2012   65
                        COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Ensemble



                        ENJZ-302                                                             ENJZ-305
                                   Bebop Ensemble                                                      New Approaches/Jazz Decomposition
                                   1 credit                                                            1 credit
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                            Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Required of: None                                                   Required of: None
                                   Electable by: All                                                   Electable by: All
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5                            Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5

                        The Bebop ensemble will study and perform important mate-            The New Approaches/Jazz Decomposition ensemble will
                        rial from the bebop era including standard bebop repertoire          study and perform original performances and arrangements
                        and original compositions. In this course, students will             of standard jazz repertoire. Under the guidance of the course
                        participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will           instructor, the ensemble will collectively create alternate
                        gain ensemble performance experience, including playing              approaches to these standard arrangements through an
                        up-tempo, intonation, phrasing, blending, and articulation.          exploration of reharmonization, new rhythmic meters,
                        Emphasis will be given to hearing and expressing your                rhythmic displacement, and alternate approaches to melodic
                        musical ideas with stylistic integrity, as well as melodic,          interpretation. Students will gain experience in ensemble
                        harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.                                     performance through learning and performing complex
                                                                                             arrangements. Emphasis will be given to hearing and express-
                        ENJZ-303                                                             ing your musical ideas with stylistic integrity, as well as
                                   The Music of Charles Mingus                               melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
                                   1 credit
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                  ENJZ-306
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                       Miles Davis Electric
                                   Required of: None                                                   1 credit
                                   Electable by: All                                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5                            Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                                                                                       Required of: None
                        The Music of Charles Mingus ensemble will study and                            Electable by: All
                        perform seminal work form legendary jazz bassist                               Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5
                        Charles Mingus. In this course, students will participate in
                        weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will gain ensemble            The Miles Davis Electric ensemble will study and perform the
                        performance experience, including playing complex                    music of the Miles Davis groups from the years 1969 to 1991.
                        arrangements, intonation, phrasing, blending, and articula-          In this course, students will participate in weekly supervised
                        tion. Emphasis will be given to hearing and expressing               rehearsals. Students will gain experience in performing the
                        your musical ideas with stylistic integrity, as well as melodic,     early jazz/electric fusion of the Davis bands and then move
                        harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.                                     into the pop/jazz bands with which he finished his career.
                                                                                             There will be focused discussions and exercises on improvisa-
                        ENJZ-304                                                             tion and group interaction. Emphasis will be given to stylistic
                                   Jazz Sextet                                               integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
                                   1 credit
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                  ENJZ-307
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                       Jazz and Latin Jazz Rating 5
                                   Required of: None                                                   1 credit
                                   Electable by: All                                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5                            Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                                                                                       Required of: None
                        The Jazz Sextet ensemble will study and perform the music of                   Electable by: All
                        all jazz standards, arranged by George Zonce. In this course,                  Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5
                        students will participate in weekly supervised rehearsals.
                        Students will gain experience in performing bebop jazz.              The Jazz and Latin Jazz ensemble will study Latin-influenced
                        Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic,   jazz and perform the music of contemporary artists that mix
                        harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.                                     jazz harmony and improvisation while performing over Latin
                                                                                             grooves. In this course, students will participate in weekly
                                                                                             supervised rehearsals. Students will gain experience in
                                                                                             performing styles and rhythms as they apply to rhythm
                                                                                             section playing and instrumental solo performance techniques
                                                                                             in the Afro-Cuban style. Emphasis will be given to stylistic
                                                                                             integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic
                                                                                             accuracy and improvisational techniques.




           66   Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                         Ensemble
ENJZ-320                                                              ENJZ-323
           The Music of Wes Montgomery                                           The Music of Cedar Walton
           1 credit                                                              1 credit
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                              Course Chair: Ron Savage
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                         Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Required of: None                                                     Required of: None
           Electable by: All                                                     Electable by: All
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 6                              Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 6

The Wes Montgomery ensemble will study and perform the                The Cedar Walton ensemble will study the music of legendary
music of Wes Montgomery. In this course, students will                pianist Cedar Walton. In this course, students will participate
participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will gain       in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will gain experience
experience in performing and interacting with other players in        in performing tunes with unusual musical forms, mixing jazz
a musical conversation. Emphasis will be given to hearing and         and Latin jazz styles. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity,
expressing your musical ideas with stylistic integrity, as well as    as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy. Good listening
skills are required.                                                  ENJZ-324
                                                                                 Free Jazz/Bebop
ENJZ-321                                                                         1 credit
           Wayne Shorter Ensemble                                                Course Chair: Ron Savage
           1 credit                                                              Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                              Required of: None
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                         Electable by: All
           Required of: None                                                     Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 6
           Electable by: All
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 6                   The Free Jazz/Bebop ensemble will study and perform
                                                                      important material from the free jazz/bebop era. In this course,
The Wayne Shorter Ensemble will study and perform seminal             students will participate in weekly supervised rehearsals.
work from the legendary jazz master composer and                      Students will gain ensemble performance experience,
saxophonist Wayne Shorter, including original arrangements of         including playing up-tempo, intonation, phrasing, blending,
his work. In this course, students will participate in weekly         and articulation. Emphasis will be given to hearing and
supervised rehearsals. Students will gain ensemble performance        expressing your musical ideas with stylistic integrity, as well
experience, including playing up-tempo, intonation, phrasing,         as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
blending, and articulation. Emphasis will be given to hearing
and expressing your musical ideas with stylistic integrity, as well   ENJZ-325
as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.                                     The Music of Charlie Parker
                                                                                 1 credit
ENJZ-322                                                                         Course Chair: Ron Savage
           The Music of Horace Silver                                            Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           1 credit                                                              Required of: None
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                              Electable by: All
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                         Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 6
           Required of: None
           Electable by: All                                          The Music of Charlie Parker ensemble will study and perform
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 6                   seminal work from the legendary bebop innovator and master
                                                                      saxophonist Charlie Parker, including original arrangements
The Horace Silver ensemble will study and perform this                of his work. In this course, students will participate in weekly
esteemed artist's compositions. Students will gain experience         supervised rehearsals. Students will gain ensemble performance
in developing their skills on melodic, complex chord structure        experience, including playing up-tempo, intonation, phrasing,
and rhythmic accuracies as well as stylistic integrity and            blending, and articulation. Emphasis will be given to hearing
maturity, i.e. phrasing, articulation, dynamics, and swing            and expressing your musical ideas with stylistic integrity, as well
interpretation. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as     as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.




                                                                                                                                 Summer/Fall 2012   67
                        COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Ensemble



                        ENJZ-326                                                              ENJZ-329
                                   New Orleans Street Band                                               ECM/Free Jazz
                                   1 credit                                                              1 credit
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                              Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                         Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Required of: None                                                     Required of: None
                                   Electable by: All                                                     Electable by: All
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5                              Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 6

                        The New Orleans Street Band ensemble will study and per-              The ECM/Free Jazz ensemble will study and perform the
                        form classic work from New Orleans street band repertoire,            music of ECM artists such as Kenny Wheeler, Dave Holland,
                        including original arrangements. In this course, students will        John Abercrombie, and Keith Jarrett. Other artists include
                        participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will            John Hollenbeck, Dave Douglas, Wayne Shorter, Chris Speed
                        gain ensemble performance experience, including playing               and others. Students will gain experience in performing an
                        up-tempo, intonation, phrasing, blending, and articulation.           end-of semester concert. Emphasis will be given to stylistic
                        Emphasis will be given to hearing and expressing your musical         integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
                        ideas with stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and
                        rhythmic accuracy.                                                    ENJZ-330
                                                                                                         Original Compositions
                        ENJZ-327                                                                         1 credit
                                   Small Band Jazz Rating 6                                              Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                   1 credit                                                              Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                              Required of: None
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                         Electable by: All
                                   Required of: None                                                     Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5
                                   Electable by: All
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 6                   The Original Composition ensemble will study and perform
                                                                                              original compositions provided by the teachers, as well as
                        The Small Band Jazz Rating 6 ensemble will study and perform          original compositions of the students in the ensemble class. The
                        important material from the jazz repertoire, including original       focus of the class will be on performing original compositions
                        arrangements. In this course, students will participate in weekly     written for a small jazz group. Additionally, critical analysis
                        supervised rehearsals. Students will gain experience in ensemble      of the musicality of the pieces will be included in a group
                        performance through a study of the following: complex                 discussion as part of the class. Emphasis will be given to
                        harmony, playing up-tempo, group interaction, dynamics,               hearing and expressing your musical ideas with stylistic integrity,
                        phrasing, blending, and articulation. Emphasis will be given to       as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
                        hearing and expressing your musical ideas with stylistic integrity,
                        as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.                  ENJZ-331
                                                                                                         9-Piece Jazz Ensemble
                        ENJZ-328                                                                         1 credit
                                   The Music of Dave Holland                                             Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                   1 credit                                                              Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                              Required of: None
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                         Electable by: All
                                   Required of: None                                                     Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 6
                                   Electable by: All
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 6                   The 9-Piece Jazz ensemble is a medium size ensemble that
                                                                                              performs arrangements in a variety of contemporary jazz styles.
                        The Dave Holland ensemble will study, analyze, and perform            In this course, students will participate in weekly supervised
                        the music of great bassist, band leader, composer, and                rehearsals. Students will gain experience in performing all styles
                        arranger Dave Holland. In this course, students will participate      of jazz and Latin music. Emphasis will be given to stylistic
                        in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will gain experience        integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
                        in performing Dave Holland compositions. Emphasis will be             Instrumentation: mixed winds, piano, guitar, bass, drums,
                        given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and       and vibes.
                        rhythmic accuracy. A recital will be the final performance for
                        the band. Each student will be required to arrange one of
                        the tunes the band will perform at the end of the semester.
                        Participation in this band requires on average a minimum of
                        six hours (per week) of out of class preparation.




           68   Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                      Ensemble
ENJZ-332                                                             ENJZ-401
           Piano Trio with Vocals Rating 5                                      Rainbow Big Band
           1 credit                                                             1 credit
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                             Course Chair: Ron Savage
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                        Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Required of: None                                                    Required of: None
           Electable by: All                                                    Electable by: All
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5                             Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor

The Piano Trio with Vocals ensemble will study, analyze, and         The Rainbow Big Band Ensemble will study and perform
perform the music of a wide variety of jazz material ranging         previously performed arrangements and original arrangements
from standard repertoire drawn from the Great American               written by Phil Wilson. In this course, students will participate
Songbook through original student compositions. In this              in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will gain experience
course, students will participate in weekly supervised               in ensemble performance through a focus on intonation,
rehearsals. Students will gain experience in chart preparation,      phrasing, blending, and articulation. Emphasis will be given to
rehearsal techniques, and performance practice. Emphasis will        hearing and expressing your musical ideas with stylistic integrity,
be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic,       as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy. Good
and rhythmic accuracy.                                               listening skills are required.

ENJZ-333                                                             ENJZ-402
           Chord Scale Madness                                                  Avant-Garde Ensemble
           1 credit                                                             1 credit
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                             Course Chair: Ron Savage
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                        Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Required of: None                                                    Required of: None
           Electable by: All                                                    Electable by: All
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 6                             Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 7

An ensemble that performs outstanding student works                  The Avant-Garde ensemble will study and perform important
written in AR-201 Chord Scale Voicings for Arranging in an           material from the avant-garde era. In this course, students
annual concert entitled Chord Scale Madness. Emphasis will           will participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will
be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic,       gain experience in ensemble performance, including playing
and rhythmic accuracy. Instrumentation: two trumpets,                up-tempo, intonation, phrasing, blending, and articulation.
alto, tenor, trombone, baritone, piano, guitar, bass, drums,         Emphasis will be given to hearing and expressing your musical
and percussion.                                                      ideas with stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and
                                                                     rhythmic accuracy.
ENJZ-P400
           Ensemble Master Class                                     ENJZ-403
           1 credit                                                             Concert Jazz Orchestra
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                             2 credits
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                        Course Chair: Ron Savage
           Required of: None                                                    Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Electable by: All                                                    Required of: None
           Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor                 Electable by: All
                                                                                Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor
The Ensemble Master Class is designed for high level jazz
players that are interested in further developing their individual   The Concert Jazz Orchestra will study and perform original
sound and the sound of their own ensemble or band. The               composition provide by the teachers, as well as, original
course is a focused on a dynamic view of essential elements of       compositions of the students in the ensemble class. The
a performing jazz artist, including what is means to be a jazz       focus of the class will be on performing original compositions
artist, how to present your music, how to engage an audience,        written for a big band. Emphasis will be given to hearing
programing, and band leading. Additionally, critical analysis and    and expressing your musical ideas with stylistic integrity, as
discussion of the musicality of the material performed in class      well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy. An end-of-
will be included as part of the class.                               semester concert is usually scheduled.




                                                                                                                              Summer/Fall 2012   69
                        COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Ensemble



                        ENJZ-404                                                            ENJZ-407
                                   Small Band Jazz                                                     Contemporary Jazz
                                   1 credit                                                            1 credit
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                            Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Required of: None                                                   Required of: None
                                   Electable by: All                                                   Electable by: All
                                   Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor                Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 7

                        The Small Band Jazz ensemble is designed for high level             The Contemporary Jazz ensemble is designed for high level
                        student performers who are focused on their development as          student performers who are focused on their development as
                        jazz instrumentalists. This ensemble will perform a wide range      jazz instrumentalists. This ensemble will perform repertoire
                        of jazz styles including, swing, bebop, free, avant-garde, and      from the contemporary jazz genre, which has been developed
                        contemporary. Students will gain ensemble experience through        out of the jazz tradition and been influenced by world music
                        weekly performances that focus on group interaction,                and contemporary popular music. Additionally, the ensemble
                        swinging, dynamics, phrasing, as well as individual and group       will perform previously performed and original contemporary
                        improvisation. Emphasis will be given to hearing and expressing     jazz compositions by the teacher. Students will be encouraged
                        your musical ideas with stylistic integrity, as well as melodic,    to present their original contemporary jazz compositions as
                        harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.                                    material to be performed by the ensemble. Students will gain
                                                                                            ensemble experience through weekly performances that focus
                        ENJZ-405                                                            on group interaction, swinging, dynamics, phrasing, as well as
                                   Blue Note Era Jazz                                       individual and group improvisation. Emphasis will be given to
                                   1 credit                                                 hearing and expressing your musical ideas with stylistic
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                 integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Required of: None                                        ENJZ-408
                                   Electable by: All                                                   Electric Jazz
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 7                            1 credit
                                                                                                       Course Chair: Ron Savage
                        The Blue Note Era ensemble will study and perform the                          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                        music of Blue Note artists recorded from 1960 to the present.                  Required of: None
                        Students should have some knowledge of this idiom and artists                  Electable by: All
                        such as Freddie Hubbard, McCoy Tyner, Wayne Shorter, John                      Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor
                        Coltrane, Joe Henderson, Hank Mobley, and Horace Silver. In
                        this course, students will participate in weekly supervised         The Electric Jazz ensemble is designed for high level students
                        rehearsals. Students will gain experience in performing original    performers that are interested in the use of electronic
                        music of this era. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity,   instruments and electronics in the jazz performance. This
                        as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.                ensemble will perform repertoire from the contemporary jazz
                                                                                            genre, which has been developed out of the jazz tradition and
                        ENJZ-406                                                            influenced by world music and contemporary popular music,
                                   Miles Davis Acoustic                                     including funk and rock. Additionally, the ensemble will
                                   1 credit                                                 perform previously performed and original contemporary jazz
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                 compositions by the teacher. Students will be encouraged to
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                            present their original contemporary jazz compositions as
                                   Required of: None                                        material to be performed by the ensemble. Students will gain
                                   Electable by: All                                        ensemble experience through weekly performances that focus
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 7                 on group interaction, swinging, dynamics, phrasing, as well as
                                                                                            individual and group improvisation. Emphasis will be given to
                        The Miles Davis Acoustic ensemble will study and perform the        hearing and expressing your musical ideas with stylistic integrity,
                        music of the Miles Davis groups from the years 1945-1969.           as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
                        In this course, students will participate in weekly supervised
                        rehearsals. Students will gain experience in performing bebop,
                        hard bop, cool, modal, and mainstream style music of the
                        Davis groups that used only acoustic instruments. There will
                        be focused discussions and exercises on improvisation and
                        group interaction. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity,
                        as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.




           70   Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                    Ensemble
ENJZ-409                                                             ENJZ-412
           The Music of Joe Henderson                                          The Music of Art Blakey
           1 credit                                                            1 credit
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                            Course Chair: Ron Savage
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Required of: None                                                   Required of: None
           Electable by: All                                                   Electable by: All
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 7                            Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 7

The Joe Henderson ensemble will study, arrange, and perform          The Art Blakey ensemble will study and perform the music of
the music of Joe Henderson. In this course, students will            Art Blakey. In this course, students will participate in weekly
participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will gain      supervised rehearsals. Students will gain experience in per-
experience in performing the compositions of Joe Henderson.          forming, transcribing, and intensive listening. Emphasis will be
Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic,   given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and
harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.                                     rhythmic accuracy.

ENJZ-410                                                             ENJZ-413
           The Music of Ornette Coleman                                        Urban Outreach Orchestra
           1 credit                                                            1 credit
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                            Course Chair: Ron Savage
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Required of: None                                                   Required of: None
           Electable by: All                                                   Electable by: All
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 7                            Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor

The Ornette Coleman ensemble will study and perform all              The Urban Outreach Orchestra will study and perform original
forms of modern jazz, both with form and free form. The              arrangements provide by the teachers, as well as original
course will focus on the stylistic interpretation of jazz            arrangements and compositions of the students in the
according to Ornette Coleman. In this course, students will          ensemble class. The focus of the class will be on performing
participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will gain      original compositions written for a big band. Emphasis will be
experience in performing this style of jazz through exercises        given to hearing, expressing your musical ideas with stylistic
and transcription. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity,    integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.                 Additionally, this group may be involved in performing in the
                                                                     surrounding communities.
ENJZ-411
           Rainbow All-Stars                                         ENJZ-414
           1 credit                                                            Jazz Composition Ensemble
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                            1 credit
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                       Course Chair: Ron Savage
           Required of: None                                                   Offered: Fall, Spring
           Electable by: All                                                   Required of: None
           Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor                Electable by: All
                                                                               Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 7
The Rainbow All-Star ensemble is designed for high-level
players interested in developing their ability to play in a big      The Jazz Composition ensemble will rehearse, record, and
band. In this course students will study and perform classic         perform the 10-piece music of students from AR-328 along
arrangements from the Great American Songbook, as well as            with music of the instructor. In this course, students will
original arrangements written by Phil Wilson. In this course,        participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will gain
students will participate in weekly supervised rehearsals.           experience in ensemble performance (intonation, phrasing,
Students will gain experience in ensemble performance                blending, and articulation) along with improvisational and
through a focus on intonation, phrasing, blending, and               comping skills (rhythm section). Emphasis will be given to
articulation. Emphasis will be given to hearing, expressing          stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic
your musical ideas with stylistic integrity, as well as melodic,     accuracy.
harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy. Instrumentation: mixed
winds, piano, guitar, bass, and drums.




                                                                                                                            Summer/Fall 2012   71
                        COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Ensemble



                        ENJZ-415                                                                ENLT-220
                                   Advanced Repertory Big Band Ensemble                                    Latin/Afro-Cuban Styles
                                   1 credit                                                                1 credit
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                                Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Required of: None                                                       Required of: None
                                   Electable by: All                                                       Electable by: All
                                   Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor                    Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4

                                                                                                In the Latin/Afro-Cuban Styles ensemble, students will
                        ENJZ-416                                                                learn and apply instrument-appropriate roles to perform
                                   Contemporary Small Band Jazz                                 popular music from Cuba and Brazil. Through participation
                                   1 credit                                                     in weekly supervised rehearsals, students will gain experience
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                     in performing styles such as son, descarga, cha-cha, mambo,
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                danzón, songo, and bembé from Cuba, as well as bossa
                                   Required of: None                                            nova, samba, and partido alto from Brazil. Emphasis will be
                                   Electable by: All                                            given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 7                     rhythmic accuracy.

                        Contemporary Small Band Jazz is designed for high-level                 ENLT-221
                        student performers who are focused on their development as                         Brazilian Instrumental Rating 4
                        jazz instrumentalists. This ensemble will perform a wide range                     1 credit
                        of jazz styles, including jazz fusion, Latin jazz, bebop, and                      Course Chair: Ron Savage
                        contemporary jazz. Students will gain ensemble experience                          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                        through weekly performances that focus on group interaction,                       Required of: None
                        swinging, dynamics, phrasing, as well as individual and group                      Electable by: All
                        improvisation. Emphasis will be given to hearing and expressing                    Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4
                        your musical ideas with stylistic integrity, as well as melodic,
                        harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.                                        In Brazilian Instrumental Rating 4, students will learn and
                                                                                                apply instrument-appropriate roles to perform Brazilian
                        ENLT-200                                                                music. Through participation in weekly supervised rehearsals,
                                   Introduction to Latin Jazz                                   students will gain experience in performing Brazilian music
                                   1 credit                                                     that draws on styles such as bossa nova, samba, partido alto,
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                     choro, and afoxé. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity,
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                musicality, individual interpretation, as well as melodic,
                                   Required of: None                                            harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy. Instrumentation: mixed
                                   Electable by: All                                            winds, piano, bass, guitar, and drums.
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3
                                                                                                ENLT-222
                        In the Introduction to Latin Jazz ensemble, students will learn                    Afro-Cuban Music Rating 4
                        and apply instrument-appropriate roles to perform traditional                      1 credit
                        popular music from Cuba and Brazil. Through participation in                       Course Chair: Ron Savage
                        weekly supervised rehearsals, students will gain experience in                     Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                        performing styles such as son, descarga, cha-cha, and mambo                        Required of: None
                        from Cuba, as well as bossa nova, samba, and partido alto                          Electable by: All
                        from Brazil. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well                Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4
                        as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
                                                                                                The Afro-Cuban Music Rating 4 ensemble will survey and
                        ENLT-201                                                                perform the music of Afro-influenced Cuban, American Latin,
                                   Brazilian Instrumental Rating 3                              and Latin jazz. In this course, students will participate in
                                   1 credit                                                     weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will gain experience in
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                     discussion, researching, and performance of specific styles.
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic,
                                   Required of: None                                            harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
                                   Electable by: All
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3

                        In Brazilian Instrumental Rating 3, students will learn and
                        apply instrument-appropriate roles to perform Brazilian
                        music. Through participation in weekly supervised rehearsals,
                        students will gain experience in performing Brazilian music
                        that draws on styles such as bossa nova and samba. Emphasis
                        will be given to stylistic integrity, musicality, as well as melodic,
                        harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.

           72   Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                    Ensemble
ENLT-223                                                            ENLT-301
           Afro-Cuban Folkloric Music                                          Brazilian Instrumental Rating 5
           1 credit                                                            1 credit
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                            Course Chair: Ron Savage
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Required of: None                                                   Required of: None
           Electable by: All                                                   Electable by: All
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4                            Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5

The Afro-Cuban Folkloric ensemble will study and perform            In Brazilian Instrumental Rating 5, students will learn and apply
traditional folkloric Afro-Cuban music. In this course, students    instrument-appropriate roles to perform Brazilian music.
will participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will     Through participation in weekly supervised rehearsals, students
gain experience in performing styles and rhythms as they            will gain experience in performing Brazilian music that draws
apply to rhythm section playing and instrumental solo per-          on styles such as bossa nova, samba, partido alto, choro, and
formance techniques in the Afro-Cuban style. Emphasis will          afoxé, as well as contemporary Brazilian styles including samba
be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic,      funk and samba reggae. Emphasis will be given to stylistic
and rhythmic accuracy and improvisational techniques.               integrity, musicality, and individual interpretation, as well as
                                                                    melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy. Instrumentation:
ENLT-224                                                            mixed winds, piano, bass, guitar, and drums.
           Vocal Music of Cuba and Brazil
           1 credit                                                 ENLT-320
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                            Afro-Cuban Music Rating 6
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                       1 credit
           Required of: None                                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage
           Electable by: All                                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4                            Required of: None
                                                                               Electable by: All
The Vocal Music of Cuba and Brazil ensemble will learn, listen,                Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 6
and perform the music of Ibrahim Ferrer, Polo Montañez,
Celia Cruz, Haila María Mompié, Cartola, Johnny Alf, Wilson         The Afro-Cuban Music Rating 6 ensemble will study and
Simonal, and Emílio Santiago. In this course, students will         perform the music of Afro-influenced Cuban, American Latin,
participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will gain     and Latin jazz. In this course, students will participate in
experience in transcribing and performing music recorded by         weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will gain experience
the artists above. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity,   in discussion, researching, and performance of specific styles.
as well as melodic, harmonic, lyrical, and rhythmic accuracy.       Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, musicality, and
                                                                    individual interpretation, as well as melodic, harmonic, and
ENLT-300                                                            rhythmic accuracy.
           Latin/Afro-Cuban Jazz
           1 credit                                                 ENLT-400
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                            The Music of the Dominican Republic
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                       1 credit
           Required of: None                                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage
           Electable by: All                                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5                            Required of: None
                                                                               Electable by: All
In the Latin/Afro-Cuban Jazz ensemble, students will learn and                 Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor
apply instrument-appropriate roles to perform contemporary
Latin jazz. Through participation in weekly supervised              The Music of the Dominican Republic ensemble will study and
rehearsals, students will gain experience in performing Latin       perform the music of Afro-influenced Cuban, American Latin,
jazz that draws on styles such as son, descarga, cha-cha,           and Latin jazz. In this course, students will participate in
mambo, danzón, songo, bembé, abakuá, and timba from                 weekly, supervised rehearsals. Students will gain experience
Cuba; bossa nova, samba, partido alto, choro and afoxé from         in discussion, researching, and performance of specific styles.
Brazil; festejo from Peru; joropo from Venezuela; milonga and       Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, musicality, and
chacarera from Argentina. Emphasis will be given to stylistic       individual interpretation, as well as melodic, harmonic, and
integrity and individual interpretation, as well as melodic,        rhythmic accuracy.
harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.




                                                                                                                            Summer/Fall 2012   73
                        COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Ensemble



                        ENLT-401                                                          ENMX-121
                                   Salsa Ensemble                                                    Mixed Styles Rating 2
                                   1 credit                                                          1 credit
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                          Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                     Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Required of: None                                                 Required of: All first-semester students who are
                                   Electable by: All                                                   enrolled in neither ENGT-111 nor ENMX-100
                                   Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor              Electable by: All
                                                                                                     Prerequisites: ENMX-100 or overall ensemble
                        The Salsa ensemble will study and perform the music of                         rating 2
                        Eddie Palmieri, Isaac Delgado, Fania All-Stars, El Gran Combo,
                        Marc Anthony, and Los Van Van. In this course, students will      An instrumental ensemble that focuses on performance in
                        participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will gain   a variety of musical styles. Classes will cover performance
                        experience in performing traditional and contemporary salsa       techniques utilized in contemporary musical idioms such as
                        as well as folk rhythms from Cuba and Puerto Rico such as         jazz, rock, and blues. In this course, students will participate in
                        guaguancó, bomba, and plena. Emphasis will be given to            weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will gain experience in
                        stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic   performing every song selected for the semester. Emphasis will
                        accuracy.                                                         be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and
                                                                                          rhythmic accuracy.
                        ENLT-402
                                   Latin Jazz Originals                                   ENMX-200
                                   1 credit                                                          Mixed Styles Rating 3
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                          1 credit
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                     Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                   Required of: None                                                 Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Electable by: All                                                 Required of: None
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5                          Electable by: All
                                                                                                     Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3
                        The Latin Jazz Originals ensemble will study and perform
                        original music, mostly written by Leo Blanco, as well as          A variety of small band ensembles that utilize original
                        current and former students of this ensemble. In this course,     compositions and arrangements written in a variety of
                        students will participate in weekly supervised rehearsals.        musical styles: jazz, rock, and Latin. In this course, students will
                        Students will gain experience in performing new original          participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will gain
                        music based on different layers of rhythms, rich harmonies,       experience in performing every song selected for the semester.
                        and melodies. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as   Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic,
                        well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.                 harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy. Instrumentation: mixed
                                                                                          winds, piano, bass, guitar, and drums.
                        ENMX-100
                                   Rhythm Section Ensemble                                ENMX-220
                                   1 credit                                                          Mixed Styles Rating 4
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                          1 credit
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                     Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                   Required of: All first-semester piano, guitar, bass,              Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                     and percussion principals who are enrolled in                   Required of: None
                                     neither ENGT-111 nor ENMX-121                                   Electable by: All
                                   Electable by: Piano, guitar, bass,                                Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4
                                     and percussion principals
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 1               Small group performance in jazz, rock, swing, and Latin
                                                                                          idioms. In this course, students will participate in weekly
                        An instrumental ensemble that focuses on rhythm section           supervised rehearsals. Students will gain experience in
                        performance in a variety of musical styles. Combining             performing every song selected for the semester. Emphasis
                        bass/guitar/drum/piano lab and ensemble formats, classes          will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic,
                        will cover performance techniques utilized in contemporary        and rhythmic accuracy. Instrumentation: trumpet, alto, tenor,
                        musical idioms including jazz, rock, and blues. Emphasis will     flute, piano, guitar, bass, drums, vibes, and strings.
                        be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic,
                        and rhythmic accuracy.




           74   Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                    Ensemble
ENMX-221                                                              spontaneous improvisation, original compositions, and
           Latin Jazz with Vocals                                     developing confidence and leadership skills. The ensemble
           1 credit                                                   will culminate with one off-campus performance at the end
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                   of the semester. Open to all, with preference given to music
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                              therapy majors.
           Required of: None
           Electable by: All                                          ENPC-211
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4                             Beginning Percussion Ensemble
                                                                                1 credit
Small group performance in jazz, rock, swing, and Latin                         Course Chair: John Ramsay
idioms. In this course, students will participate in weekly                     Offered: Fall, Spring
supervised rehearsals. Students will gain experience in                         Required of: MUED drum set and MUED total
performing every song selected for the semester. Emphasis                         percussion principals
will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic,             Electable by: All percussion principals
and rhythmic accuracy. Instrumentation: trumpet, alto, tenor,                   Prerequisites: None
flute, piano, guitar, bass, drums, vibes, and strings.
                                                                      For beginning percussion players. Covers the use of snare
ENMX-300                                                              drum, bass drum, cymbals, tambourine, triangle, simple mallet
           Mixed Styles Rating 5                                      music, and timpani in an ensemble setting.
           1 credit
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                   ENPC-215
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                        Contemporary Mallet Percussion Ensemble
           Required of: None                                                    1 credit
           Electable by: All                                                    Course Chair: John Ramsay
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5                             Offered: Spring
                                                                                Required of: None
Small group performance in jazz, rock, swing, and Latin                         Electable by: All
idioms. In this course, students will participate in weekly                     Prerequisites: ILPM-121
supervised rehearsals. Students will gain experience in
performing every song selected for the semester. Emphasis             This nontraditional percussion ensemble consists of mallet
will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic,   instruments with a rhythm section performing original
and rhythmic accuracy. Instrumentation: trumpet, alto, tenor,         compositions. Emphasis is placed upon rhythmic accuracy and
flute, piano, guitar, bass, drums, vibes, and strings.                creating spontaneous compositions. No previous
                                                                      improvisational skills are necessary.
ENMX-315
           Studio Recording Ensemble                                  ENPC-221
           1 credit                                                             World Percussion Ensemble
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                             1 credit
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                        Course Chair: John Ramsay
           Required of: None                                                    Offered: Fall, Spring
           Electable by: All                                                    Required of: None
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5                             Electable by: All percussion principals
                                                                                Prerequisites: ILPD-112 and overall ensemble
Training in the recording of band tracks for a variety of                         rating 4
musical styles. Playing with prerecorded tracks, and involve-
ment with other studio techniques. Emphasis will be given to          An ensemble utilizing transcriptions and adaptations of the
stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic       repertoire of percussion groups throughout the world. Drum
accuracy. Instrumentation: trumpet, trombone, synthesizer,            set, marching, and orchestral percussion instruments will be
tenor, piano, two guitars, bass, drums, and percussion                combined in performance with African, Indian, Brazilian, and
(vibes, conga).                                                       Latin instruments. Through demonstration and study of
                                                                      recorded audio and video sources, students will develop
ENMX-401                                                              performance skills on a wide variety of percussion instruments.
           Music Therapy Ensemble
           1 credit
           Course Chair: Ron Savage
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Required of: None
           Electable by: All
           Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor

The Music Therapy ensemble will offer unique challenges and
exciting possibilities for all music therapy majors. Emphasis will
be on creativity, individual multi-instrumental performance,


                                                                                                                            Summer/Fall 2012   75
                        COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Ensemble



                        ENPC-321                                                         ENPC-385
                                   Mixed World Ensemble                                            The Berklee College Drum Line
                                   1 credit                                                        1 credit
                                   Course Chair: John Ramsay                                       Course Chair: John Ramsay
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring                                           Offered: Fall, Spring
                                   Required of: None                                               Required of: None
                                   Electable by: All                                               Electable by: All
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 7 or written             Prerequisites: ILPD-111 or by audition
                                     approval of instructor and course chair
                                                                                         A percussion ensemble designed to develop playing skills in
                        Development of repertoire and performance skills in an           the drum line idiom. Instrumentation includes snare drums,
                        ensemble consisting of both Western and non-Western or           multi-toms, mixed percussion, tuned bass drums, and mallet
                        “world” instruments. Integration of non-Western ideas and        keyboards. Practice materials and routines designed to develop
                        techniques; listening and improvising outside of standard jazz   strength, control, and endurance will be included. An end-of-
                        and pop forms; spontaneous composition as opposed to loose       semester performance will be prepared.
                        improvisation; strengthening of individual musical aesthetic.
                                                                                         ENPC-431
                        ENPC-359                                                                   Berklee College of Music Percussion Ensemble
                                   Berklee Bata Ensemble                                           1 credit
                                   1 credit                                                        Course Chair: John Ramsay
                                   Course Chair: John Ramsay                                       Offered: Fall, Spring
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring                                           Required of: Percussion principal PERF majors
                                   Required of: None                                               Electable by: All percussion principals
                                   Electable by: All percussion principals                         Prerequisites: ENPC-211, overall ensemble 4,
                                   Prerequisites: ILPH-354                                           or by audition

                        A continuation of ILPH-354. Continued development of             Advanced performance lab for percussion principals
                        performance skills through study of recordings and               emphasizing group performance of contemporary percussion
                        transcriptions, singing and chanting, and group playing.         literature. Students enrolled in the fall semester are expected
                        Application of drumming and singing to other musical forms.      to reregister in this course for credit for the spring semester.
                                                                                         Spring concert material will be rehearsed and prepared during
                        ENPC-363                                                         both fall and spring semesters.
                                   Marimba in Mixed Chamber Music Ensemble
                                   1 credit                                              ENPH-291
                                   Course Chair: John Ramsay                                       Berklee Steelpan Ensemble
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring                                           1 credit
                                   Required of: None                                               Course Chair: John Ramsay
                                   Electable by: All                                               Offered: Fall, Spring
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4 or written             Required of: None
                                     approval of instructor and course chair                       Electable by: All percussion principals
                                                                                                   Prerequisites: ILPH-391
                        An ensemble for advanced marimbists, instrumentalists, and
                        vocalists dedicated to the performance of compositions and       This ensemble will perform a range of music specifically
                        arrangements that include the marimba. Music performed will      written and arranged for the steelpan instrument. Repertoire
                        be drawn from classical and contemporary styles. An end-of-      will be drawn from “Panorama” arrangements adapted for
                        semester recital is scheduled.                                   small ensemble, original arrangements by the director, and
                                                                                         adaptations from the European classical repertoire. Styles will
                        ENPC-374                                                         include pop, calypso, and contemporary jazz. Desired
                                   West African Drum and Dance Ensemble                  instrumentation is: four tenors (leads), two double seconds,
                                   1 credit                                              one guitar pan, two triple cellos, one tenor bass, two bass,
                                   Course Chair: John Ramsay                             and assorted engine room percussion instruments (drum set
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring                                 and hand percussion). This ensemble will perform a recital at
                                   Required of: None                                     the end of the semester, and possibly at other special events.
                                   Electable by: All
                                   Prerequisites: ILPH-351 and by audition for dancers

                        A performance-based ensemble utilizing the music and
                        rhythms from traditional West African genres. Emphasis will
                        be placed upon dialogue between drum calls and dance
                        movement along with cultural songs of historical content.
                        Students will perform at least once as a full ensemble at the
                        end of each semester.




           76   Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                  Ensemble
ENPM-331                                                          ENPN-P121
          Marimba Ensemble                                                   Introduction to Jazz Improvisation for
          1 credit                                                           Classical Pianists
          Course Chair: John Ramsay                                          1 credit
          Offered: Fall, Spring                                              Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan
          Required of: Total percussion and vibraphone                       Offered: Fall, Spring
            principal MUED and PERF majors                                   Required of: None
          Electable by: All percussion principals                            Electable by: Piano principals
          Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor               Prerequisites: ILPN-121 and PIPN-111

An ensemble for beginning percussionists specializing in          Designed for classical pianists who want to develop jazz
interpretations and transcriptions of baroque, classical, and     improvisation skill. This course will emphasize the
contemporary literature.                                          understanding of the process of improvisation; specifically
                                                                  addressing the fundamental differences between jazz and
ENPM-332                                                          classical piano playing. Specific attention will be paid to
          Marimba Ensemble 2                                      standard jazz forms, including blues and standard jazz
          1 credit                                                repertoire, free improvisation, time feel, interpretation, and
          Course Chair: John Ramsay                               motivic development.
          Offered: Fall, Spring
          Required of: None                                       ENPN-131
          Electable by: All percussion principals                            Elements of Jazz Piano
          Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor               1 credit
                                                                             Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan
An ensemble for intermediate percussionists specializing in                  Offered: Fall, Spring
interpretations and transcriptions of baroque, classical, and                Required of: None
contemporary literature.                                                     Electable by: Piano principals
                                                                             Prerequisites: None
ENPM-333
          Marimba Ensemble 3                                      A piano ensemble designed for entering students with strong
          1 credit                                                classical technique but little background in jazz performance.
          Course Chair: John Ramsay                               Focuses on comping, improvisation, and development of jazz
          Offered: Fall, Spring                                   rhythmic feels. Uses of notated jazz materials for development
          Required of: None                                       of rhythmic, harmonic, and call-and-response skills.
          Electable by: All percussion principals
          Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor    ENPN-212
                                                                             Jazz Piano Trio 2
An ensemble for advanced percussionists specializing in                      1 credit
interpretations and transcriptions of baroque, classical, and                Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan
contemporary literature.                                                     Offered: Fall, Spring
                                                                             Required of: None
ENPN-P112                                                                    Electable by: Piano principals
          Jazz Piano Trio 1                                                  Prerequisites: ENPN-P112 or overall ensemble
          1 credit                                                           ratings 4-6
          Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan
          Offered: Fall, Spring                                   A two-hour lab for piano principal performance majors that
          Required of: None                                       focuses on advanced harmonic and rhythmic studies for the
          Electable by: Piano principals                          pianist and the rhythm section. Styles include Latin, Brazilian,
          Prerequisites: ILPN-121 or overall ensemble rating 2    Hard Bop and Modern. Class focuses on rhythmic accuracy,
                                                                  independence, using the left-hand as an integral part of
An ensemble for piano students who want to improve their          building up solos, understanding of odd meters, such as 3/4,
ability to function in an ensemble setting with bass and drums.   5/4 and 7/4, rhythmic comping and the use of rhythmic motif
They will gain an understanding of the role of bass and drums     displacement as a comping and soloing technique in various
in the rhythm section and learn to interact and communicate       styles. Development of rhythm section language and musical
with them. Creating arrangements, working on appropriate          communication with bass and drums.
comping techniques, improvisation, dynamic balance, and
other applicable techniques to the jazz piano trio idiom will
be addressed.




                                                                                                                          Summer/Fall 2012   77
                        COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Ensemble



                        ENPN-246                                                          ENPN-266
                                   Afro-Cuban Piano Montunos Ensemble                                Gospel Keyboard Techniques Ensemble
                                   1 credit                                                          1 credit
                                   Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan                                    Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring                                             Offered: Fall, Spring
                                   Required of: None                                                 Required of: None
                                   Electable by: Piano principals                                    Electable by: Piano principals
                                   Prerequisites: ILPN-113 and ILPN-122, or                          Prerequisites: ILPN-122 or overall ensemble rating 3
                                     overall ensemble rating 2
                                                                                          This ensemble will expose the pianist to the stylistic diversity
                        This course emphasizes rhythmic aspects and the historical        among gospel keyboard performers. Through analysis,
                        context of Afro-Cuban piano montunos. Harmonic vocabulary         transcriptions, and performance, students will gain practical
                        includes triads and sixth chords in inversions, and “A” and       performance experience in playing hymns, traditional gospel
                        “B” standard jazz voicings for major, minor, and dominant         pieces, and contemporary gospel music. Focus will be on
                        seventh chords. Harmonic contexts used in class encompass         learning gospel music in the traditional way and will include
                        one chord, I-IV-V-VI-I progression and variations, and standard   learning by ear. The student will be exposed to the historical
                        jazz tunes. All examples are in duple meter.                      development of this spiritual music.

                        ENPN-249                                                          ENPN-279
                                   Odd-Meter Rhythmic Studies for                                    Accompanying Techniques for the
                                   the Pianist Ensemble                                              Piano/Vocalist Ensemble
                                   1 credit                                                          1 credit
                                   Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan                                    Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring                                             Offered: Fall, Spring
                                   Required of: None                                                 Required of: Piano/voice dual principal PERF majors
                                   Electable by: Piano principals                                    Electable by: Piano principals
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4                          Prerequisites: ILPN-121 or overall ensemble rating 2

                        A hands-on, in-depth study of odd meters (5/4, 7/4, 5/8, 11/8     An ensemble for piano principals focusing on tunes in
                        and 15/8) using rhythmic speech and counting/tapping of           various jazz, pop/rock, and r&b styles. Students will enhance
                        various groupings and accents. These exercises will take place    technical skills, such as creating effective intros and endings
                        at the piano and away from the instrument and will emphasize      and performing in several rhythmic styles and feels, as well
                        repetition to give the student time to internalize the groove     as learning traits and requirements for being effective
                        of each meter. Through an in-depth study of cross-rhythms,        accompanists. The course includes self-accompanying
                        listening to significant performances and transcribing musical    for students who both play and sing.
                        examples, students will be expected to produce and perform
                        arrangements of standards and/or original compositions            ENPN-353
                        utilizing odd meters.                                                        The Piano Style of Thelonious Monk
                                                                                                     1 credit
                        ENPN-261                                                                     Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan
                                   Synth Techniques for Live Performance                             Offered: Fall
                                   Ensemble                                                          Required of: None
                                   1 credit                                                          Electable by: Piano principals
                                   Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan                                    Prerequisites: Ensemble rating 5555
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring
                                   Required of: None                                      An ensemble for piano principals emphasizing the melodic,
                                   Electable by: Piano principals                         harmonic, rhythmic, and compositional innovations of
                                   Prerequisites: ILPN-122 or overall ensemble rating 3   Thelonious Monk. Studies will include listening and analysis
                                                                                          of recordings; performance of transcriptions; and detailed
                        An ensemble designed for piano principals emphasizing basic       analysis of Monk's compositional and improvisational
                        synthesizer programming and performance in a live situation.      techniques, including his harmonic and rhythmic innovations
                        Focuses on orchestration, patch choices, and playing multiple     and treatment of standard tunes.
                        timbres simultaneously in any synthesizer setup.




           78   Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                    Ensemble
ENPN-365                                                           ENPP-121
           Rehearsal Techniques for the                                       Mixed Pop Styles
           Pianist/Band Leader Ensemble                                       1 credit
           1 credit                                                           Course Chair: Ron Savage
           Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan                                     Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Offered: Fall, Spring                                              Required of: None
           Required of: None                                                  Electable by: All
           Electable by: Piano principal PERF majors                          Prerequisites: ENMX-100 or overall ensemble
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5                             rating 2

An ensemble for piano principal performance majors that            The Mixed Pop Styles ensemble will study and perform the
focuses on practical rehearsal techniques. The student applies     music of India.Arie, Chaka Khan, Lalah Hathaway, Stevie
rehearsal techniques to duos, trios, and larger ensembles with     Wonder, Rachelle Ferrell, Michael Jackson, Beyoncé, Brandy,
one or more horns. Focus is on creating arrangements for the       Mariah Carey, and many more. In this course, students will
band, understanding the role of the bass player and drummer,       participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will gain
cueing, conducting, and playing and rehearsing with the            experience in performing every song selected for the semester.
band and singer.                                                   Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic,
                                                                   harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
ENPN-371
           New Music Improvisation Ensemble                        ENPP-200
           1 credit                                                           Mixed Pop and Jazz
           Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan                                     1 credit
           Offered: Fall, Spring                                              Course Chair: Ron Savage
           Required of: None                                                  Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Electable by: Piano principals                                     Required of: None
           Prerequisites: ILPN-112 and ILPN-121, or overall                   Electable by: All
             ensemble rating 2                                                Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3

An ensemble for pianists to study improvisational systems and      The Mixed Pop and Jazz Styles ensemble will study and perform
structures using both traditional notation and other methods       the music of India.Arie, Chaka Khan, Lalah Hathaway, Stevie
such as graphic, visual, or written instructions. Topics include   Wonder, Rachelle Ferrell, Michael Jackson, Beyoncé, Brandy,
motivic development; varied scales and harmonic materials;         Mariah Carey, and many more. In this course, students will
dynamic registral and spatial contrasts; and repetition and        participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will gain
variation of patterns with an emphasis on listening and group      experience in performing every song selected for the semester.
interaction. Students are encouraged to develop their own          Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic,
compositions for performance in class.                             harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy. Instrumentation: piano,
                                                                   bass, guitar, drums, vibes, and voices.
ENPN-461
           Jazz Piano Master Class Ensemble                        ENPP-201
           1 credit                                                           Mixed Pop and Rock
           Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan                                     1 credit
           Offered: Fall, Spring                                              Course Chair: Ron Savage
           Required of: None                                                  Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Electable by Piano principals                                      Required of: None
           Prerequisites: Ensemble rating 4444                                Electable by: All
                                                                              Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3
An advanced performance ensemble for piano principals
providing the opportunity to study, analyze, and perform           The Mixed Pop and Rock ensemble will study and perform
the music of selected jazz pianists in a master-class setting.     the music of India.Arie, Chaka Khan, Stevie Wonder, Michael
Transcriptions of materials to be studied will be distributed      Jackson, Beyoncé, Elton John, U2, and many more. In this
to provide the basis for faculty-led analytical discussions.       course, students will participate in weekly supervised
The addition of bass and drums will allow for performance          rehearsals. Students will gain experience in performing every
in a complete group setting.                                       song selected for the semester. Emphasis will be given to
                                                                   stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic
                                                                   accuracy. Rhythm section accompaniment for vocalists.
                                                                   Students will gain experience with arrangements and head
                                                                   charts. Instrumentation: piano, bass, guitar, drums, vibes,
                                                                   and voices.




                                                                                                                            Summer/Fall 2012   79
                        COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Ensemble



                        ENPP-202                                                              ENPP-205
                                   R&B, Pop/Rock, and Jazz                                               The Solo Pop/Rock Performer
                                   1 credit                                                              1 credit
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                              Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                         Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Required of: None                                                     Required of: None
                                   Electable by: All                                                     Electable by: All
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3                              Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3

                        The R&B, Pop/Rock, and Jazz ensemble will study and perform           A performance class to help pianist/vocalist and guitar/vocalist
                        music by a variety of artists such as Erykah Badu, John Mayer,        solo performers develop repertoire and stage presence. Weekly
                        Sara Bareilles, Stevie Wonder, John Legend, Bob Marley, Ella          in class performances and critiques will help the student with
                        Fitzgerald, and many others. In this course, students will            developing a groove while singing by systematically working
                        participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will gain       through straight eighth, swing eighth, straight sixteenth, swing
                        experience arranging all aspects of a song including vocals.          sixteenth, and triplet subdivisions. Some classes will be video-
                        Students will take part in a end of semester performance.             taped so that the students can watch and learn. Practice tech-
                        Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic,    niques will be discussed, as well as how to choose a song, how
                        harmonic and rhythmic accuracy.                                       to choose the right key, how to program a set, and the art of
                                                                                              auditioning. Original repertoire may be used, but the music of
                        ENPP-203                                                              artists like Billy Joel, Elton John, Norah Jones, Alicia Keys, James
                                   The Music of Lilith Fair                                   Taylor, and John Mayer will also be covered.
                                   1 credit
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                   ENPP-220
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                         Oldies: Sam Cooke, Tina Turner, and
                                   Required of: None                                                     Otis Redding
                                   Electable by: All                                                     1 credit
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3                              Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                                                                                         Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                        The Lilith Fair ensemble will rehearse and perform the music                     Required of: None
                        and arrangements of the artists of the fair's musical vein. Artists              Electable by: All
                        include Paula Cole, Tracy Chapman, Jewel, Sarah McLachlan,                       Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4
                        Fiona Apple, Lisa Loeb, Joan Osborne, and many more. The
                        ensemble will play charts from teacher. Student generated             The Oldies: Sam Cooke, Tina Turner, and Otis Redding ensemble
                        material and new arrangements may be added each semester              will rehearse and perform the music of the '50s, '60s, and
                        depending on the vocalists taking the ensemble. In this course,       early '70s. The primary style of this ensemble is Motown.
                        students will participate in weekly supervised rehearsals.            The ensemble will play charts by teacher. Student generated
                        Students will gain experience in performing at the end of the         material and new arrangements may be added each semester
                        semester. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as   depending on the vocalists taking the ensemble. In this course,
                        melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy. Instrumentation:            students will participate in weekly supervised rehearsals.
                        vocals, piano, bass, guitar, and drums.                               Students will gain experience in performing at the end of the
                                                                                              semester. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well
                        ENPP-204                                                              as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
                                   Acoustic Unplugged
                                   1 credit                                                   ENPP-221
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                              Pop/R&B
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                         1 credit
                                   Required of: None                                                     Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                   Electable by: All                                                     Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3                              Required of: None
                                                                                                         Electable by: All
                        The Acoustic Unplugged ensemble will meet weekly for a                           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4
                        supervised rehearsal. In this class students will focus on the
                        development and performance of traditional and modern                 The Pop/R&B ensemble will work initially with some charts
                        acoustic players whose repertoire is totally unplugged. Artists       provided by the instructor. Then the students will have a
                        include Eric Clapton, Edward Powell, Tommy Emmanuel, Joni             chance to submit their own choices for songs to be learned.
                        Mitchell, Paul Simon, Sting, Paco De Lucía, Andy McGee, etc.          Instructor will help choose appropriate material. In this course,
                        In this course, students will participate in weekly supervised        students will participate in weekly supervised rehearsals.
                        rehearsals. Students will gain experience arranging all aspects       Students will gain experience in performing both old and
                        of a song including vocals. Students will take part in a end          current pop/r&b. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity,
                        of semester performance. Emphasis will be given to stylistic          as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
                        integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic and rhythmic accuracy.        Instrumentation: piano, bass, two guitars, drums, and
                        Instrumentation: piano, bass, two guitars, drums, and                 four voices.
                        three voices.



           80   Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                   Ensemble
ENPP-222                                                          ENPP-300
          Pop and Indie                                                      Recording Rhythm Section Rating 5
          1 credit                                                           1 credit
          Course Chair: Ron Savage                                           Course Chair: Ron Savage
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                      Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
          Required of: None                                                  Required of: None
          Electable by: All                                                  Electable by: All
          Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4                           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5

The Pop and Indie ensemble plays indie and pop vocal music        The Recording Rhythm Section Rating 5 class is designed for
chosen collectively by the members of the band. Over the          instrumentalists to get studio recording experience by learning
course of the semester, students will work on getting the         and executing various styles of music ranging from jazz and
band to listen and groove together as a unit so that the          r&b to rock, pop, singer/songwriter, and country. Each week,
performance at the end of the semester is satisfying and          students are expected to read the charts furnished by the
successful. Expect to practice the tunes several hours per        singers/recording artists and execute as an ensemble in the
week outside of class with an occasional extra rehearsal.         recording studio. Emphasis is on how quickly instrumentalists
                                                                  can learn and execute/perform different styles of music and
ENPP-223                                                          improvisation, as well as accompany the singer in this
          Pop/Rock                                                ensemble setting.
          1 credit
          Course Chair: Ron Savage                                ENPP-303
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                      Rhythm Track for Songwriters
          Required of: None                                                  1 credit
          Electable by: All                                                  Course Chair: Ron Savage
          Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4                           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                                                             Required of: None
The Pop/Rock ensemble will work initially with some charts                   Electable by: All
provided by the instructor. Then the students will have a                    Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5
chance to submit their own choices for songs to be learned.
The instructor will help choose appropriate material. In          The Rhythm Track for Songwriters ensemble will perform the
this course, students will participate in weekly supervised       music of advanced songwriters. Material is supplied by the
rehearsals. Students will gain experience in performing both      songwriter/producer of the session. Each week will be a new
old and current pop/rock. Emphasis will be given to stylistic     song and a new producer in charge. Music will not be given in
integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.   advance and the instrumentalists will work on studio technique
                                                                  during the semester. The object of the ensemble is to play the
ENPP-224                                                          songs each week like an experienced studio musician, making
          Pop/Rock and Country                                    the tunes song great no matter what the style is. In this course,
          1 credit                                                students will participate in weekly supervised rehearsals.
          Course Chair: Ron Savage                                Students will gain experience in performing various styles in
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                           recording studio setting. Emphasis will be given to stylistic
          Required of: None                                       performance of each song, sight reading, and the ability to
          Electable by: All                                       perform well as a rhythm section in a short amount of time.
          Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3                This is the basic session of the song which then goes on to
                                                                  an overdub session and a mix session.
The Pop/Rock and Country ensemble will work initially with
some charts provided by the instructor. Then the students will    ENPP-320
have a chance to submit their own choices for songs to be                    The Music of Paul Simon and Sting
learned. Instructor will help choose appropriate material. In                1 credit
this course, students will participate in weekly supervised                  Course Chair: Ron Savage
rehearsals. Students will gain experience in performing both                 Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
old and current pop, rock, and country music. Emphasis will                  Required of: None
be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic,               Electable by: All
and rhythmic accuracy.                                                       Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 6

                                                                  Students in this ensemble will rehearse and perform the music
                                                                  and arrangements of the artists Paul Simon and Sting. This
                                                                  ensemble will focus on a high level of both copying recordings
                                                                  and creating new arrangements, ad well as emphasis on the
                                                                  proper vocal interpretation thorough understanding of lyrics.
                                                                  Through this course students will develop a better understand-
                                                                  ing of how to work with vocalists in this genre with sensitivity,
                                                                  tempo, and groove. Vocalists will have an opportunity to
                                                                  develop band leadership skills. Instrumentation: two pianos,
                                                                  bass, two guitars, two drums, and four voices.

                                                                                                                           Summer/Fall 2012   81
                        COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Ensemble



                        ENPP-400                                                              ENRB-200
                                   Contemporary Christian                                                R&B Jam Band
                                   1 credit                                                              1 credit
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                              Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                         Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Required of: None                                                     Required of: None
                                   Electable by: All                                                     Electable by: All
                                   Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor                  Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3

                        The Contemporary Christian ensemble will study a wide                 The R&B Jam ensemble will work initially with some charts
                        variety of musical styles with a common theme. Styles may             provided by the instructor. Then the students will have a
                        include funk, pop, rock, Latin, country, and worship music.           chance to submit their own choices for songs to be learned.
                        In this course, students will participate in weekly supervised        Instructor will help choose appropriate material. In this course,
                        rehearsals. Students will gain experience in working together         students will participate in weekly supervised rehearsals.
                        to bring to life the spirit of this faith-based music. Emphasis       Students will gain experience in performing both old and
                        will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic,   current r&b. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as
                        and rhythmic accuracy.                                                well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.

                        ENPP-401                                                              ENRB-201
                                   Vocal Recording Session                                               R&B Rating 3
                                   1 credit                                                              1 credit
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                              Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                         Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Required of: None                                                     Required of: None
                                   Electable by: All                                                     Electable by: All
                                   Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor                  Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3

                        In the Vocal Recording Session ensemble, students will                The R&B Rating 3 ensemble will be required to bring in
                        participate in weekly supervised vocal recording sessions.            recordings charts and perform a variety of both past and
                        Students will gain experience in performing many styles of            contemporary r&b styles. In this course, students will participate
                        music including, jazz, pop, rock, reggae, salsa, Brazilian, folk,     in weekly supervised rehearsals. Vocalists and instrumentalists
                        and funk. Additionally, students will be encouraged to bring          will gain experience in performing with an emphasis on
                        their own arrangements of cover songs. Emphasis will be               leadership. Additionally, emphasis will be given to stylistic
                        given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and       integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
                        rhythmic accuracy.
                                                                                              ENRB-220
                        ENPP-402                                                                         R&B/Hip-Hop
                                   L.A. Studio Ensemble                                                  1 credit
                                   1 credit                                                              Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                              Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                         Required of: None
                                   Required of: None                                                     Electable by: All
                                   Electable by: All                                                     Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4
                                   Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor
                                                                                              The R&B/Hip-Hop ensemble will work initially with some
                        The L.A. Studio Ensemble class is designed for instrumentalists       charts provided by the instructor. Then the students will have
                        to get a Los Angeles, CA studio recording experience by               a chance to submit their own choices for songs to be learned.
                        learning and executing various styles of music ranging from           The instructor will help choose appropriate material. In
                        jazz and r&b to rock, pop, singer/songwriter, and country. Each       this course, students will participate in weekly supervised
                        week, students are expected to read the charts furnished by           rehearsals. Students will gain experience in performing both
                        the singers/recording artists and execute as an ensemble in the       old and current r&b and hip-hop. Emphasis will be given to
                        recording studio. Emphasis is on how quickly instrumentalists         stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic
                        can learn and execute/perform different styles of music, as well      accuracy. Instrumentation: piano, guitar, bass, drums, vibes,
                        as accompany the singer in this ensemble setting. Students may        and voices.
                        be required to improvise during these sessions. Instrumentation:
                        piano, guitar, bass, drums, and synthesizer.




           82   Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                       Ensemble
ENRB-221                                                             Blige, and others. In this course, students will participate in
           Spoken Word                                               weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will gain experience in
           1 credit                                                  performing music from the era that defined the r&b/funk
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                  style. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                             melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
           Required of: None
           Electable by: All                                         ENRB-303
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4                             R&B/Smooth Jazz
                                                                                1 credit
The Spoken Word ensemble will study and perform                                 Course Chair: Ron Savage
compositions of their own creation as well as interpretations                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
of preexisting pieces from other artists. In this course, students              Required of: None
will participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will                 Electable by: All
gain experience in performing their pieces during the semester.                 Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5
Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic,
harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.                                     The R&B/Smooth Jazz ensemble will study and perform
                                                                     r&b/smooth jazz. Students will participate in weekly
ENRB-300                                                             supervised rehearsals. They will focus on playing smooth jazz
           The Music of James Brown                                  compositions, which involve contemporary grooves in the r&b
           1 credit                                                  idiom. Students will be introduced to the use of standard jazz
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                  vocabulary in the context of the aforementioned styles, which
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                             will include the concept of groove oriented improvisation.
           Required of: None                                         Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic,
           Electable by: All                                         harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5
                                                                     ENRB-304
The Music of James Brown ensemble will study and perform                        Original R&B
the music of James Brown. In this course, students will                         1 credit
participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will gain                 Course Chair: Ron Savage
experience in performing seminal music in the r&b funk genre                    Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
with special attention given to grooving, spontaneity, and                      Required of: None
improvisation. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as                Electable by: All
well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.                               Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5

ENRB-301                                                             The Original R&B ensemble will focus on the original r&b era
           ’70s R&B/Funk                                             of music. The ensemble will work initially with some charts
           1 credit                                                  provided by the instructor, after which students will have a
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                  chance to submit their own choices for songs to be learned.
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                             The instructor will help choose appropriate material. In
           Required of: None                                         this course, students will participate in weekly supervised
           Electable by: All                                         rehearsals. Students will gain experience in performing with
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5                  a rhythm section. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity,
                                                                     as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
The '70s Funk ensemble will study and perform the music of
the Commodores, Chaka Khan, Patti LaBelle, Earth, Wind &             ENRB-P400
Fire, and others. In this course, students will participate in                  Funk and Soul Review
weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will gain experience in                  1 credit
performing music from the era that defined the funk style.                      Course Chair: Ron Savage
Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic,              Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.                                                Required of: None
                                                                                Electable by: All
ENRB-302                                                                        Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor
           R&B/Funk Rating 5
           1 credit                                                  The Funk and Soul Review ensemble will study and perform
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                  the music of the '70s. In this course, students will participate
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                             in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will gain experience
           Required of: None                                         in performing and entertaining, and will learn the history this
           Electable by: All                                         era. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5                  melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.

The R&B/Funk Rating 5 ensemble will study and perform the
music of the Commodores, Chaka Khan, Patti LaBelle, Earth,
Wind & Fire, Estelle, Michael Jackson, Lauryn Hill, Mary J.


                                                                                                                               Summer/Fall 2012   83
                        COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Ensemble



                        ENRB-401                                                              critique. Students will use a variety of instrumental approaches,
                                   The Music of P-Funk                                        such as control surfaces, audio/MIDI processing, MAX/MSP
                                   1 credit                                                   patches, and any instruments.
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                              ENRB-406
                                   Required of: None                                                     Aretha Franklin, Stevie Wonder, Marvin Gaye,
                                   Electable by: All                                                     and Chaka Khan
                                   Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor                  1 credit
                                                                                                         Course Chair: Ron Savage
                        The P-Funk ensemble will study and perform the music of                          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                        George Clinton's Parliament-Funkadelic. In this course,                          Required of: None
                        students will participate in weekly supervised rehearsals.                       Electable by: All
                        Students will gain experience in performing and entertaining.                    Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor
                        Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic,
                        harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy. The ensemble will perform            The Aretha Franklin, Stevie Wonder, Marvin Gaye, and Chaka
                        a forty-five minute concert at the end of semester.                   Khan ensemble will study and perform the music of these
                                                                                              great artists. In this course, students will participate in weekly
                        ENRB-402                                                              supervised rehearsals. Students will gain experience and
                                   The Music of Tower of Power                                insight as to how these songs were crafted, and why they
                                   1 credit                                                   are examples of some of the greatest songs ever written.
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                   Students will take part in presenting a professional-level show
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                              at the end of the semester. This show will include some
                                   Required of: None                                          staging and choreography. Emphasis will be given to stylistic
                                   Electable by: All                                          integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
                                   Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor
                                                                                              ENRB-407
                        This ensemble will rehearse and perform the music of                             Divas Ensemble
                        Tower of Power. The ensemble will play charts by teacher.                        1 credit
                        In this course, students will participate in weekly supervised                   Course Chair: Ron Savage
                        rehearsals. Students will gain experience in performing at the                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                        end of the semester. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity,              Required of: None
                        as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.                             Electable by: All
                                                                                                         Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor
                        ENRB-403
                                   Hip-Hop Ensemble                                           The Divas Ensemble will study and perform the music of great
                                   1 credit                                                   vocalists such as Donna Summer, Gloria Gaynor, Whitney
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                   Houston, Aretha Franklin, Jennifer Hudson, Beyoncé, Mariah
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                              Carey, and others. In this course, students will participate in
                                   Required of: None                                          weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will gain experience
                                   Electable by: All                                          and insight as to how these women's songs were crafted, and
                                   Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor       why they are examples of some of the greatest songs ever
                                                                                              written. Students will take part in presenting a professional
                        The Hip-Hop Ensemble will study and perform the music of              level show at the end of the semester. This show will include
                        hip-hop culture and its influences and apply those studies to         some staging and choreography. Emphasis will be given to
                        their own compositions. In this course, students will participate     stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic
                        in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will gain experience in     accuracy.
                        performing finished pieces throughout the semester. Emphasis
                        will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic,   ENRB-408
                        and rhythmic accuracy.                                                           Neo-Soul
                                                                                                         1 credit
                        ENRB-405                                                                         Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                   Techno/DJ Sampling Ensemble                                           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   1 credit                                                              Required of: None
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                              Electable by: All
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                         Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor
                                   Required of: None
                                   Electable by: All                                          The Neo-Soul ensemble will study and perform the music of
                                   Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor       artists such as Jill Scott, Erykah Badu, Bilal, Musiq Soulchild,
                                                                                              Maxwell, D'Angelo, and others. In this course, students will
                        An open forum for development of live performance multi-              participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will
                        instrumental duo/trio ensembles consisting of electronic,             gain experience crafting and presenting a professional-level
                        electroacoustic, and acoustic sources. The class splits into a        show, which will include staging and some choreography.
                        number of smaller groups working on two compositions and              Additionally, students will gain experience using and
                        playing in class on a rotating schedule for discussion and            performing with technology. Emphasis will be given to stylistic
                                                                                              integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
           84   Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                     Ensemble
ENRB-409                                                          outside of class as well. Students will gain experience in per-
          The Music of Take 6, Sweet Honey in the Rock,           forming by playing an in-class recital and a caf show near
          and Ladysmith Black Mambazo                             the end of the semester. Emphasis will be given to stylistic
          1 credit                                                integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
          Course Chair: Ron Savage
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                           ENRK-203
          Required of: None                                                  Rock of the ’70s
          Electable by: All                                                  1 credit
          Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor               Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                                                             Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
The Take 6, Sweet Honey in the Rock, and Ladysmith Black                     Required of: None
Mambazo ensemble will transcribe, analyze, and perform the                   Electable by: All
music of these seminal choral groups. In this course, students               Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3
will participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will
gain experience in performing learning some of the repertoire     The Rock of the '70s ensemble will study and perform the
of contemporary gospel music during the '80s. Emphasis will       music of the The Rolling Stones, Aerosmith, the Beatles, Elton
be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic,    John, The Allman Brothers, The Eagles, Blondie, and others.
and rhythmic accuracy.                                            In this course, students will participate in weekly supervised
                                                                  rehearsals. Students will gain experience in performing music
ENRK-200                                                          from the era that defined the classic rock style. Emphasis will
          Rock and Roll Hall of Fame Ensemble                     be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic,
          1 credit                                                and rhythmic accuracy.
          Course Chair: Ron Savage
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
          Required of: None                                       ENRK-204
          Electable by: All                                                  The Music of Jimi Hendrix
          Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3                           1 credit
                                                                             Course Chair: Ron Savage
The Rock and Roll Hall of Fame organization was established                  Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
in 1986 by the music industry at large to identify, recognize,               Required of: None
and study the great forefathers and pioneers of rock and                     Electable by: All
pop music. This is a valuable course for both performers and                 Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3
writers who are interested in studying and understanding
the stylistic and technical subtleties of the various pop and     The Music of Jimi Hendrix ensemble will study and perform
rock genres.                                                      the music of legendary blues rock guitarist Jimi Hendrix. In
                                                                  this course, students will participate in weekly supervised
ENRK-201                                                          rehearsals. Students will gain experience in performing
          Classic Rock                                            seminal music in the rock and psychedelic genre with a focus
          1 credit                                                on spontaneity, grooving, and improvisation. Emphasis will be
          Course Chair: Ron Savage                                given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                           rhythmic accuracy.
          Required of: None
          Electable by: All                                       ENRK-205
          Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3                           Progressive Rock Rating 3
                                                                             1 credit
The Classic Rock ensemble will focus on the stylistic                        Course Chair: Ron Savage
characteristics, performance requirements, rehearsal, and                    Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
performance of classic rock music. Repertoire will draw                      Required of: None
from the '60s, '70s, and '80s.                                               Electable by: All
                                                                             Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3
ENRK-202
          Rock Jam Band                                           This ensemble encompasses the style characteristics,
          1 credit                                                performance requirements, rehearsal, and performance of
          Course Chair: Ron Savage                                progressive rock music. Students will be asked to write charts
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                           from various progressive rock artists. In this course, students
          Required of: None                                       will participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will
          Electable by: All                                       gain experience in performing music from the era that defined
          Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3                the style. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as
                                                                  melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy. Classes will present
The Rock Jam Band will study and perform the music of             an end-of-semester final performance.
the Grateful Dead, Phish, the Allman Brothers, Medeski
Martin & Wood, Soulive, etc., depending on the interests of
ensemble members. In this course, students will participate in
weekly supervised rehearsals, and are encouraged to rehearse

                                                                                                                             Summer/Fall 2012   85
                        COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Ensemble



                        ENRK-206                                                            ENRK-302
                                   Blues-Rock Ensemble                                                 Progressive Rock Instrumental Rating 5
                                   1 credit                                                            1 credit
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                            Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Required of: None                                                   Required of: None
                                   Electable by: All                                                   Electable by: All
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3                            Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5

                        This ensemble encompasses the style characteristics,                The Progressive Instrumental ensemble will study, learn,
                        performance requirements, rehearsal, and performance of             analyze, interpret, and perform progressive rock, including
                        blues and rock music. Students will be asked to write charts        original compositions. In this course, students will participate
                        for various blues and rock styles. In this course, students will    in weekly supervised rehearsals. Emphasis will be given to
                        participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will          stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic
                        gain experience in performing music from the era that               accuracy. Students will also learn effective and efficient
                        defined the style. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity,   rehearsal techniques.
                        as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy. Classes
                        will present an end-of-semester final performance.                  ENRK-303
                                                                                                       String Metal Ensemble
                        ENRK-220                                                                       1 credit
                                   The Music of the Beatles                                            Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                   1 credit                                                            Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                            Required of: None
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                       Electable by: All
                                   Required of: None                                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5
                                   Electable by: All
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4                 The String Metal ensemble will study and perform the music
                                                                                            of student-selected pieces in the metal genre, using strings
                        The Music of the Beatles ensemble is dedicated to recreating        as the lead melodic instrument. In this course, students will
                        the Beatles's recordings with attention to detail. This is an       participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will gain
                        ear training ensemble, and students will sing and play              experience performing this extreme style while maintaining
                        the actual transcriptions and note-for-note parts that the          control of dynamics and balance. Emphasis will be given to
                        Beatles performed. The Beatles: Complete Scores book is             stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic
                        recommended. The songs are picked by the students. The class        accuracy. Instrumentation: piano, bass, two guitars, two
                        teaches the training you would need to join an existing band or     drums, horns, and strings.
                        to back up an artist that wants record copy arrangements of
                        their recordings by teaching you how to listen for parts: notes,    ENRK-400
                        rhythms, tone, timbre, phrasing, articulation, pronunciation,                  Hardcore/Heavy Metal
                        style, and groove. This training adds colors, nuances, and great               1 credit
                        variety to your musicianship skills.                                           Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                                                                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                        ENRK-300                                                                       Required of: None
                                   Women in Rock                                                       Electable by: All
                                   1 credit                                                            Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                            The Hardcore/Heavy Metal ensemble will study and perform
                                   Required of: None                                        the music of student-selected artists in this style. In this
                                   Electable by: All                                        course, students will participate in weekly supervised
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3                 rehearsals. Students will gain experience in performing this
                                                                                            extreme style while maintaining control of dynamics and
                        This ensemble offers an opportunity for rock-oriented               balance. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well
                        female singers and instrumentalists to network, rehearse, and       as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
                        perform this music. Students will perform a wide variety of
                        rock styles ranging from heavy metal, punk, and alternative to
                        some classic rock. Original compositions are welcomed and
                        encouraged. Emphasis is on stylistic integrity, melodic, har-
                        monic, and rhythmic accuracy. While chart writing is utilized
                        in the classroom, emphasis is on learning and executing this
                        music by ear.




           86   Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                        Ensemble
ENRT-200                                                              ENRT-204
           Blues                                                                 String Improvisation Ensemble
           1 credit                                                              1 credit
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                              Course Chair: Ron Savage
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                         Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Required of: None                                                     Required of: None
           Electable by: All                                                     Electable by: All
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3                              Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3

The Blues ensemble will survey and perform various blues styles       The String Improvisation ensemble will study and perform
including, but not limited to, traditional, funk, Latin, jazz, and    the music of student-selected pieces in the jazz, Latin, pop,
vocal-influenced music from B.B. King to John Coltrane. In            r&b, classical, etc., genres using strings as the lead melodic
this course, students will participate in weekly, supervised          instrument. In this course, students will participate in weekly
discussions, and performance of America's indigenous music.           supervised rehearsals. Students will gain experience in
Students will gain experience in performing a wide variety of         improvisation while maintaining control of dynamics and
blues literature from various genres and artists. Emphasis will be    balance. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as
given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and       melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy. Instrumentation:
rhythmic accuracy.                                                    piano, bass, two guitars, two drums, horns, and strings.

ENRT-201                                                              ENRT-220
           Acoustic Blues                                                        Spirituals
           1 credit                                                              1 credit
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                              Course Chair: Ron Savage
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                         Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Required of: None                                                     Required of: None
           Electable by: All                                                     Electable by: All
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3                              Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4

The Acoustic Blues ensemble will meet weekly for a supervised         Small vocal ensemble with emphasis on traditional spirituals.
rehearsal. The ensemble is open to voice, guitar, bass, piano,        In this course, students will participate in weekly rehearsals.
drums, violin, and mandolin principals. In this class students will   Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic,
focus on the development and performance of traditional and           harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy. Concert performances
modern acoustic blues repertoire. Materials covered include the       during the fall and spring semesters.
work of pre-war, post-war and modern acoustic blues artists
like Robert Johnson, Skip James, Sonny Boy Williamson, Son            ENRT-221
House, Bessie Smith, the Mississippi Sheiks, Sippie Wallace,                     New Acoustic Music
Muddy Waters, Howlin' Wolf, Taj Mahal, Eric Clapton, Keb'                        1 credit
Mo', Bonnie Raitt, and The Derek Trucks Band. This performing                    Course Chair: Ron Savage
ensemble will play various showcases for the Berklee American                    Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
Roots Program.                                                                   Required of: None
                                                                                 Electable by: All
ENRT-203                                                                         Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4
           Traditional Gospel
           1 credit                                                   The New Acoustic ensemble will study and perform new
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                   acoustic music. In this course, students will participate in
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                              weekly supervised rehearsals. Guitarists will gain experience in
           Required of: None                                          performing music from all old and current eras that defined
           Electable by: All                                          the acoustic style. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity,
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3                   as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.

Medium-sized vocal ensemble with emphasis on traditional
gospel music. In this course, students will participate in weekly
supervised rehearsals. Emphasis will be given to stylistic
integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.
Concert performances during the fall and spring semesters.




                                                                                                                                Summer/Fall 2012   87
                       COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Ensemble



                        ENRT-300                                                             course, students will participate in weekly supervised rehearsals.
                                   Chicago Blues                                             Students will gain experience in performing, writing ensemble
                                   1 credit                                                  charts, singing harmony and background parts, working as a
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                  band, and stage performance techniques. Emphasis will be
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                             given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and
                                   Required of: None                                         rhythmic accuracy.
                                   Electable by: All
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5                  ENRT-402
                                                                                                        Men’s Chorus
                        The Chicago Blues ensemble will study and perform the                           1 credit
                        music of the Muddy Waters, Howlin' Wolf, Willie Dixon, Koko                     Course Chair: Ron Savage
                        Taylor, Freddie King, Magic Sam, Syl Johnson, Jimmy Rogers,                     Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                        Buddy Guy, and others. In this course, students will participate                Required of: None
                        in weekly supervised rehearsals. Students will gain experience                  Electable by: All
                        in performing music from the era that defined the style.                        Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor
                        Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic,
                        harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.                                     Medium-sized vocal ensemble with emphasis on traditional
                                                                                             and contemporary gospel music. In this course, students will
                        ENRT-P304                                                            participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. Emphasis will be
                                   Acoustic Strings Workshop                                 given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and
                                   1 credit                                                  rhythmic accuracy. Concert performances during the fall and
                                   Course Chair: Melissa Howe                                spring semesters.
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring
                                   Required of: None                                         ENRT-403
                                   Electable by: String, bass, guitar, and                              Women’s Chorus
                                     hand percussion principals                                         1 credit
                                   Prerequisites: None                                                  Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                                                                                        Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                        This ensemble specializes in original and progressive acoustic                  Required of: None
                        string music, drawing from bluegrass, jazz, and rock roots.                     Electable by: All
                        Students should have a firm foundation in memorized                             Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor
                        repertoire. Course will include study of arranging and
                        instrumentation as well as idiomatic improvisational techniques.     Medium-sized vocal ensemble with emphasis on traditional
                                                                                             and contemporary gospel music. In this course, students will
                                                                                             participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. Emphasis will be
                        ENRT-400                                                             given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and
                                   Bluegrass                                                 rhythmic accuracy. Concert performances during the fall and
                                   1 credit                                                  spring semesters.
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                             ENRT-404
                                   Required of: None                                                    Overjoyed
                                   Electable by: All                                                    1 credit
                                   Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor                 Course Chair: Ron Savage
                                                                                                        Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                        Small band ensemble that plays bluegrass and bluegrass-                         Required of: None
                        derived music. Emphasis will be given to stylistic integrity, as                Electable by: All
                        well as melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic accuracy.                               Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor

                        ENRT-401                                                             Medium-sized vocal ensemble with emphasis on traditional
                                   Country Music Ensemble                                    and contemporary gospel music. In this course, students will
                                   1 credit                                                  participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. Emphasis will be
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                  given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                             rhythmic accuracy. Concert performances during the fall and
                                   Required of: None                                         spring semesters.
                                   Electable by: All
                                   Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor

                        The Country Music Ensemble will perform the music of any
                        and all country artists from classic to contemporary: from Patsy
                        Cline to Carrie Underwood, from bluegrass to modern country
                        rock. The material will be selected by the teacher based on
                        instrumentation and student interest and capabilities. In this




           88   Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                    Ensemble
ENRT-405                                                              ENSB-361
           Reverence Gospel Ensemble                                            Advanced Woodwind Chamber Music
           2 credits                                                            1 credit
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                             Course Chair: Bill Pierce
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                        Offered: Fall, Spring
           Required of: None                                                    Required of: None
           Electable by: All                                                    Electable by: Woodwind and French horn principals
           Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor                 Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4 or written
                                                                                  approval of course chair
Large vocal ensemble with emphasis on traditional and
contemporary gospel music. In this course, students will              Woodwind ensembles for advanced players (flute, clarinet,
participate in two choir rehearsals per week. Emphasis will be        oboe, bassoon, and French horn) emphasizing the
given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and       development of classical chamber music performance skills.
rhythmic accuracy. Concert performances during the fall and
spring semesters. Note: A $15 refundable deposit for the use          ENSB-425
of a choir robe is required.                                                    Advanced Repertory Workshop
                                                                                1 credit
ENRT-406                                                                        Course Chair: Ron Savage
           Old Time/Appalachian Music                                           Offered: Fall, Spring
           1 credit                                                             Required of: None
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                             Electable by: All
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                        Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 7
           Required of: None
           Electable by: All                                          Harmonic analysis and performance of contemporary standard
           Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor       jazz repertoire. Instrumentation: mixed winds, piano, guitar,
                                                                      bass, and drums.
The Old Time/Appalachian Music ensemble will study and
perform music from the old time genre of North American               ENST-131
folk music, with roots in the folk music of many countries,                     Harp Improvisation Ensemble
including England, Scotland, Ireland and countries in Africa.                   1 credit
Appalachian old time folk became a major influence on                           Course Chair: Melissa Howe
styles like bluegrass and country. In this course, students will                Offered: Fall, Spring
participate in weekly supervised rehearsals. Guitar players                     Required of: None
will gain experience in performing music from all old and                       Electable by: String principals
current eras that defined the acoustic style. Emphasis will be                  Prerequisites: None
given to stylistic integrity, as well as melodic, harmonic, and
rhythmic accuracy.                                                    This ensemble is designed to strengthen the basic skills needed
                                                                      for improvisation, including jazz harmony, phrasing, melodic
ENSB-355                                                              development, reading chord charts, and technical aspects of
           Improvisational String Ensemble                            improvisation on the harp.
           1 credit
           Course Chair: Ron Savage                                   ENST-132
           Offered: Fall, Spring                                                Banjo Improvisation Ensemble
           equired of: None                                                     1 credit
           Electable by: String, guitar, bass, and hand                         Course Chair: Melissa Howe
             percussion principals                                              Offered: Fall, Spring
           Prerequisites: By audition                                           Required of: None
                                                                                Electable by: String principals
An ensemble consisting of a string quartet plus rhythm                          Prerequisites: None
section. Emphasis will be on ensemble playing skills and
improvisational vocabulary in diverse contemporary idioms.            Banjo students will study chords and scales, and the ways in
Incorporation of standard jazz vocabulary with that of other          which they relate. This will then be used as the basis for
common improvisational string idioms, such as world/fusion,           improvisation, comping, and composing original tunes.
Western swing, and various traditional styles such as
Appalachian- and Texas-style fiddling, Celtic music, and
bluegrass. Instrumentation: violins, viola, cello, acoustic guitar,
acoustic bass, plus optional rhythm section instruments such
as hand percussion, mandolin, banjo, etc.




                                                                                                                            Summer/Fall 2012   89
                        COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Ensemble



                        ENST-140                                                               ENST-222
                                   R&B String Ensemble                                                   Acoustic Roots Improvisation Ensemble
                                   1 credit                                                              1 credit
                                   Course Chair: Melissa Howe                                            Course Chair: Melissa Howe
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                         Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Required of: None                                                     Required of: None
                                   Electable by: String principals                                       Electable by: String principals
                                   Prerequisites: None                                                   Prerequisites: None

                        This course will introduce string players to performance               This ensemble is a hands-on tour of two great American
                        techniques useful for playing popular music. Using music by            improvisational music forms, bluegrass and swing, focusing on
                        James Brown, Wilson Pickett, Stevie Wonder, the Meters, and            melodic variation as well as chord-based jazz improvisational
                        others, students will explore riffing, playing in different parts of   strategies, with an emphasis on standard repertoire and
                        the beat, playing without vibrato, soloing and other                   transcription projects.
                        techniques that will help them play convincingly in several
                        styles of dance music.                                                 ENST-223
                                                                                                         Wayfaring Strangers Ensemble
                        ENST-141                                                                         1 credit
                                   Free Improvisation for Strings                                        Course Chair: Melissa Howe
                                   1 credit                                                              Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Course Chair: Melissa Howe                                            Required of: None
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring                                                 Electable by: String Principals
                                   Required of: None                                                     Prerequisites: None
                                   Electable by: String principals
                                   Prerequisites: None                                         This ensemble uses traditional folk, country, and blues
                                                                                               repertoire as a means to develop higher level improvisational,
                        This ensemble provides students with the opportunity to                compositional, and arranging skills in a band setting.
                        develop improvisational skills through free improvisation.
                        Players are encouraged to create dynamic and rhythmic pieces           ENST-224
                        using existing musical skills. Skills are expanded through the                   Rhythmic Explorations for Strings
                        study of the musical elements, complex time signatures, form,                    1 credit
                        and musical roles. Students learn to trust their instincts for the               Course Chair: Melissa Howe
                        ebb and flow of music as they create satisfying ensemble                         Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                        pieces with no prior plan or discussion.                                         Required of: None
                                                                                                         Electable by: String principals
                        ENST-151                                                                         Prerequisites: None
                                   Berklee Contemporary String Orchestra
                                   1 credit                                                    This ensemble will explore grooves, rhythms, and textures for
                                   Course Chair: Melissa Howe                                  string group using traditional, international, jazz, and other
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring                                       modern material, some of which will be improvised, some
                                   Required of: String principals                              written. Participants will learn how to form a coherent and
                                   Electable by: All                                           powerful ensemble sound on varied musical frameworks.
                                   Prerequisites: Written approval of course chair
                                                                                               ENST-P230
                        Classic and contemporary approaches to string ensemble                           Classical Improvisation
                        performance, including groove-based playing and                                  1 credit
                        improvisation in addition to more traditional repertoire. Students               Course Chair: Melissa Howe
                        will be required to attend and participate in one 2-hour class                   Offered: Fall
                        meeting, and one 1-hour additional class meeting per week.                       Required of: None
                                                                                                         Electable by: String principals
                        ENST-221                                                                         Prerequisites: None
                                   String Master Class
                                   1 credit                                                    Classically trained students will use their classical skills to
                                   Course Chair: Melissa Howe                                  improvise in the classical vernacular. Topics will include
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                               creating a melody, accompanying that melody, and improvising
                                   Required of: None                                           counterpoint and harmony, all within familiar classical forms
                                   Electable by: String principals                             and using familiar classical vocabulary.
                                   Prerequisites: None

                        This ensemble is a contemporary version of the traditional
                        conservatory master class. It provides students with the
                        opportunity to perform weekly in a setting less public than a
                        concert hall, to give and get feedback on performing, and to
                        hear many points of view on string playing.

           90   Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                       Ensemble
ENST-251                                                             ENST-271
           Classical String Chamber Music Ensemble                              Global String Ensemble
           1 credit                                                             1 credit
           Course Chair: Melissa Howe                                           Course Chair: Melissa Howe
           Offered: Fall, Spring                                                Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Required of: None                                                    Required of: None
           Electable by: Violin, viola, cello, and harp principals              Electable by: String principals
           Prerequisites: None                                                  Prerequisites: None

Study and performance of string quartets and trios from the          This ensemble will examine the way string instruments
repertoire of the baroque period through the 21st century.           and improvisation are used in a variety of musical cultures
                                                                     including Greek, Bulgarian, Hungarian, klezmer, Romanian,
ENST-252                                                             and Charanga.
           Contemporary Arranging and Performing
           for Strings                                               ENST-290
           1 credit                                                             Rock Strings Ensemble
           Course Chair: Melissa Howe                                           1 credit
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                        Course Chair: Melissa Howe
           Required of: None                                                    Offered: Fall, Spring
           Electable by: String principals                                      Required of: None
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3                             Electable by: String principals
                                                                                Prerequisites: None
Strings playing covers of non-string based popular music.
Students pick the repertoire and write the arrangements.             This ensemble offers string players the opportunity to study and
                                                                     play past and current rock violin styles, including the music
ENST-253                                                             of Jerry Goodman, Don “Sugarcane” Harris, Jean-Luc Ponty,
           Old Time Fiddle Ensemble                                  and Boyd Tinsley. Students will listen, transcribe, and perform
           1 credit                                                  weekly in a variety of rock violin styles, including specific use of
           Course Chair: Melissa Howe                                effects. We will also use the work of great rock guitarists, such
           Offered: Fall, Spring                                     as Jimi Hendrix and Eric Clapton, as templates.
           Required of: None
           Electable by: String principals                           ENVC-111
           Prerequisites: None                                                  Rhythm Section Grooves for Vocalists 1
                                                                                1 credit
This ensemble explores ways to incorporate regional fiddle styles               Course Chair: Anne Peckham
(including Appalachian/old-time, Celtic, Scandinavian, and                      Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
related traditions) into varied small string ensemble formats,                  Required of: None
using extended concepts of modal harmony and contrapuntal                       Electable by: Voice principals
strategies. Students will play and develop arrangements of                      Prerequisites: None
traditional repertoire, the work of contemporary fiddle music
composers and tunesmiths, and their own compositions in              A lab for vocalists that will focus on the basic functions of
both traditional and experimental neotraditional styles.             the rhythm section and how to communicate with a rhythm
                                                                     section in a variety of musical styles. Instruments discussed
ENST-P254                                                            will include electric and acoustic bass, drums, keyboard, and
           Contemporary Styles String Quartet                        guitar as well as musical elements of various time-feels and
           1 credit                                                  grooves. Class members will have the opportunity to work
           Course Chair: Melissa Howe                                with a rhythm section.
           Offered: Fall, Spring
           Required of: None                                         ENVC-112
           Electable by: String principals                                      Rhythm Section Grooves for Vocalists 2
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3                             1 credit
                                                                                Course Chair: Anne Peckham
This ensemble offers study and performance of string quartets                   Required of: None
in a variety of contemporary styles. It provides students the                   Electable by: Voice principals
opportunity to learn how to expand the historically and                         Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3
musically significant string quartet genre to a wide variety of
contemporary styles. The same topics that occupy any working         An ensemble for vocalists that will focus on the basic functions
classical quartet (for example, intonation, ensemble, stylistic      of the rhythm section and how to communicate with a rhythm
integrity) will apply to this contemporary styles quartet.           section in a variety of musical styles. Instruments discussed will
However, the musical parameters of each style will determine         include electric and acoustic bass, drums, keyboard, and guitar,
what exactly is needed to give an authentic performance              as well as musical elements of various time-feels and grooves.
of the style being studied. Listening skills in the ensemble,        Class members will have the opportunity to work with a
instrumental skills needed for the style, and performance skills     rhythm section.
will be stressed and valued.

                                                                                                                               Summer/Fall 2012   91
                        COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Ensemble



                        ENVC-113                                                             ENVC-124
                                   Rhythm Section Grooves for Vocalists 3                               Pop/Rock/Country Vocal Ensemble with
                                   1 credit                                                             Background Vocals
                                   Course Chair: Anne Peckham                                           1 credit
                                   Required of: None                                                    Course Chair: Anne Peckham
                                   Electable by: Voice principals                                       Required of: None
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4                             Electable by: Voice principals
                                                                                                        Prerequisites: None
                        An ensemble for vocalists that will focus on the basic functions
                        of the rhythm section and how to communicate with a rhythm           Introductory pop/rock/country performance ensemble for voice
                        section in a variety of musical styles. Instruments discussed will   principals designed to prepare students for solo performance in
                        include electric and acoustic bass, drums, keyboard, and guitar,     ensembles and other performing venues within a specific song
                        as well as musical elements of various time-feels and grooves.       style. Vocalists will learn how to count off tempos of songs,
                        Class members will have the opportunity to work with a               microphone technique, song style, and groove communication
                        rhythm section.                                                      with the accompanist and lead sheet preparation.

                        ENVC-122                                                             ENVC-P132
                                   Jazz/Blues Vocal Ensemble with Improvisation                         Circle Song Choir
                                   1 credit                                                             1 credit
                                   Course Chair: Anne Peckham                                           Course Chair: Anne Peckham
                                   Required of: None                                                    Offered: Fall, Spring
                                   Electable by: Voice principals                                       Required of: None
                                   Prerequisites: None                                                  Electable by: Voice principals
                                                                                                        Prerequisites: None
                        Introductory jazz/blues performance ensemble for voice
                        principals designed to prepare students for solo performance in      The voice can be used as a paint brush to create visual
                        ensembles and other performing venues within a specific song         textures that elicit a visual and emotional experience for the
                        style. Focus on building jazz repertoire and getting familiar        listener. This performance and recording ensemble is designed
                        with jazz masters, as well as musicianship, harmony, and sight       to help each participant explore the art of composed and
                        reading. Additional focus will be on beginning improvisation         improvised vocal expression, including instrumental singing
                        skills in the jazz and blues idioms, including melodic and           and vocal improvisation. Students will learn how to use their
                        rhythmic phrasing, embellishments, tone color, and hearing           entire body as a performance instrument; explore the art of
                        basic blues patterns, as well as historical perspective.             vocal and body percussion; and discover a renewed sense of
                                                                                             freedom to discover his or her own style of vocal expression
                        ENVC-123                                                             and improvisation.
                                   R&B Vocal Ensemble with Improvisation
                                   1 credit                                                  ENVC-141
                                   Course Chair: Anne Peckham                                           Beginning Improvisation Ensemble,
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                        Mixed Styles
                                   Required of: None                                                    1 credit
                                   Electable by: Voice principals                                       Course Chair: Anne Peckham
                                   Prerequisites: None                                                  Required of: None
                                                                                                        Electable by: Voice principals
                        Introductory r&b performance ensemble for voice principals                      Prerequisites: None
                        designed to prepare students for solo performance in
                        ensembles and other performing venues within a specific song         An ensemble for vocalists focusing on basic skills in improvisa-
                        style. Vocalists will learn how to count off tempos of songs,        tion in a variety of styles. Melodic and rhythmic phrasing
                        microphone technique, song style and groove, communication           embellishments using tone colors and hearing basic blues
                        with the accompanist, and lead sheet preparation. Additional         patterns in vocal styles including pop, rock, r&b, and jazz.
                        focus will be on beginning improvisation skills in the r&b idiom,
                        including melodic and rhythmic phrasing, embellishments, tone        ENVC-142
                        color, and hearing basic blues patterns.                                        Vocal Improvisation Ensemble, Jazz
                                                                                                        1 credit
                                                                                                        Course Chair: Anne Peckham
                                                                                                        Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                                                                                        Required of: None
                                                                                                        Electable by: Voice principals
                                                                                                        Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 2

                                                                                             An intermediate ensemble for vocalists focusing on
                                                                                             improvisation in the jazz idiom. Topics include articulation
                                                                                             and groove, melodic and rhythmic phrasing, embellishments,
                                                                                             using tone colors, hearing basic instrumental patterns, blues
                                                                                             patterns, vamps, turnarounds, and II-V progressions.

           92   Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                 Ensemble
ENVC-143                                                          may vary according to scheduled final performance. Singers
          Vocal Improvisation Ensemble, R&B                       Night concert will occur in the Berklee Performance Center
          1 credit                                                each fall and spring semester.
          Course Chair: Anne Peckham
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                           ENVC-216
          Required of: None                                                 Contemporary Indian Vocal Ensemble
          Electable by: Voice principals                                    1 credit
          Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 2                          Course Chair: Anne Peckham
                                                                            Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
An intermediate ensemble for vocalists focusing on                          Required of: None
improvisation skills in the r&b idiom. Melodic and rhythmic                 Electable by: Voice principals
phrasing embellishments using tone colors and hearing                       Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3
basic blues patterns.
                                                                  An introduction to various aspects of Indian music, including
ENVC-210                                                          specific Indian modes, rhythmic patterns, and improvisation
          Elements of Vocal Technique and Performance             techniques. This performance-oriented ensemble will
          1 credit                                                explore the basics of Hindustani, Carnatic, and Indian folk
          Course Chair: Anne Peckham                              music through listening, analysis, transcription, and
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                           performance. Students will study the works of contemporary
          Required of: None                                       Indian composers such as A.R. Rahman, Salim-Sulaiman,
          Electable by: Voice principals                          Shankar-Ehsaan-Loy, and others who combine Indian classical
          Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 2                and folk traditions with Western harmonic concepts
                                                                  and instrumentation.
Introductory level ensemble for vocalists designed to address
the basic elements of singing in a performance environment,       ENVC-218
e.g. breath management, intonation, tone quality, and                       Eastern Vocal Styles Ensemble
phrasing. Song materials will be selected in consultation with              1 credit
the private instructor. Students will participate in periodic               Course Chair: Anne Peckham
self-assessment and videotaped in-class performance.                        Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                                                            Required of: None
ENVC-P212                                                                   Electable by: Voice principals
          American Negro Spirituals                                         Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3
          1 credit
          Course Chair: Anne Peckham                              A performance ensemble that explores various vocal traditions
          Offered: Fall, Spring                                   from the Middle East, Eastern Europe, the Balkans, North
          Required of: None                                       Africa, as well as Central and South Asia through listening,
          Electable by: All                                       transcription, and performance. Artists covered include Umm
          Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor    Kulthum (Egypt), Fairuz (Lebanon), Le Mystere des Voix
                                                                  Bulgares (Bulgaria), Erkan Ogur (Turkey), Cheb Mami (Algeria),
This course will focus on the learning and performing of SATB     Nusrat Fateh Ali Khan (Pakistan), and Taraf de Haïdouks
(soprano, alto, tenor, and bass) traditional American Negro       (Romania), as well as popular crossover artists such as Ofra
Spirituals in the style of such groups as the Fisk Jubilee        Haza, Sussan Deyhim, Zulal, Natacha Atlas, and Sheila
Singers. The emphasis will be on theatrically performing the      Chandra. Students also experiment with hearing and executing
stories of American Negro Spirituals evolving from the African    microtones, in addition to learning rhythms, modes, forms,
American experience. Song arrangements and compositions           and improvisation concepts from the different regions.
will include John W. Work, Moses Hogan, H.T. Burleigh, and
other African American composers.                                 ENVC-221
                                                                            Vocal Jazz History Ensemble
ENVC-P215                                                                   1 credit
          Singers Night Performance Ensemble                                Course Chair: Anne Peckham
          1 credit                                                          Offered: Fall, Spring
          Course Chair: Ron Savage                                          Required of: None
          Offered: Fall, Spring                                             Electable by: All
          Required of: None                                                 Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor
          Electable by: Bass, brass, drum set, guitar, hand
            percussion, piano, woodwind, and                      Vocalists are immersed in the jazz music of important and
            vocal principals                                      influential vocal groups from 1930 to present. Vocal groups
          Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor    covered include the Boswell Sisters; the Mills Brothers; Mel
                                                                  Torme and the Mel-Tones; Lambert, Hendricks, and Ross;
Performance ensemble comprised of piano, keyboards, bass,         Swingle Singers; Take 6; and Manhattan Transfer. Students
drums, percussion, horns and vocalists. The focus of this class   will strive for authentic performances through listening,
will emphasize the relationship between vocals and band           studying printed transcriptions, emulating tone, articulation,
members as well as the supportive and collaborative role of       diction, and phrasing of specific vocal arrangements.
band members. Class meeting times, including rehearsals,          Materials covered vary according to the starting level of
                                                                  the student group. A final performance is required.
                                                                                                                         Summer/Fall 2012   93
                        COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Ensemble



                        ENVC-232                                                          ENVC-243
                                   A Cappella Workshop Ensemble                                     Instrumental Vocal Singing Ensemble
                                   1 credit                                                         1 credit
                                   Course Chair: Anne Peckham                                       Course Chair: Anne Peckham
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring                                            Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Required of: None                                                Required of: None
                                   Electable by: Voice principals                                   Electable by: Voice principals
                                   Prerequisites: Written approval of                               Prerequisites: Written approval of
                                     course instructor                                                course instructor

                        Vocal ensemble that concentrates on small group singing           This ensemble is designed to teach each student how to
                        without instrumental accompaniment. Content will focus on         explore and discover all the boundaries of what is vocally
                        developing musical independence and ear training within the       possible. Each student will obtain the skills necessary to
                        context of popular and jazz vocal styles. Will include vocal      reproduce an instrumental track using just the voice. Students
                        styles and song selections such as Take Six, Singers Unlimited,   are required to have a functioning version of Digital Performer
                        Manhattan Transfer, The Bobs, Impact, New York Voices,            installed before the first class session.
                        and The King Singers, as well as original compositions
                        and arrangements.                                                 ENVC-245
                                                                                                    Great American Songbook Ensemble
                        ENVC-P235                                                                   1 credit
                                   A Cappella Ensemble                                              Course Chair: Anne Peckham
                                   1 credit                                                         Offered: Fall
                                   Course Chair: Ron Savage                                         Required of: None
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring                                            Electable by: Voice principals and piano/voice
                                   Required of: None                                                  dual principals
                                   Electable by: All                                                Prerequisites: Written approval of
                                   Prerequisites: By audition                                         course instructor

                        This ensemble is available for vocalists. Though participants     This course will familiarize voice students with jazz standard
                        do not need to be voice principals, they should have the vocal    songs and composers of the “Great American Songbook,”
                        and musicianship training necessary for this type of perform-     including George Gershwin, Cole Porter, Duke Ellington,
                        ance. Students will practice, learn, and perform in one or two    Rodgers and Hart, Rodgers and Hammerstein, Irving Berlin,
                        concerts per semester. There will be mixed voice and divisi       Harold Arlen, and many more who impacted America’s music.
                        rehearsals as needed. Music will include traditional pieces       Students will learn to sing and perform songs in the jazz style
                        from early music through contemporary classical music. This       with rhythm section. In addition, students will learn about a
                        ensemble will utilize soprano, alto, tenor, bass voices—four      specific song era, historical content, and the composer by
                        voices per part (two voices per part for divisi)—for sixteen      making song introductions regarding the composer and song.
                        vocalists. This course will also require a piano accompanist.
                        Audition requirements include singing one classical piece         ENVC-261
                        with piano accompaniment, as well as singing in a quartet                   Self-Accompanying Singer Ensemble
                        performing briefly rehearsed a cappella music.                              1 credit
                                                                                                    Course Chair: Anne Peckham
                        ENVC-241                                                                    Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Jazz Fundamentals Ensemble for Vocalists                         Required of: None
                                   1 credit                                                         Electable by: Voice principals
                                   Course Chair: Anne Peckham                                       Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Required of: None                                      An ensemble for singers who accompany themselves and
                                   Electable by: Voice principals                         wish to develop vocal performing skills. Topics will include
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3               basic singing techniques, tone quality, diction, projection,
                                                                                          stylistic vocal delivery, approaches stage presence, and
                        An intermediate ensemble for aspiring jazz vocalists. Study       effective utilization of microphones and PA systems.
                        of American composers and repertoire including Porter,
                        Gershwin, and Rodgers and Hart. Emphasis on sight-reading,
                        analysis, elements of swing, bebop, and vocalise, rhythmic
                        figures, scales, and melodic embellishments.




           94   Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                Ensemble
ENVC-P270                                                         ENVC-P335
          Musical Theater Workshop                                          The New Group
          1 credit                                                          1 credit
          Course Chair: Anne Peckham                                        Course Chair: Anne Peckham
          Offered: Fall, Spring                                             Offered: Fall, Spring
          Required of: None                                                 Required of: None
          Electable by: All                                                 Electable by: Voice principals
          Prerequisites: None                                               Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor

This musical theater performance class is a non-auditioned        This course will focus on new a cappella vocals in various
performance ensemble with musical theater repertoire. The         styles: rock, r&b, gospel, and pop with vocal percussion. The
curriculum includes the study of stage craft, musical theater     group is designed to be a performing group—including
repertoire and genres, and the study of specific musical          movement and overall presentation. Material content will
theater composers. This course prepares students for future       include student arrangements and some transcriptions. There
work in musical theater and introduces students to musical        will be work on dance steps, stage presence, and mic
theater repertoire and performance techniques.                    technique, as well as vocal delivery as required by the
                                                                  instructors. A final performance will be required.
ENVC-P322
          Vocal Jazz Choir                                        ENVC-361
          2 credits                                                         Music Education Concert Choir
          Course Chair: Anne Peckham                                        1 credit
          Offered: Fall, Spring                                             Course Chair: Cecil Adderley
          Required of: None                                                 Offered: Fall, Spring
          Electable by: Voice principals                                    Required of: MUED majors
          Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor              Electable by: MUED majors
                                                                            Prerequisites: None
A jazz choir consists of 8-12 singers divided into SATB (sopra-
no, alto, tenor bass) parts and performs standard jazz choir      Concert choir experience with the materials and literature of
repertoire with full rhythm section accompaniment (piano,         secondary school music.
bass, drums). Each meeting would be devoted to rehearsing
parts, focusing on blend, dynamics, intonation, articulation,     ENVC-370
expression, interpretation, and stage presence. Iconic groups               Musical Theater Ensemble
that would be emulated include The Manhattan Transfer, New                  2 credits
York Voices, Syncopation, and Vox One. Vocal arrangements                   Course Chair: Anne Peckham
recorded, performed, and published by these groups (and                     Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
others) would be used in addition to the works of contemporary              Required of: None
arrangers in this idiom including Michele Weir, April Arabian,              Electable by: Voice principals
Greg Jasperse, Darmon Meader, Paris Rutherford, and                         Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor
Ward Swingle.
                                                                  An ensemble designed to provide singers with an understanding
ENVC-331                                                          of repertoire styles and basic stagecraft. An end-of-semester
          Advanced Vocal Performance Ensemble                     musical/dramatic presentation will be scheduled.
          Mixed Styles 1
          1 credit                                                ENVC-375
          Course Chair: Anne Peckham                                        Advanced Performance Skills for the
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                     Background Singer
          Required of: None                                                 1 credit
          Electable by: Voice principals                                    Course Chair: Anne Peckham
          Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4                          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                                                            Required of: None
A continuation of vocal performance study with emphasis on                  Electable by: Voice principals
song interpretation, elements of style, microphone technique,               Prerequisites: Ensemble rating 5555 or by audition
stage presence, and rehearsing with a rhythm section.
                                                                  A continuation of ILVC-281, Performance Skills for Live
                                                                  Background Vocalists, concentration will be on more difficult
                                                                  and advanced vocal arrangements in live performance venues.
                                                                  Topics integrated into assigned materials will address
                                                                  intonation, blend, rhythmic phrasing, singing riffs and
                                                                  embellishments, entrances and cutoffs, voicings, blend,
                                                                  articulation, written arrangements as well as rote or “head”
                                                                  arrangements, stage presence including movement while
                                                                  singing, microphone setting, and microphone technique.
                                                                  Written transcriptions and arrangements or lead sheets of
                                                                  specific arrangements may be assigned.

                                                                                                                        Summer/Fall 2012   95
                        COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Ensemble



                        ENVC-421                                                          ensembles and other performing venues within a specific song
                                   Pop/Rock/Country Vocal Ensemble                        style. Vocalists will learn how to count off tempos of songs,
                                   with Background Vocals                                 microphone technique, song style and groove, communication
                                   1 credit                                               with the accompanist, and lead sheet preparation.
                                   Course Chair: Anne Peckham
                                   Required of: None                                      ENVC-431
                                   Electable by: Voice principals                                   Advanced Vocal Performance Ensemble 2,
                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 2                         Mixed Styles
                                                                                                    1 credit
                        An intermediate ensemble for vocalists focusing on improvisa-               Course Chair: Anne Peckham
                        tion in the jazz idiom. Topics include articulation and groove,             Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                        melodic and rhythmic phrasing, embellishments, using tone                   Required of: None
                        colors, hearing basic instrumental patterns, blues patterns,                Electable by: Voice principals
                        vamps, turnarounds, and II-V progressions.                                  Prerequisites: ENVC-331 and overall ensemble
                                                                                                    rating 5
                        ENVC-422
                                   Advanced Jazz/Blues Vocal Ensemble                     A continuation of ENVC-331 with an emphasis on song
                                   1 credit                                               interpretation, elements of style, microphone technique,
                                   Course Chair: Anne Peckham                             stage presence, and rehearsal techniques.
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Required of: None                                      ENVC-432
                                   Electable by: Voice principals                                   Spontaneous Composition Ensemble for Voice
                                   Prerequisites: ENVC-122 and overall ensemble                     1 credit
                                     rating 3                                                       Course Chair: Anne Peckham
                                                                                                    Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                        Advanced jazz/blues vocal performance ensemble designed                     Required of: None
                        to prepare students for solo performance in ensembles and                   Electable by: Voice Principals
                        other performing venues within a specific song style. Vocalists             Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4
                        will learn how to count off tempos of songs with different
                        grooves and meters and work on arrangements, while                An intermediate to advanced creative vocal improvisation
                        developing improvisation skills, microphone technique,            ensemble in which students learn to improvise melody,
                        stage presence, and communication with the rhythm section.        harmony, rhythm patterns, counterpoint, layering parts
                        Repertoire will include standards, bebop, fusion, songs           articulation, and vocal percussion in solo and small ensemble
                        without words, and post-1960 jazz compositions.                   team formats. Vocalists will perform assigned repertoire
                                                                                          incorporating learned improvisation techniques created
                        ENVC-423                                                          by instructors.
                                   Advanced R&B Vocal Ensemble
                                   1 credit                                               ENVC-433
                                   Course Chair: Anne Peckham                                       Advanced Latin and Jazz Vocal Workshop
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                    1 credit
                                   Required of: None                                                Course Chair: Anne Peckham
                                   Electable by: Voice principals                                   Offered: Fall, Spring
                                   Prerequisites: ENVC-123 and overall ensemble                     Required of: None
                                     rating 3                                                       Electable by: Voice principals
                                                                                                    Prerequisites: Written approval of
                        Advanced r&b vocal performance ensemble designed to                           course instructor
                        prepare students for solo performance in ensembles and
                        other performing venues within a specific song style. Vocalists   A performance ensemble designed for vocalists wishing to
                        will learn how to count off tempos of songs, microphone           develop skills in the performance of Latin jazz and traditional
                        technique, song style and groove, communication with the          jazz idioms. Students work with a rhythm section and perform
                        accompanist, and lead sheet preparation.                          a concert towards the end of the semester. Vocalists will learn
                                                                                          how to effectively interact with the rhythm section and
                        ENVC-424                                                          develop interpretation and musicianship skills necessary for
                                   Advanced Pop/Rock/Country Vocal Ensemble               performance. Topics covered include vocal improvisation as
                                   1 credit                                               appropriate to song style arrangement tempos grooves and
                                   Course Chair: Anne Peckham                             rhythms key and stage presence.
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                   Required of: None
                                   Electable by: Voice principals
                                   Prerequisites: ENVC-124 and overall ensemble
                                     rating 3

                        Advanced pop/rock/country performance vocal ensemble
                        designed to prepare students for solo performance in

           96   Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                            Electronic Production and Design
                                                                                                                                            Ensemble/
ENVC-470                                                            ENWD-375
          Musical Theater Chorus                                              Advanced Performance Saxophone Quartet
          1 credit                                                            1 credit
          Course Chair: Anne Peckham                                          Course Chair: Bill Pierce
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
          Required of: None                                                   Required of: None
          Electable by: Voice principals                                      Electable by: Woodwind principals
          Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor                Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5 (saxophone
                                                                                principals) or saxophone doubling abilities and
A full chorus designed to support the Musical Theater program.                  written approval of course chair (non-saxophone
Students will work on choral repertoire in the American musical                 principals)
theatre idiom and perform in an end-of-semester musical and
dramatic presentation.                                              Students in this advanced saxophone quartet will focus
                                                                    primarily on preparing for performances, not on sight-reading.
ENVC-480                                                            The quartet will perform pieces in a broad range of styles
          Vocal Recording Ensemble                                  from jazz to classical to student and faculty originals.
          1 credit
          Course Chair: Anne Peckham
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                             Electronic Production and Design
          Required of: None
          Electable by: Voice principals                            EP-210
          Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor                Survey of Electroacoustic Music
                                                                              2 credits
A vocal recording ensemble focusing on development of the                     Course Chair: Kari Juusela
performance skills necessary for effective functioning in the                 Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
recording studio. Students will have the opportunity to                       Required of: None
perform in the studio as soloists and background singers.                     Electable by: All
                                                                              Prerequisites: None
ENWD-343
          Flute Choir                                               An audio/video tour of compositions, performances, and
          1 credit                                                  technical developments that inform the diversity of
          Course Chair: Bill Pierce                                 electroacoustic music. Composition genres facilitated by
          Offered: Fall, Spring                                     electronic means such as process music, microtonality,
          Required of: None                                         ambient, aleatory; and electronic transformations of
          Electable by: Flute principals                            keyboards, guitars, drums, winds, and voice are explored.
          Prerequisites: None                                       Landmark compositions, songs, soundscapes, and
                                                                    performances are placed in a broader context that runs the
Rehearsal and performance of traditional literature for flutes      gamut from early avant-garde through current popular genres.
with an emphasis on reading and interpretation including            The classroom listening experience is extended via the 50+
flute choir materials for three, four, and five parts.              page annotated discography designed for long-term study.
                                                                    This course provides a focused introduction to the culture and
ENWD-351                                                            repertoire of music technology, a requisite for those who
          Clarinet Choir                                            intend to work in the field. A selected film that features
          1 credit                                                  electronic sound design and/or electroacoustic music is
          Course Chair: Bill Pierce                                 screened during midterm and final exam weeks.
          Offered: Fall, Spring
          Required of: None                                         EP-220
          Electable by: All                                                   Studio Technologies
          Prerequisites: Ensemble rating 4434                                 2 credits
                                                                              Course Chair: Kari Juusela
Rehearsal and performance of traditional literature for clarinets             Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
with an emphasis on reading and interpretation. Includes                      Required of: ELPD majors
clarinet choir materials in three, four, and five parts.                      Electable by: ELPD majors
                                                                              Prerequisites: MTEC-111 and either LMSC-208 or
ENWD-361                                                                        LMSC-209, and written approval of course chair
          Saxophone Quartet
          1 credit                                                  This course provides a comprehensive introduction to the
          Course Chair: Bill Pierce                                 electronic music studio. Emphasis is placed on understanding
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                             analog and digital audio concepts, analog and digital signal
          Required of: None                                         flow, audio connections and gain-staging, console vs. control
          Electable by: All                                         surface paradigms, DAW set-up and usage, studio signal
          Prerequisites: Ensemble rating 4434                       flow, the recording process, microphone usage, and signal
                                                                    processors used in recording and mixing.
A saxophone ensemble performing a mixture of traditional
and 20th-century music for soprano, alto, tenor, and
baritone saxophone.                                                                                                      Summer/Fall 2012          97
                                                COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Electronic Production and Design



                                                EP-223                                                              to produce sound/music to picture for feature films, industrials,
                                                           Modular Functions and Signal Flow                        animation, advertising, and video games. A selected film that
                                                           2 credits                                                features electronic sound design and/or electroacoustic music
                                                           Course Chair: Kari Juusela                               is screened during midterm and final exam weeks.
                                                           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                                           Required of: ELPD majors                                 EP-261
                                                           Electable by: ELPD majors                                           Musical Devices for Media Composers
                                                           Prerequisites: MTEC-111 and either LMSC-208                         2 credits
                                                             or LMSC-209                                                       Course Chair: Kari Juusela
                                                                                                                               Offered: Spring
                                                Study of principles and use of modules (oscillators, filters,                  Required of: None
                                                amplifiers, envelope generators) found in software and                         Electable by: All
                                                hardware modular sound production systems. Focus is on                         Prerequisites: EP-225 or MP-225
                                                observing signal characteristics at outputs, and defining signal
                                                functions (audio, control, timing) solely via connections to        A study of composition devices such as hemiola, stretto,
                                                inputs. “Sonic deconstruction” and other electronic ear             polymeter, canon, augmentation/diminution, antiphony,
                                                training techniques are presented, and correlative original         pointillism, streaming, hocketing, ostinato, spatialization, etc.
                                                sound designs are produced by students. In addition to class        used by professional electronic media (e.g., video game, film
                                                participation, students are supervised in weekly hands-on           score, telecommunications, internet) composers and sound
                                                practice in EP/D labs, where an array of software and hardware      designers. Harmony and its devices are not considered.
                                                systems are available.                                              Students are challenged to show how the classic devices of
                                                                                                                    music composition can be extended using electronic
                                                EP-225                                                              technology. Participants compose original sound sketches, and
                                                           Control Systems in Electronic Production                 a longer digital audio/MIDI production that illustrate fluency
                                                           2 credits                                                with the musical devices presented in class. Class members
                                                           Course Chair: Kari Juusela                               also excerpt commercially available music of their choice that
                                                           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                            features discernible musical devices, and group analyses are
                                                           Required of: ELPD majors                                 developed in class.
                                                           Electable by: All
                                                           Prerequisites: MTEC-111 and either LMSC-208              EP-320
                                                             or LMSC-209                                                       Digital Mix Techniques
                                                                                                                               2 credits
                                                A comprehensive study of MIDI and other control systems in                     Course Chair: Kari Juusela
                                                the context of electronic music production. Focus is given to                  Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                                the integration of hardware and software synthesizers, digital                 Required of: ELPD majors
                                                audio, and controllers into the sequencing/DAW environment.                    Electable by: ELPD majors
                                                The MIDI specification and its practical applications in music                 Prerequisites: EP-220, EP-223, and EP-225
                                                production and sound design will be explored. A wide range
                                                of sequencing projects includes music for commercials,              Based on the concepts and skills learned in EP-220 Studio
                                                electronica, and performance-oriented control techniques.           Technologies, this course places a primary emphasis on the
                                                                                                                    improvement of student productions through effective mixing
                                                EP-250                                                              techniques. Mix balance, equalization, dynamics, and other
                                                           Electronics in the Soundtrack                            signal processing techniques will be explored and applied to a
                                                           2 credits                                                series of projects. Genre-specific techniques will be discussed,
                                                           Course Chair: Kari Juusela                               in addition to electronic music styles and sound
                                                           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                            design scenarios.
                                                           Required of: None
                                                           Electable by: All
                                                           Prerequisites: None

                                                Focuses on electroacoustic music in the film score. Highlights
                                                electronic musical instruments, computer software, and
                                                electronic techniques used to create and synchronize music,
                                                Foley, SFX (sound effects), and dialogue to picture. Illustrated
                                                voluminously with film clips and DVD supplements, from the
                                                coming of sound in film (circa 1927) through the modern era.
                                                Real time or mediated demonstrations of techniques such as
                                                click track, punches and streamers, Pro Tools mix down, pitch
                                                shifting, audio reversal, ADR (automated dialogue
                                                replacement), etc., are shown in class. This course familiarizes
                                                class members with archetypal electroacoustic underscores,
                                                industry terminology, and standard practices used to produce
                                                sound for picture. It is a useful initiation for those who intend



                                   98   Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                    Electronic Production and Design
EP-321                                                             EP-330
          Control Systems in Advanced Production                              Indian Music Concepts in Electronic Production
          2 credits                                                           2 credits
          Course Chair: Kari Juusela                                          Course Chair: Kari Juusela
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                       Offered: Fall, Spring
          Required of: ELPD majors                                            Required of: None
          Electable by: ELPD majors                                           Electable by: ELPD majors
          Prerequisites: EP-220, EP-223, and EP-225                           Prerequisites: EP-320, EP-321, and EP-223

An advanced project-oriented course focused on the mastery         A creative study of the musical aesthetics involved with
of an integrated electronic production environment using a         composing and arranging in a wide range of popular Indian
wide variety of hardware and software. Emphasis is placed on       musical genres, including pop songs, remix hits, and classical
advanced techniques in MIDI sequencing with audio                  forms. Utilizing a variety of electronic programming and
production. These techniques are applied in a series of projects   production techniques, students will complete a series of
including orchestral emulation, music and sound design for         guided projects that effectively demonstrate the contemporary
animation, and remixes of existing vocal tracks. Supporting        application of Indian ragas, musical instrumentation, and
topics include advanced real-time control of synthesis             popular stylistic repertoire.
parameters, manipulation of musical time and tempo, and
effectively working with various rhythmic feels. Special           EP-335
attention will be paid to integrating hardware instruments and                Mapping and Curves in Sonic Arts
controllers in a software-based DAW production environment.                   2 credits
                                                                              Course Chair: Kari Juusela
EP-322                                                                        Offered: Fall
          Advanced Sound Design Techniques                                    Required of: None
          2 credits                                                           Electable by: ELPD majors
          Course Chair: Kari Juusela                                          Prerequisites: EP-322
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
          Required of: ELPD majors                                 A global study of curves, graphic displays, and mapping tech-
          Electable by: ELPD majors                                niques that undergird practical use of electronic sound produc-
          Prerequisites: EP-220, EP-223, and EP-225                tion systems. Focuses on aural and visual aids to understanding
                                                                   rather than taking a purely mathematical approach. Topics
This advanced course expands upon the concepts and                 include principles of linearity and nonlinearity in: relationships
techniques learned in EP-223 Modular Functions and Signal          and functions; input responses and attenuator calibrations; pitch
Flow. Concentrated ear training and patch dictation helps          vs. frequency shifting; AM and FM sideband production; and
students to identify and create unusual and dynamic                envelope generator segment curves. Creative mapping using
instrumental sounds and sound effects, and their applications      logic gates (AND, OR, NOR, etc.) is introduced. Graphic displays
in live performance, film, electronic music production, and        in selected software applications are examined to reveal the
video game audio.                                                  curves implicit when waveform and spectrum are represented.
                                                                   This course presents the pervasive graphical-mathematical ele-
EP-326                                                             ments common to digital audio applications and their displays,
          Interactive Media Portfolio                              and facilitates advanced studies in sonic arts.
          2 credits
          Course Chair: Kari Juusela                               EP-337
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                       Programming, Sound Design, and Composition
          Required of: None                                                   in Csound
          Electable by: ELPD majors                                           2 credits
          Prerequisites: EP-320, EP-321, and EP-322                           Course Chair: Kari Juusela
                                                                              Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
This course is a portfolio development workshop focusing on                   Required of: None
interactive media. Weekly assignments will build fluency in file              Electable by: ELPD majors
formats, encoding tools, and authoring platforms. Through                     Prerequisites: EP-223
successful completion of these projects, students will become
adept in the basics of video preparation, audio for online and     This is a class in electronic production and design using
DVD formats, and Flash interface design.                           Csound, one of the world’s most powerful and versatile
                                                                   software synthesizers and signal processors. At the algorithmic
                                                                   level, students will design and compose using classic synthesis
                                                                   techniques such as additive, subtractive, waveshaping,
                                                                   wavetable, granular, scanned, RM, AM, PM, FM, FOF, and
                                                                   physical modeling. Students will learn how this powerful
                                                                   software synthesisizer language has been applied in game
                                                                   audio, sound design for TV, film, advertising, and graduate
                                                                   research in computer music and music perception.




                                                                                                                            Summer/Fall 2012   99
                                           COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Electronic Production and Design



                                           EP-339                                                              EP-341
                                                      Electronic Composition and Sound Design for                        Programming Interactive Audio Software and
                                                      Commercial Production                                              Plugins in Max/MSP
                                                      2 credits                                                          2 credits
                                                      Course Chair: Kari Juusela                                         Course Chair: Kari Juusela
                                                      Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                      Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                                      Required of: None                                                  Required of: ELPD majors
                                                      Electable by: ELPD majors                                          Electable by: ELPD majors
                                                      Prerequisites: EP-223                                              Prerequisites: EP-320, EP-321, and EP-322

                                           This course will provide the opportunity for students to gain       A class in electronic production and design using Max/MSP,
                                           experience working in situations which typify the demands of        arguably one of the world’s most powerful and intuitive
                                           a commercial production environment. This will include:             multimedia programming languages. Students will prototype,
                                           composing in a wide variety of idioms, to specific stylistic        design, and program stand-alone audio applications and VST
                                           direction, and under common constraints that affect                 plugin versions of wind chimes, music boxes, softsynths,
                                           commercial music composition. The emulation of these styles         samplers, drum machines, groove boxes, audio processors, and
                                           will require drawing upon the skills of a synthesist, engineer,     remixers and learn to control them with game controllers such
                                           and producer as well as those of composer and orchestrator.         as the Nintendo wiiMote. Students will apply algorithmic
                                           This course will confront the student with the issues and           composition techniques to the systems that they design, and
                                           problems common to the working composer, music producer,            learn to utilize noise, fractals, and chaos as a means of
                                           and small studio owner.                                             humanizing their software creations. The class culminates in a
                                                                                                               public laptop jam session using the original software designed
                                           EP-340                                                              by the students.
                                                      Speech and Vocal Synthesis
                                                      2 credits                                                EP-P350
                                                      Course Chair: Kari Juusela                                         Live Performance Techniques for
                                                      Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                      Electronic Musicians
                                                      Required of: None                                                  2 credits
                                                      Electable by: ELPD majors                                          Course chair: Kari Juusela
                                                      Prerequisites: EP-223                                              Offered: Fall, Spring
                                                                                                                         Required of: None
                                           An overview of the electronically produced/processed voice,                   Electable by: ELPD majors
                                           with exploration of: human voice mechanics; formants in                       Prerequisites: EP-320, EP-321, and EP-322
                                           speech and singing; time-stretching granular techniques;
                                           channel and phase vocoders; parametric EQ; and formant              This course will examine the technical and creative processes
                                           (fixed) filters. Theoretical underpinnings and practical examples   involved with adapting electronic composition and production
                                           of the transformative power of convolution are presented.           for live performance. Topics to be covered include the
                                           Synergistic “dymaxion” music composition approaches that            development of repertoire in various electronic genres, set
                                           exercise elements learned in class are suggested, as                organization and improvisational strategies, hardware and
                                           alternatives to familiar software sequencer production.             software integration, expressive real-time control, and
                                           Students are provided weekly hands-on access to EP/D labs,          considerations for solo and ensemble stage presentation.
                                           where a variety of software and hardware systems are
                                           available. This course culminates in a public concert, and is       EP-351
                                           suitable for those who recognize the central role that                        Advanced Studies in Digital
                                           electronically produced and processed voices play in: video                   Sampling Techniques
                                           games; animation; advertising; contemporary song writing;                     2 credits
                                           and telecommunications.                                                       Course Chair: Kari Juusela
                                                                                                                         Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                                                                                                         Required of: None
                                                                                                                         Electable by: ELPD majors
                                                                                                                         Prerequisites: EP-322

                                                                                                               This course focuses on the study of the generation of original,
                                                                                                               exotic sound textures and unusual synthetic instrumental
                                                                                                               timbres derived from acoustic sounds recorded from studio
                                                                                                               and field sources. Digital signal processing and studio
                                                                                                               production techniques as used by the industry’s top game and
                                                                                                               film sound designers are discussed and practiced.




                       100         Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                Electronic Production and Design
EP-353                                                               a variety sound elements: music, sound effects, and vocal
           Programming Audio Applications and Plugins                elements. At various times throughout the semester, the class
           in C, C++, and Objective-C                                will meet at MassArt in joint meetings with student animators
           2 credits                                                 for directed review of their work.
           Course Chair: Kari Juusela
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                             EP-381
           Required of: None                                                   Digital Audio Production and Design
           Electable by: ELPD majors                                           2 credits
           Prerequisites: EP-322                                               Course Chair: Kari Juusela
                                                                               Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
A class in C programming with projects tailored specifically to                Required of: ELPD majors
the progressive electronic musician. Working initially from the                Electable by: ELPD majors
Terminal application, using the GNU Compiler Collection on                     Prerequisites: EP-320, EP-321, and EP-322
Mac OS X, and later with Apple’s XCODE Integrated Developer
Environment (IDE), the student will write musical programs and       This course challenges students to design and produce audio
audio units that do algorithmic composition, software                content for a series of projects. Utilizing the studio and lab
synthesis, and signal processing. This software engineering          resources of the department, students will produce content
class is the first step toward the design of one’s own custom        that ranges from spoken word to sound and music mixed in
synthesis and signal processing tools; and as such, will provide     surround. Students are introduced to techniques and
both a marketable technical skill as well as satisfying a highly     applications that are essential for pursuit of a variety of
regarded and often required prerequisite for graduate                professional opportunities in the areas of sound design and
programs in computer music and music technology.                     audio production for film, video games, TV, and radio, as well
                                                                     as all types of music production.
EP-371
           Composition Workshop                                      EP-391
           2 credits                                                           Physical Computing, Circuit Bending, and
           Course Chair: Kari Juusela                                          Alternative Controllers
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                       2 credits
           Required of: None                                                   Course Chair: Kari Juusela
           Electable by: ELPD majors                                           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Prerequisites: EP-223                                               Required of: None
                                                                               Electable by: ELPD majors
This class provides the student with an opportunity to create                  Prerequisites: EP-321
portfolio pieces of original compositions using software and
hardware tools. We will study a variety of approaches to             Using Ableton Live, Reaktor, Max, Jitter, OSC, Csound, and C,
composing and realizing works with an emphasis on developing         students design and program their own interactive games and
the use of line, rhythm, harmony, orchestration and form.            audio/video remixers. These systems use the department’s
Weekly assignments include electronic realization of musical         cutting edge collection of MIDI and wireless controllers: the
excerpts, readings by composers, listening, and analysis.            Mathews Radio Baton, Buchla Lightning, Haiken Continuum,
Technical topics will be explored by the group as needed.            Lemur, AudioCubes, Monome, and the iPhone; sensor systems
                                                                     such as the iCube, MIDItron, and IBVA BrainWave-to-MIDI
EP-373                                                               Interface; and game controllers such as the P5 DataGlove and
           Sound Design for Animation                                the Nintendo wiiMote. This class also focuses on electronics
           2 credits                                                 and circuit-bending. Students breadboard and build a custom
           Course Chair: Kari Juusela                                analog synth; they modify and extend several sound-making
           Offered: Spring                                           toys; and they add photocells to their Oxygen8 keyboards. The
           Required of: None                                         class culminates in a public interactive audio installation and
           Electable by: ELPD majors                                 circuit-bent jam session using the original software, synths,
           Prerequisites: EP-321 and EP-322                          controllers, and systems designed by the students.

A project-based course covering basic design principles and
production techniques used in producing sound for animation.
Students will work in collaboration with senior animation
students at the Massachusetts College of Art to produce three
short animation projects. Animation is a part of practically every
form of entertainment that uses visual elements, from feature
films and television programs to video games and websites.
Most, if not all, musicians will work with this medium at some
point in their career. Class meetings will explore the historical
roots of sound and music for animation through screenings,
case studies, and assigned readings. From this, students will
develop the skills necessary to analyze an animation and create




                                                                                                                           Summer/Fall 2012   101
                                           COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Electronic Production and Design



                                           EP-401                                                               EP-426
                                                      Advanced Seminar                                                    Interactive Video Programming
                                                      2 credits                                                           and Performance
                                                      Course Chair: Kari Juusela                                          2 credits
                                                      Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                       Course Chair: Kari Juusela
                                                      Required of: ELPD majors                                            Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                                      Electable by: ELPD majors                                           Required of: None
                                                      Prerequisites: EP-326 and EP-381                                    Electable by: ELPD majors
                                                                                                                          Prerequisites: EP-341
                                           A precursor to EP-491, Advanced Seminar combines master
                                           class and private lesson settings for the electronic production      This class provides the student with an opportunity to create
                                           and design major. Master class topics include group                  visual projections for their original compositions using
                                           assessment of each student’s portfolio work, group critiques,        MAX/MSP/Jitter and other programs as needed. We will study
                                           and technical instruction as needed. Assessment and analysis         a variety of approaches to creating interactive video for music
                                           tools are provided to discuss music composition/production as        performance, installation, and net-art works. Students will
                                           well as the integration of music and sound design for picture        then create software and art works using audio, video, and
                                           and games. Business and career preparations will also be             various controllers for input. Weekly assignments will include
                                           discussed. The private lesson component allows each student          reading, programming projects, and short live performances.
                                           to develop skills and musicianship with direct mentoring from        The final project can be a performance or installation using
                                           the instructor.                                                      original software.

                                           EP-413                                                               EP-431
                                                      Digital Signal Processing: Theory                                   Physical Modeling and Additive Synthesis
                                                      and Composition                                                     2 credits
                                                      2 credits                                                           Course Chair: Kari Juusela
                                                      Course Chair: Kari Juusela                                          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                                      Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                       Required of: None
                                                      Required of: None                                                   Electable by: ELPD majors
                                                      Electable by: ELPD majors                                           Prerequisites: EP-322
                                                      Prerequisites: EP-322
                                                                                                                An exploration of excitation/resonance models of sound
                                           A theoretical and practical exploration of open-source digital       production: Karplus-Strong (string), brass, and woodwind
                                           signal processing software, audio-units, and plugins. Student        modeling using digital signal processing in a dedicated
                                           projects focus on the innovative production, remixing, and           hardware environment; use of software-based modeling for
                                           compositional use of pitch shifting, time scaling, phase             pedagogical purposes; exploration of Fourier or additive
                                           vocoding, spectral filtering, cross-synthesis, and convolution. In   synthesis and formant theory in a hardware environment.
                                           addition to composing avant-garde DSP-based audio art,
                                           students will learn how to use these powerful techniques to          EP-461
                                           design new and unique sounds for advertising, film, television,                Experimental and Avant-Garde
                                           animation, and games, and produce experimental and                             Electronic Composition
                                           innovative pop.                                                                2 credits
                                                                                                                          Course Chair: Kari Juusela
                                           EP-414                                                                         Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                                      Digital Signal Processing for Music Production                      Required of: None
                                                      and Postproduction                                                  Electable by: ELPD majors
                                                      2 credits                                                           Prerequisites: EP-322
                                                      Course Chair: Kari Juusela
                                                      Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                             This course explores an expansive set of historically innovative
                                                      Required of: None                                         academic works, which students translate into cutting-edge
                                                      Electable by: ELPD majors                                 commercial approaches to composition and production. The
                                                      Prerequisites: EP-381                                     student will compose a graduate school application portfolio
                                                                                                                of modal, serial, atonal and microtonal audio art based on
                                           A practical exploration of digital signal processing music and       and inspired by the analysis of masterworks in the following
                                           sound design projects, including composition, remixing, and          genres: ambient, minimal, glitch, sound object, soundscape,
                                           mastering, with emphasis on key techniques of DSP and their          and sound collage. Through listening, modeling, and formal
                                           applications in audio production. The class explores the             musical analysis of both alternative pop and mainstream
                                           implementation and application of common DSP functions in            acousmatic masterworks, each student comes to better
                                           software applications, and how they are effectively applied in       understand the creative process and their unique personal
                                           these projects.                                                      creative process; and along the way discovers and cultivates a
                                                                                                                more personal and original musical voice.




                       102         Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                           Ear Training
                                                                                                                                           Electronic Production and Design/
EP-491                                                             ET-112
          Advanced Projects in Electronic Production                         Ear Training 2
          and Design                                                         2 credits
          2 credits                                                          Course Chair: Allan Chase
          Course Chair: Kari Juusela                                         Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                      Required of: All
          Required of: ELPD majors                                           Electable by: All
          Electable by: ELPD majors                                          Prerequisites: ET-111
          Prerequisites: EP-401, completion of 8 credits of
            ELPD electives, and written approval of instructor     Continuation of ET-111 Ear Training 1. Development of basic
            and course chair                                       ear training skills through performance and dictation. Study of
                                                                   melodies, intervals, harmony, and solfege in minor keys.
This course focuses on production of the capstone Electronic       Continued study of rhythms, meters, conducting patterns,
Production and Design project and provides for individual          and notation.
attention within a small group setting. The specific nature of
the project will be determined by written agreement between        ET-211
student and instructor. Each student will also be required to                Ear Training 3
participate in the jury process as well as the Senior Showcase               2 credits
at the end of the semester.                                                  Course Chair: Allan Chase
                                                                             Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
EP-495                                                                       Required of: All students not taking ET-231
          Electronic Production and Design Internship                        Electable by: All
          2 credits                                                          Prerequisites: ET-112
          Course Chair: Kari Juusela
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                            Development of ear training skills through performance and
          Required of: None                                        dictation. Study of melodies, intervals, harmony, and solfege
          Electable by: ELPD majors                                in Lydian, Mixolydian, Dorian, and Phrygian modes, mixed
          Prerequisites: Written approval of course chair          modes, and harmonic and melodic minor. Continued study of
            and EP-223                                             rhythms, meters, conducting patterns, and notation.

Monitored and evaluated professional work experience in            ET-212
an environment related to the electronic production and                      Ear Training 4
design major. Placement is limited to situations available from              2 credits
or approved by the Office of Experiential Learning and the                   Course Chair: Allan Chase
Electronic Production and Design department chair or designee.               Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
To apply for an internship, students must see the internship                 Required of: All students not taking ET-232
coordinator in the Office of Experiential Learning prior to                  Electable by: All
registering. Note: Equivalent credit for prior experience is not             Prerequisites: ET-211
available due to the requirement of concurrent contract
between the employer/supervisor and the college. International     Continuation of ET-211. Modal singing and dictation studies.
students in F-1 status must obtain authorization on their          Interval studies, two- and three-part dictation. Basic atonal
Form I-20 from the Counseling and Advising Center prior to         melodic studies.
beginning an internship.
                                                                   ET-231
                                                                             Solfege 1
Ear Training                                                                 2 credits
                                                                             Course Chair: Allan Chase
ET-111                                                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
          Ear Training 1                                                     Required of: All students not taking ET-211
          2 credits                                                          Electable by: All
          Course Chair: Allan Chase                                          Prerequisites: ET-112
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
          Required of: All                                         Development of sight-singing skills using the traditional
          Electable by: All                                        movable “do” method. Drills in rhythm, interval, and pitch.
          Prerequisites: None                                      Singing exercises in major keys through four sharps and four
                                                                   flats in G and F clefs. Some studies in minor keys. Harmonic
Development of basic ear training skills through performance       studies. Part singing. Contrapuntal and harmonic dictation.
and dictation. Study of melodies, intervals, harmony, and
solfege in major keys. Study of basic rhythms in the most
common meters.




                                                                                                                        Summer/Fall 2012          103
                       COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Ear Training



                       ET-232                                                              ET-332
                                  Solfege 2                                                          Harmonic Ear Training 2
                                  2 credits                                                          2 credits
                                  Course Chair: Allan Chase                                          Course Chair: Allan Chase
                                  Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                      Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                  Required of: All students not taking ET-212                        Required of: None
                                  Electable by: All                                                  Electable by: All
                                  Prerequisites: ET-231                                              Prerequisites: ET-331

                       Continuation of ET-231. Sight-singing and harmonic studies in       This course is a continuation of ET-331. Chord progressions
                       all major and minor keys. C clef drills. Rhythm patterns of         will be more intermediate to complex in nature. The concepts
                       increased complexity.                                               of modal interchange harmony, substitute dominants, and
                                                                                           modulation will be introduced. Voicings containing multiple
                       ET-321                                                              tensions and upper structure triads will also be covered.
                                  World Music Ear Training                                 More extensive transcription work of “real music” will
                                  2 credits                                                be incorporated.
                                  Course Chair: Allan Chase
                                  Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                            ET-341
                                  Required of: None                                                  Rhythmic Ear Training
                                  Electable by: All                                                  2 credits
                                  Prerequisites: ET-112                                              Course Chair: Allan Chase
                                                                                                     Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                       This course focuses on a variety of rhythmic patterns,                        Required of: None
                       percussive ostinatos, and melodic repertoire from around the                  Electable by: All
                       world, with an emphasis on African, Caribbean, and South                      Prerequisites: ET-112
                       American traditional and popular music, as well as South
                       Indian classical, Balkan, and Middle Eastern genres. In-class       Touching on a variety of contemporary styles such as pop/r&b,
                       activity includes vocalization and rhythmic externalization         jazz, fusion, Latin music, and classical genres as resources for
                       exercises based on particular musical examples, general             weekly in-class analysis, transcription, and solfege exercises,
                       listening and aural analysis, and transcription of selected         this course enhances theoretical understanding, aural
                       elements of a musical texture. Students examine music from          perception, and performance of rhythm in music. Emphasis is
                       the perspective of musical cognition, including the potential       placed on accurate and meaningful interpretation and
                       impact of cultural background on the formation of one’s             notation of a piece’s rhythmic components, e.g., polyrhythmic
                       mental representation and the analysis of “ambiguous”               percussion grooves, syncopated melodic lines, characteristic
                       musical structures. Homework assignments entail full or partial     comping patterns, or large-scale harmonic rhythms.
                       transcriptions of rhythmic and melodic elements, as well as         Furthermore, the cognitive process involved in the construction
                       exercises involving melodic solfege and rhythmic recitation         of a resultant metrical perspective will be discussed. Sight-
                       designed to enhance a student’s internal sense of time, pitch,      reading and general rhythmic comprehension are challenged
                       and physical independence through singing or speaking of            through a series of exercises and drills featuring odd-time
                       melody and rhythm in the context of its underlying essential        patterns and polyrhythmic independence between the voice
                       metrical structure.                                                 and the body, as well as advanced studies of mixed
                                                                                           subdivisions. The intent is to strengthen internal coordination
                       ET-331                                                              of multiple rhythmic voices, as well as sharpen one’s precision
                                  Harmonic Ear Training 1                                  and clarity when performing.
                                  2 credits
                                  Course Chair: Allan Chase                                ET-351
                                  Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                      Fundamentals of Transcription
                                  Required of: None                                                  2 credits
                                  Electable by: All                                                  Course Chair: Allan Chase
                                  Prerequisites: HR-112 and ET-112                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                                                                                     Required of: None
                       This course will work within the limited scope of progressions                Electable by: All
                       including simple root position diatonic harmony, inversions,                  Prerequisites: ET-211 or ET-231
                       secondary and extended dominants, II-V patterns, and passing
                       diminished chords. Chord voicings containing one tension will       A course designed to teach the student how to transcribe
                       also be covered. This course will include several activiites that   instrumental and vocal recorded material as found in jazz,
                       address application to “real music” situations.                     pop, and rock. Techniques for transcribing melody, harmony,
                                                                                           and bass lines. This course is especially recommended for
                                                                                           those students wishing to extend their skills in identifying
                                                                                           chord progressions and rhythms.




         104   Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                             Film Scoring
                                                                                                                                             Ear Training/
ET-411                                                            ET-451
          Advanced Ear Training 1                                            Jazz Solo Transcription
          2 credits                                                          2 credits
          Course Chair: Allan Chase                                          Course Chair: Allan Chase
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                      Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
          Required of: None                                                  Required of: None
          Electable by: All                                                  Electable by: All
          Prerequisites: ET-212 or ET-232                                    Prerequisites: ET-212, ET-232, or ET-351

Singing and aurally identifying intervals in tonal and nontonal   Transcription of recorded jazz solos from various periods.
situations. Intended to bridge the gap between relative pitch     Classroom analysis and discussion.
and hearing by interval alone. Preparation for singing
atonal music.                                                     ET-P461
                                                                             Advanced Modal Ear Training
ET-412                                                                       2 credits
          Advanced Ear Training 2                                            Course Chair: Allan Chase
          2 credits                                                          Offered: Fall, Spring
          Course Chair: Allan Chase                                          Required of: None
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                      Electable by: All
          Required of: None                                                  Prerequisites: ET-212 and HR-211
          Electable by: All
          Prerequisites: ET-411                                   Traditional modes will briefly be reviewed and the basic
                                                                  techniques of practice and performance will be learned.
Continuation of ET-411.                                           Students will then learn and perform nontraditional/hybrid
                                                                  modes. Examples of modes (please note that each example
ET-421                                                            has alternate names) to be studied include Hungarian Major,
          Atonal Solfege 1                                        Spanish Phrygian, Octatonic, Arabic, Whole Tone, Hindu, Super
          2 credits                                               Locrian, Lydian b7, Japanese, and Hungarian Minor.
          Course Chair: Allan Chase
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
          Required of: None                                       Film Scoring
          Electable by: All
          Prerequisites: ET-212 or ET-232                         FS-221
                                                                             Introduction to Film Scoring
A continuation of solfege that concentrates on atonal music.                 2 credits
Sol-fa syllables are not used. Please note that this course is               Course Chair: Dan Carlin
recommended for students who have a high potential in non-                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
tonal intervallic solfege.                                                   Required of: FILM majors
                                                                             Electable by: All
ET-422                                                                       Prerequisites: LENG-111
          Atonal Solfege 2
          2 credits                                               Investigation of the aesthetic relationship between film and
          Course Chair: Allan Chase                               music. Discussion of the many functions of film music with
          Offered: Spring                                         analysis of its most effective application to dramatic situations.
          Required of: None                                       Exploration of career opportunities in film and television music.
          Electable by: All
          Prerequisites: ET-421                                   FS-231
                                                                             History of Film Music
Continuation of ET-421, including the choral works                           2 credits
of Webern.                                                                   Course Chair: Dan Carlin
                                                                             Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
ET-441                                                                       Required of: None
          Popular Song Transcription                                         Electable by: All
          2 credits                                                          Prerequisites: FS-221
          Course Chair: Allan Chase
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                           A survey of music in feature-length films from the silent period
          Required of: None                                       to the present day. An overview of stylistic scoring approaches
          Electable by: All                                       that represent the most significant developments in the field.
          Prerequisites: ET-212, ET-232, or ET-351                Discussion of works of composers who have contributed
                                                                  extensively to the development of film music, including
Designed to teach the student how to transcribe songs and         representatives of newer trends in recent years. Extensive visual
arrangements in current popular music. Most projects are          examples will be combined with independent aural analysis of
chosen by the student in his/her area of musical interest.        a wide range of scores.
Project presentation in class.

                                                                                                                          Summer/Fall 2012      105
                       COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Film Scoring



                       FS-241                                                                 FS-P301
                                  Analysis of Dramatic Scoring                                          Mixing the Film Score
                                  2 credits                                                             2 credits
                                  Course Chair: Dan Carlin                                              Course Chair: Dan Carlin
                                  Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                         Offered: Fall, Spring
                                  Required of: FILM majors                                              Required of: None
                                  Electable by: FILM majors                                             Electable by: FILM majors
                                  Prerequisites: FS-221, CM-221, CM-231, CP-212 or                      Prerequisites: FS-361
                                    CP-215, and ISKB-212 (non-piano principals);
                                    either COND-211, COND-221, or COND-216;                   This course is a study of multitrack mixdown in a digital audio
                                    HR-212; and ET-212 or ET-232; FS-241 must be              workstation environment, specifically for the needs of modern
                                    taken concurrently with FS-361                            film and television scoring in a project studio. Balance and
                                                                                              context of a mix are explored, and special consideration is
                       This course combines analysis and composition elements in              given to genre-appropriate sound. In additional to aesthetic and
                       order to provide students with the basic musical skills                technical concerns, people skills and delivery to specifications
                       necessary for composing music for film. Course work includes           (including stem mixes and session interchange between DAWs)
                       in-depth analysis of existing musical examples, which                  are emphasized. Mix material will be drawn from the student's
                       demonstrate the building blocks of composition, including              own film scoring projects from other courses, and/or film
                       melody, harmony, rhythm, and form, as applied to specific              scoring sessions from other composers.
                       dramatic situations. Students will compose several short
                       original examples modeled after the various analysis                   FS-311
                       examples presented.                                                              Film Music Composition Seminar
                                                                                                        1 credit
                       FS-251                                                                           Course Chair: Dan Carlin
                                  The Language of Film                                                  Offered: Fall, Spring
                                  3 credits                                                             Required of: None
                                  Course Chair: Dan Carlin                                              Electable by: FILM majors
                                  Offered: Fall, Spring                                                 Prerequisites: FS-241 and FS-361
                                  Required of: None
                                  Electable by: All                                           Intended as a complement to FS-341 and/or FS-441, this
                                  Prerequisites: FS-221 and LENG-201                          course is designed to provide a link between composition and
                                                                                              scoring techniques by addressing specific challenges of
                       This course provides film scoring majors with an introduction          dramatic music composition. Application of compositional
                       to how film makes visual and narrative meaning through the             devices intended to help advance the drama; exploration of
                       language of film, which includes camera, frame composition,            different concepts and methods as creative music resources for
                       lighting, production design, acting styles, editing, dialogue,         current and future scoring assignments.
                       plot, genre, themes, sound, and point of view. Students will
                       learn to “read” and analyze film from a film studies                   FS-340
                       perspective. Written assignments and in-class activities will                    Dramatic Orchestration for Film
                       reinforce writing, reading, and oral communication skills, with                  2 credits
                       the goal of strengthening students’ abilities to communicate                     Course Chair: Dan Carlin
                       with directors.                                                                  Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                                                                                        Required of: FILM majors
                       FS-271                                                                           Electable by: FILM majors
                                  Analysis of Video Game Techniques                                     Prerequisites: FS-241, FS-361, and either
                                  2 credits                                                               COND-212, COND-217, or COND-222; FS-341
                                  Course Chair: Dan Carlin                                                must be taken concurrently with FS-340
                                  Offered: Fall, Spring
                                  Required of: None                                           This course focuses on the exploration and application of
                                  Electable by: All                                           traditional and contemporary orchestration techniques to
                                  Prerequisites: MTEC-111                                     support and achieve intended dramatic effect. Regular
                                                                                              assignments involve the use of orchestration as an important
                       This course provides students a thorough overview of the               compositional tool to successfully meet the emotional
                       history, theory, aesthetics, and application of interactive scoring    requirements of a wide variety of dramatic situations.
                       along with an introduction to the video game and interactive
                       industries, including career opportunities, contracts, licensing,
                       practices, and toolsets. The course includes analysis of interactive
                       music as found in video games, the internet, installations, sound
                       art, and concert composition.This course can stand alone or
                       serve as the first in a series of three courses that make up part
                       of the Video Game Scoring Minor.




        106    Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                Film Scoring
FS-341                                                              FS-371
          Scoring Techniques for Film and Video                               Interactive Scoring for Video Games
          2 credits                                                           2 credits
          Course Chair: Dan Carlin                                            Course Chair: Dan Carlin
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                       Offered: Fall, Spring
          Required of: FILM majors                                            Required of: None
          Electable by: FILM majors                                           Electable by: All
          Prerequisites: FS-241, FS-361, and either                           Prerequisites: FS-271 and one of the following:
            COND-212, COND-217, or COND-222; FS-340                             FS-361, CW-361, or EP-371
            must be taken concurrently with FS-341
                                                                    This course features applied approaches to scoring for video
The technical and aesthetic aspects of composing and                games and builds upon the foundations learned in FS-271. It
recording music for picture using various synchronization           presents a solid understanding of the knowledge and skills
methods: to a click provided by a MIDI sequencer and to a           needed to prepare students for entry-level work at a game
studio clock or stopwatch. Film and video formats,                  development company or as a freelance game music
measurements, and conversions, as well as scoring procedures        professional, including experience with typical game music
and rehearsal techniques will be covered. Students will             workflow and approaches to scoring video games. This is an
compose and record three projects: sequenced, sequenced             intensive scoring course including collaborations with game
combined with live players, and a free timed-to-clock project       design programs and weekly or biweekly scoring assignments.
using a live ensemble.
                                                                    FS-375
FS-343                                                                        Film Music Editing 1
          Master Film Composers                                               2 credits
          2 credits                                                           Course Chair: Dan Carlin
          Course Chair: Dan Carlin                                            Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
          Offered: Fall                                                       Required of: FILM majors
          Required of: None                                                   Electable by: FILM majors
          Electable by: All                                                   Prerequisites: CM-311, FS-340, and FS-341; FS-375
          Prerequisites: FS-241                                                 must be taken concurrently with FS-441

Throughout the history of film, a handful of composers have         A technical course designed to give composers practical
had an extraordinary and formative impact on the art of film        experience in the area of music editing for a scored film and
scoring. Composers such as Bernard Herrmann, Jerry                  temp-tracked film project. Class instruction and weekly private
Goldsmith, and more recently, Thomas Newman, have                   lab work will include the preparation of all documents involved
invented, extended, or defined the grammar and vocabulary of        in music postproduction, as well as various techniques used
film music. This course will take a full semester to closely        when synchronizing and editing music to picture on a digital
examine the work and career of one composer in a rotating           audio workstation.
set of seminal figures in film scoring history. By studying their
work, their impact on film music language, and how their            FS-391
careers developed, students will gain valuable lessons in the art             Film Scoring Techniques for Composers
and profession of film scoring.                                               2 credits
                                                                              Course Chair: Dan Carlin
FS-361                                                                        Offered: Fall
          Computer/Synthesis Applications for                                 Required of: None
          Film Scoring                                                        Electable by: All except FILM majors
          2 credits                                                           Prerequisites: COND-211 or COND-216, FS-221,
          Course Chair: Dan Carlin                                              CM-212, and CP-212; and either PW-161,
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                         EP-225 or MP-225
          Required of: FILM majors
          Electable by: FILM majors                                 This course is intended to give non-film scoring majors an
          Prerequisites: FS-221, CM-221, CM-231, CP-212             overview of the mechanics of synchronization and the
            or CP-215, and ISKB-212 (non-piano principals);         psychological implications of applying music to film. Analysis
            HR-212; ET-212 or ET-232; and either COND-211,          of special dramatic situations will be followed by applications
            COND-216, or COND-221; FS-361 must be taken             of scoring and synchronization techniques.
            concurrently with FS-241

The use of MIDI/audio sequencing in scoring to picture, in
conjunction with sample playback and synthesis software.
Special attention is paid to the film scoring capabilities of
Macintosh sequencing applications using QuickTime, tempo,
meter, and synchronization in the process of scoring music to
picture. Emphasis is also placed on maximizing dramatic
expression through use of the available software tools.



                                                                                                                           Summer/Fall 2012   107
                       COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Film Scoring



                       FS-433                                                              FS-461
                                  Stylistic Adaptation in Film Scoring                               Advanced Computer Applications for
                                  2 credits                                                          Film/Video Scoring
                                  Course Chair: Dan Carlin                                           2 credits
                                  Offered: Spring                                                    Course Chair: Dan Carlin
                                  Required of: None                                                  Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                  Electable by: FILM majors                                          Required of: None
                                  Prerequisites: CM-311, FS-340, and FS-341                          Electable by: FILM majors
                                                                                                     Prerequisites: FS-361 and FS-241
                       This course will address the prevalent and recurrent need in
                       films to emulate a wide variety of stylistic scoring approaches     An examination of advanced film scoring functions available
                       appropriate to the period setting and/or specific ethnic locale     in various software applications. Mac applications include
                       of a screenplay. Approaches to research and adaptation of           Digital Performer, Logic Pro, Kontakt, and Reason. Requires
                       authentic musical styles will be discussed. (Such styles include,   the use of multi-computer workstation setups: Mac for
                       for example, 17th-century European, African, 1920s American,        sequencing, PC for sample or software synthesis playback,
                       etc.). Careful attention to instrumentation, arranging,             Kontakt or GigaStudio for various sample libraries, as well as
                       orchestration, and dramatic theme development will be               V-Stack as a host for VST instruments. Scoring projects
                       stressed. Assignments representing realistic situations will be     include a cartoon, TV commercial, and video game footage.
                       recorded synchronously to the specific needs of film scenes.
                                                                                           FS-468
                       FS-435                                                                        Contemporary Techniques in Film Scoring
                                  Scoring the Moment                                                 2 credits
                                  2 credits                                                          Course Chair: Dan Carlin
                                  Course Chair: Dan Carlin                                           Offered: Fall, Spring
                                  Offered: Fall                                                      Required of: None
                                  Required of: None                                                  Electable by: FILM majors
                                  Electable by: FILM majors                                          Prerequisites: CM-311, FS-340, and FS-341
                                  Prerequisites: FS-340 and FS-341
                                                                                           This course focuses on the new musical and technological
                       In this course, students will examine and explore the               techniques and aesthetics of contemporary film composing.
                       challenges posed to a composer in addressing certain classic        The use of synthesizers and sound design, computers and
                       moments that occur as standard fare in dramatic and comedic         advanced sequencing techniques, rock, pop, and other
                       films. Such moments include, but would not be limited to, The       nontraditional music in the film scoring process, and the
                       Kiss, The Revelation, The Chase, The Punch Line, The Victory,       contemporary aesthetics of modern filmmakers and audiences
                       The Hero’s Death, etc. The typical class session will be divided    will be investigated.
                       between a critical review of the previous week’s writing
                       assignment and a lecture on the next moment to be examined          FS-471
                       and scored. Lectures will be far-ranging, and examples will be                Advanced Scoring and Implementation for
                       drawn from the work of prominent film and TV composers.                       Video Games
                       Students will learn how to confront the challenges posed by                   2 credits
                       such parameters as limited budgets, period settings,                          Course Chair: Dan Carlin
                       anticipated sound effects, docu-dramatics, etc.                               Offered: Fall, Spring
                                                                                                     Required of: None
                       FS-441                                                                        Electable by: All
                                  Advanced Scoring Techniques for Film                               Prerequisites: FS-371
                                  and Video
                                  2 credits                                                This course continues to build on the foundations learned in
                                  Course Chair: Dan Carlin                                 FS-371. It features advanced approaches to scoring for video
                                  Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                            games, including implementation using middleware like XACT,
                                  Required of: FILM majors                                 Wwise, and Fmod. It includes examples, guest speakers, and
                                  Electable by: FILM majors                                applied scoring to develop the knowledge and skills that
                                  Prerequisites: CM-311, FS-340, and FS-341; FS-375        games composers and implementers are using in today’s
                                    must be taken concurrently with FS-441                 industry. This course deepens the preparation of students
                                                                                           for entry level work in music at a game development company
                       This course will provide opportunities for scoring scenes with      or as a freelance game music professional, including
                       a wide range of dramatic and technical requirements. A              experience with typical game music workflow using version
                       combination of material from FS-341 combined with advanced          control technologies.
                       techniques from the course (scoring to picture, special and
                       variable clicks, segue/overlays/sweeteners), will be employed in
                       the scoring assignments. All recorded projects will be
                       conducted by the composers and screened for faculty
                       evaluation. These assignments will also form the basis of a
                       portfolio which will be compiled and submitted in FS-487 as
                       partial requirements for graduation.

        108    Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                               Harmony
                                                                                                                                               Film Scoring/
FS-475                                                              Berklee-based series of silent film scores (The Berklee Silent
           Advanced Film Music Editing                              Film Score series). Admission to the class is highly limited,
           2 credits                                                and interested students must submit examples of their work
           Course Chair: Dan Carlin                                 for consideration for acceptance into the class.
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Required of: None                                        FS-487
           Electable by: FILM majors                                           Senior Portfolio and Seminar in Film Scoring
           Prerequisites: FS-375                                               2 credits
                                                                               Course Chair: Dan Carlin
An advanced music editing course dealing with standard film                    Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
and television industry procedures. Intended for the student                   Required of: FILM majors
who demonstrates technical fluidity with editing equipment and                 Electable by: FILM majors
who intends to pursue a career in this field. Emphasis is on the               Prerequisites: FS-441 and FS-375
responsibilities of a music editor for the scored film, from temp
tracks and spotting through dubbing. Instruction will include       This course focuses on production of the capstone film scoring
digital editing techniques on a multitrack digital audio            projects and graduation portfolio, and provides for individual
workstation, as well as the necessary preparations for delivering   attention within a small group setting. Career planning, relevant
music to the dubbing stage in various surround sound formats.       business aspects, and the film and television industry’s expecta-
                                                                    tions of the composer/music editor also will be discussed both in
FS-481                                                              the small group meetings with the listed faculty, and in weekly
           Film Scoring Practicum                                   seminars with faculty and visiting artist guest speakers.
           2 credits
           Course Chair: Dan Carlin                                 FS-495
           Offered: Fall, Spring                                               Film Scoring Internship
           Required of: None                                                   2 credits
           Electable by: FILM majors                                           Course Chair: Dan Carlin
           Prerequisites: FS-340, FS-341, and written                          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
             approval of course chair                                          Required of: None
                                                                               Electable by: FILM majors
A real-world immersion course in which students learn about                    Prerequisites: Sixth-semester standing and written
aspects of film scoring that go beyond composition and                           approval of the course chair
production by scoring actual student films. These will include
one collaboration with a music production and engineering           Monitored and evaluated professional work experience in an
student who is creating sound design, as well as at least one       environment related to the film scoring major. Placement is
student film from a local college. Some of these student films      limited to situations available from or approved by the Office
will be provided through the professors; however, students will     of Experiential Learning and the Film Scoring Department chair
be able to find their own films if they wish. Lectures and          or designee. To apply for an internship, students must see the
discussions will consist of real-world examples of how the          internship coordinator in the Office of Experiential Learning
director-composer relationship works, as well as critiques of       prior to registering. Note: Equivalent credit for prior experience
student projects and processes. Admission to the course             is not available due to the requirement of concurrent contract
is by application.                                                  between the employer/supervisor and the college. International
                                                                    students in F-1 status must obtain authorization on their
FS-P485                                                             Form I-20 from the Counseling and Advising Center prior to
           Scoring Silent Films                                     beginning an internship.
           2 credits
           Course Chair: Dan Carlin
           Offered: Fall, Spring
                                                                    Harmony
           Required of: None
           Electable by: FILM majors                                HR-111
           Prerequisites: FS-340, FS-341, and written                          Harmony 1
             approval of course chair                                          2 credits
                                                                               Course Chair: Joe Mulholland
This class will compose and produce a complete score for a                     Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
feature length film of the silent era. The final composed score                Required of: All
will receive a full studio recording, and be performed live with               Electable by: All
the film in a performance at a local theater in the final weeks                Prerequisites: None
of the term. The students will each score, arrange, orchestrate
and conduct the music for a “reel” (12-15 minutes) of the           Basic harmonic theory. Note identification, scale and mode
film, using thematic material provided by, and under the            construction, key signatures, interval recognition, chord
guidance of, the instructor. The recording of the final score       construction, available tensions. Principles of diatonic chord
will be dubbed to the film and will become an available,            progressions and analysis.
and archived, item for further distribution or broadcast, in a




                                                                                                                            Summer/Fall 2012      109
                   COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Harmony



                   HR-112                                                             HR-241
                              Harmony 2                                                         Harmony in Brazilian Song
                              2 credits                                                         2 credits
                              Course Chair: Joe Mulholland                                      Course Chair: Joe Mulholland
                              Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                     Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                              Required of: All                                                  Required of: None
                              Electable by: All                                                 Electable by: All
                              Prerequisites: HR-111 or PW-111                                   Prerequisites: HR-211

                   Continued exploration of major key harmony: secondary and          A study of how harmony interacts with melody, lyric, rhythm,
                   extended dominant relationships. Continued study of melodic        style, and form in Brazilian popular song, accomplished
                   construction and motif development. Principles of linear harmon-   through examining the works of the principal songwriters of
                   ic continuity and guide tone lines. Minor key harmony; introduc-   three major styles of Brazilian popular music: samba, bossa
                   tion to subdominant minor. Blues theory and chord progressions.    nova, and MPB (musica popular Brasiliera).
                   Melodic rhythm, form, and melody/harmony relationship.
                                                                                      HR-251
                   HR-211                                                                       Blues: Analysis and Application
                              Harmony 3                                                         2 credits
                              2 credits                                                         Course Chair: Joe Mulholland
                              Course Chair: Joe Mulholland                                      Offered: Fall, Spring
                              Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                     Required of: None
                              Required of: All                                                  Electable by: All
                              Electable by: All                                                 Prerequisites: HR-211
                              Prerequisites: HR-112
                                                                                      A study of the evolution of the blues, combined with
                   Continued analysis and application of major and minor key          compositional application of various blues styles. Historical
                   harmony; continued elaboration of subdominant minor and            study focusing on the blues as a complete and complex form
                   modal interchange; chord scale theory. Review of melodic           as well as the basic foundation for other styles. Analysis
                   construction and melody/harmony relationship; individual           includes examination of harmonic movement, rhythmic and
                   note analysis of melodies. Substitute dominant and related         melodic construction, and lyric content.
                   II-7 chords; diminished chord patterns; modulation.
                                                                                      HR-261
                   HR-212                                                                       The Music of the Beatles
                              Harmony 4                                                         2 credits
                              2 credits                                                         Course Chair: Joe Mulholland
                              Course Chair: Joe Mulholland                                      Offered: Fall, Spring
                              Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                     Required of: None
                              Required of: All                                                  Electable by: All
                              Electable by: All                                                 Prerequisites: HR-212
                              Prerequisites: HR-211
                                                                                      Songs written and recorded by the Beatles, as well as songs
                   Continuation of principles of modern chord progression:            written by the Beatles and recorded by other artists, will be
                   deceptive resolutions of secondary dominants; dominant             analyzed for their harmonic content, melodic construction,
                   seventh chords without dominant function; contiguous               modal focus, rhythmic phrasing, and lyrical construction. The
                   dominant motion. Review of melodic construction, form, and         course will be structured around the 10-year rule for
                   melody/harmony relationship; modal interchange; pedal point        composers and the three stages they move through in their
                   and ostinato; modal harmony and modal composition;                 career, from being engaged in others’ music, to development
                   compound chords; constant structures.                              of the current style, to innovation. In addition, an
                                                                                      understanding of each member’s personal history will be
                   HR-231                                                             presented as a means of understanding the group’s music.
                              Harmonic Analysis of Rock Music                         Also addressed will be the social environment from which the
                              2 credits                                               group emerged and developed and consideration given to its
                              Course Chair: Joe Mulholland                            effect on their musical development and progress.
                              Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                              Required of: None
                              Electable by: All
                              Prerequisites: HR-211

                   Identification and analysis of rock harmonies and melodies.
                   Examples from the mid-1950s to the present day will be
                   studied. Pentatonic and diatonic harmony, linear/open
                   harmony, modulation, and classic rock chord patterns will be
                   included. Emphasis will be placed on harmonic dictation.


     110   Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                              Instrumental Labs
                                                                                                                                              Harmony/
HR-325                                                               and differences between them. As the focus will be on
           Reharmonization Techniques                                harmonic and melodic content, students will be able to expand
           2 credits                                                 their musical vocabulary and understanding. Song form,
           Course Chair: Joe Mulholland                              arranging techniques, and lyric writing will also be addressed,
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                             giving a view of harmony and melody in a wider context.
           Required of: JCMP majors                                  Examining each member’s personal experiences and social
           Electable by: All                                         environment will add depth and help students create a stronger
           Prerequisites: HR-212                                     connection between musical product and context.

Functional, extended, and bass line reharmonization.                 HR-355
Incomplete chord structures and reharmonization of                             The Music of the Yellowjackets
diminished chords. Application of the above techniques for                     2 credits
writing turnarounds, introductions, interludes, modulations,                   Course Chair: Joe Mulholland
and extended endings. Corrections of faulty lead sheets.                       Offered: Fall, Spring
                                                                               Required of: None
HR-335                                                                         Electable by: All
           Advanced Harmonic Concepts                                          Prerequisites: HR-212
           2 credits
           Course Chair: Joe Mulholland                              A study of the music of this popular jazz fusion ensemble.
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                             Students will analyze original manuscripts and transcribed
           Required of: None                                         scores to discover the variety of harmonic, melodic, and
           Electable by: All                                         rhythmic concepts used that make the music unique, and will
           Prerequisites: HR-212                                     write tunes that demonstrate their understanding of these
                                                                     elements. Selected compositions will be performed by the
Emphasis on newer harmonic concepts to enable students               Yellowjackets Ensemble, ENFF-325.
to write and analyze tunes in the style of Mike Gibbs,
Chick Corea, and others. Discussion and use of nonfunctional         HR-361
harmonic techniques including multitonic systems,                              World Music Materials and Concepts for the
constant cycles, and patterned material. Analysis of                           Contemporary Musician
representative tunes.                                                          2 credits
                                                                               Course Chair: Joe Mulholland
HR-345                                                                         Offered: Fall, Spring
           Advanced Modal Harmony                                              Required of: None
           2 credits                                                           Electable by: All
           Course Chair: Joe Mulholland                                        Prerequisites: HR-212
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Required of: None                                         An introduction to the musical elements of several non-
           Electable by: All                                         Western musical systems will provide alternative approaches
           Prerequisites: HR-212                                     to contemporary composition and improvisation. Topics
                                                                     explored will include melody, mode, improvisation, form,
Modal chord progression and melody using traditional,                rhythmic organization, and preferences of timbre in the music
synthetic, and other modes. Analysis of modal jazz                   of India, Africa, the Middle East, Latin America, and Japan.
compositions. Modal voicings using characteristic tones and          Contemporary world beat styles from these regions will be
spacing considerations. Use of polytonal and polymodal               discussed in relation to underlying traditional genres.
relationships in original compositions.

HR-P351                                                              Instrumental Labs
           John, Paul, George, and Ringo: The Solo Years
           2 credits                                                 ILBR-111
           Course Chair: Joe Mulholland
                                                                               Brass Lab – Reading 1
           Offered: Fall, Fall, Spring
                                                                               1 credit
           Required of: None
                                                                               Course Chair: Tom Plsek
           Electable by: All
                                                                               Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Prerequisites: HR-212
                                                                               Required of: Brass principals
                                                                               Electable by: Brass principals
This course will give a musical view of the solo careers of each
                                                                               Prerequisites: None
member of the Beatles. As a group, their influence in the field
of popular music is unparalleled. As separate artists, the unique
                                                                     The goal of ILBR-111, ILBR-112, and ILBR-211 is to prepare
musical qualities that helped to create the Beatles remains
                                                                     the entering brass student for the college ensemble program.
present in their solo work. The cross-pollination between all of
                                                                     Emphasis on reading studies in a variety of styles.
them is obvious. This course will examine how each musician
transitioned into and developed an individual musical path. It
will help provide a deeper look at the Beatles’ influence on
these four musicians as well as uncover the stylistic similarities

                                                                                                                           Summer/Fall 2012       111
                            COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Instrumental Labs



                            ILBR-112                                                          ILBR-212
                                       Brass Lab – Reading 2                                             Advanced Brass Reading Lab
                                       1 credit                                                          1 credit
                                       Course Chair: Tom Plsek                                           Course Chair: Tom Plsek
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                     Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                       Required of: Brass principals                                     Required of: None
                                       Electable by: Brass principals                                    Electable by: Brass principals
                                       Prerequisites: ILBR-111                                           Prerequisites: ILBR-211 or overall ensemble rating 4

                            The goal of ILBR-111, ILBR-112, and ILBR-211 is to prepare        Advanced Brass Reading Lab is designed for those brass
                            the entering brass student for the college ensemble program.      students who have an overall ensemble rating of 4, and new
                            Emphasis on reading studies in a variety of styles.               students who demonstrate moderate-to-advanced reading
                                                                                              skills. The material covered is a continuation of ILBR-111, ILBR-
                            ILBR-121                                                          112, and ILBR-211, and focuses on developing the advanced
                                       Brass Improvisation Lab 1                              reading skills required in contemporary music.
                                       1 credit
                                       Course Chair: Tom Plsek                                ILBR-221
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                     Brass Improvisation Lab 3
                                       Required of: Brass principals                                     1 credit
                                       Electable by: Brass principals                                    Course Chair: Tom Plsek
                                       Prerequisites: None                                               Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                                                                                         Required of: None
                            This course presents the basics of jazz improvisation on blues               Electable by: Brass principals
                            forms in easy keys. In addition to learning to improvise on                  Prerequisites: ILBR-122 or written approval of
                            these sets of changes, the student will also memorize a basic                  instructor and course chair
                            set of appropriate tunes.
                                                                                              This course continues the materials presented in ILBR-121 and
                            ILBR-122                                                          ILBR-122, and applies them to improvising on blues forms and
                                       Brass Improvisation Lab 2                              diatonic song forms in more advanced keys. In addition to
                                       1 credit                                               learning to improvise on these sets of changes, the student
                                       Course Chair: Tom Plsek                                will also memorize a basic set of appropriate tunes.
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                       Required of: Brass principals                          ILBR-222
                                       Electable by: Brass principals                                    Advanced Brass Improvisation Lab
                                       Prerequisites: ILBR-121 or written approval of                    1 credit
                                         instructor and course chair                                     Course Chair: Tom Plsek
                                                                                                         Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                            This course presents the basics of jazz improvisation on simple              Required of: None
                            diatonic song forms in easy keys. In addition to learning to                 Electable by: Brass principals
                            improvise on these sets of changes, the student will also                    Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4
                            memorize a basic set of appropriate tunes.
                                                                                              Advanced Brass Improvisation Lab is designed for those brass
                            ILBR-211                                                          students who have an overall ensemble rating of 4, and new
                                       Brass Lab – Reading 3                                  students who demonstrate moderate-to-advanced
                                       1 credit                                               improvisational skills. The material covered is a continuation of
                                       Course Chair: Tom Plsek                                ILBR-111, ILBR-112, and ILBR-211, and focuses on developing
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                          the advanced improvisational abilities required in
                                       Required of: Brass principals                          contemporary music.
                                       Electable by: Brass principals
                                       Prerequisites: ILBR-112                                ILBR-335
                                                                                                         Exploring Technology for Brass Players
                            The goal of ILBR-111, ILBR-112, and ILBR-211 is to prepare                   1 credit
                            the entering brass student for the college ensemble program.                 Course Chair: Tom Plsek
                            Emphasis on reading studies in a variety of styles.                          Offered: Fall, Spring
                                                                                                         Required of: None
                                                                                                         Electable by: Brass principals
                                                                                                         Prerequisites: Written approval of instructor and
                                                                                                           course chair

                                                                                              Students will be introduced to technology applications
                                                                                              available for use by brass players in real-time performance
                                                                                              situations. Emphasis will be on the use of technology as an
                                                                                              extension of the instruments.


            112     Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                             Instrumental Labs
ILBS-P110                                                        ILBS-121
          Electric Bass for Non-Bass Principals                             Bass Lab – Lines 1
          1 credit                                                          1 credit
          Course Chair: Rich Appleman                                       Course Chair: Rich Appleman
          Offered: Fall, Spring                                             Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
          Required of: None                                                 Required of: Bass principals
          Electable by: All except bass principals                          Electable by: All
          Prerequisites: None                                               Prerequisites: None

This course provides nonbassists with a working knowledge        Instrumental lab for bass principals emphasizing the
and ability to perform basic bass parts and bass lines.          construction and performance of bass lines through chord
Developing a good sound, fretboard knowledge, right and left     changes in standard, popular, and jazz tunes.
hand technique, basic major and minor scales, arpeggios, and
common patterns inherent to the bass guitar will be covered.     ILBS-141
                                                                            Rock Bass Lab
ILBS-111                                                                    1 credit
          Bass Lab – Reading 1                                              Course Chair: Rich Appleman
          1 credit                                                          Offered: Fall, Spring
          Course Chair: Rich Appleman                                       Required of: None
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                     Electable by: Bass principals
          Required of: Bass principals                                      Prerequisites: PIBS-111
          Electable by: All
          Prerequisites: None                                    Study, through performance, of a wide variety of rock bass
                                                                 playing techniques from the ’60s through the ’90s. Students
Instrumental lab for bass principals emphasizing the basic       will perform transcriptions, read and sight read typical bass
techniques and styles of bass playing in a variety of idioms.    lines, and demonstrate general and specific aspects of a
                                                                 particular rock bass style.
ILBS-112
          Bass Lab – Reading 2                                   ILBS-181
          1 credit                                                          Elementary Double Bass Lab
          Course Chair: Rich Appleman                                       1 credit
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                     Course Chair: Rich Appleman
          Required of: Bass principals                                      Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
          Electable by: All                                                 Required of: None
          Prerequisites: ILBS-111                                           Electable by: Bass principals
                                                                            Prerequisites: None
Continuation of ILBS-111.
                                                                 Intended primarily for electric bass players, this lab focuses on
ILBS-115                                                         basic concepts of double bass playing: fingering, bowing, and
          Bass Fundamentals                                      sound production. Students are required to have access to a
          1 credit                                               double bass and a bow for use in class and practice.
          Course Chair: Rich Appleman
          Offered: Fall                                          ILBS-P201
          Required of: None                                                 Jaco Pastorius Bass Lab
          Electable by: Bass principals                                     1 credit
          Prerequisites: None                                               Course Chair: Rich Appleman
                                                                            Offered: Fall, Spring
General physical and mechanical aspects of playing the double               Required of: None
bass and electric bass (four-, five-, and six-string) will be               Electable by: Bass principals
covered in depth, along with proper performance practices.                  Prerequisites: PIBS-211 or overall ensemble rating 3
Topics will include instrument construction, repair, and
maintenance; proper body posture for effective bass playing;     ILBS-P201 is intended to provide intermediate and advanced
physical problems associated with performance; theoretical       bass students with the opportunity to closely study the style,
make-up of the fingerboard; and proper fingering concepts of     technique, and writing of the legendary Jaco Pastorius. The
both hands. This course is meant to be a basics manual for the   semester will begin with early Jaco recordings: his first solo
bassist. Student participation via performance in class will     record, Weather Report, Joni Mitchell, and others. Students
be required.                                                     will have the opportunity to listen, analyze, and play songs,
                                                                 bass lines, and solos from each phase. The semester will
                                                                 progress with mid and then later recordings, always focusing
                                                                 on the more influential and monumental pieces. Video
                                                                 footage from both YouTube and Jaco's own instructional
                                                                 videos will be included. Students will develop grooves and
                                                                 compositions in Jaco's style.


                                                                                                                        Summer/Fall 2012   113
                            COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Instrumental Labs



                            ILBS-211                                                           ILBS-225
                                       Bass Lab – Reading 3                                               Bass Lab – Basic Timekeeping
                                       1 credit                                                           1 credit
                                       Course Chair: Rich Appleman                                        Course Chair: Rich Appleman
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                      Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                       Required of: None                                                  Required of: None
                                       Electable by: All                                                  Electable by: Bass principals
                                       Prerequisites: ILBS-112 or written approval of                     Prerequisites: None
                                         instructor and course chair
                                                                                               Development of the ability to grasp and maintain a tempo.
                            A continuation of ILBS-111 and ILBS-112. Material presented        Exercises including metronome games to improve accuracy
                            will advance the concepts taught in those labs. The focus will     and steady time while developing suppleness and flexibility to
                            be on out-of-class preparation of written examples as well as      meet the wide array of rhythm section challenges found in
                            in-class sight-reading at an advanced level.                       contemporary, live, and studio environments.

                            ILBS-215                                                           ILBS-241
                                       Bass Lines from Motown/Atlantic                                    Electric Bass Pop Repertoire
                                       1 credit                                                           1 credit
                                       Course Chair: Rich Appleman                                        Course Chair: Rich Appleman
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring                                              Offered: Fall, Spring
                                       Required of: None                                                  Required of: None
                                       Electable by: Bass principals                                      Electable by: Bass principals
                                         (electric bass recommended)                                      Prerequisites: PFSS-311
                                       Prerequisites: ILBS-112 or overall ensemble rating 2
                                                                                               A bass lab designed to develop familiarity and performance
                            This course will examine the bass styles of James Jamerson,        skills in the pop repertoire. Bass lines to a number of classic
                            Carol Kaye, Jerry Jemmott, Chuck Rainey, Willie Weeks,             pop tunes will be learned, and the ability to transpose these
                            Tommy Cogbill, Bob Babbitt, and David Hood, the bassists for       lines to several other keys will be developed. Students will
                            Motown and Atlantic records during the 1960s and 1970s.            learn harmonic sequences that are frequently used in pop
                            Students will learn to play the original bass parts to hit songs   music styles, and will also develop interactive and
                            from this music period. Students will then learn to create and     communication skills by teaching new songs to the class.
                            play bass parts using this stylistic vocabulary/rhythm section
                            technique over chord progressions in this style. Emphasis on       ILBS-244
                            tone and rhythmic feel will also be covered.                                  Five- and Six-String Electric Bass Lab
                                                                                                          1 credit
                            ILBS-221                                                                      Course Chair: Rich Appleman
                                       Bass Lab – Lines 2                                                 Offered: Fall, Spring
                                       1 credit                                                           Required of: None
                                       Course Chair: Rich Appleman                                        Electable by: Bass principals
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                      Prerequisites: None
                                       Required of: Bass principals
                                       Electable by: All                                       A general overview and application of different types of
                                       Prerequisites: ILBS-121                                 knowledge applied to five- and six-string bass, including but
                                                                                               not limited to different muting techniques, two- and three-
                            Continuation of ILBS-121. Instrumental lab for bass principals     octave scales, arpeggios, intervals, reading in positions, and
                            emphasizing the construction and performance of bass lines         also discussions on various neck widths, string closeness, pick-
                            through standard chord progressions, using more demanding          up placement, and bolt-on necks versus neck-through basses.
                            styles and approaches.
                                                                                               ILBS-247
                            ILBS-222                                                                      Funk/Fusion Styles for Bass
                                       Bass Lab – Lines 3                                                 1 credit
                                       1 credit                                                           Course Chair: Rich Appleman
                                       Course Chair: Rich Appleman                                        Offered: Fall, Spring
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                      Required of: None
                                       Required of: None                                                  Electable by: Bass principals
                                       Electable by: All                                                  Prerequisites: PIBS-211 or ensemble rating 3433
                                       Prerequisites: ILBS-221
                                                                                               Development of working knowledge of funk styles for bass,
                            Continuation of ILBS-221. Instrumental lab for bass principals     including grooves, reading syncopated rhythms, developing a
                            emphasizing the construction and performance of bass lines         good sound with thumb slapping and popping, and
                            through standard chord progressions, using more demanding          importance of drum/bass concepts in contemporary rock and
                            styles and approaches.                                             commercial styles.




            114     Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                               Instrumental Labs
ILBS-251                                                           ILBS-261
           Basic Slap Technique for Electric Bass                            Introduction to Latin Jazz Bass Playing
           1 credit                                                          1 credit
           Course Chair: Rich Appleman                                       Course Chair: Rich Appleman
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                     Offered: Fall
           Required of: None                                                 Required of: None
           Electable by: All                                                 Electable by: Bass principals
           Prerequisites: None (bass principals) or written                  Prerequisites: PIBS-111
             approval of course chair (non-bass principals)
                                                                   Students will learn the basics of Latin jazz bass playing.
Alternately called slap bass, funk bass, or thumb and snap         Emphasis on Cuban and Brazilian music and rhythms from the
bass, this technique will be approached in class on a              ’20s through the ’60s.
beginner’s basis. Emphasis will be placed on fundamentals.
Developing a technical foundation through progressive              ILBS-262
exercises, students will learn to read and interpret basic slap              Brazilian Bass Lab
notation. Creativity is encouraged through use of combining                  1 credit
basic slap ideas (thumb, snap, muted notes, slides,                          Course Chair: Rich Appleman
hammer-ons, and pull-offs).                                                  Offered: Spring
                                                                             Required of: None
ILBS-254                                                                     Electable by: Bass principals
           Finger Style R&B/Fusion Lab                                       Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3
           1 credit
           Course Chair: Rich Appleman                             This is an instrumental lab for bassists that focuses on the
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                           Brazilian styles of bossa nova, samba, partido alto, chorinho,
           Required of: None                                       and afoxe. Weekly assignments will cover a wide range of
           Electable by: Bass principals                           Brazilian music repertoire, including bass lines and melodies.
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3                Students will be exposed to reading in 2/4, 4/4, and cut-time
                                                                   meters, as well as Brazilian percussion instruments and
Development of playing skills in this style through study of the   their patterns.
repertoire from the 1960s to the present. Chronological history
of the style; development of technique, sound, and overall         ILBS-263
feel; performance of bass lines with backing tracks;                         Playing in Odd Meters
appreciation of lesser-known players in this style.                          1 credit
                                                                             Course Chair: Rich Appleman
ILBS-255                                                                     Offered: Fall, Spring
           The Evolution of Hip-Hop Bass                                     Required of: None
           1 credit                                                          Electable by: Bass principals
           Course Chair: Rich Appleman                                       Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3
           Offered: Fall, Spring
           Required of: None                                       This lab serves as an introduction to improvising and playing
           Electable by: Bass principals                           music in odd and unusual meters in various styles of jazz,
           Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 2                rock, funk, global music, etc. Students will be exposed to a
                                                                   variety of bass lines transcribed from masters of different
This lab focuses on the techniques required to perform in the      styles and receive guidance on how to invent suitable bass
hip-hop style. Recordings and transcriptions will be presented,    lines for various odd-meter styles.
and students will be required to perform the bass parts and
lines. Content covers the beginnings of hip-hop (rap) in New       ILBS-271
York in the late 1970s, focusing on groups such as                           Blues Bass Lab
Grandmaster Flash and others. The gospel influence of Ce Ce                  1 credit
Winans and more contemporary hip-hop artists such as                         Course Chair: Rich Appleman
D’Angelo, the Roots, Steve Coleman, Jill Scott, and others will              Offered: Fall, Spring
be presented. Drum and bass grooves will also be explored.                   Required of: None
                                                                             Electable by: Bass principals
ILBS-257                                                                     Prerequisites: ILBS-121
           Bass Performance Group
           1 credit                                                An instrumental lab for bass players that concentrates on
           Course Chair: Rich Appleman                             blues forms and the various musical styles (r&b, jazz, rock,
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                           Dixieland, pop, etc.) in which they are performed.
           Required of: None
           Electable by: Bass principals
           Prerequisites: ILBS-112 or PIBS-211

An instrumental lab for bass players focusing on the musical
relationship between performers in an ensemble. Rehearsal
and performance of music arranged for this class will facilitate
the learning process.                                                                                                     Summer/Fall 2012   115
                            COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Instrumental Labs



                            ILBS-274                                                           ILBS-324
                                       Bass Lab – Singing and Playing                                    Bass Lab – Advanced Rhythmic Language
                                       1 credit                                                          1 credit
                                       Course Chair: Rich Appleman                                       Course Chair: Rich Appleman
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                     Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                       Required of: None                                                 Required of: None
                                       Electable by: Bass principals                                     Electable by: All
                                       Prerequisites: ET-111                                             Prerequisites: Ensemble rating 4444 or PIBS-212

                            A lab for bass principals wishing to begin coordinating their      Development of rhythmic language ability through study of
                            playing with singing, or to further develop their skills playing   principles of temporal articulation and elaboration: creation of
                            while singing. In addition to opening a new range of working       polymeter and polyrhythm via grouping of subdivisions of the
                            possibilities, this study will significantly expand students’      basic meter. Use of subtle tempo change (rubato) within
                            musicianship levels by developing musical independence and         established rhythmic and harmonic contexts for expressive
                            multitasking skills.                                               purposes in live performance as well as automated recording
                                                                                               environments. Note: Performance majors are given preference
                            ILBS-281                                                           in enrollment.
                                       Arco Workshop
                                       1 credit                                                ILBS-327
                                       Course Chair: Rich Appleman                                       John Coltrane Bass Lines
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring                                             1 credit
                                       Required of: None                                                 Course Chair: Rich Appleman
                                       Electable by: All                                                 Offered: Fall, Spring
                                       Prerequisites: ILBS-181 (bass principals) or written              Required of: None
                                         approval of course chair (non-bass principals)                  Electable by: Bass principals
                                                                                                         Prerequisites: Ensemble rating 5555
                            This course will introduce the double bass student to orchestral
                            performance. Basic bowing techniques will be covered and           Study of the music of John Coltrane from the perspective of
                            suitable études will be presented for practice.                    developing bass lines. Particularities of harmony and rhythm
                                                                                               in interpretation of both original and standard tunes.
                            ILBS-284
                                       Orchestral Repertoire Workshop for                      ILBS-331
                                       Double Bass                                                       Arco Bass in the Jazz Idiom
                                       1 credit                                                          1 credit
                                       Course Chair: Rich Appleman                                       Course Chair: Rich Appleman
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring                                             Offered: Fall, Spring
                                       Required of: None                                                 Required of: None
                                       Electable by: All                                                 Electable by: Bass principals
                                       Prerequisites: ILBS-281 (bass principals) or written              Prerequisites: PIBS-211 and ensemble rating 4 in
                                         approval of course chair (non-bass principals)                    improvisation (third digit of rating)

                            This course will introduce the double bass student to orchestral   A lab offering various applications for the bowed bass in
                            playing. Suitable orchestral literature will be presented          jazz, for bass principals who have acquired basic arco
                            for practice.                                                      technique and possess some knowledge of improvisation.
                                                                                               Bowing skills learned will be applicable to melody playing,
                            ILBS-321                                                           soloing, and accompaniment.
                                       Reading Contemporary Bass Rhythms
                                       1 credit                                                ILBS-334
                                       Course Chair: Rich Appleman                                       Bass Guitar MIDI Controller Lab
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring                                             1 credit
                                       Required of: None                                                 Course Chair: Rich Appleman
                                       Electable by: All                                                 Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                       Prerequisites: ILBS-211 or written approval of                    Required of: None
                                         instructor and course chair                                     Electable by: Bass principals
                                                                                                         Prerequisites: PIBS-112 or overall ensemble rating 3
                            A continuation of ILBS-211. Study of contemporary written
                            bass parts as encountered in shows and recording sessions,         Study of the MIDI bass guitar controller as a doubling
                            principally in soul, funk, and r&b styles featuring challenging    instrument. Aspects of setting up a system, necessary
                            notated beat subdivisions.                                         adaptations of technique, and necessary expansion of musical
                                                                                               horizons will be explored using Berklee-supplied MIDI
                                                                                               equipment and playing representative repertoire.




            116     Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                               Instrumental Labs
ILBS-344                                                          ILBS-421
           Five- and Six- String Electric Bass Chord Lab                     Bass Lab – Advanced Reading
           1 credit                                                          1 credit
           Course Chair: Rich Appleman                                       Course Chair: Rich Appleman
           Offered: Fall, Spring                                             Offered: Fall, Spring
           Required of: None                                                 Required of: None
           Electable by: Bass principals                                     Electable by: Bass principals
           Prerequisites: PIBS-212 and ensemble rating 4444                  Prerequisites: Ensemble rating 4444 or PIBS-212

A study of various approaches and voicings that are possible      Methods of approach to, and practice in, reading examples of
on the five- and six-string bass as well as inversions, octave    high difficulty in various music styles including classical, jazz,
displacements, playing changes through a tune, and playing        and rock.
melodies with chord sound accompanying.
                                                                  ILBS-481
ILBS-351                                                                     Bach Cello Suites for Bowed Double Bass
           Slap Techniques for Electric Bass 2                               1 credit
           1 credit                                                          Course Chair: Rich Appleman
           Course Chair: Rich Appleman                                       Offered: Fall, Spring
           Offered: Fall, Spring                                             Required of: None
           Required of: None                                                 Electable by: Bass principals
           Electable by: Bass principals                                     Prerequisites: ILBS-284, ILBS-331, or written
           Prerequisites: ILBS-251                                             approval of instructor and course chair

Students will learn how to incorporate advanced slapping          A lab for bass principals that uses the cello suites of J.S. Bach
techniques in order to construct effective lines and solos.       to develop arco performance skills. The goals of the course
Emphasis will be on solid groove playing between drums and        are to build technique using the bow and musicality through
bass, with special stress on consistency. Students will study     the study of masterpieces. Students will be assigned individual
and perform transcriptions of classic funk bass lines as an aid   movements of a suite and perform in a master-class setting.
to learning proper integration of technique, sound, and feel.
                                                                  ILEN-333
ILBS-361                                                                     Turntable Technique
           Latin Bass Lines                                                  1 credit
           1 credit                                                          Course Chair: Ron Savage
           Course Chair: Rich Appleman                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Offered: Fall, Spring                                             Required of: None
           Required of: None                                                 Electable by: All
           Electable by: Bass principals                                     Prerequisites: MTEC-111
           Prerequisites: ILBS-364, PIBS-212, or ensemble
             rating 5 in reading (first digit of rating)          Students will develop basic skills using the turntable both as a
                                                                  means of live expression and performance and as a production
A performance lab focusing on the development,                    tool. Weekly hands-on exercises will be emphasized. The
interpretation, and performance of bass lines in the Latin jazz   course traces the historical development of the turntable from
ensemble setting. Includes the study of characteristic melodies   its origins in Jamaican music through its importance as a major
in this style.                                                    expression of hip-hop culture, and to the turntable’s
                                                                  prominence in contemporary music. Artistic, ethical, and legal
ILBS-364                                                          issues surrounding the use of the turntable will be examined.
           Bass Lab – Sight-Reading Latin Rhythms                 For students with little or no prior experience.
           1 credit
           Course Chair: Rich Appleman                            ILGT-115
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                     Guitar Performance Skills for the
           Required of: None                                                 Non-Guitar Principal
           Electable by: Bass principals                                     1 credit
           Prerequisites: Ensemble rating 5 in reading (first                Course Chair: Larry Baione
             digit of rating)                                                Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                                                             Required of: None
Development of effective ability to sight-read typical bass                  Electable by: All
parts in Latin styles. Patterns derived using actual recordings              Prerequisites: None
in specific idioms, including son, songo, cha-cha, bolero,
merengue, and salsa.                                              A lab for the non-guitar principal focusing on technique for
                                                                  the development of basic lead, comping, and soloing skills for
                                                                  effective performance. Students are required to provide their
                                                                  own acoustic or electric guitar.




                                                                                                                          Summer/Fall 2012   117
                            COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Instrumental Labs



                            ILGT-119                                                          ILGT-217
                                       Guitar Styles Skills Labs                                        Creative Applications for Proficiency Materials
                                       1 credit                                                         1 credit
                                       Course Chair: Larry Baione                                       Course Chair: Larry Baione
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                    Offered: Fall, Spring
                                       Required of: None                                                Required of: None
                                       Electable by: Guitar principals                                  Electable by: Guitar principals
                                       Prerequisites: None                                              Prerequisites: ILGT-119

                            Instrumental labs for guitar principals with a minimum of         This lab will explore creative applications for Guitar
                            second-semester standing. Offered in stylistically delineated     Department final exam materials with emphasis on
                            sections (jazz, rock, funk, fusion, blues), these labs develop    improvisation, accompaniment, and composition in non-jazz
                            performance skills in the specified style.                        contexts, including use of triadic and drone-based modal
                                                                                              vamps to assist utilizing the less familiar modes in melodic
                            ILGT-211                                                          minor, harmonic minor, and harmonic major; improvisation
                                       Ensemble Preparation Lab – Guitar                      over common and “nonfunctional” harmony; and comping,
                                       1 credit                                               voice leading, and voicing creation.
                                       Course Chair: Larry Baione
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                          ILGT-221
                                       Required of: None                                                Standard Tune Workshop for the Guitarist
                                       Electable by: Guitar principals                                  1 credit
                                       Prerequisites: None                                              Course Chair: Larry Baione
                                                                                                        Offered: Fall, Spring
                            A lab focusing on the development of lead, comping, and                     Required of: None
                            soloing skills necessary for effective performance in an                    Electable by: Guitar principals
                            ensemble. Aids to skills development include a graphic/                     Prerequisites: ILGT-119
                            electronic repertoire of rhythm tracks that provides effective
                            ensemble environments. Planned outcomes include successful        Standard tunes are prepared (melody, chords, bass lines,
                            transition into the college ensemble program.                     and improvisation) for critiqued performance on a weekly
                                                                                              basis. Techniques for, and approaches to, improvisation,
                            ILGT-213                                                          including solo transcription and analysis of chord progressions
                                       Guitar Comping and Soloing in Odd Meters               for scale relationship.
                                       1 credit
                                       Course Chair: Larry Baione                             ILGT-223
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring                                            Guitarmony 1
                                       Required of: None                                                1 credit
                                       Electable by: Guitar principals                                  Course Chair: Larry Baione
                                       Prerequisites: None                                              Offered: Fall, Spring
                                                                                                        Required of: None
                            A course developed to aid guitarists in negotiating odd and                 Electable by: Guitar principals
                            compound meters. The student will explore meters based on                   Prerequisites: ILGT-119
                            groupings of 5, 7, 9, and 11 through a graduated series of
                            exercises, études, class demonstration, and participation. Some   Complete enharmonic examination of four-note structures
                            knowledge of chord voicings and the ability to solo over chord    beginning with “drop 2” type voicings and including various
                            changes is strongly recommended, but not essential.               tension additions and substitutions. Different voice-leading
                                                                                              concepts will be introduced resulting in an enriched vertical
                            ILGT-215                                                          and horizontal harmonic awareness by students.
                                       Bottleneck Blues Lab
                                       1 credit                                               ILGT-225
                                       Course Chair: Larry Baione                                       Guitar Chart Reading and Performance
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring                                            1 credit
                                       Required of: None                                                Course Chair: Larry Baione
                                       Electable by: Guitar principals                                  Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                       Prerequisites: None                                              Required of: None
                                                                                                        Electable by: Guitar principals
                            A weekly one-hour departmental lab to develop skills and                    Prerequisites: None
                            repertoire in the traditional bottleneck blues guitar style.
                                                                                              Development of reading skills focusing on interpretation of
                                                                                              lead sheets as well as performance of guitar parts. Blend,
                                                                                              balance, and accurate performance of intermediate to
                                                                                              advanced rhythmic materials are to be addressed.




            118     Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                 Instrumental Labs
ILGT-227                                                          ILGT-235
          Guitar Chord Soloing                                               Jimmy Page Lab
          1 credit                                                           1 credit
          Course Chair: Larry Baione                                         Course Chair: Larry Baione
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                      Offered: Fall, Spring
          Required of: None                                                  Required of: None
          Electable by: Guitar principals                                    Electable by: Guitar principals
          Prerequisites: ILGT-119                                            Prerequisites: ILGT-119

Immediately accessible mechanical and nonmechanical               A concentrated course of study for guitarists based on the
techniques for the development of arrangements for solo           music of Jimmy Page. Topics will include early blues and rock
guitar. Each week a step-by-step approach will be                 influences, detailed analysis of solos and compositions, and
demonstrated and discussed. During the semester, students         use of open tunings.
will produce a tape of four chord solos (two original
arrangements and two from department files).                      ILGT-237
                                                                             Hard Rock/Metal Lab
ILGT-228                                                                     1 credit
          Fingerpicking Blues Guitar                                         Course Chair: Larry Baione
          1 credit                                                           Offered: Fall, Spring
          Course Chair: Larry Baione                                         Required of: None
          Offered: Fall, Spring                                              Electable by: Guitar principals
          Required of: None                                                  Prerequisites: ILGT-119
          Electable by: Guitar principals
          Prerequisites: ILGT-119                                 Exploration of technical innovations provided by three decades
                                                                  of classically influenced, hard-rock players. In-depth study of
Study of technique, repertoire, and improvisational approaches    the early pioneers of the style (Ritchie Blackmore, Uli-Jon Roth,
in the fingerpicking style of playing blues guitar.               Michael Schenker) and the more recent guitarists (Yngwie
                                                                  Malmsteen, Jason Becker, Joe Stump) who helped to redefine
ILGT-230                                                          the genre known most commonly as shred.
          Performing Solo Guitarist
          1 credit                                                ILGT-238
          Course Chair: Larry Baione                                         The Music of Kenny Burrell and Grant Green
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                      1 credit
          Required of: None                                                  Course Chair: Larry Baione
          Electable by: Guitar principals                                    Offered: Fall, Spring
          Prerequisites: ILGT-119                                            Required of: None
                                                                             Electable by: Guitar principals
This lab offers students the opportunity to perform solo guitar              Prerequisites: ILGT-119
pieces in any style, to develop solo guitar arrangements or
compositions for performance, and to exploit the                  Students will listen, analyze, transcribe, and perform solos by
harmonic/melodic capabilities of the guitar. Essential elements   guitarists Kenny Burrell and Grant Green. Material covered will
of solo guitar will be discussed, demonstrated, and applied to    include instruction on the performance styles and techniques
student performances. Students will learn and perform original    of these artists and their approach to improvisation, with
arrangements or transcriptions of pieces by artists or            attention to fingerings, phrasing, articulation, and harmonic
composers of any genre for midterm and final projects. Jazz,      structures.
pop, blues, classical, funk, and folk styles will be among the
idioms to be addressed.                                           ILGT-241
                                                                             Jazz/Rock Improvisation for Guitar
ILGT-231                                                                     1 credit
          Jazz/Blues Guitar                                                  Course Chair: Larry Baione
          1 credit                                                           Offered: Fall, Spring
          Course Chair: Larry Baione                                         Required of: None
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                      Electable by: Guitar principals
          Required of: None                                                  Prerequisites: ILGT-119
          Electable by: Guitar principals
          Prerequisites: ILGT-119                                 Study and application of scales and harmony in this style of
                                                                  improvisation and their application to the guitar, including
This lab focuses on basic to intermediate jazz blues techniques   fingering and guitaristic devices (string bending, slides, etc.).
including single-note blues heads, solos, and standard            Presentation is through written and recorded examples of
dominant-seventh, minor-seventh, and major-seventh blues          contemporary artists (including nonguitarists), instructor
progressions. Weekly playing assignments; analysis of             demonstration, and student performance with taped
recordings by various blues artists.                              rhythm section.




                                                                                                                            Summer/Fall 2012   119
                            COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Instrumental Labs



                            ILGT-243                                                          ILGT-251
                                       Jazz/Rock Rhythm Guitar Playing                                   Advanced Blues/Rock Guitar Techniques
                                       1 credit                                                          1 credit
                                       Course Chair: Larry Baione                                        Course Chair: Larry Baione
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring                                             Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                       Required of: None                                                 Required of: None
                                       Electable by: Guitar principals                                   Electable by: Guitar principals
                                       Prerequisites: ILGT-119                                           Prerequisites: ILGT-119

                            The application of harmony as it occurs in popular music.         Study of advanced rock and blues guitar techniques: string
                            Rhythm guitar parts presented through tapes, transcriptions,      bending, chromatic harmony in the idiom, tone production,
                            and demonstrations of jazz, rock, funk, and fusion records.       and repertoire. This will be accomplished through analysis of
                            Included are adaptations of keyboard parts to guitar and          tune melodies and solo transcriptions prepared by the teacher
                            discussion and demonstration of various rhythm guitar             and transcriptions completed by each individual student.
                            techniques (two- and three-note voicings, mutings, etc.).         Emphasis will be placed on jazz improvisation approaches and
                                                                                              their application to rock and blues soloing.
                            ILGT-245
                                       Rock Guitar Lab                                        ILGT-253
                                       1 credit                                                          Groove Concept for Funk Guitar Performance
                                       Course Chair: Larry Baione                                        1 credit
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                     Course Chair: Larry Baione
                                       Required of: None                                                 Offered: Fall, Spring
                                       Electable by: Guitar principals                                   Required of: None
                                       Prerequisites: ILGT-119                                           Electable by: Guitar principals
                                                                                                         Prerequisites: ILGT-119
                            Performance of material from Rock Guitar Styles including
                            extensive lead and rhythm examples in all idioms of rock          This lab will break down all aspects of funk guitar styles.
                            music from the 1950s to the present day.                          Students will familiarize themselves with salient concepts
                                                                                              including phrasing, time, rhythm playing, “playing the
                            ILGT-247                                                          pocket,” harmonics possibilities, and understanding the many
                                       Steel Guitar Lab                                       roles that the guitar can play in funk settings. Funk is a dialect
                                       1 credit                                               in the musical language. As is the case with any language,
                                       Course Chair: Larry Baione                             students will focus on understanding and communicating in
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                          this dialect, listening to pronunciation and how sentences are
                                       Required of: None                                      phrased, and building a strong vocabulary.
                                       Electable by: Guitar principals
                                       Prerequisites: None                                    ILGT-261
                                                                                                         Guitar Lab – Developmental Arpeggios
                            Aspects of steel guitar performances in exemplary styles                     1 credit
                            including Hawaiian, western swing, country, blues, and jazz.                 Course Chair: Larry Baione
                            Extensive listening and study of transcribed examples. Students              Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                            use their own guitars with an inexpensive accessory to learn                 Required of: None
                            bar control and picking methods. Exploration of alternative                  Electable by: Guitar principals
                            open tunings.                                                                Prerequisites: None

                            ILGT-249                                                          Instrumental lab for guitar principals dealing with two-octave,
                                       Slide Guitar Lab                                       three- and four-part arpeggios across the guitar. Included in
                                       1 credit                                               weekly assignments will be exercises and drill studies.
                                       Course Chair: Larry Baione
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring                                  ILGT-265
                                       Required of: None                                                 Guitar Lab – Performance Techniques
                                       Electable by: Guitar principals                                   and Comping
                                       Prerequisites: None                                               1 credit
                                                                                                         Course Chair: Larry Baione
                            Study of technique, repertoire, and improvisational approaches               Offered: Fall, Spring
                            with regard to contemporary slide guitar performance.                        Required of: None
                                                                                                         Electable by: Guitar principals
                                                                                                         Prerequisites: ILGT-119

                                                                                              A performance lab for guitarists focusing on combining jazz
                                                                                              style harmonic techniques with the development of rhythmic
                                                                                              flexibility. This course is for students who wish to develop
                                                                                              these skills in an interactive setting.


            120     Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                             Instrumental Labs
ILGT-267                                                          ILGT-285
          Guitarist Approaches to Vocal Accompaniment                       Country Guitar Lab
          1 credit                                                          1 credit
          Course Chair: Larry Baione                                        Course Chair: Larry Baione
          Offered: Fall, Spring                                             Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
          Required of: None                                                 Required of: None
          Electable by: Guitar principals                                   Electable by: Guitar principals
          Prerequisites: None                                               Prerequisites: ILGT-119

A Guitar Department course in which students will study           Performance of material from Country Guitar Styles, including
methods and techniques specifically related to the                single-note solos, pedal steel style, folk fingerpicking, and
accompaniment of vocalists in a variety of styles and settings.   western swing.
Students will learn repertoire-appropriate chord and melodic
techniques, including drop two and three, voicings; walking       ILGT-319
bass techniques; chord soloing techniques; and finger- and                  Guitar Styles of the Beatles
pick-style playing; as well as techniques for working with male             1 credit
and female vocalists in solo, duo, trio, or larger settings.                Course Chair: Larry Baione
                                                                            Offered: Fall, Spring
ILGT-269                                                                    Required of: None
          Polyrhythms for Guitar 1                                          Electable by: Guitar principals
          1 credit                                                          Prerequisites: None
          Course Chair: Larry Baione
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                           Study and performance of guitar riffs, leads, and grooves as
          Required of: None                                       recorded by Harrison, Lennon, and McCartney. Role of the
          Electable by: Guitar principals                         guitar in pop/rock recording and production, including triads,
          Prerequisites: ILGT-119                                 four-note voicings, characteristic rhythms, phrasing, effects,
                                                                  layering, and the mini-orchestra concept. Developing typical
This lab is an introduction to rhythmic displacement in           accompaniment patterns for contemporary songs.
comping and soloing by the use of various polyrhythms and
polymeters against a standard 3/4 or 4/4 time signature.          ILGT-321
                                                                            Advanced Standard Workshop for the Guitarist
ILGT-271                                                                    1 credit
          Linear Approach Concepts                                          Course Chair: Larry Baione
          1 credit                                                          Offered: Fall, Spring
          Course Chair: Larry Baione                                        Required of: None
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                     Electable by: Guitar principals
          Required of: None                                                 Prerequisites: ILGT-221 and ensemble rating 4444
          Electable by: Guitar principals
          Prerequisites: ILGT-119                                 A continuation of ILGT-221 using standards that present
                                                                  greater challenges. Tunes are prepared (melody, chords, bass
A lab for guitar principals that develops approach patterns       line, and improvisation) for critiqued performance on a weekly
and trains the ear for improvisation in all idioms.               basis. Techniques for and approaches to improvisation,
                                                                  including the application of melodic and harmonic minor
ILGT-275                                                          scales and diminished and whole tone scales.
          Recording/Practice Techniques for the
          Performing Guitarist                                    ILGT-323
          1 credit                                                          Guitarmony 2
          Course Chair: Larry Baione                                        1 credit
          Offered: Fall, Spring                                             Course Chair: Larry Baione
          Required of: None                                                 Offered: Fall, Spring
          Electable by: Guitar principals                                   Required of: None
          Prerequisites: ILGT-119                                           Electable by: Guitar principals
                                                                            Prerequisites: ILGT-223
A course exploring a wide range of creative, aesthetic,
conceptual, and technical aspects of recording electric and       A lab for guitar principals continuing the development of
acoustic guitar. Topics will include the creation of overdubbed   harmonic and voice-leading concepts introduced in ILGT-223.
parts in a recording session and related aspects of tone;         Various string combinations and voicing sizes will be
orchestration and concept; recording media; direct recording      introduced, and a more in-depth examination of modal
of electric guitar; microphone use and theory applied to          harmonies and upper-structure triads will be developed.
electric and acoustic guitar; use of equalization, compression,
and other effects in a recording environment; and mixing and
production concepts.




                                                                                                                        Summer/Fall 2012   121
                            COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Instrumental Labs



                            ILGT-325                                                         ILGT-340
                                       Walking Bass Line and Chords for Guitar                         The George Benson Lab
                                       1 credit                                                        1 credit
                                       Course Chair: Larry Baione                                      Course Chair: Larry Baione
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                       Required of: None                                               Required of: None
                                       Electable by: Guitar principals                                 Electable by: Guitar principals
                                       Prerequisites: ILGT-119                                         Prerequisites: ILGT-119

                            A systematic technique developing a complete rhythm section      Study and performance of the guitar playing style of George
                            style of accompaniment playing, ideal for duo and trio           Benson through recordings and transcriptions. Students will
                            situations. Class participation involves weekly performance of   focus on the artist’s harmonic, melodic, and rhythmic styles.
                            standard, jazz, blues, or Latin tunes.
                                                                                             ILGT-341
                            ILGT-327                                                                   Jazz/Rock Improvisation for Guitar 2
                                       Advanced Chord Soloing                                          1 credit
                                       1 credit                                                        Course Chair: Larry Baione
                                       Course Chair: Larry Baione                                      Offered: Fall, Spring
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                   Required of: None
                                       Required of: None                                               Electable by: Guitar principals
                                       Electable by: Guitar principals                                 Prerequisites: ILGT-241
                                       Prerequisites: ILGT-227
                                                                                             A continuation of ILGT-241, with more advanced theory and
                            Students will record solo guitar pieces of their choice, which   techniques. Analysis becomes secondary, and in-class
                            may include original arrangements, transcriptions, adaptations   performance is emphasized. Instructor demonstration
                            in various genres, and Guitar Department-produced handouts.      is continued.
                            Recordings may also include chord soloing with rhythm section.
                                                                                             ILGT-343
                            ILGT-331                                                                   Jeff Beck Lab
                                       Guitar Synthesizer Lab                                          1 credit
                                       1 credit                                                        Course Chair: Larry Baione
                                       Course Chair: Larry Baione                                      Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                   Required of: None
                                       Required of: None                                               Electable by: Guitar principals
                                       Electable by: Guitar principals                                 Prerequisites: ILGT-119
                                       Prerequisites: None
                                                                                             Study of guitar performance skills based on the music of Jeff
                            Applications, scope, and limitations of guitar synthesizers.     Beck. Concentration on intonation, tone production,
                            Understanding the operating principles of guitar synthesizers    transcription skills, and a variety of techniques both
                            as they have evolved with developments in technology.            conventional and unorthodox.
                            Discussion of appropriate performance techniques and
                            related problems.                                                ILGT-344
                                                                                                       The Jim Hall Lab
                            ILGT-333                                                                   1 credit
                                       Electronic Effects for Guitar                                   Course Chair: Larry Baione
                                       1 credit                                                        Offered: Fall, Spring
                                       Course Chair: Larry Baione                                      Required of: None
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                   Electable by: Guitar principals
                                       Required of: None                                               Prerequisites: ILGT-119
                                       Electable by: Guitar principals
                                       Prerequisites: None                                   Study and performance of the guitar playing style of Jim Hall
                                                                                             through recordings and transcriptions. Students will explore Jim
                            Hands-on training with current digital equipment and             Hall’s conceptual approaches to rhythm, melody, and harmony.
                            electronic devices. Approaches to effective performance using
                            various signal-processing equipment.




            122     Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                             Instrumental Labs
ILGT-345                                                          ILGT-360
          Advanced Rock Guitar Performance Techniques                       Advanced Brazilian Guitar Styles
          1 credit                                                          1 credit
          Course Chair: Larry Baione                                        Course Chair: Larry Baione
          Offered: Fall, Spring                                             Offered: Fall, Spring
          Required of: None                                                 Required of: None
          Electable by: Guitar principals                                   Electable by: Guitar principals
          Prerequisites: ILGT-119                                           Prerequisites: ILGT-119

Instrumental lab for guitar principals with third-semester or     A study and performance of the Brazilian guitar tradition. This
higher standing. Emphasis on application of theory and            course will look into the solo style of Baden Powell, teach
musicianship concepts presented in core music studies             some of the chorihnos, and continue to expand upon the
(harmony and ear training) to modern rock guitar improvisation.   repertoire of Antônio Carlos Jobim and more contemporary
                                                                  Brazilian composers.
ILGT-346
          The Music of the Allman Brothers Band                   ILGT-363
          1 credit                                                          Advanced Reading
          Course Chair: Larry Baione                                        1 credit
          Offered: Fall, Spring                                             Course Chair: Larry Baione
          Required of: None                                                 Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
          Electable by: Guitar principals                                   Required of: None
          Prerequisites: None                                               Electable by: Guitar principals
                                                                            Prerequisites: ILGT-119
This course teaches guitarists the music of the Allman Brothers
band. Students will be given transcriptions and learn to play     Performance lab for guitar principals focusing on development
the music of the Allman Brothers, which will include analysis     of advanced reading skills. Each session will be thorough and
and improvisation pertaining to the harmonic structure of the     challenging. Individual solos as well as group arrangements
tunes. Slide technique, pentatonic and modal scale                will be played.
applications, chord forms, and arpeggios will also be
incorporated into the class.                                      ILGT-365
                                                                            Advanced Guitar Performance Lab
ILGT-347                                                                    1 credit
          Jimi Hendrix Lab                                                  Course Chair: Larry Baione
          1 credit                                                          Offered: Fall, Spring
          Course Chair: Larry Baione                                        Required of: None
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                     Electable by: Guitar principals
          Required of: None                                                 Prerequisites: By audition
          Electable by: Guitar principals
          Prerequisites: ILGT-119                                 For advanced guitar principals, continued development of
                                                                  skills and techniques with emphasis on reading and
Study of guitar performance skills based on the music of Jimi     group performance.
Hendrix. Concentration on intonation, tone production,
transcription skills, and a variety of techniques both            ILGT-367
conventional and unorthodox.                                                Building Guitar Technique through Triads
                                                                            1 credit
ILGT-349                                                                    Course Chair: Larry Baione
          Solo Jazz Guitar                                                  Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
          1 credit                                                          Required of: None
          Course Chair: Larry Baione                                        Electable by: Guitar principals
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                     Prerequisites: ILGT-119
          Required of: None
          Electable by: Guitar principals                         This lab uses the original George Van Eps method for guitar.
          Prerequisites: ILGT-119                                 The student is rigorously involved in developing a triad-
                                                                  oriented approach to the finger board. Topics covered include
This lab offers an in-depth analysis of complex harmonic          harmonized scales and scale patterns, melodized triads, and
situations in the creation and performance of chord solos,        free improvisations. Strong emphasis on correct technique for
involving mechanical voicings derived from chord scales and       both right and left hands.
various reharmonization techniques.




                                                                                                                        Summer/Fall 2012   123
                            COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Instrumental Labs



                            ILGT-369                                                           ILGT-385
                                       Polyrhythms for Guitar 2                                           Show/Theater Guitar Lab
                                       1 credit                                                           1 credit
                                       Course Chair: Larry Baione                                         Course Chair: Larry Baione
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring                                              Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                       Required of: None                                                  Required of: None
                                       Electable by: Guitar principals                                    Electable by: Guitar principals
                                       Prerequisites: ILGT-269                                            Prerequisites: ILGT-119

                            This is a continuation of ILGT-269 (rhythmic displacement          Performance and study of guitar books from Broadway
                            in comping and soloing by the use of polyrhythms                   shows, night clubs, and recording sessions.
                            and polymeters).
                                                                                               ILGT-386
                            ILGT-371                                                                      Contemporary Sight-Reading Skills
                                       Professional Guitar Styles                                         for Guitarists
                                       1 credit                                                           1 credit
                                       Course Chair: Larry Baione                                         Course Chair: Larry Baione
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                      Offered: Fall, Spring
                                       Required of: None                                                  Required of: None
                                       Electable by: Guitar principals                                    Electable by: Guitar principals
                                       Prerequisites: ILGT-119                                            Prerequisites: None

                            Designed to prepare guitarists for professional general            A sight-reading class for guitarists utilizing modern music in
                            business engagements, this lab will cover correct rhythm and       funk and jazz styles. The class will be based on a working
                            lead styles for all types of music commonly played on such         guitarist’s skills necessary to function in practical playing
                            engagements. Other topics will include: hearing common             situations. Drills will utilize play-along recordings where class
                            chord progressions, forming a band, utilizing booking agents,      members will have to add parts on the spot. Guitar ensemble
                            and running an engagement.                                         material will also be used to gain ensemble, phrasing, and
                                                                                               intonation skills, as well as big band charts reading lines,
                            ILGT-373                                                           comping chords, and improvising.
                                       The Linear Style of Pat Martino: Approaches to
                                       Jazz Improvisation                                      ILPC-281
                                       1 credit                                                           Introduction to Timpani
                                       Course Chair: Larry Baione                                         1 credit
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring                                              Course Chair: John Ramsay
                                       Required of: None                                                  Offered: Fall, Spring
                                       Electable by: Guitar principals                                    Required of: Total percussion principal
                                       Prerequisites: ILGT-119                                              MUED majors
                                                                                                          Electable by: All percussion principals
                            Instrumental lab for guitar principals emphasizing performance                Prerequisites: None
                            in the style of Pat Martino. Study of études and line studies as
                            preparation for performing transcribed solos. Application of       Emphasis on intervallic recognition, setting the pitch, tone
                            linear concepts to improvisation.                                  concepts, rolls, dynamics, and sticking. Performance of two
                                                                                               timpani études.
                            ILGT-375
                                       Wes Montgomery Lab                                      ILPC-315
                                       1 credit                                                           Concert Snare Drum Techniques
                                       Course Chair: Larry Baione                                         1 credit
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring                                              Course Chair: John Ramsay
                                       Required of: None                                                  Offered: Fall, Spring
                                       Electable by: Guitar principals                                    Required of: Total percussion principal PERF majors
                                       Prerequisites: None                                                Electable by: All percussion principals
                                                                                                          Prerequisites: ILPD-125
                            Study and performance of the guitar playing style of Wes
                            Montgomery through recordings and transcribed solos                Technique, interpretation, and practical use of the snare drum
                            featuring Montgomery’s own fingerings, phrasing, etc. Focus        in a solo context.
                            on the artist’s blues and swing feel, spontaneous
                            improvisation, and individuality.




            124     Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                Instrumental Labs
ILPC-319                                                            ILPD-211
          Advanced Drum Rudiments                                             Introduction to Brazilian and Afro-Cuban
          1 credit                                                            Drum Set
          Course Chair: John Ramsay                                           1 credit
          Offered: Fall, Spring                                               Course Chair: John Ramsay
          Required of: None                                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
          Electable by: Drum set and total                                    Required of: Drum set principals
            percussion principals                                             Electable by: All percussion principals
          Prerequisites: ILPD-112                                             Prerequisites: ILPD-112

A study of the 26 American rudiments, the Swiss rudiments,          Development of fluency and effectiveness with Afro-Cuban
and their variations. Application of rudimental vocabulary to       and Brazilian rhythms applied to drum set with an emphasis
successful performance of solo études, including Wilcoxon’s         on form. Continued brush, orchestral, and rudimental snare
Modern Swing Solos.                                                 drum studies.

ILPD-111                                                            ILPD-212
          Drum Set Basics                                                     Drum Set Chart Interpretation
          1 credit                                                            1 credit
          Course Chair: John Ramsay                                           Course Chair: John Ramsay
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
          Required of: Drum set and total percussion                          Required of: Drum set principal PERF majors
            principals; hand percussion principal PERF majors                 Electable by: All percussion principals
          Electable by: All percussion principals                             Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3
          Prerequisites: None
                                                                    Intermediate-to-advanced drum set chart reading and
Development of fundamental snare drum studies including             improvisation studies, notation, and repertoire. Continued
grip, sticking, sticking patterns, rhythmic studies, reading, and   orchestral and rudimental snare drum studies.
rudimental studies. Drum set grooves and techniques will be
introduced as well.                                                 ILPD-217
                                                                              Brush Techniques
ILPD-112                                                                      1 credit
          Jazz Drum Set Fundamentals                                          Course Chair: John Ramsay
          1 credit                                                            Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
          Course Chair: John Ramsay                                           Required of: None
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                       Electable by: Drum set and total
          Required of: Drum set and total percussion                            percussion principals
            principals; hand percussion principal PERF majors                 Prerequisites: ILPD-112
          Electable by: All percussion principals
          Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 2                  This lab emphasizes techniques related to traditional wire
                                                                    brushes and heavier specialty brushes, including conventional
Continued orchestral and rudimental snare drum studies              sweeping and figure patterns, individualized patterns,
along with drum set time and improvisational skills utilizing       distribution of rhythm between both hands, reverse
12- and 32-measure tune forms primarily in the jazz context,        functioning in the hands, and techniques related to jazz and
including the use of brushes.                                       bossa nova styles. Repertoire study and brush stylists including
                                                                    Philly Joe Jones, Vernell Fournier, and Ed Thigpen will
ILPD-125                                                            be investigated.
          Snare Drum Techniques for the
          Drum Set Principal                                        ILPD-221
          1 credit                                                            Rock Drumming Repertoire and Application
          Course Chair: John Ramsay                                           1 credit
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                       Course Chair: John Ramsay
          Required of: None                                                   Offered: Fall, Spring
          Electable by: All percussion principals                             Required of: None
          Prerequisites: ILPD-111                                             Electable by: All percussion principals
                                                                              Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3
Study of snare drum performance techniques and reading of
constant odd meters, changing meters, polyrhythms over one          This course will enhance the learning and playing of standard
and two beats, and metric modulation.                               repertoire for the drumset in various rock styles. Numerous
                                                                    songs will be analyzed, studied, and memorized. This course
                                                                    is designed to allow the student to gain a working knowledge
                                                                    of the standard rock repertoire.




                                                                                                                           Summer/Fall 2012   125
                            COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Instrumental Labs



                            ILPD-225                                                         ILPD-237
                                       Jazz Repertoire Development and Application                     Acoustic Characteristics of the Drum Set
                                       1 credit                                                        1 credit
                                       Course Chair: John Ramsay                                       Course Chair: John Ramsay
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring                                           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                       Required of: None                                               Required of: None
                                       Electable by: All percussion principals                         Electable by: All percussion principals
                                       Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3                        Prerequisites: None

                            This course will enhance the learning and playing of standard    This course examines the sonic and acoustic dimensions of the
                            repertoire for the drum set in various jazz styles. Numerous     instruments that make up the drum set. Study of the history,
                            songs will be analyzed, studied, and memorized. This course      materials used, manufacturing processes, tuning, and
                            is designed to allow the student to gain a working knowledge     maintenance of these components through demonstrations
                            of the standard jazz repertoire.                                 and direct experience. Comparisons of common descriptive
                                                                                             sonic vocabulary with the actual sounds; techniques for
                            ILPD-229                                                         adapting and controlling sound in various styles.
                                       Hip-Hop Repertoire Development
                                       and Application                                       ILPD-239
                                       1 credit                                                        Country Drumming Styles
                                       Course Chair: John Ramsay                                       1 credit
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring                                           Course Chair: John Ramsay
                                       Required of: None                                               Offered: Fall, Spring
                                       Electable by: All percussion principals                         Required of: None
                                       Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3                        Electable by: All percussion principals
                                                                                                       Prerequisites: None
                            This course will enhance the learning and playing of standard
                            repertoire for the drum set in various hip-hop styles.           A performance-based historical survey of country and western
                            Numerous songs will be analyzed, studied, and memorized.         drumming styles up to the present day. Development of
                            This course is designed to allow the student to gain a working   performance skills in country and western feels incorporating
                            knowledge of the standard hip-hop repertoire.                    both stick and brush techniques. Major drummers in this style
                                                                                             will be studied.
                            ILPD-233
                                       Funk Repertoire Development and Application           ILPD-250
                                       1 credit                                                        Global Sight-Reading and Advanced
                                       Course Chair: John Ramsay                                       Rhythmic Solfege
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                   1 credit
                                       Required of: None                                               Course Chair: John Ramsay
                                       Electable by: All percussion principals                         Offered: Fall, Spring
                                       Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3                        Required of: None
                                                                                                       Electable by: All percussion principals
                            This course will enhance the learning and playing of standard              Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3
                            repertoire for the drumset in various funk styles. Numerous
                            songs will be analyzed, studied, and memorized. This course      This performance-oriented lab draws on a global selection
                            is designed to allow the student to gain a working knowledge     of musical genres including Indian, Middle Eastern, Latin
                            of the standard funk repertoire.                                 American, Balkan, and African traditions, and utilizes them as
                                                                                             structural models or compositional inspiration for a variety of
                            ILPD-235                                                         concise yet challenging sight-reading and recitation exercises.
                                       Polyrhythms 1                                         Each example is introduced both as a vocal exercise, using
                                       1 credit                                              native mnemonic or other onomatopoeic syllables to represent
                                       Course Chair: John Ramsay                             the given notation, and performed on a variety of instruments,
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                         focusing primarily on the snare drum but also making use of
                                       Required of: Total percussion principal PERF majors   hand percussion and drum set. This course will be of interest to
                                       Electable by: All percussion principals               anyone who wishes to advance his/her reading and interpreta-
                                       Prerequisites: ILPD-112                               tive skills while exploring new rhythmic concepts and languages
                                                                                             outside the classical/orchestral and popular Western genres.
                            This course will examine polyrhythmic studies including multi-
                            simultaneous patterns, metric modulation, and cross rhythms.




            126     Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                             Instrumental Labs
ILPD-261                                                          ILPD-339
          Jazz Drum Styles                                                  Fusion Repertoire Development
          1 credit                                                          and Application
          Course Chair: John Ramsay                                         1 credit
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                     Course Chair: John Ramsay
          Required of: None                                                 Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
          Electable by: All                                                 Required of: None
          Prerequisites: None                                               Electable by: All percussion principals
                                                                            Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3
A study of drummers in the jazz idiom. Resources include
audio and video examples, articles, transcriptions, and           This course will enhance the learning and playing of standard
demonstrations. Artists covered will include Joey Baron, Brian    repertoire for the drum set in various fusion styles. Numerous
Blade, Art Blakey, Larry Bunker, Jon Christensen, Jimmy Cobb,     songs will be analyzed, studied, and memorized. This course
Troy Davis, Alan Dawson, Jack DeJohnette, Al Foster, Steve        is designed to allow the student to gain a working knowledge
Gadd, Billy Hart, Roy Haynes, Billy Higgins, Elvin Jones, Lewis   of the standard fusion repertoire.
Nash, Bill Stewart, and Jeff Watts.
                                                                  ILPD-351
ILPD-317                                                                    Alternative Setups for Drum Set
          Advanced Brush Lab                                                and Percussion
          1 credit                                                          2 credits
          Course Chair: John Ramsay                                         Course Chair: John Ramsay
          Offered: Fall, Spring                                             Offered: Fall, Spring
          Required of: None                                                 Required of: None
          Electable by: All percussion principals                           Electable by: All percussion principals
          Prerequisites: ILPD-217                                           Prerequisites: ILPD-211

Building on ILPD-217, this course offers students the             Solutions to practical and logistical problems confronting the
opportunity to improve basic skills. Studies include ballad and   contemporary percussionist/drummer. Experimentation with
swing patterns, odd meters, Latin, solo, and ensemble playing.    alternative setups designed to meet the demands of today’s
Various contemporary brush stylists will be examined. In          contemporary music and the student’s own creative
addition, continued repertoire study is included.                 requirements. Topics include new hardware solutions,
                                                                  coordination exercises, and practical musical and
ILPD-331                                                          orchestrational choices. Various global music drumming
          Contemporary Electronic Percussion                      traditions will be applied as catalysts in approaching
          1 credit                                                alternative setups.
          Course Chair: John Ramsay
          Offered: Fall, Spring                                   ILPD-355
          Required of: None                                                 African Rhythms for Drum Set
          Electable by: All percussion principals                           1 credit
          Prerequisites: ILPD-211                                           Course Chair: John Ramsay
                                                                            Offered: Fall, Spring
A comprehensive course on functioning in today’s music world                Required of: None
with the latest electronic instruments in modern percussion.                Electable by: Drum set, total percussion, and hand
The program includes hands-on work with electronic drum kits                  percussion principals
and drum machines, including programming, triggering,                       Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3
and interfacing.
                                                                  This course is a practical application of traditional African
ILPD-333                                                          rhythms and their application to drum set performance and
          Advanced Drum Chart Reading                             their use in contemporary Afro-pop music. This course will
          1 credit                                                examine many of the commonly used rhythmic concepts,
          Course Chair: John Ramsay                               metric meters, and an analysis of important Afro-pop artists
          Offered: Fall, Spring                                   such as Salif Keita (Mali), Baaba Maal (Senegal), Angélique
          Required of: None                                       Kidjo (Benin), King Sunny Adé (Nigeria), and Tabu Ley
          Electable by: All percussion principals                 Rochereau (Zaire).
          Prerequisites: ILPD-212

Musical applications of skills associated with reading in
professional performance situations: drum parts, lead sheets,
sight-reading, song forms, soloing, playing with brushes,
show charts, shifting time-feels, and changes of meter.
Extensive use of prerecorded materials in both large and small
ensemble configurations.




                                                                                                                        Summer/Fall 2012   127
                            COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Instrumental Labs



                            ILPD-357                                                        percussionists, physical integration of percussion instruments
                                       South American Rhythms for the Drum Set              into the drum set for simultaneous performance by one player,
                                       1 credit                                             and creation of custom sets and set-ups for specific musical
                                       Course Chair: John Ramsay                            situations. Topics will be examined from both traditional and
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring                                nontraditional perspectives.
                                       Required of: None
                                       Electable by: Drum set, hand percussion, and total   ILPD-424
                                         percussion principals                                        Caribbean Rhythms for Drum Set
                                       Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3                       1 credit
                                                                                                      Course Chair: John Ramsay
                            This course develops integrated applications of all South                 Offered: Fall, Spring
                            American percussion concepts for the drum set. Topics include             Required of: None
                            identification of various Brazilian, Venezuelan, Uruguayan,               Electable by: Drum set, hand percussion, and total
                            Peruvian, Colombian, and Argentinean musical instruments                    percussion principals
                            and drum set applications of all rhythms (both with and                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 3
                            without a percussionist). Topics are examined from both
                            traditional and nontraditional perspectives.                    Building on the foundation of ILPD-373, this lab will develop
                                                                                            integrated applications of Caribbean percussion concepts for
                            ILPD-361                                                        the drum set. Topics will include identification of various
                                       New Orleans Drumming                                 musical styles from Trinidad, Martinique, Guadeloupe, Haiti,
                                       1 credit                                             Jamaica, Puerto Rico, Curacao, Cuba, and the Dominican
                                       Course Chair: John Ramsay                            Republic. Basic techniques and patterns for traditional
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                        percussion instruments and drum set applications of all
                                       Required of: None                                    rhythms (both with and without a percussionist) will be
                                       Electable by: Drum set and total                     discussed. All topics will be examined from both a traditional
                                         percussion principals                              and nontraditional perspective.
                                       Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 2
                                                                                            ILPD-433
                            A study and analysis of New Orleans drumming styles, from                 Advanced Jazz Drumming
                            street beats to funk and jazz.                                            1 credit
                                                                                                      Course Chair: John Ramsay
                            ILPD-369                                                                  Offered: Spring
                                       Double Bass Drum Studies                                       Required of: None
                                       1 credit                                                       Electable by: Drum set principals
                                       Course Chair: John Ramsay                                      Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 4
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring
                                       Required of: None                                    This lab emphasizes post-bop and modern jazz techniques.
                                       Electable by: All percussion principals              Topics include advanced repertoire development,
                                       Prerequisites: None                                  technique/coordination development, polyrhythmic application,
                                                                                            and conceptual approaches along with transcription, listening,
                            This lab explores the application of two bass drums (and        and analysis of a number of master drummers, such as Roy
                            double pedal) in the rock, jazz/rock, and funk/fusion styles.   Haynes, Jack DeJohnette, and Tony Williams.
                            Technical coordination studies include feet positioning,
                            continuous and noncontinuous grooves, and double bass           ILPH-293
                            fill/solo concepts.                                                       Afro-Caribbean Rhythms and Percussion
                                                                                                      for Nonpercussionists
                            ILPD-373                                                                  2 credits
                                       Afro-Cuban/Brazilian Rhythms for Drum Set                      Course Chair: John Ramsay
                                       2 credits                                                      Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                       Course Chair: John Ramsay                                      Required of: None
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring                                          Electable by: All non-percussion principals
                                       Required of: None                                              Prerequisites: None
                                       Electable by: Drum set and total
                                         percussion principals                              Rhythms, song styles, and percussion instruments of Cuba and
                                       Prerequisites: ILPH-357 or ILPH-359                  other Afro-Caribbean regions. Development of performance
                                                                                            skills in various rhythm styles through study of basic techniques
                            Intended for students who have completed ILPH-371, this         of characteristic percussion instruments.
                            course will develop integrated applications of all Latin
                            percussion concepts for the drum set. Topics include drum set
                            performance with no percussionist and with one or more




            128     Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                 Instrumental Labs
ILPH-351                                                           ILPH-359
          Drumming Styles of Ghana                                            Brazilian Rhythms and Percussion
          2 credits                                                           2 credits
          Course Chair: John Ramsay                                           Course Chair: John Ramsay
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
          Required of: Hand percussion principals                             Required of: Hand percussion principals, drum set
          Electable by: All percussion principals                               principals, and total percussion principal PERF and
          Prerequisites: None                                                   PROM majors not taking ILPH-357
                                                                              Electable by: All
An intensive study of West African drumming styles from the                   Prerequisites: None
Ewe, Ga, and Dagbamba people of Ghana, West Africa. This
course will emphasize three areas of performance techniques:       A lab focusing on rhythmic techniques and song styles of
straight stick, curved stick, and hand drumming styles.            Brazilian music and their related percussion instruments.
Repertoire studied will include agbekor, kpanlogo, and             Development of performance skills through study of audio
damba. Teaching methods will incorporate call-and-response         and video recordings as well as supervised ensemble playing.
formats, videos, and transcriptions. Authentic instruments will    Note: ILPH-357 may be taken instead of this course.
be provided.
                                                                   ILPH-P365
ILPH-353                                                                      Timbale Playing Styles 1
          Native American Drumming Lab                                        2 credits
          1 credit                                                            Course Chair: John Ramsay
          Course Chair: John Ramsay                                           Offered: Fall, Spring
          Offered: Fall, Spring                                               Required of: None
          Required of: None                                                   Electable by: All percussion principals
          Electable by: All                                                   Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 2
          Prerequisites: None
                                                                   An introduction to timbale playing that will cover the history
Study of various techniques and tribal styles of American Indian   of the instrument from its Creole origins when it was still a
drumming using traditional songs as the repertoire for learning.   timpani, to the contemporary timbale set-up: three cowbells,
Teaching style will be hands-on: students will perform on          bass drum, cymbals, jam-block, and snare. This course will
traditional Native American drums and percussion instruments.      cover danzón, cha-cha, mambo, pilon, Mozambique,
                                                                   “traditional” salsa, and songo styles. With each style, the
ILPH-354                                                           student will learn to play a tune in that genre and study
          Bata Rhythms/Afro-Cuban Ceremonial                       stylistically appropriate patterns, fills, and solo material. This
          Drumming Lab                                             course is highly recommended for drum set principals who
          2 credits                                                wish to improve their overall understanding of Latin music
          Course Chair: John Ramsay                                though adaptation of timbale playing concepts to the
          Offered: Fall, Spring                                    drum set.
          Required of: None
          Electable by: All                                        ILPH-371
          Prerequisites: ILPH-293 or ILPH-357 or by audition                  Advanced Afro-Cuban Rhythms and Percussion
                                                                              2 credits
Study of various techniques and tribal styles of American Indian              Course Chair: John Ramsay
drumming using traditional songs as the repertoire for learning.              Offered: Fall, Spring
Teaching style will be hands-on: students will perform on                     Required of: Hand percussion principal PERF majors
traditional Native American drums and percussion instruments.                 Electable by: All percussion principals
                                                                              Prerequisites: ILPH-293 or ILPH-357
ILPH-357
          Afro-Caribbean Rhythms and Percussion                    Continuation of ILPH-357 and ILPH-359. Development of
          2 credits                                                more advanced techniques and concepts through deeper
          Course Chair: John Ramsay                                examination of evolution and derivations of the rhythmic
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                            styles. Intended course outcomes include performance-level
          Required of: Hand percussion principals, drum set        group playing and improvisation as well as soloing.
            principals, and total percussion principal PERF and
            PROM majors not taking ILPH-359
          Electable by: All percussion principals
          Prerequisites: None

A lab for percussion department principals focusing on
rhythmic techniques and song styles from Cuba, Puerto Rico
and the Dominican Republic and their related percussion
instruments. Development of performance skills through study
of recordings, transcriptions, and supervised ensemble playing.
Note: ILPH-359 may be taken instead of this course.

                                                                                                                            Summer/Fall 2012   129
                            COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Instrumental Labs



                            ILPH-375                                                           ILPH-451
                                       Practical Applications of Afro-Latin Rhythms                      Drumming Styles of Guinea
                                       2 credits                                                         2 credits
                                       Course Chair: John Ramsay                                         Course Chair: John Ramsay
                                       Offered: Fall                                                     Offered: Fall, Spring
                                       Required of: None                                                 Required of: Hand percussion principal PERF majors
                                       Electable by: All percussion principals                           Electable by: All percussion principals
                                       Prerequisites: ILPH-293 or ILPH-357                               Prerequisites: None

                            A study of traditional or indigenous Afro-Latin rhythmic           An intensive study of West African drumming styles from the
                            concepts and their application to contemporary musical forms.      Susu, Malinké, and Bagba people of Guinea, West Africa. Class
                            Expanded concepts of technique as it relates to this study and     format will include hand drumming techniques for the djembe
                            to related instruments. Emphasis on performance with               and stick patterns on the dununs (bass drums). All material
                            traditional instruments and rhythmic concepts in                   covered will be taught orally by the instructor along with video
                            nontraditional music.                                              presentations. Repertoire will include yankadi, makuru, kuku,
                                                                                               and sinte. Authentic instruments will be provided.
                            ILPH-391
                                       Steelpan Techniques for Percussionists                  ILPH-459
                                       2 credits                                                         Brazilian Rhythms and Percussion 2
                                       Course Chair: John Ramsay                                         2 credits
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring                                             Course Chair: John Ramsay
                                       Required of: None                                                 Offered: Fall, Spring
                                       Electable by: All percussion principals                           Required of: None
                                       Prerequisites: None                                               Electable by: All
                                                                                                         Prerequisites: ILPH-359
                            A study of steelpan performance techniques designed for
                            percussion principals. Skills development will include the         A continuation of ILPH-359, with emphasis on the drumming
                            sticking techniques required for steelpan players, rhythmic        styles of northeastern Brazil. Development of performance
                            patterns, scale-learning methods on the instrument, and            skills through study of recordings, transcriptions, and
                            general performance techniques.                                    supervised ensemble playing.

                            ILPH-429                                                           ILPM-121
                                       Contemporary Techniques for Pop Percussion                        Mallet Lab 1
                                       1 credit                                                          1 credit
                                       Course Chair: John Ramsay                                         Course Chair: John Ramsay
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring                                             Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                       Required of: None                                                 Required of: Hand percussion principal PERF majors
                                       Electable by: All percussion principals                           Electable by: All percussion principals
                                       Prerequisites: None                                               Prerequisites: None

                            With emphasis on r&b, rock/funk, swing, motown, and pop            A mallet-keyboard lab for percussion principals with no prior
                            styles, this course explores the study of small hand percussion:   mallet experience. Development of basic skills required
                            tambourine, shakers, cowbells, and cabasa, as well as congas,      including grips, stroke, pedaling, dampening, sight-reading,
                            bongos, and timbales, individually as well as in combination       basic four-mallet technique, scales, and arpeggios.
                            with each other to form multiple percussion setups.
                            Transitions, groove building, and coordination techniques will     ILPM-221
                            be analyzed in class. Chart reading and interpretation, as well              Mallet Lab 2
                            as some transcription techniques, will be covered throughout                 1 credit
                            the semester. Knowledge of basic conga techniques is                         Course Chair: John Ramsay
                            strongly recommended.                                                        Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                                                                                         Required of: Vibraphone principal non-PERF majors
                                                                                                         Electable by: All percussion principals
                                                                                                         Prerequisites: ILPM-121 or by audition

                                                                                               A mallet-keyboard performance lab for Percussion Department
                                                                                               principals with some basic grounding in mallet work, including
                                                                                               grips, scales, and reading experience. In this lab, the student
                                                                                               will begin to address broader melodic, harmonic, and technical
                                                                                               issues involved in mallet playing, including the continuation of
                                                                                               four-mallet technique applied to basic harmonic progressions.




            130     Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                Instrumental Labs
ILPM-231                                                           ILPN-121
           Mallet Keyboard Musicianship                                       Keyboard Lab – Comping 1
           2 credits                                                          1 credit
           Course Chair: John Ramsay                                          Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan
           Offered: Fall                                                      Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Required of: Marimba and total percussion principal                Required of: None
             PERF majors                                                      Electable by: Piano principals
           Electable by: Hand percussion, vibraphone, and                     Prerequisites: None
             total percussion principals
           Prerequisites: HR-112 and ILPM-121                      Instrumental laboratory for piano principals emphasizing
                                                                   comping studies and the application of these techniques to a
This class is designed for the non-improvising player to develop   variety of idioms. Recorded material for play-along purposes.
musicianship skills by concentrating on the integration of
harmony, melody, rhythm, and dynamics through the analysis         ILPN-122
and performance of music ranging from Bach to the present.                    Keyboard Lab – Comping 2
                                                                              1 credit
ILPM-341                                                                      Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan
           Marimba Transcription and Repertoire                               Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           2 credits                                                          Required of: None
           Course Chair: John Ramsay                                          Electable by: Piano principals
           Offered: Fall, Spring                                              Prerequisites: ILPN-121 or overall ensemble rating 2
           Required of: Marimba principal MUED, PERF, and
             PROM majors                                           Continuation of ILPN-121. Instrumental laboratory for piano
           Electable by: Marimba, total percussion, and            principals emphasizing more challenging comping studies and
             vibraphone principals                                 the application of these techniques to a variety of idioms.
           Prerequisites: Written approval of course instructor    Recorded material for play-along purposes.

A lab emphasizing skills essential for marimbists and              ILPN-213
percussionists to develop a personalized repertoire and                       Keyboard Lab – Chart Reading
contribute to performance literature for the marimba. Students                1 credit
will learn to adapt music for the marimba from sources such                   Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan
as lead sheets; music for violin, guitar, and harp; and                       Offered: Fall, Spring
transcribed recordings. Works composed for the marimba will                   Required of: None
also be studied and performed.                                                Electable by: Piano principals
                                                                              Prerequisites: ILPN-112 and ILPN-122,
ILPN-111                                                                        overall ensemble rating 3
           Keyboard Lab – Reading 1
           1 credit                                                Practical training in the kind of reading and comping skills
           Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan                          necessary for successful ensemble participation, such as
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                           introductions, endings, fills, notational practices, and style
           Required of: None                                       awareness. Recorded material for play-along purposes.
           Electable by: Piano principals
           Prerequisites: None                                     ILPN-224
                                                                              Keyboard Lab – Advanced Comping
Instrumental laboratory for piano principals emphasizing                      1 credit
reading studies in a variety of idioms. This course increases                 Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan
sight-reading abilities through exposure to traditionally                     Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
notated materials.                                                            Required of: None
                                                                              Electable by: Piano principals
ILPN-112                                                                      Prerequisites: ILPN-122 or overall ensemble rating 3
           Keyboard Lab – Reading 2
           1 credit                                                Continuation of ILPN-122 emphasizing more advanced voicing
           Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan                          techniques. Instrumental laboratory for piano principals
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                           emphasizing comping studies, including rhythm, and the
           Required of: None                                       application of these techniques to the jazz idiom. Recorded
           Electable by: Piano principals                          material for play-along purposes.
           Prerequisites: ILPN-111 or overall ensemble rating 2

Continuation of ILPN-111. Instrumental laboratory for piano
principals emphasizing more challenging reading studies in a
variety of idioms. This course increases sight-reading abilities
through exposure to traditionally notated materials.




                                                                                                                           Summer/Fall 2012   131
                            COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Instrumental Labs



                            ILPN-227                                                             ILPN-241
                                       Accompaniment Techniques for the                                     Advanced Stylistic Comping – Pop
                                       Singer/Pianist                                                       1 credit
                                       1 credit                                                             Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan
                                       Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                        Required of: None
                                       Required of: None                                                    Electable by: Piano principals
                                       Electable by: Voice principals and SONG majors                       Prerequisites: ILPN-122 or overall ensemble rating 3
                                       Prerequisites: ISKB-212 or PIPN-112
                                                                                                 Instrumental laboratory for piano principals emphasizing
                            Practical intermediate keyboard skills for self-accompanying         comping studies and the application of these techniques to a
                            vocalists and singer/songwriters. Focuses on rhythm, voicing,        variety of pop music styles. There will be use of recorded
                            registration, and overall arrangement. Enhancement of                material for play-along purposes.
                            individual performance skills and repertory through study and
                            critiqued performance of musical examples drawn from                 ILPN-242
                            appropriate contemporary styles.                                                Advanced Stylistic Comping – Funk/Fusion
                                                                                                            1 credit
                            ILPN-235                                                                        Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan
                                       Upper Structure Triad Applications                                   Offered: Fall, Spring
                                       1 credit                                                             Required of: None
                                       Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan                                       Electable by: Piano principals
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring                                                Prerequisites: ILPN-112 and ILPN-122, or
                                       Required of: None                                                      overall ensemble rating 3
                                       Electable by: Piano principals
                                       Prerequisites: ILPN-122 or overall ensemble rating 3      Instrumental laboratory for piano principals emphasizing
                                                                                                 comping studies and their application to the funk/fusion
                            This course involves the in-depth study of upper structure triads    idiom. Recorded material for play-along purposes.
                            (USTs) in all chord types and triad combinations. Content and
                            exercises focus on identification of triads for specific tension     ILPN-243
                            combinations, the study of techniques for comping in a group                    Advanced Stylistic Comping – Latin
                            using a variety of USTs, and application of the knowledge of                    1 credit
                            USTs in a linear fashion for jazz improvisation, and applying USTs              Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan
                            as a technique for harmonizing melodies in a solo piano format.                 Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                                                                                            Required of: None
                            ILPN-237                                                                        Electable by: Piano principals
                                       Advanced Rhythmic Lab for the Keyboardist                            Prerequisites: ILPN-122 or overall ensemble rating 3
                                       1 credit
                                       Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan                            Instrumental laboratory for piano principals emphasizing the
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring                                     application of comping techniques to a variety of Latin and
                                       Required of: None                                         Latin-influenced jazz and pop music styles. Use of recorded
                                       Electable by: Piano principals                            material for play-along purposes as well as transcriptions of
                                       Prerequisites: ILPN-112 and ILPN-122, or                  comping of major Latin piano players.
                                         overall ensemble rating 3
                                                                                                 ILPN-244
                            A lab workshop specifically designed to improve the                             Advanced Stylistic Comping – Roots/Rock
                            keyboardist’s understanding and mastery of different rhythmic                   1 credit
                            concepts and their application on the keyboard into various                     Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan
                            musical contexts. Students will learn percussion and speaking                   Offered: Fall, Spring
                            rhythms, which they will apply on the keyboard. The course                      Required of: None
                            material will be based on different rhythmic approaches of jazz                 Electable by: Piano principals
                            performers such as Jelly Roll Morton, Thelonious Monk, Danilo                   Prerequisites: ILPN-111 and ILPN-122, or
                            Perez, McCoy Tyner, and others; 20th-century composers,                           overall ensemble rating 3
                            including Olivier Messiaen, György Ligeti, and Alberto
                            Ginastera; and a variety of global music styles.                     Instrumental laboratory for piano principals emphasizing the
                                                                                                 application of comping techniques to a variety of “roots of rock”
                                                                                                 styles influenced by blues, New Orleans, and gospel music. Use
                                                                                                 of recorded material and transcriptions of influential players.
                                                                                                 Emphasis on in-class performance and play-along.




            132     Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                               Instrumental Labs
ILPN-247                                                            ILPN-272
          Improvisation in Afro-Cuban Piano                                   Jazz Harmonic Techniques for Piano 2
          1 credit                                                            1 credit
          Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan                                      Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan
          Offered: Fall, Spring                                               Offered: Fall, Spring
          Required of: None                                                   Required of: None
          Electable by: Piano principals                                      Electable by: All
          Prerequisites: ILPN-112 and ILPN-121, or                            Prerequisites: ILPN-271
            overall ensemble rating 2
                                                                    An organized approach to establishing a thorough foundation
The course explores the rhythmic and harmonic/melodic               of knowledge and proficiency in keyboard for the study of jazz
vocabulary in Afro-Cuban piano improvisation. Phrasing with         harmony, improvisation, and composition. A continuation of
the clave is a main focus of the course. Percussion instrument      ILPN-271. Material to be covered: additional exercises in scale
patterns are explored in-depth as they relate to the clave and      patterns, diatonic sevenths in inversions, seventh chord
influence the role of the piano. Percussion (“quinto”) solos are    inversions, harmonic tensions, voice leading, and sight-reading
analyzed and compared to piano solos. Broad exposure to a           of lead sheets (melody/chord symbols). Designed for pianists
variety of piano solos will reveal typical elements of the idiom.   and other instrumentalists who want to develop
                                                                    keyboard skills.
ILPN-253
          Keyboard Lab – Improvisation                              ILPN-273
          1 credit                                                            Jazz Harmonic Applications
          Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan                                      1 credit
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                       Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan
          Required of: None                                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
          Electable by: Piano principals                                      Required of: None
          Prerequisites: ILPN-121 or overall ensemble rating 2                Electable by: All
                                                                              Prerequisites: ILPN-272
A performance lab intended for keyboardists with little or
no experience in improvisation. Instructional focus is on           An organized approach to develop a thorough knowledge of
understanding of materials of improvisation both theoretically      common harmonic vocabulary used in contemporary jazz
and aurally, and assimilating these materials into established      harmony, arranging, and composition. Foundation materials
musical forms and styles. Learning methods include                  established in ILPN-271 and ILPN-272 are applied to one-
playing with tapes and MIDI sequences, various call-and-            handed and two-handed voicings through construction and
response activities, and writing, performing, and                   supportive exercises. Designed for pianists and other
analyzing improvisations.                                           instrumentalists who want to further develop keyboard skills.

ILPN-271                                                            ILPN-P274
          Jazz Harmonic Techniques for Piano 1                                Jazz Harmonic Applications 2
          1 credit                                                            1 credit
          Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan                                      Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                       Offered: Fall, Spring
          Required of: None                                                   Required of: None
          Electable by: All                                                   Electable by: All
          Prerequisites: None                                                 Prerequisites: ILPN-273

Material to be covered includes scales, scale patterns, diatonic    The course offers an organized approach to develop a
chords, available tensions, triads, seventh chords, guide tones,    thorough knowledge of common harmonic vocabulary used in
simple voicing techniques, and sight-reading lead sheets            contemporary jazz established in ILPN-271, ILPN-272, and
(melody/chord symbols).                                             ILPN-273 (Jazz Harmonic Techniques for Piano 1, Jazz
                                                                    Harmonic Techniques for Piano 2, and Jazz Harmonic
                                                                    Applications) as applied to one-handed and two-handed
                                                                    voicings through construction and supportive exercises.
                                                                    Designed for pianists and other instrumentalists who want to
                                                                    further develop keyboard skills.




                                                                                                                          Summer/Fall 2012   133
                            COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Instrumental Labs



                            ILPN-335                                                           ILPN-P375
                                       Hammond Organ Techniques                                          Danilo Perez Performance Lab
                                       1 credit                                                          1 credit
                                       Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan                                    Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                     Offered: Spring
                                       Required of: None                                                 Required of: None
                                       Electable by: Piano principals                                    Electable by: Piano principals
                                       Prerequisites: ILPN-122 or overall ensemble rating 3              Prerequisites: Overall ensemble rating 5

                            Instrumental lab for piano principals emphasizing fundamental      An advanced elective lab that will meet for five three-hour
                            techniques and skills involved in playing the Hammond organ        sessions per semester. The meetings will be scheduled at the
                            in predominant contemporary styles, including jazz, r&b, blues,    beginning of each semester by the instructor. The lab will
                            rock, and funk. Study of recorded examples and transcriptions      focus on creativity and finding your own voice, technique,
                            of influential performers.                                         improvisation, and ensemble playing. See chair for schedule.
                                                                                               The class will present a recital as a final project.
                            ILPN-337
                                       Blues Styles for Hammond Organ                          ILPN-381
                                       1 credit                                                          Classical Repertory for Two Pianos
                                       Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan                                    1 credit
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring                                             Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan
                                       Required of: None                                                 Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                       Electable by: Piano principals                                    Required of: None
                                       Prerequisites: ILPN-122 or overall ensemble rating 3              Electable by: Piano principals
                                                                                                         Prerequisites: ILPN-112 or overall ensemble rating 3
                            Instrumental lab for piano principals emphasizing techniques
                            of playing the Hammond B3 organ in blues styles. Analysis          An advanced instrumental lab for pianists that focuses on
                            and performance of blues and blues-related music including         traditional and 20th-century literature for two pianos,
                            gospel, jazz blues, and soul.                                      four hands.

                            ILPN-339                                                           ILPN-385
                                       Rock Styles Lab – Hammond Organ                                   Classical Accompanying
                                       1 credit                                                          1 credit
                                       Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan                                    Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring                                             Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                       Required of: None                                                 Required of: None
                                       Electable by: Piano principals                                    Electable by: Piano principals
                                       Prerequisites: ILPN-122 or overall ensemble rating 3              Prerequisites: ILPN-112 or overall ensemble rating 3

                            Instrumental lab for piano principals emphasizing techniques       The study and performance of traditionally notated
                            of playing the Hammond organ in rock styles. Study of              accompaniments for music in a wide variety of styles serving to
                            recorded material and transcriptions of influential players; in-   enhance performances and rehearsal skills, as well as broaden
                            class recording.                                                   professional opportunities. Styles include opera, art songs,
                                                                                               choral compositions and arrangements, and Broadway musicals.
                            ILPN-345
                                       Hammond Organ Techniques 2                              ILRE-375
                                       1 credit                                                          Recital Workshop for Performance Majors
                                       Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan                                    1 credit
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring                                             Course Chair: Rich Appleman
                                       Required of: None                                                 Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                       Electable by: Piano principals                                    Required of: All fifth-semester PERF majors enrolled
                                       Prerequisites: ILPN-335                                             in RPXX-311
                                                                                                         Electable by: Fifth-semester PERF majors
                            Continued study of specific techniques for Hammond organ                     Prerequisites: PIXX-212 and current enrollment
                            learned in ILPN-335, Hammond Organ Techniques. Greater                         in RPXX-311
                            emphasis on left-hand bass and foot-pedal bass. Exploration
                            of the role of organ in a variety of settings, including jazz      Required for all fifth-semester performance majors. Each
                            organ trio, rock band, acid jam band, gospel choir, and            student will perform three times during the semester. Students
                            recording studio.                                                  will critique one another’s performances. Topics to be
                                                                                               discussed will include repertoire, stage presence, constructive
                                                                                               criticism, and mental preparation.




            134     Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                    Instrumental Labs
ILST-111                                                             ILST-250
           String Reading Lab                                                   Recording Techniques for String Players
           1 credit                                                             2 credits
           Course Chair: Melissa Howe                                           Course Chair: Melissa Howe
           Offered: Fall, Spring                                                Offered: Fall, Spring
           Required of: None                                                    Required of: None
           Electable by: String principals                                      Electable by: String principals
           Prerequisites: None                                                  Prerequisites: None

This class will teach string players how to be fluent and            This is an interdivisional course that offers students in the String
expressive readers of standard music notation. It involves           Department, Professional Writing Division, and Music Production
learning how to process both the quantitative aspects (pitch,        and Engineering Department insight into how to operate most
rhythm, and form) and the qualitative properties (phrasing,          efficiently in the recording studio. The course will be divided
dynamics, articulation, etc.) of written music. Using a variety of   into three or four sections of three weeks each. In each section,
styles, students in this class will work on recognizing common       all participants will meet in the recording studio to record one
pitch patterns, rhythmic motives, and “road maps” (repeats,          or more works written by a writing division student for strings,
da capos, codas, parallel and contrast phrase structures, and        or strings with other tracks previously recorded.
typical harmonic progressions). Ear training skills will be
emphasized to develop the strong inner hearing crucial for           ILVC-111
good reading. Upon completion of this course students will                      Vocal Sight-Reading Techniques 1
have improved their ability to read standard music notation                     1 credit
fluently and musically in a variety of styles.                                  Course Chair: Anne Peckham
                                                                                Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
ILST-121                                                                        Required of: Voice principals
           Jazz Violin Lab                                                      Electable by: Voice principals
           1 credit                                                             Prerequisites: ET-111
           Course Chair: Melissa Howe
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                             Introductory lab for singers to further develop listening skills,
           Required of: None                                         reading notation, concepts of rhythm, intervals, chord
           Electable by: String principals                           changes, time-feels, and grooves applied to singing lyrics and
           Prerequisites: None                                       pitches simultaneously; sight-reading will include lead sheets,
                                                                     sheet music, and specific vocal arrangements.
Advanced improvisational concepts and their application in
strings. Reading charts with jazz phrasing, higher-level bowing,     ILVC-115
and left-hand development. Instrumentation: violin, viola.                      Musical Independence Skills for Singers
                                                                                1 credit
ILST-240                                                                        Course Chair: Anne Peckham
           Sound Reinforcement Techniques for Strings                           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           1 credit                                                             Required of: None
           Course Chair: Melissa Howe                                           Electable by: Voice principals
           Offered: Fall, Spring                                                Prerequisites: None
           Required of: None
           Electable by: String principals                           Introductory lab for singers focusing on skills necessary for
           Prerequisites: None                                       repertoire development. These include finding the right key
                                                                     for a song, transposition, development of lead sheets, and
This course provides an understanding of the technology              basic self-accompanying skills necessary to learn songs
available for effective performances in nonacoustic situations.      independently. The goal of the course is to develop self-
Topics covered include pickups, microphones, electric                sufficiency for vocalists in learning new material.
instruments, amplifiers, effects, stage sound/monitors, mixers,
recording acoustic instruments, recording electric instruments,
and how to take care of your acoustic instrument.




                                                                                                                               Summer/Fall 2012   135
                            COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Instrumental Labs



                            ILVC-121                                                             ILVC-151
                                       Vocal Pop/Rock/Country Styles Lab                                    Acting Skills for the Vocalist
                                       1 credit                                                             1 credit
                                       Course Chair: Anne Peckham                                           Course Chair: Anne Peckham
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                        Offered: Fall, Spring
                                       Required of: Voice principals                                        Required of: None
                                       Electable by: Voice principals                                       Electable by: Voice principals
                                       Prerequisites: None                                                  Prerequisites: None

                            Introductory pop/rock/country performance lab for voice              This lab is designed to increase body awareness and develop
                            principals designed to prepare students for solo performance         the stage presence and performance skills of vocalists through
                            in ensembles and other performing venues within a specific           the use of acting techniques. Improvisational acting methods
                            song style. Vocalists will learn how to count off tempos of          will be utilized in song performances.
                            songs, microphone technique, song style and groove,
                            communication with the accompanist, and lead                         ILVC-P200
                            sheet preparation.                                                              Vocal Technique and Wellness
                                                                                                            1 credit
                            ILVC-122                                                                        Course Chair: Anne Peckham
                                       Vocal Jazz/Blues Styles Lab                                          Offered: Fall, Spring
                                       1 credit                                                             Required of: None
                                       Course Chair: Anne Peckham                                           Electable by: Voice principals
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                        Prerequisites: None
                                       Required of: Voice principals
                                       Electable by: Voice principals                            Maintaining a balance between body, mind, and spirit is
                                       Prerequisites: None                                       essential for any musician to be healthy. This is wellness.
                                                                                                 In this course vocalists learn techniques for keeping their
                            Introductory jazz/blues performance lab for voice principals         instruments in top shape, reducing both vocal and overall
                            designed to prepare students for solo performance in                 stress, and managing real life factors like performance anxiety.
                            ensembles and other performing venues within a specific song         This course will also present techniques and a detailed look
                            style. Vocalists will learn how to count off tempos of songs,        at vocal anatomy, to support learning to sing virtually every
                            microphone technique, song style and groove, communication           style of music with a healthy, long-lasting approach.
                            with the accompanist, and lead sheet preparation.
                                                                                                 ILVC-210
                            ILVC-123                                                                        Elements of Vocal Technique for
                                       Vocal R&B Styles Lab                                                 Non-Voice Principals
                                       1 credit                                                             1 credit
                                       Course Chair: Anne Peckham                                           Course Chair: Anne Peckham
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                        Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                       Required of: Voice principals                                        Required of: MTHE majors
                                       Electable by: Voice principals                                       Electable by: Non-voice principals
                                       Prerequisites: None                                                  Prerequisites: None

                            Introductory r&b performance lab for voice principals designed       A lab for non-voice principals designed to address the basic
                            to prepare students for solo performance in ensembles and            elements of singing: breath management, intonation, tone
                            other performing venues within a specific song style. Vocalists      quality, and phrasing. Students will participate in periodic self-
                            will learn how to count off tempos of songs, microphone              assessment, including videotaping of in-class performance.
                            technique, song style and groove, communication with the
                            accompanist, and lead sheet preparation.                             ILVC-211
                                                                                                            Vocal Sight-Reading Techniques 2
                            ILVC-141                                                                        1 credit
                                       Beginning Improvisation for the Singer                               Course Chair: Anne Peckham
                                       1 credit                                                             Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                       Course Chair: Anne Peckham                                           Required of: Voice principals
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                        Electable by: Voice principals
                                       Required of: None                                                    Prerequisites: ILVC-111
                                       Electable by: Voice principals
                                       Prerequisites: None                                       A continuation of ILVC-111. Additional concentration on
                                                                                                 singing lyrics on chord tones, seventh chords, minor chords,
                            A lab for vocalists focusing on basic skills in improvisation in a   and modes in different time-feels and grooves.
                            variety of styles. Melodic and rhythmic phrasing,
                            embellishments, using tone colors, and hearing basic blues
                            patterns in vocal styles including pop, rock, r&b, and jazz.




            136     Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                   Instrumental Labs
ILVC-P220                                                            ILVC-311
           Musicianship for Singers                                             Vocal Sight-Reading Techniques 3
           1 credit                                                             1 credit
           Course Chair: Anne Peckham                                           Course Chair: Anne Peckham
           Offered: Fall, Spring                                                Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Required of: None                                                    Required of: None
           Electable by: Voice principals                                       Electable by: Voice principals
           Prerequisites: ET-111 and PW-111                                     Prerequisites: ILVC-211 or ensemble rating 4 in
                                                                                  reading (first digit of rating)
Musicianship for Singers provides singers with the opportunity
to gain mastery of the knowledge and skills they learned in Ear      A continuation of ILVC-211. Additional concentration on
Training and Music Application and Theory. Students put their        singing lyrics on various chords, modes, and pentatonic scales
theory knowledge into practice with melodic and rhythmic             in different time-feels and grooves.
patterns using solfege, piano, and music notation.
                                                                     ILVC-331
ILVC-251                                                                        Advanced Vocal Performance Lab 1
           Rehearsal Techniques for Vocalists                                   2 credits
           2 credits                                                            Course Chair: Anne Peckham
           Course Chair: Anne Peckham                                           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                        Required of: None
           Required of: None                                                    Electable by: Voice principals
           Electable by: Voice principals                                       Prerequisites: ILVC-121, ILVC-122, ILVC-123, or
           Prerequisites: ENVC-111                                                overall ensemble rating 4

A lab designed to prepare singers for performance with               A continuation of vocal styles study with emphasis on song
accompanying instrumentalists. Students will conduct open            interpretation, elements of style, microphone technique, stage
rehearsals of their own basic arrangements of pop, rock, jazz,       presence, and rehearsing with a rhythm section.
and r&b tunes. Emphasis on communication skills, effective
rehearsal procedures, and the independent and collective role        ILWD-111
of each rhythm section member. Intended to increase the                         Woodwind Lab – Techniques 1
singer’s aptitude for participation in college ensemble offerings.              1 credit
                                                                                Course Chair: Bill Pierce
ILVC-271                                                                        Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Microphones, PA Systems, and the Singer                              Required of: Woodwind principals
           1 credit                                                             Electable by: Woodwind principals
           Course Chair: Anne Peckham                                           Prerequisites: None
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Required of: Voice principal PERF majors                  Reading studies, improvisational techniques, and practice
           Electable by: Voice principals                            routines in a variety of styles. Lab content is musically related
           Prerequisites: None                                       to ensemble and private instrumental instruction materials.

A lab for vocalists providing an overview of sound-                  ILWD-112
reinforcement equipment currently used in live performance                      Woodwind Lab – Techniques 2
and how to use it effectively. Topics will include basic system                 1 credit
hookup, kinds of microphones, PA mixers, and speakers, how                      Course Chair: Bill Pierce
to EQ individual vocal channels, adding effects, use of                         Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
monitors, and communicating effectively with the                                Required of: Woodwind principals
sound person.                                                                   Electable by: Woodwind principals
                                                                                Prerequisites: ILWD-111
ILVC-281
           Performance Skills for the Background Singer              Reading studies, improvisational techniques, and practice
           1 credit                                                  routines in a variety of styles. Lab content is musically related
           Course Chair: Anne Peckham                                to ensemble and private instrumental instruction materials.
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Required of: None
           Electable by: Voice principals
           Prerequisites: None

Vocal lab concentrating on techniques and performance skills
necessary for background singing in live performance venues.
Topics include intonation, blend, rhythmic phrasing, riffs and
embellishments, entrances and cutoffs, voicings, written versus
head arrangements, stage presence, microphone settings, and
microphone technique.

                                                                                                                              Summer/Fall 2012   137
                            COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Instrumental Labs



                            ILWD-113                                                            ILWD-241
                                       Woodwind Lab – Techniques 3                                         Jazz Flute Lab
                                       1 credit                                                            1 credit
                                       Course Chair: Bill Pierce                                           Course Chair: Bill Pierce
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                       Offered: Spring
                                       Required of: Woodwind principals                                    Required of: None
                                       Electable by: Woodwind principals                                   Electable by: All
                                       Prerequisites: ILWD-112                                             Prerequisites: ILWD-113

                            Reading studies, improvisational techniques, and practice           This course is designed to help the flutist develop a jazz style
                            routines in a variety of styles. Lab content is musically related   of playing through the study of various practice routines and
                            to ensemble and private instrumental instruction materials.         the performance of standard jazz repertory. Students will
                                                                                                perform on a weekly basis with sequenced practice routines
                            ILWD-211                                                            and rhythm tracks of standard jazz tunes.
                                       Woodwind Improvisation Lab 1
                                       1 credit                                                 ILWD-311
                                       Course Chair: Bill Pierce                                           Woodwind Improvisation Lab 2
                                       Offered: Fall, Spring                                               1 credit
                                       Required of: None                                                   Course Chair: Bill Pierce
                                       Electable by: Woodwind principals                                   Offered: Fall, Spring
                                       Prerequisites: ILWD-113                                             Required of: None
                                                                                                           Electable by: Woodwind principals
                            A lab designed to give beginning and intermediate woodwind                     Prerequisites: ILWD-113 or ILWD-211
                            students hands-on experience with jazz nomenclature, chord
                            scale relationships, basic woodwind jazz articulation, jazz         A continuation of ILWD-211 Woodwind Improvisational Lab 1,
                            vocabulary, and standard jazz repertoire. In-class playing          designed for the intermediate woodwind principal. Continued
                            assignments will give students practice in the application of       work with chord scales, jazz articulation, and standard jazz
                            theoretical, technical, and stylistic improvisational skills. The   repertoire; study and performance of jazz solo transcriptions.
                            study and performance of selected transcribed solos will
                            support learning of specific stylistic woodwind concepts.           ILWD-321
                                                                                                           Woodwind Doubling Lab – Flute
                            ILWD-221                                                                       1 credit
                                       Practice Routines for Flute                                         Course Chair: Bill Pierce
                                       1 credit                                                            Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                       Course Chair: Bill Pierce                                           Required of: None
                                       Offered: Spring                                                     Electable by: All
                                       Required of: None                                                   Prerequisites: None
                                       Electable by: All
                                       Prerequisites: None                                      The study of the flute as a doubling instrument for the
                                                                                                woodwind principal. Fundamentals of embouchure, breathing,
                            A lab focusing on efficient and effective practice to develop       and technique are presented using representative methods,
                            sound, technique, articulation, and other fundamentals.             études, and solos. Emphasis is placed on doubling situations.
                            Approaches to difficult passages; customization and
                            personalization of practice routines; how to avoid common           ILWD-322
                            mistakes in practicing. Scales, arpeggios, and chromatic                       Woodwind Doubling Lab – Clarinet
                            exercises are approached combining classical and jazz                          1 credit
                            performance orientations. Consideration of flute players in                    Course Chair: Bill Pierce
                            both fields and the application of color, dynamic range,                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                            vibrato, articulation, breathing, and tone development. In                     Required of: None
                            addition to the material provided by the instructor, students                  Electable by: All
                            will bring their own choice of jazz and/or classical pieces to                 Prerequisites: None
                            perform in class. Basic and advanced material will be covered.
                                                                                                The study of the clarinet as a doubling instrument for the
                                                                                                woodwind principal. Fundamentals of embouchure, breathing,
                                                                                                and technique are presented using representative methods,
                                                                                                études, and solos. Emphasis is placed on doubling situations.




            138     Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                 Instrumental Labs
ILWD-323                                                             ILWD-345
           Woodwind Doubling Lab – Saxophone and                               Brazilian and Latin Flute Lab
           Theater Doubling                                                    1 credit
           1 credit                                                            Course Chair: Bill Pierce
           Course Chair: Bill Pierce                                           Offered: Fall, Spring
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                       Required of: None
           Required of: None                                                   Electable by: Woodwind principals
           Electable by: All                                                   Prerequisites: None
           Prerequisites: None
                                                                     Study of characteristic rhythms, articulation, phrasing, and
Preparation for a career as a theater and pit musician, including    improvisation techniques necessary to perform and interpret
Broadway shows, Las Vegas, Hollywood, cruise ships, and              music in various Latin styles. Creative and effective use of
film. Study of all woodwind instruments and techniques               these skills in the student’s own improvisational style.
with concentration on tone quality, intonation, and facility.
Instruments include: clarinets (piccolo, soprano, bass and           ILWD-355
contra-alto); saxophones (soprano, alto, tenor, and baritone);                 Advanced Woodwind Sight-Reading Lab
flute/piccolo; and oboe, English horn, and bassoon. Discussions                1 credit
will include instrument setup and arrangement, reeds, and                      Course Chair: Bill Pierce
performance problems, and other related topics such as                         Offered: Fall, Spring
resumes, musician contracts, and percentages for doubles.                      Required of: None
                                                                               Electable by: Woodwind principals
ILWD-331                                                                       Prerequisites: ILWD-113 and ensemble rating 4 in
           Woodwind Doubling Lab – MIDI                                          reading (first digit of rating)
           Wind Controller
           1 credit                                                  A course for advanced woodwind students wishing to
           Course Chair: Bill Pierce                                 improve their sight-reading skills. Reading exercises will cover
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                             a wide range of styles including swing, bebop, funk, Latin,
           Required of: None                                         odd-meter jazz, and various studio styles. The course will
           Electable by: All                                         draw heavily from the required text Creative Reading Studies
           Prerequisites: ILWD-113                                   by Joseph Viola. Other materials to be used include selected
                                                                     études, transcribed solos, and exercises designed by the
The study of the MIDI wind controller as a doubling                  instructor(s). The course will focus primarily on line reading,
instrument. Fundamentals of technique are presented with             although exercises that target chord-change reading may also
representative literature and MIDI sequences using various           be included.
kinds of synthesized voices. Students must own a MIDI
wind controller.                                                     ILWD-365
                                                                               Saxophone Section Playing
ILWD-341                                                                       1 credit
           Flute Repertoire Class: Baroque through                             Course Chair: Bill Pierce
           Contemporary                                                        Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           1 credit                                                            Required of: None
           Course Chair: Bill Pierce                                           Electable by: All
           Offered: Spring                                                     Prerequisites: ILWD-113
           Required of: None
           Electable by: Flute principals                            Aspects and techniques of playing in a saxophone section
           Prerequisites: None                                       within the big band context: lead playing, blending with the
                                                                     lead and with the brass section, and section soli playing.
A study of the core works essential for any professional
flutist’s repertoire. Through an interactive master-class setting,
students will learn performance practices in a wide range
of styles, including baroque, classical, and 19th-century;
explorations of extended and experimental techniques found
in 20th- and 21st-century compositions for the flute; and
selections from flute music from around the world. Students
will work with their own accompanists, including piano,
guitar, and harp, and perform frequently, including an
end-of-semester in-class or public concert.




                                                                                                                            Summer/Fall 2012   139
                               COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Instrumental Studies




                               Instrumental Studies                                              ISGT-232
                                                                                                           Guitar Class for Music Therapists 2
                               ISBR-221                                                                    1 credit
                                          Trumpet Class for Music Education Majors                         Course Chair: Larry Baione
                                          1 credit                                                         Offered: Fall, Spring
                                          Course Chair: Tom Plsek                                          Required of: MTHE majors
                                          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                    Electable by: MTHE majors
                                          Required of: MUED majors not taking ISBR-231                     Prerequisites: ISGT-231 or written approval
                                          Electable by: MUED majors                                          of course instructor
                                          Prerequisites: None
                                                                                                 Continued development of guitar performance skills with
                               Functional study of the trumpet. Technical fundamentals of        emphasis on applications in music therapy environments.
                               class instruction in music education. Use of representative
                               elementary/secondary school methods and materials.                ISKB-P111
                                                                                                           Keyboard Fundamentals
                               ISBR-231                                                                    1 credit
                                          Trombone Class for Music Education Majors                        Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan
                                          1 credit                                                         Offered: Fall, Spring, SummerRequired of: None
                                          Course Chair: Tom Plsek                                          Electable by: All
                                          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                    Prerequisites: None
                                          Required of: MUED majors not taking ISBR-221
                                                                                                 An online keyboard program for non-piano principals designed
                                          Electable by: MUED majors
                                                                                                 to give students skills in note reading, chord voicings, rhythmic
                                          Prerequisites: None
                                                                                                 interpretation, technique, and other instrumental skills. Using
                               Functional study of the trombone. Technical fundamentals of       video clips, recorded play-alongs, chord-study exercises, weekly
                               class instruction in music education. Use of representative       recorded assignments, and feedback from the teacher, students
                               elementary/secondary school methods and materials.                will be able to play simple accompaniments, read notes on the
                                                                                                 grand staff, realize a lead sheet, apply simple voice-leading
                                                                                                 techniques, and develop hand independence and a familiarity
                               ISGT-221
                                                                                                 with different styles. Students will acquire the ability to use
                                          Guitar Class for Music Education Majors
                                                                                                 the keyboard as a resource in learning harmony, ear training,
                                          1 credit
                                                                                                 arranging, and technology applications such as notation
                                          Course Chair: Larry Baione
                                                                                                 and sequencing.
                                          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                          Required of: None
                                          Electable by: MUED majors
                                                                                                 ISKB-211
                                          Prerequisites: None                                              Basic Keyboard Techniques 1
                                                                                                           1 credit
                               Functional study of the guitar. Technical fundamentals of class             Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan
                               instruction in music education. Use of representative                       Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                               elementary/secondary school methods and materials.                          Required of: COMP, CWPR, JCMP, and
                                                                                                             SONG majors
                               ISGT-231                                                                    Electable by: COMP, CWPR, FILM, JCMP, and
                                                                                                             SONG majors
                                          Guitar Class for Music Therapists 1
                                                                                                           Prerequisites: HR-111 or PW-111
                                          1 credit
                                          Course Chair: Larry Baione
                                                                                                 For non-piano principals. Comping, harmonic continuity.
                                          Offered: Fall, Spring
                                                                                                 Triads, seventh chords, melody, and accompaniment. Standard
                                          Required of: MTHE majors
                                                                                                 song forms, blues.
                                          Electable by: MTHE majors
                                          Prerequisites: None
                                                                                                 ISKB-212
                               Introduction to guitar performance skills with emphasis on                  Basic Keyboard Techniques 2
                               applications in music therapy environments.                                 1 credit
                                                                                                           Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan
                                                                                                           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                                                                                           Required of: COMP, CWPR, JCMP, and
                                                                                                             SONG majors
                                                                                                           Electable by: COMP, CWPR, FILM, JCMP, and
                                                                                                             SONG majors
                                                                                                           Prerequisites: ISKB-211

                                                                                                 Continuation of ISKB-211. Advanced comping, voicings,
                                                                                                 additional melody with accompaniment.




              140      Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                             Instrumental Studies
ISKB-215                                                           ISKB-322
           Keyboard Skills for the Writer                                    Keyboard Class 4 for Music Education Majors
           1 credit                                                          1 credit
           Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan                                    Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                     Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Required of: None                                                 Required of: MUED majors
           Electable by: COMP, CWPR, FILM, JCMP, and                         Electable by: MUED majors
             SONG majors                                                     Prerequisites: ISKB-321
           Prerequisites: ISKB-212 or PIPN-111
                                                                   Continued use of chorale style materials including some
A course designed to provide the Professional Writing Division     standard public school literature. Further use of simple
student with the specialized keyboard skills necessary to          melodies with rhythmicized chordal patterns in minor keys.
develop their composition abilities. This course will focus on     Sight-reading of open score vocal arrangements. A complete,
developing sight-reading skills applicable to score-reading,       simplified supplement for pop music, including melody with
lead-sheet reading, transposition, etc. Open to piano principals   chordal accompaniment or chordal progressions with bass line.
or those who have completed basic keyboard classes.                Standard progression studies.

ISKB-221                                                           ISPC-221
           Keyboard Class 1 for Music Education Majors                       Percussion Class for Music Education Majors
           1 credit                                                          1 credit
           Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan                                    Course Chair: John Ramsay
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                     Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Required of: MUED and MTHE majors                                 Required of: None
           Electable by: MUED and MTHE majors                                Electable by: MUED and MTHE majors
           Prerequisites: None                                               Prerequisites: None

A graduated piano study for beginning students dealing with        Functional study of percussion instruments. Technical
note reading, rhythm, and technique. Materials range from          fundamentals of class instruction in music education. Use of
separate hand studies to simple two-voice pieces and simple        representative elementary/secondary school methods
melodies with chordal accompaniment. Technique involves            and materials.
scales and coordination studies with fingering for various two-
hand patterns. Introduction to harmonization.                      ISPC-231
                                                                             Percussion for Music Therapy
ISKB-222                                                                     1 credit
           Keyboard Class 2 for Music Education Majors                       Course Chair: John Ramsay
           1 credit                                                          Offered: Fall, Spring
           Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan                                    Required of: MTHE majors
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                     Electable by: All
           Required of: MUED and MTHE majors                                 Prerequisites: None
           Electable by: MUED and MTHE majors
           Prerequisites: ISKB-221                                 Introduction to various percussion instruments, rhythms, and
                                                                   techniques that can be used to facilitate drum circles and
Coordination studies leading to a simple chorale style.            interactive percussive events for the music therapy
Introduction to transposition of simple melodies with              patient/client.
accompaniment (major keys). Continuation of scale studies
and chordal patterns relating to harmonization.                    ISST-221
                                                                             String Class for Music Education Majors
ISKB-321                                                                     1 credit
           Keyboard Class 3 for Music Education Majors                       Course Chair: Melissa Howe
           1 credit                                                          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Course Chair: Stephany Tiernan                                    Required of: None
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                     Electable by: MUED majors
           Required of: MUED majors                                          Prerequisites: None
           Electable by: MUED majors
           Prerequisites: ISKB-222                                 Functional study of string instruments. Technical fundamentals
                                                                   of class instruction in music education. Use of representative
Further development of techniques necessary for functional         elementary/secondary school methods and materials.
piano playing in public school teaching. Full chorale style with
the aid of graduated coordination studies. Emphasis on
rhythmicized accompaniment patterns and transposition of
material based on standard school music (major keys with
secondary dominants). Chorale-type accompaniments based
on various styles.


                                                                                                                        Summer/Fall 2012   141
                                COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Instrumental Studies/
         Internships


                                ISVC-111                                                         ISWD-223
                                           Guitar Accompanying Skills for the Vocalist                      Double Reed/Saxophone Class for Music
                                           1 credit                                                         Education Majors
                                           Course Chair: Anne Peckham                                       1 credit
                                           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                    Course Chair: Bill Pierce
                                           Required of: None                                                Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                           Electable by: Voice principals                                   Required of: None
                                           Prerequisites: None                                              Electable by: MUED majors
                                                                                                            Prerequisites: None
                                A lab for singers wishing to develop self-accompanying skills
                                on the guitar: chord forms, rhythmic patterns, etc.              Functional study of the oboe and saxophone. Technical
                                                                                                 fundamentals of classroom instruction in music education. Use
                                ISVC-112                                                         of representative elementary/secondary school methods
                                           Guitar Accompaniment Skills for the Vocalist 2        and materials.
                                           1 credit
                                           Course Chair: Anne Peckham
                                           Offered: Spring                                       Internships
                                           Required of: None
                                           Electable by: Voice principals                        CW-495
                                           Prerequisites: ISVC-111                                          Contemporary Writing and
                                                                                                            Production Internship
                                A continuation of ISVC-111 for singers wishing to further                   2 credits
                                develop self-accompanying skills on the guitar. Course will                 Course Chair: Matthew Nicholl
                                focus on the successful combination of guitar techniques (bar               Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                chords, power chords, elementary fingerpicking styles, and                  Required of: None
                                elementary lead guitar work) with a vocal selection suited to               Electable by: CWPR majors
                                the student’s ability.                                                      Prerequisites: Written approval of course chair

                                ISWD-221                                                         Monitored and evaluated professional work experience in an
                                           Flute Class for Music Education Majors                environment related to the contemporary writing and
                                           1 credit                                              production major. Placement is limited to situations available
                                           Course Chair: Bill Pierce                             from or approved by the Office of Experiential Learning and
                                           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                         the Contemporary Writing and Production Department chair
                                           Required of: None                                     or designee. To apply for an internship, students must see the
                                           Electable by: MUED majors                             internship coordinator in the Office of Experiential Learning
                                           Prerequisites: None                                   prior to registering. Note: Equivalent credit for prior experience
                                                                                                 is not available due to the requirement of concurrent contract
                                Functional study of the flute. Technical fundamentals of class   between the employer/supervisor and the college.International
                                instruction in music education. Use of representative            students in F-1 status must obtain authorization on their Form
                                elementary/secondary school methods and materials.               I-20 from the Counseling and Advising Center prior to
                                                                                                 beginning an internship.
                                ISWD-222
                                           Clarinet Class for Music Education Majors             EP-495
                                           1 credit                                                         Electronic Production and Design Internship
                                           Course Chair: Bill Pierce                                        2 credits
                                           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                    Course Chair: Kari Juusela
                                           Required of: MUED majors                                         Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
                                           Electable by: MUED majors                                        Required of: None
                                           Prerequisites: None                                              Electable by: ELPD majors
                                                                                                            Prerequisites: Written approval of course chair
                                Functional study of the clarinet. Technical fundamentals of                   and EP-223
                                class instruction in music education. Use of representative
                                elementary/secondary school methods and materials.               Monitored and evaluated professional work experience in an
                                                                                                 environment related to the electronic production and design
                                                                                                 major. Placement is limited to situations available from or
                                                                                                 approved by the Office of Experiential Learning and the
                                                                                                 Electronic Production and Design department chair or designee.
                                                                                                 To apply for an internship, students must see the internship
                                                                                                 coordinator in the Office of Experiential Learning prior to
                                                                                                 registering. Note: Equivalent credit for prior experience is
                                                                                                 not available due to the requirement of concurrent contract
                                                                                                 between the employer/supervisor and the college. International
                                                                                                 students in F-1 status must obtain authorization on their
                                                                                                 Form I-20 from the Counseling and Advising Center prior to
                                                                                                 beginning an internship.
      142               Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                   Internships
FS-495                                                                IN-290
           Film Scoring Internship                                               Service Learning: Connecting Music
           2 credits                                                             with Community
           Course Chair: Dan Carlin                                              2 credits
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                         Course Chair: Debra Gelinas
           Required of: None                                                     Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
           Electable by: FILM majors                                             Required of: None
           Prerequisites: Sixth-semester standing and written                    Electable by: All
             approval of the course chair                                        Prerequisites: 4th semester standing or completion
                                                                                   of 36 credits; permission of the Office of
Monitored and evaluated professional work experience in an                         Experiential Learning
environment related to the film scoring major. Placement is
limited to situations available from or approved by the Office        Monitored and evaluated unpaid service-learning experience,
of Experiential Learning and the Film Scoring Department chair        taking place in the community and relating to the student’s
or designee. To apply for an internship, students must see the        academic field of study. The student will develop leadership
internship coordinator in the Office of Experiential Learning prior   skills and connections to the community in which they live,
to registering. Note: Equivalent credit for prior experience is       study, and work that will advance their academic studies and
not available due to the requirement of concurrent contract           their professional career, while making a positive contribution
between the employer/supervisor and the college. International        to their community. Students will complete 45 hours of service
students in F-1 status must obtain authorization on their             work, reflective assignments, reading assigned materials, and
Form I-20 from the Counseling and Advising Center prior to            participating in online discussions with the experiential
beginning an internship.                                              learning staff and other classmates. There will be one required
                                                                      class meeting with the Office of Experiential Learning at the
IN-103                                                                start of the semester, but more may be added as needed.
           Internship Certificate                                     Placement is limited to a service project selected by the Office
           1 credit, not to count toward                              of Experiential Learning or an alternative site selected by the
             graduation requirements                                  student and approved by the Office of Experiential Learning.
           Course Chair: Debra Gelinas                                Students must see the Office of Experiential Learning before
           Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                              registering for IN-290. Credit for prior experience is not
           Required of: None                                          available due to requirement of concurrent contract between
           Electable by: All                                          the community site and the college.
           Prerequisites: 3rd semester standing (students must
             have completed two semesters at Berklee before           IN-492
             eligible to enroll in course)                                       Los Angeles Internship Program: 2 Credit
                                                                                 2 credits
A minimum of 50 hours of monitored and evaluated                                 Course Chair: Debra Gelinas
professional work experience in a field related to student’s                     Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
course of study. Internships may take place in the geographic                    Required of: None
location of a student’s choice, but enrollment is limited to                     Electable by: All
situations approved by the Office of Experiential Learning. To                   Prerequisites: 5th semester standing, satisfactory
apply for an internship, please see the Office of Experiential                     completion of 50 credits by the start of the
Learning at least one semester prior to planned internship                         internship, minimum of 3.00 CCumGPA
experience. Students will be required to attend a one-hour                         (concentrate GPA) and 2.50 CumGPA (overall
preparation seminar before applying for internships or                             GPA), and permission of Office of
enrolling in the course. Upon submission of course                                 Experiential Learning
requirements and satisfactory supervisor evaluation, the
student will receive a certificate of completion from the college     Monitored and evaluated professional work experience in a
and a passing grade in the course. Note: Credit for prior             field related to student’s course of study. All internships take
experience is not available due to the requirement of                 place in the Los Angeles area. The L.A. Internship Program
concurrent contract between the employer/supervisor and               involves a substantial workload commitment, comparable to
the college.                                                          full-time study. Students are required to intern for 140 hours
                                                                      over the duration of the semester in which they are enrolled in
                                                                      the Los Angeles Internship Program. Housing for interns is
                                                                      secured by the college. For more information and to apply for
                                                                      the L.A. Internship Program, see the Office of Experiential
                                                                      Learning to obtain materials. Enrollment is limited to students
                                                                      who apply and are accepted for the Los Angeles Internship
                                                                      Program. Note: Equivalent credit for prior experience is not
                                                                      available due to the requirement of concurrent contract
                                                                      between the employer/supervisor and the college. International
                                                                      students in F-1 status must obtain authorization on their
                                                                      Form I-20 from the Counseling and Advising Center prior to
                                                                      beginning an internship.



                                                                                                                              Summer/Fall 2012   143
                      COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Internships



                      IN-493                                                             IN-498
                                 New York Internship: 2 Credit                                     Summer Internship Program in London
                                 2 credits                                                         6 credits
                                 Course Chair: Debra Gelinas                                       Course Chair: Debra Gelinas
                                 Offered: Summer                                                   Offered: Summer
                                 Required of: None                                                 Required of: None
                                 Electable by: All                                                 Electable by: All
                                 Prerequisites: 5th semester standing, acceptance                  Prerequisites: 5th semester standing, satisfactory
                                   into New York Internship Program                                  completion of 50 credits by the start of
                                                                                                     the internship
                      Monitored and evaluated professional work experience in a
                      field related to student‘s course of study. All internships take   Monitored and evaluated professional work experience in a
                      place in New York, NY. Students are required to intern for 140     field related to student’s course of study. All internships take
                      hours over the duration of the semester in which they enrolled     place in London, England. Interns will be required to work at
                      in the New York Internship Program. Students will also be          the internship site for 2–3 days a week for approximately 10
                      required to attend weekly workshops led by prominent alumni        weeks. The remaining days of each week will be devoted to
                      and members of the music industry. Enrollment is limited to        class presentations and field trips exploring British life and
                      students who apply and are accepted for the New York               culture. Students will be required to attend a pre-departure
                      Internship Program. Equivalent credit for prior experience is      orientation session in Boston and a second orientation upon
                      not available due to the requirement of concurrent contract        arrival in London. Housing for interns is secured by the college.
                      between the internship site and the college. Student housing is    To apply for the Summer Internship Program in London, see
                      secured by the college. See the Office of Experiential Learning    the Office of Experiential Learning for application materials.
                      for more information and application materials.                    Enrollment in the Summer Internship Program in London is
                                                                                         limited to situations approved by the Office of Experiential
                      IN-497                                                             Learning. Note: Credit for prior experience is not available due
                                 Los Angeles Internship Program: 6 Credit                to the requirement of concurrent contract between the
                                 6 credits                                               employer/supervisor and the college.
                                 Course Chair: Debra Gelinas
                                 Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                           IN-499
                                 Required of: None                                                 New York Internship: 6 Credit
                                 Electable by: All                                                 6 credits
                                 Prerequisites: 5th semester standing, satisfactory                Course Chair: Debra Gelinas
                                   completion of 50 credits by the start of the                    Offered: Summer
                                   internship, minimum of 3.00 CCumGPA                             Required of: None
                                   (concentrate GPA) and 2.50 CumGPA (overall                      Electable by: All
                                   GPA), and permission of Office of                               Prerequisites: 5th semester standing, acceptance
                                   Experiential Learning                                             into New York Internship Program

                      Monitored and evaluated professional work experience in a          Monitored and evaluated professional work experience in a
                      field related to student’s course of study. All internships take   field related to student‘s course of study. All internships take
                      place in the Los Angeles area. The L.A. Internship Program         place in New York, NY. Students are required to intern for 300
                      involves a substantial workload commitment, comparable to          hours over the duration of the semester in which they enrolled
                      full-time study. Students are required to intern for 300 hours     in the New York Internship Program. Students will also be
                      over the duration of the semester in which they are enrolled in    required to attend weekly workshops led by prominent alumni
                      the Los Angeles Internship Program. Housing for interns is         and members of the music industry. Enrollment is limited to
                      secured by the college. For more information and to apply for      students who apply and are accepted for the New York
                      the L.A. Internship Program, see the Office of Experiential        Internship Program. Equivalent credit for prior experience is
                      Learning to obtain materials. Enrollment is limited to students    not available due to the requirement of concurrent contract
                      who apply and are accepted for the Los Angeles Internship          between the internship site and the college. Student housing is
                      Program. Note: Equivalent credit for prior experience is not       secured by the college. See the Office of Experiential Learning
                      available due to the requirement of concurrent contract            for more information and application materials.
                      between the employer/supervisor and the college. International
                      students in F-1 status must obtain authorization on their
                      Form I-20 from the Counseling and Advising Center prior to
                      beginning an internship.




        144   Summer/Fall 2012
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS




                                                                                                                                                 Internships
JC-495                                                              Production and Engineering Department chair or designee.
          Jazz Composition Internship                               To apply for an internship, students must see the internship
          2 credits                                                 coordinator in the Office of Experiential Learning prior to
          Course Chair: Ken Pullig                                  registering. Note: Equivalent credit for prior experience is
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                             not available due to the requirement of concurrent contract
          Required of: None                                         between the employer/supervisor and the college. International
          Electable by: JCMP majors                                 students in F-1 status must obtain authorization on their
          Prerequisites: Sixth-semester standing and written        Form I-20 from the Counseling and Advising Center prior to
            approval of course chair                                beginning an internship.

Monitored and evaluated professional work experience in an          MTH-495
environment related to the jazz composition major. Placement                   Music Therapy Internship
is limited to situations available from or approved by the Office              2 credits
of Experiential Learning and the Jazz Composition Department                   Course Chair: Suzanne Hanser
chair or designee. To apply for an internship, students must                   Offered: Fall, Spring
see the internship coordinator in the Office of Experiential                   Required of: MTHE majors
Learning prior to registering. Note: Equivalent credit for prior               Electable by: MTHE majors
experience is not available due to the requirement of                          Prerequisites: MTH-432 and written approval of
concurrent contract between the employer/supervisor and the                      course chair
college. International students in F-1 status must obtain
authorization on their Form I-20 from the Counseling and            This course involves 1,040 hours of full-time music therapy
Advising Center prior to beginning and internship.                  experience at a clinical internship site approved by the American
                                                                    Music Therapy Association. Enrollment is permitted after the
MB-495                                                              completion of all course work and after the student applies and
          Internship in Music Business/Management                   is accepted to a site. Successful completion of the internship is
          2 credits                                                 required before receiving the degree or sitting for the Music
          Course Chair: Don Gorder                                  Therapy Board Certification Examination. International students
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                             in F-1 status must obtain authorization on their Form I-20
          Required of: MBUS majors in management and                from the Counseling and Advising Center prior to beginning
            marketing tracks not taking MB-490 or MB-491            an internship.
          Electable by: MBUS majors
          Prerequisites: LSOC-225, LMSC-251, and MB-325;            PM-495
            MB-255 or MB-355; and one of the following:                        Professional Music Internship
            MB-331, MB-335, or MB-337                                          2 credits
                                                                               Course Chair: Kenn Brass
Monitored and evaluated professional work experience in                        Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
an environment related to the music business/management                        Required of: None
major. Placement is limited to situations available from or                    Electable by: PROM majors
approved by the Office of Experiential Learning and the Music                  Prerequisites: PM-375 and written approval of
Business/Management Department chair or designee. To apply                       course chair
for an internship, students must see the internship coordinator
in the Office of Experiential Learning prior to registering.        Monitored and evaluated professional work experience in a
Note: Students in the music products industry track are required    retail, entrepreneurial, or corporate environment matched
to take MB-495. Credit for prior experience is not available        to the student’s individual career goals. Placement is limited
due to the requirement of concurrent contract between the           to situations available from or approved by the Office of
employer/supervisor and the college. International students         Experiential Learning and the Professional Music Department
in F-1 status must obtain authorization on their Form I-20          chair or a designee. To apply for an internship, students must
from the Counseling and Advising Center prior to beginning          see the internship coordinator in the Office of Experiential
an internship.                                                      Learning prior to registering. Note: Equivalent credit for prior
                                                                    experience is not available due to the requirement of concurrent
MP-495                                                              contract between the employer/supervisor and the college.
          Music Production and Engineering Internship               International students in F-1 status must obtain authorization
          2 credits                                                 on their Form I-20 from the Counseling and Advising Center
          Course Chair: Rob Jaczko                                  prior to beginning an internship.
          Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer
          Required of: None
          Electable by: MPED majors
          Prerequisites: MP-340 and written approval of
            course chair

Monitored and evaluated professional work experience in an
environment related to the music production and engineering
major. Placement is limited to situations available from or
approved by the Office of Experiential Learning and the Music

                                                                                                                            Summer/Fall 2012   145
                        COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
Internships/
 Liberal Arts


                        PS-495                                                                  Liberal Arts
                                   Professional Performance Internship
                                   2 credits                                                    LAHS-P230
                                   Course Chair: Matt Marvuglio                                           Indian Art, Music, and Culture
                                   Offered: Fall, Spring, Summer                                          3 credits
                                   Required of: None                                                      Course Chair: Mike Mason
                                   Electable by: PERF majors, sixth-semester